JP7197140B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that variably displays symbols on display means and gives a predetermined game value when a display result becomes a specific display result. A game machine of this type is provided with a plurality of light emitters, which emit light in various manners in relation to the display of the display means. In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that causes a plurality of light emitters to emit light in a rainbow mode when there is a high degree of expectation that the display result will be a specific display result (Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-017517 A

By the way, in the amusement machine described above , when a plurality of light emitters are caused to emit light in rainbow colors (rainbow mode), depending on the mounting surface of the board on which these light emitters are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the light emitted from the light emitters on the mounting surface may vary. deterioration, and uneven illuminance, etc. may occur. When such illuminance unevenness or the like occurs, there is a risk that the staging effect of light emission in the rainbow mode will be reduced, and the interest in the game will be reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in interest in gaming.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above objects, in the present invention,
A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition and provides a profit based on the result of the lottery,
a plurality of specific mounting areas in which the light emitters are mounted and a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface;
an effect display means capable of executing a predetermined effect display;
Production control means for performing control related to production;
a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine,
The production control means is
a first specific luminous body mounted in a first specific mounting region among the plurality of specific mounting regions, and a plurality of the specific mounting A second specific light emitting body mounted in a second specific mounting region of the region and a third specific light emitting body mounted in a third specific mounting region of the plurality of specific mounting regions are made to emit light of different colors. It is possible to emit multicolor light by emitting light at the same time and changing the light emission color in a predetermined order,
When the state detection means detects that the state detection means is in a specific state during the multicolor light emission, the multicolor light emission is terminated,
Aside from the plurality of specific mounting regions, the device further has a special mounting region in which special light emission other than the multicolor light emission is performed during the multicolor light emission,
The special light emitter mounted in the special mounting area terminates the special light emission when the state detecting means detects that the special light emission is in a specific state during execution of the special light emission. continue without
Furthermore, apart from the plurality of specific mounting regions and the special mounting region, a special mounting region is mounted in which a special light emitter capable of emitting light in a manner different from the multicolor light emission is mounted during the multicolor light emission,
Although it is impossible to adjust the brightness of the special light-emitting body by a predetermined brightness adjusting means during the multicolor light emission, the brightness of the special light-emitting body is adjusted by the brightness adjusting means during the multicolor light emission. is made possible and
Further, the luminescent color of the special light emitter mounted in the special mounting area is only a specific color, and the specific color is never switched to another color.
It is characterized by

With the above configuration, it is possible to cause the light emitter to emit light more effectively, and it is possible to improve the lighting effect.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decline in amusement in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from behind; FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1; It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a main part of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). It is a cross-sectional view showing the. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of a door frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front lower part. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is in the upward movement end position; is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where has moved to the raised position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. FIG. 11 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit; (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is a connection between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). FIG. 10C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching portion is provided between the plate units, and FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the same. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit. , and (d) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO. (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame; Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a closed state; It is a front view which shows each decoration board|substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board|substrate of the site|part of the production|presentation operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame; It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 100(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. It is a perspective view which shows the part of a tank rail enlarging, seeing from behind the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of another embodiment. (a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107; (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. Figure 2 is a viewed perspective view; 111(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111(a) being exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 111B is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squeak line in FIG. 111 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. 111(a) is a bottom view showing a part behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 111(a). FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at an out-ball outlet of an out-ball passage; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right; (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left; is a perspective view. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the sacer line in (a). It is a sectional view. FIG. 121(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the sea line. FIG. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 ; FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 when it is exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing elimination of clogged balls in the board unit of FIG. 119; FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 119; FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 119; 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which center accessories and the like are made opaque; FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 as seen from the front right; FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 as seen from the front left; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nail. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged upper right corner of the front structural member and the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Suse line in (a), and (c) is (a). 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front after disassembling each main member. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front unit on the game board. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the part of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory and viewed from the front, and (b) is the part of the separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. 2 is a side cross-sectional view viewed from the right side by cutting left and right at . (a) is a front perspective view of the gate member, (b) is an exploded front perspective view of the gate member, and (c) is an exploded rear perspective view of the gate member. It is an exploded perspective view. (a) is a front view of a gate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the saw line in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball of the right side in a front unit. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing enlarged portions of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in FIG. 144; FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of the magnetic sensors. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a detection range of the magnetic sensor by a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body where the lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected, and (e). is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet. (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which a magnetic sensor is held by a holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is a holding member. FIG. 4 is an exploded view showing the member in cross section; (a) is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back unit of the game board. It is a front view of the back front production unit in the back unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back front effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back front effect unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part of (a), (c) is (a) ) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the front left decoration unit of the front production unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. An exploded perspective view of only the back front left first decoration, the back front left second decoration, the back front left third decoration, and the back front left decoration base when the back front left decoration unit is disassembled from behind. be. (a) is a front view of the back front left first decoration shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the back front left second decoration shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a transparent front view. FIG. 10C is a front view of the back front left third ornament shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left ornament base shown in a transparent state. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front effect unit, the light guide plate, and the decoration substrate for luminous decoration of the back front left decoration unit; FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light plate and the decoration substrate for luminous decoration of the decoration body of the back front and bottom effect unit. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decoration unit is decorated with light emission; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emitting configuration of a second pattern of the light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a front view of the back front effect unit showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper first decorative portion of the rear upper movable decoration in the rear upper production unit of the rear unit is directed forward and moved to a lowered position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper second decorative portion is directed forward while the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper production unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-left movable decoration and the rear-right movable decoration in the rear-lower production unit of the rear unit are moved to the appearing position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-front-lower middle decorative body in the back-front-lower effect unit of the back-front-lower effect unit of the back unit is raised; The back front left logo decoration part, the back front upper left logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front production unit of the back unit are decorated with light emission. It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission. A game shown in a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission, and the back rear left movable decoration body and the back rear right movable decoration body in the back rear bottom effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of a board. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. There is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and a top view (b) of a state in which a control ROM having a leadless package is attached to the ROM socket. FIG. 173(a) is a P arrow directional view. FIG. 4 is a through-hole cross-sectional view showing an overview of the positional relationship between a through-hole formed in a peripheral control board and a through-hole formed in a conversion board; There is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM and a ROM socket having a leadless package mounted on a conversion board, and a top view (b) of the control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. . 4A to 4C are schematic diagrams showing board management numbers of peripheral control boards; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a main control input circuit with an error detection function; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. FIG. 4A is a perspective view (a) of the main control board box showing a state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and the cover body and the base body are sealed; It is a perspective view (b) of the main control board box sealed by the mechanism. It is a perspective view (a) of the setting key switch seen from the front right side, a perspective view (b) of the setting key switch seen from the front left side, and a top view of the setting key switch (c). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box; FIG. (a) is a diagram (a) showing a mounting surface (surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switches are mounted, and a solder surface of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switches are mounted; FIG. 1B is a diagram (part 1) (b) showing the (rear surface), and a diagram (part 2) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control substrate on which the setting key switches are mounted and the corresponding solder surface (rear surface) of the main control substrate. )(c). FIG. 186 is a continuation of FIG. 186 and is a diagram (part 3) (d) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switches are mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board; FIG. 4E is a diagram (part 4) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the switches are mounted and the corresponding solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board. It is a schematic diagram explaining the outline of arrangement|positioning of various electronic components mounted in the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board. It is a schematic diagram of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board for explaining the outline of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of covering lands of input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment formed on a mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board with an insulating film; 2 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in FIG. 3B, and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). Fig. 13(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering lands of input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to a second embodiment formed on a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of a main control board 1310 with an insulating coating; It is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering a land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to a third embodiment formed on a mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board with an insulating film; 2 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in FIG. 3B, and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering a land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to a fourth embodiment formed on a mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board with an insulating film; 2 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in FIG. 3B, and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). (a) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) shows an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same part as (a). It is a front view. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) shows a state in which the back front left decoration unit of the back front effect unit in (a) is decorated with light emission. It is an explanatory diagram. FIG. 195(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the panel plate of the game panel is decorated with light. It is the exploded perspective view which exploded the panel board and the cell in the game board of 3rd embodiment, and was seen from the front. (a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a saw-to-saw line sectional view in (a), and (c) is a front view of the function display unit in (a). (d) is a rear perspective view of the function display unit of (a). 199 is an exploded front perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198; FIG. 199 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198, viewed from behind; FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 198 and the player; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of the third embodiment and the player; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a function display unit of a fourth embodiment; (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (a) in a perspective view, and (c) is a diagram in (b). FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor, and (d) is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor with a holding member different from that of (c). (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as the positioning hole for the second member, and (b) is the second member for removing the decoration. FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which a closed space is formed by a second member behind the separation hole of one member, and (c) is a cross section showing a state in which decorations having different thicknesses are attached in (b). and (d) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as the attachment hole of the decoration. (a) is an explanatory view showing the state in which the decoration is attached to the first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is a decoration different from (a). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the oblong rectangular ornament and the first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular ornament and the first member, and (c) is FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symmetrically provided decorative body and the first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member that are symmetrically provided in a shape different from that of (c). be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the tarter line in (a), and (c) is (a ) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the positional relationship between the decoration and the first member, and (d) shows from the front the relationship between the decoration having a form different from that of (a) and the movable first member. It is an explanatory view, and (e) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Chi-Chi line in (d). 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 210; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 216. FIG. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing subsequent to FIG. 217 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production|presentation preliminary determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 1st special design normal processing (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit design determination table (B), and a small hit design determination table (C). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process (step S284). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about jackpot control processing (step S235A). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame; It is a timing chart which shows an example of rainbow color production. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect in the event of an abnormality; (A) is a front perspective view of the rear upper movable decorative body, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the rear upper movable decorative body cut along line AA. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a first modified example of rainbow effect; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a first modified example of rainbow effect; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a second modified example of rainbow effect; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a second modified example of rainbow effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of gold production|presentation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of golden production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the low expectation golden production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect processing in a golden effect; 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of light amount adjustment during golden rendering; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of volume control during golden effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an information display.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, main frame and outer frame 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 89) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player can operate the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side and a power board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; I have.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. Main control unit 1300 having cage main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311; A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is arranged, an effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined effect image, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege given to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. It has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 that provide (for example, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a gate 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a. , the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195 .

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 or displays A player can be amused by performing a light emitting effect or a movable effect by means of an upper effect unit 3200, a back/lower effect unit 3300, and the like.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a right side from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends short in the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. Lateral fixing portion 23b, flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the rear side of horizontal fixing portion 23a, and from the rear side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b that are spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grille member 46 communicates the interior of the panel front member 42 (the panel interior space 40a) with the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by means of two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the interior space 40a of the curtain board by the main body frame speaker 622 to the outside is transmitted to the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 at the . As a result, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, the balls are discharged from the port member 47 to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and to other players wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, since the effect sound can also attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect sound with a deeper bass, and it is possible to amuse the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recessed portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame upper hinge member 51. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door, a handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the tray unit 200. A door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. A speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end when viewed from the rear at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame secondary relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 covering a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 covering the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to release the ball. 540 is used to play a game of hitting the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. .

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42). A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted through the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a in the front-rear direction, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in a front view. and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front-rear direction and exposes the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 forward.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 82). and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decoration board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4; It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (parts extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101 d of the door frame base 101 .

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1 g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to rotate with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can support.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. Figure 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the front and back, and (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. 2 is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 2, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a). 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Fig. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34(a) from the front, and Fig. 36(b) shows the state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of Fig. 34(a). It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening and closing with the frame 4 . The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 which is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder main body 131 and rotates together with a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 attached rotatably about an axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131 in the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 A band plate-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 at the lower end side of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is the first cam member 134 that rotates. a strip-shaped second arm 137 which is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; ing.

Also, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder main body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from behind except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets that rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139 and .

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be integrally rotatable. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136 .

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are spaced apart at an angle of 90 degrees around their respective rotation axes. doing. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a cylindrical shaft portion 138a that protrudes outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces of the rear cover 138. The shaft portion 138a is engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. It is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 by means of.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are made of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3 , the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430 .

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder main body 131 which passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end of which is attached to the front piece. there is A rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130A.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131. 34(a) and 34(b), etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131. As shown in FIGS.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 positioned at the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower portions of the rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state by using a proper key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will happen. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the second arm 137 has its upper end side attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is reversed from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that acts upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is generated by the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the portion where the first cam member 134 is attached. 134 is proportional to the horizontal distance from the center of rotation. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. greater power to do so.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136 . , mainly via the second arm 137, the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned counterclockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is used to rotate the first cam member 134 clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 from the normal state, the upper end side of the first cam member 134 rotates to the right of the center of rotation. As the first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, the second arm 137 attached to the lower end of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate in the direction of .

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. , and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tends to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases. The arm 137 exerts a greater force to rotate the second cam member 135 .

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly via the second arm 137 . Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned clockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the operation is reversed to that described above. It will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are phased at an angle of 90 degrees to each other, are attached. , so that at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is engaged regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132). , the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 can be improved.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 can be changed to any position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be used. cost increase can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudulent person who has knowledge of the structure may insert a tool behind the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, the door frame 3 may be opened to commit a fraudulent act. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool can be inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, since the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated, and the door frame 3, the body frame 4, etc. are opened. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. A straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 at the part attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of the one arm 136 or the second arm 137 Even when positioned above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. be in a state where Therefore, by positioning one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 , the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135 . Since the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation of the first cam member 134 The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a large resistance to rotation, and unlocking/locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Even if one of the arms is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, the tip of the tool may be hooked on the teeth of the gear, causing the gear to rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a rod shape with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of the tool from being caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, thereby preventing the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 from moving. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 from being unlocked due to illegal operation of the locking unit 650.例文帳に追加be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but not limited to, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt , and so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the discharge solenoid 542 by the discharge control section 633b (see FIG. 169) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball extracting member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being caught in the partition portion 143a. You can prevent bouncing.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to let the illegal game ball B enter and exit the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 is released. By force, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the portion with a narrowed shape, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using a fraudulent game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 39(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, through which the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200 are communicated. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the rear. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--E in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is moved by the player's operation. It can be driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later; A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. a front lens 185;

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the handle 195 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

One end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle 195 so that the handle 195 can be returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handlebar cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d can be inserted into the three grooves 181c. is inserted, the handle base 181 is brought into a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291 .

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two ring portions extending in an arc around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. A slit 195d and a locking projection 195e projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slit 195d and locking the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and clockwise around one spoke portion 195b horizontally extending leftward from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spokes 195b extend counterclockwise from 120 degree angles. The three spoke portions 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c so that a player's finger can be inserted thereinto.

An outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape in which the rounded side of the U-shape faces forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to be translucent as a whole, and is partially provided with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. there is The mounting stays 196b of the three handle guides 196 are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196a are positioned behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 . A guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, is inserted into the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196, thereby restricting movement in the front-rear direction.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in the shape of a disk having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into 5 groups: 1 in the center, 3 in the middle, 2 in the upper left corner of the outer circumference, 2 in the upper right corner of the outer circumference, and 2 in the lower part of the outer circumference. (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I'm trying

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and a command and address line from the peripheral control board 1510. , and a clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510 are connected. . Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into five groups according to the command. Each set of ten LEDs 184a can be illuminated with an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger in number than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected, can be individually (in this case, assembled). Since it is possible to control each unit, the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electric wiring can be simplified.

The handle front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle front lens 185 has a lens member inside which is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel front lens 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. FIG. The internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the handle 195 rotates. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with strength according to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, detects static electricity acting from the player when the player touches the handle 195, and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the ejection solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be pressed. By canceling the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200, an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface, An annular board cover 294 covering the handle cover decoration board 293 from the front and a handle cover 295 covering the outer periphery of the inner 292 and having the rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylindrical portion 291a whose inner diameter decreases forward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a tubular rear tubular portion 291c penetrating through the intermediate wall portion 291b and extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter allowing insertion of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181; and the inner periphery of the rear tubular portion 291c. A plurality of (here, three) projections 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer circumference of the front cylindrical portion 291a, and a portion extending from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward to the front cylinder portion 291f; and an opening 291h penetrating at the lower portion of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate cross section from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 at its rear end. The rear tubular portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, a U-shaped guide portion is formed. A guide piece 291g can be positioned within 196a to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h extends from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and extends through the front cylindrical portion 291a with a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. .

The inner member 292 has an annular base portion 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notch portions 292c that are cut from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e with the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292 b extends outward in a curved shape, and its rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 . The notch portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The steering wheel cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right from the center. divided (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with 3 systems for a total of 18 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the steering wheel cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one of which is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, commands from the peripheral control board 1510 and A wiring cable made up of four wires, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. there is Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address through the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into six groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each set.

The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. and a cylindrical side plate portion 294b with an outer peripheral edge of the cylindrical side plate portion 294b extending short rearward. The substrate cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to the base portion 292a of the inner 292. As shown in FIG.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at its front end, and has a spindle frustum (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b are provided in the circumferential direction by notching forward from the rear end. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and has a plurality of cutout openings 295b that are aligned with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292 .

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. , circular and radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. A portion behind the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are positioned on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. As shown in FIG. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291, and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 is mounted. 101b.

A handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181 at a central hub portion 195a. In addition, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported while its movement in the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 being decorated with light, the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylindrical portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light.

The handle cover unit 290 has cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, so that when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is positioned on both the left and right sides and on the lower side. It is possible to make it look as if a hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a is open. As a result, the player is relieved from the mental anxiety of sticking his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. can be done.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the right plate decoration unit 275 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is positioned below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, it passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed into the outer frame base assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension line of the slanting direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional structure 40. As shown in FIG. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening portion 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening portion 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter into the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his/her fingers into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the main body frame speaker By vibrating the 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 and the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by placing a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously hit into the game area 5a with a constant strength even without continuing to twist the hand. In this way, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in a variety of ways, so the pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a hitting operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided to be openable and closable, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. A handle 195 and a handle cover unit 290 in a form never seen before can be seen at the site where the player is, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. At the same time, the player can be motivated to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is playing in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, since the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grips the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the player can be given a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine for the operation of the handle 195, and the player can be entertained and entertained by the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling. can be suppressed.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and causes the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to output the production sound, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to be output. The air inside the enclosure 624 due to the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the inner space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47 causes the sound pressure to rise. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted to the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Sound pressure stimulation can be applied to the player's finger operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Accordingly, sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , the player can be surprised, the player can feel the arrival of a chance, and the operation amount of the steering wheel operation can be changed, which can entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. The interior of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, thereby relieving the stress on the player and suppressing the loss of interest in the game. can.

In addition, as described above, the handle 195 and the handle 195 may be pressed against the finger of the player operating the handle 195 while inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 on which the handle cover unit 290 is provided is applied to the grill member 46. Since stimulation is applied by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are reduced compared to the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibrating device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism, etc., and the handle unit 180 can be made difficult to break. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile. Although the appearance is greatly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine can be played without hesitation. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which the player's fingers can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. is provided, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 is visible through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it is possible to give a sense of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player is relieved. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided through the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and the port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward through the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295 b and the opening 291 h to enter the port member 47 .

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be grasped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated with only fingers, and the outer ring The portion 195c can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b can be gripped by a finger, or the handle cover unit can be operated by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as pinching the inside and outside of the 290 with fingers and capable of various game ball B hitting operations (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, fingers may be hung between the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 to grasp them, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by fingers while straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform a handle operation that cannot be performed with a conventional pachinko machine, so that a variety of handle operations can be provided to the player. , making it difficult for the player to get bored by entertaining the steering wheel operation.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The appearance can be such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance to attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from increasing more than necessary. By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward, it is possible to avoid narrowing of the game area 5a, and it is possible to relatively enlarge the game area 5a, The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the luminous decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are conspicuous. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

A handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided at a portion facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that deteriorates its appearance, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports an outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction, and A guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c can be restricted by the guide piece 291g or the like. 195c and spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, since the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be hit even if the handle 195 is operated in a touched state. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball B in a state in which the handle 195 is not touched, prevent the handle operation using a tool, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . Mounting base (illustration omitted) protruding forward attached to the mounting base, Dish unit relay board (illustration omitted) attached to the right of the mounting base, and ball attached to the top surface of the mounting base A rental operation unit 220, an upper tray ball removal pre-unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray ball removal pre-unit, It has

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be press-operated by the player. The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation part cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation part base 315 housed in the production operation part cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation part base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer periphery board cover 325 covering the upper side of the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. and a partial relay board unit 330 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which can protrude upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 is provided, and the operation unit base 315, and is attached to the effect operation unit 350. A production operation part elevating mechanism 360 that supports the part unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projection force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. there is

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. A guide passage portion 201a (Fig. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 extends from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, the outer diameter of the game ball B is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

In addition, the guiding passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball B static electricity can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part; The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in the left side with respect to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the center axis. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is shaped like a cylinder extending straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 150d goes straight to the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by the lower tray ball supply port 211j, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided in the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a possibility that the game balls B are concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B flow from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full-tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room left in the lower tray 202. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend obliquely forward left. More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it becomes a distance.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is positioned to the left of the center axis line (the line indicated by the dashed line) of the rear end (ball outlet 150d) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. are moving to

As a result, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is moved leftward by moving the lower plate ball removal hole 202a to the left. In the state where 202a is closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of game balls B stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. - 特許庁In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. Since the left side wall of the port 211c extends obliquely and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower plate 202 through which the game ball B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B released from the post-extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the obliquely extending left side wall and released. , and the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202 .

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. It has a main body 212 and a plate unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

In addition, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220. It has a pre-extraction unit (not shown) and an after-extraction upper tray unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the pre-extraction upper tray unit.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. and an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) extending vertically and having an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate main body 212 .

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed opening, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper tray. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feed guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the post-ball removal unit 240 and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feed opening is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210 , and is located inside the upper tray 201 . A game ball B is supplied from the ball receiving opening of the upper tray ball extraction unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the left plate decorative board 273, the right plate decorative board 278, and the operation part relay board 332. It is for The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 . The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning cash or a prepaid card thrown into the machine after subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B, adjusting the sound volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and a button on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the upper tray ball extraction button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball rental operation base 223, a ball rental display unit 226 arranged in the rear lower part of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental button 224 on the outside of the base unit 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized from the player's side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. A ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern is applied to the part of , as if the sound is coming out of the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the volume control button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume. In this example, the volume can be set to six levels from volume 1 to volume 6 by pressing the volume control button 227 .

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount (brightness) of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 . This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern of a light bulb is applied to the part of . The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 brightens the light, and pressing the "-" side darkens it. In addition to the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 may also be adjusted. In this example, the amount of light (brightness) can be set in six steps from brightness 1 to brightness 6 by pressing the light amount adjustment button 228 .

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are colored in different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player is unlikely to make a mistake.

By the way, when the sound volume and the amount of light are adjusted using the contact operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301, the player participation type effect requiring the operation of the effect operation portion 301 is not executed. Sometimes, the effect operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the volume of the sound and the brightness of the amount of light have to be changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be directly adjusted. can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after upper plate ball removal]
The unit before ball removal of the upper plate and the unit after removal of upper plate ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging B to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed opening from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be vertically slidable. , a spring (not shown) that urges the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball. A ball feeding guideway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward; A ball removal guidance path 241c for guiding the game ball B downward from the position and then guiding it rightward in rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port is opened forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in the state assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving opening and the ball feeding guiding path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper disk ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion. and a projecting operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward. The lower end of button 222 abuts. When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the post-upper-disc-ball-extraction unit 240, the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper-movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 moves through the operation receiving portion of the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is positioned at the end of upward movement. In addition, since the upper disk ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball ejection button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the contacting ball extracting member 143 can move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves toward the entrance 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B, which has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201, is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b opening below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c which is engaged, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower tray 202 side by the upper tray ball extraction unit 240. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and has a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. and a lower front decorative portion 252b that protrudes forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. - 特許庁

A left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side protrusions 252a, respectively.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the plate unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and is provided with an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 includes a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263 .

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid. 265 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

When the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed to move the lower tray ball removal lid 265, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a remains open. , and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pressed rearward and then released. returns to its normal position, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate left decorative unit and plate right decorative unit]
The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200 .

The left plate decoration unit 270 includes a left plate decoration body 271 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and which has translucency, and a left plate decoration which has translucency penetrating the left plate decoration body 271. It is provided with a lens 272 and a left plate decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The left plate ornament 271 has a semi-circular arc projecting forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The left plate decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the left plate decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the left plate decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

The left plate decoration unit 270 is connected to the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 at its left end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The right plate decoration unit 275 includes a right plate decoration body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends in the left and right direction and has translucency, and a right plate decoration that has translucency penetrating through the right plate decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a right plate decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right plate decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The right plate ornament 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the center axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The right plate decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the right plate decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the right plate decoration 276 can be decorated with light.

The plate right decorative unit 275 is connected to the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430 at its right end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the right plate decoration substrate 278 are lit, the entire front surface of the right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side swelling portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from front and below. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upper movement end position, and (b) is a effect operation from the state of (a). FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the part unit has moved to the raised position; FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. (vibration) so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. The effect operation section 301 has a contact operation section 302 provided above a pressing operation section 303 . In the effect operation unit 301 , the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter about 5/8 the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300 .

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the plate unit 200 at the center in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape, and the production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside and is attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). An outer periphery decoration board 320, an outer periphery board cover 325 attached to the operation part base 315 so as to cover the performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 from above, and an operation part relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 315. 330 and .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for lifting and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting the projection force. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 by the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315 . The effect operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer circumference of the effect operation unit 300 (the periphery of the effect operation section unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an annular shape having an insertion opening 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the production operation section 301 is inserted. and a unit top cover 312 . The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation portion base 315 . The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311 . In other words, the effect operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled on the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

At least the upper unit cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected so that the left plate decoration 271 and the right plate decoration 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212 a of the upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 . The operation unit base 315 is covered with the unit lower cover 311 on the front and the bottom, and is covered with the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 on the top. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped body portion 315a with an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates the effect operation portion unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

The effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange section 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the peripheral substrate cover 325 .

The upper surface of the flange portion 315 b of the operation portion base 315 is positioned substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 when assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 315 . The operation part relay board unit 330 covers the board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body part 315a of the operation part base 315, the operation part relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation part relay board 332 from behind. and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 as shown.

The operation part relay board 332 includes the production operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outer decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, inside button decoration board 364, and operation buttons. It relays connection between the elevation drive motor 367 , the pressure detection sensor 373 , the elevation detection sensor 374 , the protrusion force detection sensor 375 , the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 .

[3-5e-4. Production control unit]
The effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303. is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed tubular button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to move up and down by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and arranged above the button base 354 and an annular button exterior decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. a contact sensor body 358 connected to and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353 .

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. and a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351 a is formed in a shape that constitutes a portion of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 . The upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape whose diameter is about half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351 a (cylindrical portion 351 b ) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310 . The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351 c is locked to the button base 354 . Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a certain width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection member 352 is located below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is formed to bulge upward obliquely and have a flat inner surface. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of decoration of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351 a of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 can be satisfactorily controlled. It can be decorated with light emission in a normal state.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358 . As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. can be done. In other words, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 .

The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending tubular sleeve body 353a and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353 a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 , and the length of the sleeve body 353 a is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351 b of the button body 351 . The button sleeve 353 can upwardly transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disc shape with a diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351 . The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at symmetrical portions with respect to the center, a center hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and protruding from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. and a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevation cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354 d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 of the button base 354 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. A pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, and the button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable. Further, the button base 354 is vertically moved by guiding the pair of guide pins 354 c to the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 . The bottom surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365 .

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the external button decoration board 355. As shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a concentric double circumference. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately lighting the LED 355a of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. Vibration motor 356 is arranged such that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation section 301 . Also, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation section 301 (the effect operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation section 301 . In addition, the vibration caused by the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 includes a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrodes that it has inside. The connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352 . That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrodes and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but signals in multiple stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor main body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352 . In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body can be detected with the effect operation unit 350 projecting upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of 351 . Thus, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 .

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by a effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. When the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation portion 303. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), it does not move further downward even if it is pressed, and is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and enters a non-detection state. . Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pushed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing force. It is detected by sensor 373 . Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In addition, since the effect operation section unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, when the contact operation section 302 is operated, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302 . Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351 , by forming minute unevenness or a plurality of streaks on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 , an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation part 302 . can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player more can be provided.

In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be made opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351 . This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button main body 351 can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 provided below. can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can raise and lower the production operation unit unit 350. As shown in FIG. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached inside the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylinders arranged symmetrically, the lower ends of which are attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the upper ends of which extend upward through the operating portion base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362 and a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer circumference smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353 are attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 to direct light upward. and a button interior decoration substrate 364 on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and urging the button base 354 upward. and a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315 a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363 .

Furthermore, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operating button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating drive motor 367. a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the lifting drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lift cam drive gear member 370 having a central shaft 366 therethrough and rotatably mounted thereon.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected at the lower end to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366. When rotated, the elevating cam raises and lowers the button base 354. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 is attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and an elevating mechanism base 361 that is attached to the elevation cam drive gear member 370. (Elevation cam member 371) up-and-down detection sensor 374 that detects the up-and-down of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the rotation position, and the elevation mechanism base 361 attached to the elevation mechanism base 361, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 of the elevation undersprung holding member A projection force detection sensor 375 that detects the projection force of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 and lifting springs that penetrate the base body 361a. and a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 . A driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projecting force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. The lifting mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b. Thus, a space in which the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. As shown in FIG. A pair of through-holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, forward and rearward from the center, at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363 . A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. The lower protrusion of the upper base 363 is brought into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372 to form a space between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361 in which the lifting cam member 371 can be accommodated. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, through which the guide shaft 362 is inserted. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lower lifting spring holding members 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevation cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 . The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371 a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The lift cam member 371 is configured so that when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the lift cam member 371, it extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b. is formed in The elevation cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 by the cam portion 371a by rotating, and the button base 354 (the effect operation portion unit 350) which is urged upward by the elevation spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion projecting upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 . The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projection into contact with the lower end of the lower projection of the upper base 363 . be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). This press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 from the normal state. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 354. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370 c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 , thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 . is detected.

The projection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385 d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 in the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 .

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can vertically support the effect operation unit 350 via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front-rear direction, and the button base 354 is lifted by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through it. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 rotates the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 to move the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310. can be made In addition, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration substrate 364 .

In the normal state, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 engaged with the engaging section 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a)). ). In this normal state, the effect operation section unit 350 is positioned at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The part unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 match, and the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (state in which the effect operation section unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the elevation drive gear 368 is engaged. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c while rolling from the 371c to the left part of the engaging portion 371c of the first cam 371b.

Then, when the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam member 371 rotates. Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation section unit 350 is in the state of the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381, although the details will be described later. can. Since the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit 350 is lifted with a projecting force corresponding to the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. Can be protruded into position.

When the effect operating unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam portion 371d of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 is above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. also protrudes upwards.

When the button main body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of this raised position, the effect operation unit 350 , and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 . When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation section unit 350 (the pressing operation section 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button main body 351 ( Pressing of the pressing operation portion 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c). is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

In addition, when returning the effect operation section unit 350 to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the operation button elevation drive motor 367 that rotates the elevation cam member 371, thereby reducing damage (failure) of the operation button elevation drive motor 367. Also, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the effect operation section unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

In the above description, in the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 to the first cam 371b ( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving from the engaging portion 371c) to the second cam 371d. In a normal state where the button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371 and is moving to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevation cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e. will move upward along the When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, if the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 can be protruded upward at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pushed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can be pushed downward. can function as

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 (operation button elevation drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be reduced.

Thus, depending on the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, it is possible to change the amount of projection of the button body 351 (effect operation section unit 350), depending on the game state (for example, the first start opening 2002 and By varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second start port 2004, the player can be made to indicate the degree of expectation for the game.

At least one shallow concave portion capable of engaging the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371. As shown in FIG. As a result, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Further, when a concave portion is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is engaged with the concave portion so that the operation button elevation drive motor 367 stops the elevation cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Projection power adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, thereby causing the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) to protrude upward ( projection force) can be changed. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and from the gear portion 384a An adjusting screw 384, which has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw 384, the pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 are in contact with each other.

The protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to form a gap with the lower surface of the base body 361a. The rotation shaft of the projection force adjusting drive motor 381 protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjusting screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . A screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically through the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, and a front and rear portion of the main body portion 385a. It has spring holding recesses 385c which are provided at both ends and which are recessed downward to accommodate the lower ends of the lifting springs 365, and flat detection pieces 385d which extend upward from the front end of the body portion 385a. . The lift lower spring holding member 385 is penetrated by the guide shafts 362 at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385 d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

The protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can rotate the adjusting screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 . The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, thereby vertically moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 through the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force of the lifting/lowering spring 365 that urges the effect operating unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. As a result, the urging force that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward by the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the upward projection force of the effect operation section unit 350 .

The detection piece 385d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the lift unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, the detection piece 385d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is maximized. As a result, when the protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lift unsprung member 385 upward, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 moves the lift unsprung member 385 upward. By stopping the upward movement of 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

In addition, as described above, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body. Detecting the contact or approach of an object to be detected (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to 351, the production operation unit unit 350 is projected by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the object to be detected. Sometimes, the vertical position of the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 may be appropriately selected to vary the projecting force of the button body 351 . As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be varied, so that if the button body 351 strongly abuts, something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is not possible, and to increase the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380, depending on the game state (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004), the button By increasing or decreasing the projecting force of the main body 351, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the biasing force by twisting the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to protrude the effect operation section unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it is impossible to use a force different from the original use. A large amount of stress will act on the compression coil spring, and there is a risk that the internal structure will deteriorate and break at an early stage. On the other hand, in the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion force ( Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the lifting spring 365, and early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. It can be made to protrude stably over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button external decoration board, and button internal decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a performance operation section 301 on the upper surface thereof which can be operated by the player. The effect operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 capable of being operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation section 303 capable of pressing operation. The contact operation portion 302 is provided above the pressing operation portion 303 (button main body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) that can project upward is inclined so that the upper part is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. In other words, the center of the effect operation section 301 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300 . As a result, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the effect operation section 301.例文帳に追加

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation part unit 350 is in the state of the effect. It matches the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310 . Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation portion 303 (the effect operation portion unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament to the player, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 has a production operation unit peripheral decoration board 320 arranged below a unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 303 (production operation unit unit 350). , an annular button external decoration substrate 355 and an inner button decoration substrate 364 are arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation portion 303 . The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outside in the order of the button outer decoration board 355 and the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 centering on the inside button decoration board 364 . The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it is translucent. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (toward the player).

The effect operation unit 300 can light-embellish the annular unit upper cover 312 by means of the LEDs 320 a of the effect operation portion peripheral decoration board 320 . In addition, the LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 can be used to decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 can be decorated with light by means of the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364. FIG.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation portion 303 . Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, light is emitted from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a lighting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation part 303 (effect operation part unit 350) is aligned with the surface of the unit top cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58(a). state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable contact operations in accordance with the player-participation type production to be executed.

As an effect (player participatory effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button main body 351, the process proceeds to the next performance stage. When the contact is detected, the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 emit light to decorate the button body 351, so that the player recognizes that the contact operation has been accepted. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operational feeling. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous) is given to the player by means of the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. You may suggest it.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351 , the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351 . As a result, it is possible to impart an operational feeling to the contact operation section 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. good.

In addition, as an effect in the normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300, or a voice, sound effect, etc. is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). The urging force of the spring 365 protrudes (pops up) upward. More specifically, in a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the button base 354 and the effect operation unit 350 (the button main body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrude upward due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised. It can attract a lot of attention.

After that, the game shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303), and the player is entertained by the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. FIG. More specifically, when the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and is pressed downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) is activated. When the button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 , and the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 . As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the presentation can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger, and the player can be entertained by the player participation type presentation.

In addition, during the above effects, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion force (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude. may be suggested. Further, when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351 .

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button main body 351 abuts the player's finger or the like and gives an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection force of the button body 351, so that the player's expectations for the game may be suggested by the strength of the projection force.

In addition, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like is outside the projecting range of the upward projecting button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351. The button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the player approaches the . As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projecting force of the button body 351 is strengthened or weakened by the projecting force adjusting mechanism 380, and the degree of expectation for the game is suggested to the player by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the player's fingers or the like. You can do it.

Furthermore, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong projection force by the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (projection sound) is generated, so that the projection sound surprises the player. can be done. In addition, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak projection force by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the projection of the button body 351. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button main body 351 (pressing operation part 303) is generally operated. It is also possible to execute an effect such that a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button is performed. Alternatively, the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as an effect after the effect operation section unit 350 (the button body 351) is projected, an effect such as contacting the projecting button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be touched. Also, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380. This makes it difficult to move the protruding button body 351, thereby preventing the button body 351 (contact operation) from moving. 302) can be easily operated.

In addition, as an effect for projecting the effect operation unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction so that the button base 354 The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project the button base 354 (button main body 351) from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is lifted and lowered. The drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in plan view, thereby moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and moving the elevation cam member 371 in the middle of the third cam 371e. may be stopped so that the upward projection of the button body 351 is stopped at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 .

Thus, even when the button body 351 is protruded halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation portion 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player-participation type production. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after projecting the effect operation unit 350, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. be minimized. As a result, since the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation section unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is improved. can entertain. In addition, as an effect for pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is set at an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the result of the special lottery, and the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is set. may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be made to press the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more diverse An effect can be presented, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection body is provided so that the contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at a plurality of contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of stages of threshold values corresponding to the capacitance of 352 may be provided, and the effect may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. may be provided to detect in multiple stages and be utilized for production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are away from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and are not in contact with the button body 351, By dividing the stage into stages in which a player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the performance according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 presents a variety of performances to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 385 has been moved upward, but this is not a limitation, and as shown in FIG. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Further, the urging force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can prevent early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower lift spring holding member 385 .

As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player-participation type effects, the player can be entertained with various effects, and the player is bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult.

By the way, the effect operation unit 300 is provided with an annular (two circular arcs combined) effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 on the upper part of the spherical effect operation part cover unit 310, and the effect operation part outer periphery A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the effect operation section unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decoration board 320 . In addition, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operating unit 350, a button middle decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode ) approaches the production operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, and the proximity of the production operation section outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button inside decoration board 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make an erroneous detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) is provided between the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the inside button decoration board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is moved by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down. , and between the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, a shield connected to a ground (GND) that does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 allows the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, and to prevent erroneous detection in the main body 358 of the contact detection sensor.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of an effect operating unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operating unit of the effect operating unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). and (c) is a representation in which the left plate decoration unit, the right plate decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit or the like; FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative touch detector, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same symbols are attached to the same components as those described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. A left contact detection sensor main body 391L and a right contact detection sensor main body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the top surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his or her finger or the like from the left side to the right side, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor main body 391L becomes detection, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-detection. becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button main body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body to change. Both right 391R are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to the original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-detection, and the static electricity of the right contact detection body 390R The capacitance has changed and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R and the pattern of the change, the movement of the player's fingers etc. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with more diverse movements, and to present to the player a player-participation-type effect that allows the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations. , the player-participation-type performance in which the contact operation unit 302 is operated can be made more enjoyable. It should be noted that more complex motions can be detected by increasing the number of contact detection bodies.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60( a ) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392 . According to this embodiment, a single contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like on any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state in which the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of mutually different locations. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like touches any part of the surface of the button body 351, the A contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the accuracy of detecting contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be used as a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may get injured, or where there is a risk of causing annoyance to other players). A certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent conduct, etc.) may be provided so that when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a caution or warning may be issued.

Moreover, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switching mechanism that connects only one contact detection body 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection body 393. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (contact detection body 352). . The switching unit 394 may be "switched by a switching circuit such as a relay or a transistor", "switched by other electronic circuits", or "a movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c)"). The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are switched along with the movement".

For example, in the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type production is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching part 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's finger or the like touches. good. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type presentation with a high game quality by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are configured to move forward and backward, the front side of the effect operation unit 300 is the first When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394 when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted. You may make it switch so that it may carry out.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the forward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped. to As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 or the like from unnecessarily pressing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby avoiding the player from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, if the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded forward, a gap may be formed behind the effect operation unit 300 or the like. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second contact detection body 393b is switched to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching portion 394 when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward. Then, when the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is in a non-detection state, the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the rear gap of the performance operation unit 300 and the like, and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Also, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), a contact detection body 395 for detecting contact of a player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is circular, polygonal, geometrical, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a shape imitating a predetermined item. A shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like may be used. Thereby, the contact detection body 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It should be noted that the contact detection body is preferably provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers do not come into direct contact with it. can be smooth.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the button interior decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. A contact detection body 397 may be provided under the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided therebelow. As a result, the decoration body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the performance operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visually recognized. Alternatively, the decoration 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396 or the like. good.

Also, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection member include "a member formed of a transparent member" and "a member formed so as to be seen integrally with the decoration of the surface member such as the button body". As a result, since the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, it does not detect the contact of the player's finger or the like or perform the contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player-participation type effect is executed and the player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 lifts the button body 351 upward. By causing the player to notice the existence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation part 302) for the first time, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. Figure 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. A door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422 a are mounted vertically and arranged at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side base 421 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame left side base 421. The front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface are covered. A left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421, a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 .

In addition, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides forward the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and an upper and lower light guide member 427 in the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction on the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame and a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the inner layer 3a is partly outside. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 422b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, ie, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 422b. Also, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color light from the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 15 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side thereof is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 423b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decoration board 423. As shown in FIG.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 LEDs from 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups in full color. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 21 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding tube 424b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 holds the light-guiding shaft 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light-guiding shaft 427a of the left-side upper light-guiding member 427, which will be described later. is. This holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 projecting forward through the holding tube 424b, the second light guide plate of the door frame left upper decorative substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a is formed. The light from the LED 422b irradiates the light guide shaft portion 427a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides, thereby avoiding the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, the left side upper reflector 424 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrude forward through the holding tube 425b, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, which faces the door frame more, irradiates the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decorative body 426. - 特許庁

Further, the left side lower reflector 425 is provided with an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the front-rear direction at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding tube 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding tube 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425 . In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left lower light guide member 429, are inserted from behind. The door frame left side decoration 426 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421 . In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a certain shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. doing.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left-side upper light guide member 427 guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side center light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . This left side middle light guide member 428 guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a that extend forward and backward in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left side lower light guide member 429 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial patterned portion of the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the handle cover 295 . In addition, the color of the portion of the door frame left side base 421 outside the circular or radial pattern is the same as the color of the portion of the handle cover 295 outside the circular or radial pattern.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the part above the center in the vertical direction projects slightly forward than the part below, and the vicinity of the lower end gently curves to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end thereof is below the door window 101a and located on the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. is located above the speaker mouth 211b in the . The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located outside the left side of the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door-frame left-side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door-frame left-side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decoration substrate 423 are placed at a certain distance rearward from the front surface of the door-frame left-side decoration 426 . is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the door frame The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 rearward. is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle light guide member 428 on the left side, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower light guide member 429 on the left side. As a result, the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

In addition, the first LED 422 a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 , the first LED 423 a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 , the light guide shaft portion 427 a of the left side upper light guide member 427 , the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 422b and 423b. As a result, the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a irradiate the light with an even amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly distributed. It can be decorated with light emission in a plane.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the width center in the horizontal direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b projects the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, , Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame The appearance of the luminous decoration of the side decorations 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door-frame right side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted vertically on the front surface at regular intervals, and a door frame right side base 431 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame. A door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a door frame right side lower A right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and a door frame right side attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration 435 is provided.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 includes a right-side upper light guide member 436 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432, and a right-side lower decorative board 433 of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board. A right-side lower light guide member 437 that guides light from one LED 433a forward is provided.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of ornamental holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. The left side decoration 438 is provided between the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A light-transmitting right side left lens 439 having a fitting decorative portion 439a and a plurality of light-transmissive right side left lenses 439 and a door frame right side base 431 are attached so as to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431, and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A translucent right-side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width on the left and right. Further, the door frame right side base 431 has a rear end side that extends vertically over the entire height, and a front end side that extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to near the center in the vertical direction, and then curves rearward. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 439). A plurality of reflector portions 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end are provided at a portion of the height where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided. The reflector portions 431a have rear ends that are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a, and are inclined toward the side surfaces, and have curved bottom surfaces.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a which are provided rearwardly of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is a , penetrates in the left and right direction (they are recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door-frame right-side base 431 reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of a door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and a third LED 433c of a door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are decorated with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame with a gap in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light.

On this door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Moreover, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 432b. Moreover, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c. and the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 21 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the above 21 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 described later He is trying to control a total of 24 systems|strains of 3 systems for 1 group above the 3rd LED433c divided into 2 groups.

Although not shown, this door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 4, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group out of the grouped groups can be caused to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light.

On this door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs are mounted: 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c. Moreover, 1st LED433a in which 2nd LED433b is provided in the upper-lower both sides is provided in the center (center between) of those 2nd LED433b. At least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two in order from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, and from the seventh to ninth from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. and the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 27 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at the maximum. Among them, the upper one set of 3 systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front side first LED 433a and second LED 433b, and the rear side third LED 433c ) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although illustration is omitted, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two LEDs for supplying electric power for driving a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, two lower third LEDs 433c, and an LED driver 433d. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A clock line and a distribution cable consisting of four electric wires are connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of Six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two third LEDs 433c of the lower set of the two sets, each set It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity every time.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. In addition, a cylindrical holding tube 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. Around the sides it is shaped like a dish widening forward. Thereby, the light from 2nd LED432b and 2nd LED433b can be diffused widely ahead.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. , the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a projecting forward through the holding cylinder 434b, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing through the through holes 434a on both upper and lower sides, The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame irradiates the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of 435.

Further, the right side reflector 434 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 .

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. As shown in FIG. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from behind. The door frame right side decoration 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426 . In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a certain shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. doing.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals from above the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side upper light guide member 436 guides the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The right-side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are vertically spaced apart from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side lower light guide member 437 guides the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a front end side formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 . The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door-frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is two-color-molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, in the same manner as the handle cover 295 and the door-frame left-side base 421 described above. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decoration body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and protrudes leftward to form the decoration of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 when fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 . The decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is positioned to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decoration 438. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in the horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). Further, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having the keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 . This door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3 . Further, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b in the same manner as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes rightward to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 when fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 . The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 is located on the right side of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side right side decoration 440. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 441a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern portions of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are the same as those of the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the side base 421, and is outside the circular or radial patterns of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. is formed to have the same color as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the part above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the same height part of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed to have substantially the same height as the door frame 3 from its upper end to its lower end. The door frame right side unit 430 has an upper portion located outside the right side of the door frame top unit 450 .

The door-frame right-side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door-frame base 101 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes greatly forward from the top to about half the height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for a player seated in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacently on the right side of the island facility of the game hall to see the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it is possible to block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, the other players can play without hesitation.

According to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are provided at positions that are somewhat backward from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435 . is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the door frame The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 432 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435 rearward. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Further, the door-frame right-side unit 430 emits light from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433, so that the reflector portion of the door-frame right-side base 431 is illuminated. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 that is attached can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a part of the right and left sides of the screen-like door frame right side unit 430 (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) can be decorated with light, the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be conspicuous and which has a high appeal to the players.

Further, according to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the front-side LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. Together with the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration 435 are decorated with light. Therefore, due to the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are illuminated to be decorated with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiates the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front side. luminous decoration or prevent it. As a result, the right-side door-frame decoration 435 and the right-side left-side door-frame decoration 438 and right-side right-side door-frame decoration 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent of each other to be decorated with light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 432b and 433b. As a result, the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with a uniform amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, the door-frame right-side unit 430 has a door-frame right-side decoration 435 with a decoration portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b causes the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a to be projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadow is not projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided at the portion where the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are located, the shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a can be obscured. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the bottom end of the.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration substrate 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration substrate 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 in front of the top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; (see Figure 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top central speaker and the top side speaker, and the front surface of the door frame top base 451 A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the door frame top base 451 above. there is

The door-frame top base 451 extends laterally by approximately the same length as the distance between the door-frame left-side unit 420 and the door-frame right-side unit 430 . The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched forward from the rear end. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decoration 453 extends laterally in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top cover 452 in plan view. The front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

A pair of top center speakers are spaced left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as speech and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speakers are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 , a door frame top left decorative board 456 , a door frame top right decorative board 457 , a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame secondary of the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are sunk from the front toward the rear portion of the upper inner side of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 . It is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame is made opaque, is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271 and the plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, the unit upper cover 312 and the button main body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a unit top cover 312, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration 453 are a left plate decoration board 273, a right plate decoration board 278, an effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422, a door frame left side lower decoration board 423, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, these decoration boards are arranged. By properly emitting light from the LEDs, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the player can be shown a light emitting performance such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the horizontal direction. As a result, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is positioned in the center of the plate unit 200, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 (the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 301) can be used. The operation unit 303) can be conspicuous.

In addition, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button main body 351 as the effect operation section 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming a single sphere. , the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be made difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated, and the effect operation unit 300 consisting of a huge sphere allows the player to see other This pachinko machine can be made to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from a pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, can enhance the appeal to the player, and can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation section 301 (the contact operation section 302 , and the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the gigantic sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the production operation section 301 can easily see the entire production operation section 301, and the production operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly feel that he or she wants to operate the gigantic spherical performance operation section 301, and to heighten expectations for execution of the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加At the same time, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the operation of the performance operation unit 301 allows the player to enjoy the player participation type performance. A decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. FIG. 71 shows a door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 .

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns applied to the outer surface are formed in two colors using two types of synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. Circular and radial patterns are formed by appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the part other than the pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b. Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decoration hole 440a (decoration portion 441a) does not change.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding. By appropriately selecting and combining the color of resin), light transmittance, etc., it is possible to greatly change the appearance even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when minor changes are made, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed on the island equipment, thereby providing a colorful feeling to the players. It is possible to enhance the appeal to

Although two-color molding is shown in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the two-color molded door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side are provided outside the door window 101a facing forward from the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a polka dot decoration is formed by the two-color molding. Since the decoration body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decoration body at the same time. There is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the substrate in a flat shape.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle are light-transmissive. When the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are formed in the same color with different ratios, since the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, the polka-dot circles are difficult to see, and the appearance looks as if the polka-dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle is colored white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is colored pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes The polka-dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka-dots. Thus, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. Cost can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a line on the island equipment, the island equipment is made colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a strong impact on the players who are playing in the game hall and attracting the players.

Further, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorations to improve the appearance. can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color-molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Thus, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be clearly seen, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layers 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In order to prevent the inner layer 3a from being seen through from the outside, the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance for the outer layer 3b at the time of a model change. Thus, it is possible to greatly change the way of looking at the decoration of the decoration, and it is possible to easily change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the decoration.

In addition, as described above, the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the inner layer 3a has a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, attaching a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b. By using such a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decoration can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decoration. , it is possible to suppress the increase in cost for model change.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate that can irradiate the inside of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. 433, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the door frame 440 emit light, the inner side of the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 The portion of the layer 3a (portion of polka dots) can be decorated with bright light, and the outer side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light, thereby improving the appearance and allowing the player to see the right side of the door frame. The luminous decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also illuminate the outer layer 3b. The entire side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be decorated with light emission, and the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are displayed neatly and the game is played. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the attention of players.

In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorative bodies such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molding (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since it is formed by molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the LED is not lit can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is illuminated, and the change in the decoration can strongly attract the player's interest. In detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, when a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is caused to emit light. Without it, only the surface-exposed portions of the inner layer 3a are visible. On the other hand, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED directly irradiates the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the part exposed to the surface and the part of the hole in the inner layer 3a can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are luminous decoration. The parts to be illuminated can be varied, and the decorations to be illuminated can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body informs the player of the arrival of a chance, the change of the hitting operation (for example, "right hitting"), and the like. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of suggesting and capable of various performances.

In addition, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different projection amounts in the front-rear direction, Since the pachinko machine 1 can give different impressions (appearances) when viewed from the left front and from the right front, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that of the previous excursion, thereby attracting interest in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be made to attract players who are wandering around the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. Arrangement and system of LEDs in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement of each LED provided on the door frame 3 and the control system will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner in the front view, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's rotating operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of an automobile steering wheel.

The handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a whose front side is covered with a handle front lens 185. Between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a, a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided. is provided. A handle cover decorative substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. As shown in FIG.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and the LEDs 184a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a line on the handle cover decorative substrate 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, two LEDs on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 on the bottom right and . The LEDs 293a divided into these six groups are controlled in 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that light is emitted to rotate around the handle 195, and light is emitted toward the center of the handle 195. A player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195.例文帳に追加Also, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293. FIG.

Further, the door frame 3 has a substantially square door window 101a extending vertically and closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center of the front view, as shown in the figure. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decoration substrate 273 behind the plate left decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decoration substrate 278 behind the plate right decoration 276, Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 behind door frame left side decoration 426, door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decoration 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, four LEDs 273a are mounted on the front surface of the plate left decorative substrate 273 in a line in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a of the plate right decorative substrate 278, which will be described later, to emit light. (illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and the LEDs 273a in each group can emit light in full colors as appropriate.

The plate right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the plate left decorative board 273, and the LEDs 278a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two of each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It has eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for driving a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 422c. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two of each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It has 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled in 21 systems by an LED driver 423c. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a on the front surface. It has eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 emits light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 432b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two groups, the second LED 432b divided into three groups, the third LED 432c divided into two groups, and the third group divided into two groups in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 A set of third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by 24 systems by an LED driver 432d. It can emit light in full color.

On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a on the front surface. 12 mounted second LEDs 433b, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface with a gap in the vertical direction, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the lower two third LEDs 433c. and an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top. , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups , LED driver 433d, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c of each set can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 423 provided on the right side of the door window 101a are used. The substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are formed in a shape asymmetrical with respect to the lateral center of the door window 101a. In addition, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

The door-frame left-side upper decorative board 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decorative board 423, and the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. While the numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b are the same, the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72 A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LEDs for performing the lighting effect.

On the door frame top center decorative board 455, there are six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the horizontal direction, the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled in nine systems by an LED driver, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface with a left-right opening. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface with a left-right direction opening. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 passes through the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The light guide shaft portion 429 a of the light member 429 , the light guide shaft portion 436 a of the right side upper light guide member 436 , and the light guide shaft portion 437 a of the right side lower light guide member 437 form the opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 . The light is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, in front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the player can see a light emitting effect of emitting bright light in a dot shape, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. A player can be surprised by a light-emitting effect of flashing spot light.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower Second LED 423b of decorative board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decorative board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decorative board 433, LED 455a of door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately illuminated to light-embellish the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to perform light emission so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to or played by the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the system of LEDs connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. In FIG. 72, the system of the LEDs connected by the dashed line allows the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to perform planar light emission (surface light emission). can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. By the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Therefore, compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the parts of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated brightly with high brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 And even if the part of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the performance image, the decorative body, etc. within the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 projecting forward (connecting the front ends projecting forward in an arc shape in plan view). Since it is provided on a straight line in the vertical direction, the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is emitted behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and by emitting spot light with high brightness, other players can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, according to the door frame 3, the parts for spot light emission are provided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 which protrude forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player does not block the light of the spot light emission because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are spot-lighted, even other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the high-intensity spot light. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the interest of the players can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be used to select the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422 a, first LED 423 a, first LED 432 a, first LED 433 a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) preferably belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pins (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation portion 302 in the effect operation portion 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. A performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 is provided. This performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operating section peripheral decoration board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decoration board 321 and a rear decoration board 322 .

18 LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 in the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321, 6 are spaced apart on the circumference near the inner periphery, and 3 are spaced apart on the circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. , and the remaining nine are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322, four are provided on the circumference near the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided midway between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. They are spaced on the circumference, and the remaining six are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference, three by three near the ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decoration substrate 321 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. are divided into three sets of one piece each, and three sets of three pieces each of the nine pieces on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction, for a total of nine sets. The 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration board 322 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. There are 3 sets of 3 pieces each, and 2 sets of 9 pieces near each end of the outer circumference. That is, on the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled in 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, light emission effect such that light rotates in the effect operation unit 301, and light emission such that light is concentrated at the center. It is possible to show the player a performance or a light emission performance in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 3 extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a on one side and the other in the left-right direction so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction differs from each other. A door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted and door frame left side lower decorations on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted behind each of 435 A substrate 423, a door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forward Light guide shaft portion 427a of left side upper light guide member 427, light guide shaft portion 428a of left side middle light guide member 428, light guide shaft portion 429a of left side lower light guide member 429, right side upper light guide member. 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame emit light, thereby the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame. It is possible to make planar light emitting decoration (surface light emission), and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward passes through the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is radiated forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The guides in the frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 The parts corresponding to the tip of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a can be decorated with light emission (spot emission) in a dot shape. .

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 are The second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting decorated in a plane, or a part of the left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting, or the left side of the door frame may be decorated. The entire side decoration body 426 and the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame can be illuminated in a planar manner and a part thereof can be decorated in a point manner, so that the player can see various lighting effects. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and keeps the player entertained, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are divided, and the door frame right side A plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decoration board 432 and the lower right side decoration board 433 of the door frame are symmetrical to each other. Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems, the left side of the door frame Lighting patterns of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. , for example, the data for the left side of the door frame decoration 426 may be diverted to the data for the right side of the door frame 435, or the left side of the door frame decoration 426 and the door frame Since it is possible to create data with the same flow on the right side decorative body 435 side, the labor involved in creating lighting pattern data can be simplified (with the same creation time ) It becomes easier to construct more complicated lighting pattern data, and it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects with high effects. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect for the lighting performance of the door frame left side decorations 426 and the door frame right side decorations 435 on both the left and right sides of 101a.

In addition, since the two second LEDs 422b, second LEDs 423b, second LEDs 432b, and second LEDs 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are the same system. , so as to sandwich the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, the light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LEDs 423b, 2nd LEDs 432b, and 2nd LEDs 433b provided in the are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b light guide shaft portion 427a and guide shaft portion 427a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are planarly decorated with light emission by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 433b. The first LED 432a and the first LED 433a light-embellish the portions corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portions 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a in a dot-like manner. As a result, it is possible to show the player a lighting effect that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as a planar light and a partial light in a dot shape, and the light is bright in a dot shape. The player's interest can be strongly attracted by the light emission effect, etc., and the player can be surprised by the light emission effect, in which spot light is emitted in a dot shape, which is not available in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the horizontal direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower side on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the left side of the door frame upper decorative substrate 422, the lower left side of the door frame decorative substrate 423, the upper right side of the door frame decorative substrate 432, and the right side of the door frame. Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be identified, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid mistaking the lower right side decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, using the door frame 3 as an example, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative substrate 273, the plate right decorative substrate 278, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The upper side decoration board 432, the lower door frame right side decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the LED drivers and connectors of colors other than white that are attached to the decoration board are attached to the rear side of the board. I'm trying As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected forward, so that the decorations and the like in the front can be illuminated brighter, and the front (player side) is reflected. This makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has a large number of decorative boards, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numerals, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b using different colors (indicated by shades of different shades in FIG. 74). and have

More specifically, as the character identification portion 7a, the dish left decorative board 273 has the character "lower left", the dish right decorative board 278 has the character "lower right", and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has the character "upper left". , the letters "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the letters "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the letters "lower right" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied substantially over the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but partially so as not to hinder the soldering of LEDs and the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a seal, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decoration board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example, but various The decorative substrate may also be provided with identification portions 7 such as the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b.

In the above-described embodiment, the identifying section 7 includes both the character identifying section 7a and the color identifying section 7b. Alternatively, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification part 7 (the character identification part 7a and the color identification part 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to make a decoration board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work and to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the front side of the decoration board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board The light is reflected forward on the front surface of the decoration board, so that the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), thereby improving the appearance. can do better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is provided over substantially the entire decoration board, the desired color can be obtained by just looking at a part of the decoration board. ) can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of kinds of decorative substrates are superimposed during assembly, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, the desired decorative substrate can be easily found. can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification part 7b is different for each decoration board, when preparing the decoration boards required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color can be used. When there is a decorative board provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared redundantly. Alternatively, when the colors are insufficient in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decoration substrates necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification portion 7a as the identification portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the operator can read the characters of the character identification portion 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decoration board are white and the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface, the decoration provided in front of the decoration board is highly transparent. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decoration can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decoration board. is possible, the decorative body can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the player can be entertained by the light emission performance with high performance effect, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decoration board so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to being visible, and improve the appearance of the ornament (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by being provided on the back surface of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the labor of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired portion to detect the player's approach or contact is detected. and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are switched by the switching unit 394, and when the player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect a change in capacitance, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with a desired part, Control means such as the main control board 1310 , the peripheral control board 1510 , the peripheral control section 1511 , and the effect display control section 1512 can execute predetermined control according to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching portion 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at the other parts is prevented. is cut, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact detection body 393 is Since the switching unit 394 has disconnected the connection, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired portion can be reliably detected. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection.

As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions. It is possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means of (1), the number of channels involved in detection of the player's approach or contact can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for presentation can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more production means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, production display devices, etc.) by the control means, the increase in the production means allows the player to enjoy a wider variety of productions. It is possible to make the player less likely to get tired of the game, and to sufficiently entertain the player, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at the desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. Connects to the contact detection sensor main body 392, detects the player's approach or contact with a desired part, and controls the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by the means, while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, the number of channels that can be used for production can be relatively reduced. The number can be increased, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Further, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhancing the appeal to the player. can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . can be connected, compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts can be reduced. can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body can be eliminated. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the 392, and it is possible to facilitate the realization of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching part 394. are dispersedly arranged, and when a player-participation type performance is executed in which the plurality of dispersedly arranged contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches in order. By switching the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the , it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection bodies 393 in order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of patching metal, the player side of which is covered with the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (the effect operation unit 350).

In this way, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation section unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section lifting and lowering are performed. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, and the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can be made to function as a contact operation part. Since the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. Since various performance operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine having an operation button that can only be operated by pressing, and can be used for other pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players by being differentiated from other machines.

In addition, according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined effect is output to the player side. Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple steps, the effect corresponding to each step is output. By doing so, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection device having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of performance operations, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player enjoy the player-participation type performance, and to reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes, the player can easily touch the button main body 351 through the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state of approach or non-contact, and to avoid erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 . Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in the capacitance. It is possible to widen the range for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. When the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or touch the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type performance. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered with the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, so that the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing in the player participation type performance can be made difficult to miss, and the player can surely participate in the player participation type performance. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. A light emission effect from the LEDs 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emission effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be pressed is provided with the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352 can reinforce the effect operation unit 350, and even if the player strongly presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) when performing a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the effect operation part unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the effect operation part unit 350 can be operated by pressing the effect operation part unit 350 without worrying about the player. It is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made thinner compared to the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness. Therefore, the space for providing the contact detection body 352 can be easily secured, the contact detection body 352 can be easily provided, the degree of freedom in design can be increased, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal. The button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be easily made into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact, and the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed is covered by the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button main body 351 and avoid the player from feeling uncomfortable when the player touches the contact detection body 352 formed with a plurality of holes. is used as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without a sense of incongruity, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the performance.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect The performance output through (via) the operation section unit 350 can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since it is provided, the effect means is covered by the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection body 352 (the effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly put together. To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being easily provided at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 with a performance operation section unit 350 and performance means etc. having such functions and effects, and capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. can be made easier.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) provided to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the player approaches the effect operation unit 350. Or it can detect contact. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it contacts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation section unit 350 protrudes in , the player can be presented with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by a performance not found in the conventional pachinko machine, to strongly attract the player's interest to the performance operation unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to reliably make the user notice the projection of the performance operation unit 350. - 特許庁

When the effect operation section unit 350 is projected, if the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction of the upper end portion of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lift spring 365 is moved in a direction (downward) away from the upper end portion side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 is weakened and the bias force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, it is possible to change the biasing force of the effect operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 . In this way, since the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded with various projecting forces, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the effect operation can be performed. It is possible to entertain the performance by the protrusion of the part unit 350, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the projecting force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed in accordance with the game state, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit 350 is moved with a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, and the player can strongly feel that something good is happening (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous), and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 is the pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participatory effect is executed, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 to perform the game. It is possible to make the player participate in the player-participation type performance, and to entertain the pressing operation of the performance operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible to operate the effect operation unit 350 at any time. When the player participatory effect in which the effect operation part unit 350 is pressed is executed, the effect operation part unit 350 is protruded by the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, so that the player participatory effect is performed by effect images, sounds, etc. Even without guiding the execution start of the performance, the player can be made to quickly recognize the start of execution of the player participation type performance, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the performance operation part unit 350 can be increased to perform the player participation type performance. can entertain you even more.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 is protruded by the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using a drive motor. As a result, the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded easily and vigorously, and the effects described above can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity varies according to the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages. By projecting with a projecting power, it is possible to present a more diverse performance to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of it and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is popped up by execution of the player participation type effect, so that the player can enter the effect operation unit 350 which is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. approaches or touches, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the contact due to the approach or contact of the player is detected. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the movement (pressing) of the production operation unit 350 by the player causes the production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the button outer decoration board 355, the production operation part lifting mechanism 360, and the inside button decoration board. 364, the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600 and other effect means execute a predetermined effect. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the effect operation unit 350 or approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. can function as On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so the effect operation unit 350 can be made to function like a effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, since it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, the player can enjoy various performance operations by executing a player participation type performance that enables the player to perform the performance operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (under the upper surface portion 351a). , the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (the button body 351) and the player. It is possible to execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact thereof in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present more diverse performances to the player, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation (non-contact operation, A sense of operation can be given to the contact operation), and the player can enjoy the performance operation more.

Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressable), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350. Therefore, in the player-participating production, the player has an operation (pressing operation) to advance and retreat the production operation unit 350, an operation to approach or touch the production operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the variety of operations can increase a player's willingness to participate in the player participation type performance, and facilitate participation in the player participation type performance. can be done. When the player participates in the player-participation type production, various operations using the production operation section unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, by engaging the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 with the engaging portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 is locked so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect to move the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is prevented from advancing and retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevation cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the arbitrarily moving or swaying of the performance operating unit 350, thereby making the performance by the performance operating unit 350 more enjoyable. can be made available.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is hard to be seen by a player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, etc. are separated, Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be matched with the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. , and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the decoration 398. When a finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is executed in which light is emitted to the player side by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Therefore, the player side The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 by the light emitted to the button, and the executed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is detected by the button body 351 or the contact detection body 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is a part of the decoration portion. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be compared with the button external decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be bothered by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effects of the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 in a good state, so that the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button outside covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decorative body 398 is designed to irradiate the player with light, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 can be attached to the effect operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and can provide the player with a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button main body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 moves the finger or the like to approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396. Upon detection of contact, an effect is executed by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player can participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like are detected. Since it is possible to change the effects of the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, or the decoration 398 according to the distance from the button outer decoration board 355, the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the performance by the decorative board 364 inside the button or the decorative body 398, so that the player can see a more colorful performance, and the colorful performance makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In addition, it is designed to detect a change in capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the external decoration board 355, the button interior decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is not affected by the game. The pachinko machine 1 that can easily detect the approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is adapted to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and the vapor deposition film can be thickened to have a metallic luster so that it looks like a part of the decoration. can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punching metal having a design like a star or a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 look like a part of decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detectors 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable by the player, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacity is increased by the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (surface side). Depending on the change, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect presentation means such as the effect display device 1600 produce a predetermined effect. Contact detection body 395 etc. (including contact detection body 352, left contact detection body 390L, right contact detection body 390R, contact detection body 393, and contact detection body 397, etc.) for presenting the , the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and an effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. As a result, the button main body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation section 301 . Since the contact detection body 395 or the like that can be seen through the button body 351 has a design property, the effect operation unit 301 looks like it has a design property, and a performance not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 having the operation part 301 can give a strong impact to a player and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, so that the contact detection body 395 and the like (the button main body 351) can strongly arouse interest in the player. It is possible to heighten expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participatory performance for operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, the effect presentation It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (the button main body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player-participation-type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is activated by the contact detection body 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or touch the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and to give the player unexpectedness to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participatory effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detection body 395 or the like is stopped. Since the performance is presented by the performance presenting means by changing the electric capacity, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can amuse the player and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like is presented. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized. In addition, since an effect is presented in accordance with a change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like approaches the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like and touches the button body 351 . Since it is possible to detect the interval (distance) by dividing it into multiple stages, by presenting an effect according to each stage, it is possible to present a more colorful effect to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to get tired of.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detection body 395 or the like, Designability can be imparted to the contact detection body 395 and the like, deterioration in appearance due to the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the above effects can be achieved. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a device having designability without forming the contact detection body 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351, the contact detection body 395 and the like are prevented from being contaminated with dust and dirt such as food and drink, which makes cleaning easier. can be More specifically, since the contact detection member 395 or the like is made of a material having unevenness, such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and it is troublesome to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button main body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 and the like is made of a punching metal having unevenness, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as it is easy to clean.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact detection bodies 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection bodies 395 and the like, the contact detection bodies 395 and the like are made of a metal vapor deposition film or the like. When a material such as foil stamping that enhances the design is used, it is possible to prevent early wear due to touch by the player, and to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection body 395 and the like. Since it is possible to use an object that does not feel good to the touch or an object that gives discomfort to the player as the sensing element 395 or the like, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the material used for the contact sensing element 395 or the like, and to meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed from suitable materials.

In addition, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like to change the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the player brings his/her finger or the like closer to or touches the button body 351. can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the actions of fingers and the like.

In addition, an effect is presented to the player through the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. , the button main body 351, the contact detection body 395, and the like are executed, the effect presented to the player is executed. can be provided, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like, and touches the contact detection body 352. When the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area is detected by (contact detection sensor main body 358), a plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and a plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 emit light to play through the button main body 351. A light emission effect in which light is emitted to the player, a effect in which the player's finger or the like that is in contact with the button body 351 is vibrated by the vibration motor 356, and a projection upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. , the button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can enjoy the game. can let Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the player can be surprised and amused by the effects. It is possible to increase the willingness to operate the button body 351 . Then, when the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and moves the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation portion 303, so that the contact detection body The player can be entertained with a variety of performance operations by the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, and the player is less likely to get bored and is interesting. can be suppressed.

Also, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body 351. The approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a can be detected, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look better.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, and the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 are provided. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. can be easily imparted, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, pays out the game ball B to the player side, and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 opens and closes so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570, based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the horizontal direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left, right, and rearward directions.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the front-rear right side of the portion 501e in the front view, and a substrate unit in which the board unit is penetrated in the front-rear lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620, and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

Further, the body frame base 501 has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch is depressurized and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . Further, the body frame base 501 has a body frame open switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch is attached. there is When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 .

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably attached about an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which connects the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame secondary board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this manner, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a back perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 195 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. A ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of is provided (see FIG. 91).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 89).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of Game Ball B in Payout Unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full by voice (for example, ``Please remove the ball! stop temporarily until

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 92(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 96) and The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The rear cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The rear cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 97(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like as viewed from above, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) viewed from below. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the horizontal direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. and a discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is overflowed. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In the tank rail 553, the part where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front view left part of the rear wall 552c. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the side of the detour passage 552g presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned to Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 occurs. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment such as a tank rail]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a tank rail or the like, which is viewed from behind and shows an enlarged portion of the tank rail. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 106 together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 107 as seen from the front, and (c). 2 is a rear perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a). FIG. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the front, and Fig. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carka line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 553A and the like of an embodiment different from the above include a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A. It is different from the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560 . The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 553A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided to the left of the first rail cover 554A in front view, and a A ball straightening member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stop member 557 capable of blocking the circulation of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. The circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream (on the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A; and an opening 555c penetrating through the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at the portion where the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. Straightening pieces 556a of a ball straightening member 556A, which will be described later, are inserted through the openings 555c from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A extends back and forth at its upstream end side and is attached rotatably around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. It has flat plate-like rectifying pieces 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking down the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row. The game ball B is restrained from moving rapidly to the downstream side, thereby preventing the occurrence of ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is positioned below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached is It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the wire causes the game ball B to contact the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. may not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exhibited. In contrast, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to prevent ball biting and ball bite in the tank rail 553A. The occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves first to the downstream side, ball jamming is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, thereby preventing the upper game ball B from moving downstream first. can be suppressed, and the occurrence of ball jamming can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wire from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Arranging the terminal board (for example, the external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire is connected and the control board near, or arranging the terminal board and the control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (the ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 116 and the like. FIG. 111(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is the board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. 112(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 112(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from the rear. FIG. 115(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the squeak line in FIG. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ku-k line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line (a). ) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. FIG. 116 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 111(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from that of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The substrate unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661 attached to the rear side. A rear base 662, and an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 flow, and a game through which the out ball passage 663 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects balls B one by one, a ball extraction guide part 627 that receives and guides the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the right in front view, The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 is circulated, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665 are closed. and a passageway wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 as shown.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open forward and elongated in the left and right direction. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction. A ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are made of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized well from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, making it easy to check ball clogging or the like. there is

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of a flat plate-like partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open to the front. The front end is closed by front base 661 .

The out-ball passage 663 is open upward at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and has a ball discharge receiving portion 663a extending left and right, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. Out-ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while making it meander in the left-right direction, a downward guiding portion 663c that guides downward the game balls B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the lower end of the downward guiding portion 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d which is open downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. - 特許庁An out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball rectifying portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a so that the left end side becomes lower. In addition, the out-ball straightening portion 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (leftward), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It has depth. In addition, the portion of the out ball rectifying portion 663b that is left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball straightening section 663b.

The downward guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out ball straightening portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall and the rear wall (partition wall portion) are on the same plane in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backward in a small crank shape so that it becomes like this. Thereby, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663 d ) of the downward guiding portion 663 c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662 a of the rear base 662 . An out-sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guiding portion 663c. Since the downward guide portion 663c is bent in a crank shape and is formed in a curved shape so as not to have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, it passes through the out sensor 664 and bends in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it does not jump upward to the out sensor 664 side, and the out sensor 664 can prevent one game ball B from being detected twice.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life because the game ball B frequently passes through it.

The ball discharge guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663 . The ball removal guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream side that bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 115(a), etc.).

The ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. As shown in FIG. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being open rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666 . The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. In other words, between the ball discharge path 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap of one game ball B or more is formed.

The ball discharge passage 665 is connected at its upstream end (left end) to the downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627, has the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is inclined more than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) has a ball discharge port 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 116).

In addition, the ball removal passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately protrude inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. In the ball discharge passage 665, a game ball B flowing through a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward contacts with a plurality of projections 665d alternately, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag manner. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B ejected downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

This ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guiding portion 665a and the vertical guiding portion 665b. , a large number of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that has been struck into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 is detected and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball discharge lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to move the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b side to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guidance part 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 which are separated and independent. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. can be counted. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, the number of game balls B can be accurately counted. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B counted by the out sensor 664 (the number of out balls) is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening. The number of game balls B received by winning openings such as the opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of the game balls B that are not received in any winning opening after being hit into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B accepted by the out port 1008 and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). be.

In addition, since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the gaming state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is defined as "payout within a predetermined period number/number of out-balls in a predetermined period=payout rate in a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B ejected from the game board 5 flow. The game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, so the "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out-ball detection unit, the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, between the rear end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided. , the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are kept away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are used by many game balls B The pachinko machine 1 can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to the static electricity, the induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of the game balls B, and the malfunction caused by the circulation of the game balls B is reduced. can be

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663, Since the impact applied to the out-sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out-sensor 664 is quickly worn out and damaged.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, if a fraudulent act such as paying out a large number of game balls B is performed, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual. The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against the fraudulent act can be made to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent act. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position that is invisible to the player, the staff at the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is possible to change the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the problem early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows is provided with the out sensor 664, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of a game board 5 without providing an out-ball detection unit, and to secure a space in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the discharged game balls B.例文帳に追加By installing the performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, since the ball discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude alternately, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, the out-ball passage 663 is provided with a meandering out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of projections 665d protrude. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B that circulates in the out ball passage 663 and the ball extraction discharge passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, the game ball B is less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to avoid damage to the machine, walls, etc. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side Collection of discharged game balls B can be facilitated.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be Only by ejecting the game ball B struck into the area 5a downward, it can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660, so the configuration for ejecting the game ball B on the game board 5 , the configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged and to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is hard to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the part ( An out receiving part, a bucket, etc.) need not be advanced to a position superimposed on the outer frame 2, and labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 and the like. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 118(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, a guiding piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward is provided at the out-ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. FIG. More specifically, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663, there is a confluence portion 663e that merges with the ball removal discharge passage 665. As shown in FIG. The confluence portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes slightly rearward from the front wall of the out-ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward. . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) side, and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island facility side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, by moving the out-ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., a large number of game balls B circulate through the out-ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be provided.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, an out-ball sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at a portion of an out-ball discharge port 663d in the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opens downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of 664 .

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. As shown in FIG. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660 .

The sensor cover 668 has a body portion 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 at the base end side, and detects the out sensor 664 that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the base end side of the main body portion 668a. have.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. An engaging claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with an engaging portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball straightening portion 663b side.

The sensor cover 668 accommodates the out-sensor 664 in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out-sensor 664 coincides with the out-ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c moves upward. By rotating the locking claw portion 668c to lock and close the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a contacts the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out-sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out-ball passage 663 is detected by the out-sensor 664, the through-hole 668b is detected. discharged downwards. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as an out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG.

When replacing (removing) the out-sensor 664, by operating the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668, the locking claw portion 668c is elastically deformed to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated about the base end side of the body portion 668a to open so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward. , and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118(b)).

As shown in FIG. 118(b), in this embodiment, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact-hazardous object indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2) are placed in a state where the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened. , the upper end surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the contact-threatening object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B circulate. However, as described above, the out-sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the outer frame 2 or other objects that may come into contact. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out-sensor 664 from below. There is a possibility that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover 668 may open. When the sensor cover 668 opens and the out-sensor 664 drops downward during the game, the out-sensor 664 detects the game ball B even though the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 or the like notifies the occurrence of the abnormality. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 so that the staff of the game hall can confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the contact risky substance, the body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risky substance, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 118, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outside portion opposite to the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor attachment recess 663f. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be well viewed from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664 . Therefore, when the game balls B are jammed in the out-ball passage 663, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game balls B are jammed can be specified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned over to stand upright in an upside-down state, and the out-sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out-ball passage 663 can be accessed from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform the confirmation work of the inside and the inside of the ball removal discharge passage 665, and the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out-sensor 664 is damaged, the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. Thus, it is possible to alleviate the player's frustration due to the interruption of the game, suppress the decline in interest, suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out-sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 will not be removed from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, loss of the sensor cover 668 can be avoided.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, at the outer portion near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B in the base unit 660 circulate, around the axis in the front-back direction (horizontal direction) Since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). ), and relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 by many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, it is Since the sensor cover 668 is opened and the sensor cover 668 is opened, the out sensor 664 can be prevented from falling off. .

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Next, a substrate unit 700 of a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) 1 is a perspective view seen from . 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. 121(a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the Sacer line in (a). FIG. 122 is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 121(a).

123 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 and viewed from the rear. 125(a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119, and FIG. 125(b) is a back perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 126 is an explanatory view showing elimination of clogged balls in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. FIG. FIG. 127 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. FIG.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. 119 to 128, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The substrate unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

This board unit 700 includes a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and a first ball path 701 provided behind the first ball path 701 and released downward from the game board 5. A second ball path 702 through which a game ball b can circulate, a first ball sensor 703 for detecting a game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701, and a game ball circulating in the second ball path 702. a second ball sensor 704 for detecting b, and a ball extraction passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 circulates. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are open upward, respectively. Eject downwards.

In this embodiment, on the game board 5, the game ball B received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 circulates through the first ball path 701, and on the game board 5, the general winning A game ball b received in the opening 2001 , the first starting opening 2002 , the second starting opening 2004 , the big winning opening 2005 and the prize winning opening 2006 is configured to flow through the second ball path 702 . In other words, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704 . As a result, there is no fraud with respect to the winning openings (winning opening sensors) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the prize winning opening 2006 of the game board 5. If it is done, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will be different, and fraudulent actions with respect to the winning opening can be detected.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and having a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. and a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent unauthorized tools from entering. a crime prevention cover 714 provided openable and closable on the rear base 712; and a frame relay board 716 . In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is elongated in the left and right direction and is open rearwardly and upwardly. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from behind. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that is long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that is open in the lower peripheral wall at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the crime prevention cover 714 rotatably around an axis extending in the left-right direction at the front end side of the elimination opening 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and guides it downward to discharge the ball extraction passage 705. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open rearward. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715 . A portion of the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side of which is closed by a passage wall member 715 .

In addition, the rear base 712 includes a first ejection guide portion 712a that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then ejects it downward, and a second ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding part 712b that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The entrance sides of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the entrance of the first ejection guide portion 712a opens forward. , the inlet of the second discharge guide portion 712b is open upward. The outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first ejection guide portion 712 a and the second ejection guide portion 712 b are open rearward from the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715 .

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball extraction passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located to the left of the dissolution opening 711b of the front base 711 in front view. are arranged in order from the right to the left. The exit of the ball removal passage 705 widens greatly forward at the front end and slightly widens rearward at the rear end with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (Fig. 120(b) )). That is, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is formed larger (broader) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from behind and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 . The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d inclined downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, The straightening wall portion 713e extends obliquely downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the upper right shelf portion rises rightward from a position separated rightward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. A lower shelf portion 713f that extends to the right from the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and a right wall portion 713g. An upper wall portion 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped opening that is connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opens upward. and a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is positioned on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 includes a lower wall portion upper portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e, and extending vertically upward from the left end of the lower wall portion upper portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The protruding middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k so as to become lower toward the left, and the lower shelf portion 713f near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f extend vertically and vertically. It has an extending hanging wall portion 713m and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the lower wall portion upper portion 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion lower 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is notched vertically to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, and has a plurality of obstacles spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n into front and rear.

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of cutouts that are recessed from the front and rear ends of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f toward the partition wall portion 713p. has a notch 713q. Each of the cutouts 713q is provided so that a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled on the board unit 700. Dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of laterally extending guide ribs 713r. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by a lower wall upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p. It is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the rear side of the front portion 713s and the partition wall portion 713p. 713t and.

In the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are positioned below the part between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. In other words, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are accommodated with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend leftward from the inner wall portion 713k from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. .

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion forward of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n. have. When the first ball guiding portion 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is the entrance side of the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. In front of the partition wall portion 713p, the first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to the right and then to the rear, It can be delivered to the first ejection guiding portion 712 a of the rear base 712 .

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, a portion that is open downward from the bottom wall portion 713n (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 that is housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t) ) is located below the second discharge guide portion 712 b of the rear base 712 . As a result, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be transferred to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713 d is positioned to the right of the right end of the dissolution opening 711 b of the front base 711 . The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is positioned to the left of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the portion of the front base 711 immediately above the clearance opening 711b is covered with the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the straightening wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and the left end side is curved downward vertically. The distance (height) between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is slanted so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height through which one game ball B can pass. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f rectify a plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

Between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, as described above, the vertical dimension is formed so as to narrow toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B circulates). Depending on the amount of balls B distributed, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 126). Since the regulating wall portion 713e is positioned above the clearing port 711b, when ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to clear the clearing port 711b. In the open state, a bar-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the dissolution port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the game ball B is bitten by the tool. You can clear the clogged ball by poke the .

By the way, since the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for eliminating clogged balls and dropping dirt and dust downward, a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a catheter may be used. from below through the notch 713q and enter above the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk of cheating on the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). Insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, and there is a similar concern in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d in which the notch portion 713q is provided.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of plate-like obstruction ribs 713o extending downward and spaced apart in the left-right direction are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h. is provided, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the hindrance rib 713o and the tip ends. Movement can be blocked and further unauthorized tool insertion can be blocked (see FIG. 127). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

In addition, in the portion of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the inner wall portion 713k, the lower part and the left and right sides thereof are the rectifying wall portion 713e in which the notch portion 713q is not provided, and the lower wall. Since it is closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the corresponding cutout part 713q of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b. No fraudulent act is performed through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f. (see Figure 128). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is discharged through the rectifying wall 713e, the lower wall upper 713j, and the middle wall 713j. It is housed in the space surrounded by the wall portion 713k. As a result, dust or the like does not adhere to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

In addition, wiring cables are connected by connectors to the left end sides of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t. It protrudes leftward from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from the left side above the sensor housing portion front 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t, it is formed on the upper left shelf portion 713b. Dirt and dust that have fallen downward through the cutout portion 713q are guided leftward by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l. It is possible to prevent the product from falling on the wiring cable and the connector, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dust or the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a straightening wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 rear left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The crime prevention cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction. Moreover, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 122, when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and placed horizontally, the security cover 714 closes the release opening 711b. is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward to be vertical, the disengagement port 711b is open. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the dissolution opening 711b.

By closing the crime prevention cover 714, the removal opening 711b of the front base 711 can be closed. It can be prevented from being inserted into the two ball path 702). In addition, the security cover 714 opens the clearing port 711b of the front base 711 by opening the clogged ball between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713. Therefore, a bar-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to clear the clogging of the game balls B. can be done. This ball clogging elimination work is carried out with the body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 .

The security cover 714 has a lower end (an end on the side of the elastic locking portion 714a) in a state in which the release port 711b is opened (in a vertical state). It is located below the height of the connection tube portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 122). Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 open. is to be closed against the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the contact-threatening object (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and to securely close the security cover 714 so that the security cover 714 exhibits its crime prevention function.

Further, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , the open crime prevention cover 714 comes into contact with the object that may come into contact with from the front. Since the crime prevention cover 714 rotates in the direction to close when it contacts, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 being caught by the contact-threatening object, and damage to the crime-prevention cover 714 and the contact-threatening object can be avoided. .

It should be noted that the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely causes clogging of the game balls B between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically kept closed. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705 that is open rearward. In addition, the passage wall member 715 closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and closes the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game ball B that has flowed through the secondary ejection guide portion 712b can be ejected downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716 .

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715 . The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192 of the door frame 3, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 and the main control board 1310. .

As shown in FIG. 121(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has an upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of an upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 extending from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5.例文帳に追加The game ball b dropped to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls leftward on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are piled up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are collapsed by the upper rectifying wall 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B rolling to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is stored in the sensor housing portion front 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guiding portion 713u, the ball passes through the first discharging guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, in the case behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t, the ball is discharged downward through the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first spherical path 701 is located on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and a second spherical path 702 is located on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B dropped forward from the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 moves the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to extract the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like into the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712. can be discharged downward through the The game ball B ejected downward from the first ejection guide portion 712a (first ball path 701), the second ejection guide portion 712b (second ball path 702), and the ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 is It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B on the side.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q, dust can be collected through the cutouts 713q. Since dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid obstruction of the circulation of the game balls B by dust etc., and suppress the occurrence of clogging etc. can be made

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700), presence or absence of clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily verified. In addition, since the notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and the crime prevention cover 714 is opened to remove a rod-shaped tool from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and ball clogging can be eliminated by the tool.

Furthermore, a dissolution opening 711b that opens downward is provided in a portion below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 that closes the dissolution opening 711b is provided. In addition to being able to eliminate ball clogging as described above, in a normal state, by closing the elimination opening 711b with the security cover 714, a linear illegal tool can be passed from the elimination opening 711b to the first ball path 701 or the like. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being inserted into the second ball path 702 and has a high deterrent effect against fraud.

In addition, since the security cover 714 for opening and closing the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating it about the axis in the left-right direction at the front end side, the body frame 4 can be opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the potentially dangerous object (connection tube 43a of the rear panel member 43) and the body frame 4 will not be able to be closed. The security cover 714 can be made to notice that it has been forgotten to be closed, and the security cover 714 can be reliably closed to exhibit the security function of the security cover 714.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since a plurality of flat plate-like hindrance ribs 713o are provided on the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward, linear Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, the tip can be prevented from moving by coming into contact with the inhibition rib 713o. Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

Further, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713 as described above. Therefore, even if an illegal linear tool is inserted from the exit side of the first ejection guide part 712a or the second ejection guide part 712b, the entry can be prevented by the complicated path. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 .

Further, since all the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game ball B, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced. A space corresponding to the structure can be secured, and by installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, respectively. By comparing with the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not cheating is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against cheating.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, if a fraudulent act such as paying out a large number of game balls B is performed, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual. The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against the fraudulent act can be made to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent act. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position that is invisible to the player, the staff at the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is possible to change the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the problem early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball extraction path 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without the ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 .

In the above embodiment, the first ball path 701 is the out ball, and the second ball path 702 is the safe ball. Alternatively, the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 may pass through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 regardless of the safe ball or the out ball. Any one of the sphere paths 702 may be flowed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the dissolution opening 711b. However, the security cover 714 is not limited to this. It is good as a thing.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall portion 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 is separated into two paths before and after the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Although it is shown that the ball is discharged through one of the three ball paths, it is not limited to this, and the ball path is divided into three or more in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any ball path is provided. The game ball B released from the game board 5 passing through may be ejected downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 137. FIG. FIG. 129 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the central accessories and the like are made opaque. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 as seen from the front right, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. . FIG. 133 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate 2003 that give a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B to be paid out) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. , a second starting port 2004, a big prize winning port 2005, and a prize winning port 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. It is for performing a game that allows the user to enjoy the hitting operation of the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. It has a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 137, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A game is performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. and are further provided.

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A panel relay board 1710 is attached behind the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000 . The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a gate sensor 2801, a large winning opening sensor 2402, a prize winning opening sensor 2601, V It is for relaying connection with the winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the prize winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate 2003 that is always open to accept the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, A second start port 2004 that enables the reception of the game ball B according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B in the gate 2003, and the game to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A large prize winning opening 2005 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the ball B, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 An accessory prize winning port 2006 capable of accepting the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B, and the game ball accepted in the accessory prize winning port 2006. It has a V winning opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 that give an opportunity of acceptance to B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning holes 2001, and a side upper left unit that is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in front view, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a big winning prize outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2021. A first attacker unit 2400 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. .

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center role item 2500 and having a role item winning opening 2006, and the second attacker unit 2600. A side right center unit 2700 provided above and having one general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022, and a gate provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate 2003. a member 2800;

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004 and a big winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the big winning opening 2005. and have. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a prize winning hole sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006 . The gate member 2800 is provided with a gate sensor 2801 for detecting passage of the game ball B through the gate 2003 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall and having a box shape with an open front. A lock mechanism (not shown) for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided. In addition, the back unit 3000 detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening 2002 which detect the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000. a first starting opening sensor 3002, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 after being accepted in the role winning opening 2006, and It has a loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 (see FIG. 169, etc.).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a V winning opening door 3006 that can move back and forth for opening and closing the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball received in the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth. A V distribution solenoid 3007 for distributing B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back front effect unit 3100 provided near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back rear upper effect provided on the upper part inside the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back front effect unit 3100. It is provided with a unit 3200 and a rear-back lower effect unit 3300 provided in the lower part in the back box 3010 below the rear-back upper effect unit.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. FIG. 138(a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel. Figure 139 (a) is a front view showing an enlarged upper right corner of the front structural member and the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Suse line in (a), and (c) is ( It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled a) for every main member, and was seen from the front.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the space between the outer rail 1001 and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1010 is aligned with the notch portion 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 are penetrated and the lower full ball path unit 610 is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139, the front structural member 1000 is recessed from the front to the rear in a predetermined range along the right rail 1005 from the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right corner in front view, and the specs of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. A spec seal sticking portion 1021 to which the spec seal 1020 is stuck, an insertion pin 1022 projecting cylindrically from the rear of the spec seal sticking portion 1021 for positioning the blocking portion 1006, and the center of the insertion pin 1022. and a separation hole 1023 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The spec seal sticking portion 1021 is formed in a size one size larger than the outer shape of the spec seal 1020, and is recessed backward (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the spec seal 1020 (Fig. 139). (b)). In this spec sticker sticking portion 1021, the part extending horizontally at the lower end and the linear part of the part extending vertically upward from the right end of the part are used as contact surfaces for attaching the spec sticker 1020. is set.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec sticker pasted portion 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000 . The blocking portion 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022 .

The separation hole 1023 penetrates from the front side to the rear side of the front component member 1000 . The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends back and forth with a constant inner diameter. The separation hole 1023 is closed on the front side by the spec seal 1020 attached to the spec seal attaching portion 1021 in the state assembled to the game board 5, and is closed on the rear side by the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The inside of the separation hole 1023 is a closed space (closed space). This separation hole 1023 is provided at a position near the edge of the spec seal sticking portion 1021 (spec seal 1020), as shown in the figure.

The separation hole 1023 of this embodiment has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 will be reduced, which will make it easier to bend and may not be able to press the speck seal 1020 sufficiently. If the separation hole 1023 is larger than this, the speck seal 1020 may be bent at the separation hole 1023 and the appearance of the speck seal 1020 may deteriorate.

According to the front structural member 1000 of the present embodiment, when the spec seal 1020 cannot be properly pasted onto the spec seal sticking portion 1021 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the front structural member 1000 is separated from the rear. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1023 and pressing the speck seal 1020 forward from the rear with the tip of the bar, the vicinity of the end edge of the speck seal 1020 can be rolled up forward and removed, and the rolled up portion can be removed by the operator. By pulling the spec seal 1020, the spec seal 1020 can be easily removed from the spec seal attaching portion 1021, and the spec seal 1020 can be reattached.

In addition, in a state in which the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the front component 1000, and the tip thereof presses the spec seal 1020 from behind. can be easily removed from the spec seal affixed portion 1021, the replacement work of the spec seal 1020 accompanying model change can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated, the spec seal 1020 can be easily removed from the spec seal sticking portion 1021 using the separation hole 1023. The component parts can be easily sorted by material, and the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front by sticking the spec seal 1020 to the spec seal sticking portion 1021, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1023 and prevent the player from seeing the separation hole. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1023, and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1023.

Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 assembled on the rear side of the front component 1000 to which the spec sticker 1020 is stuck. To prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into a game board 5 through a hole which is not passed through to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine. and prevent fraudulent activities from occurring.

In addition, since the separation hole 1023 is closed from behind by the game panel 1100, even if an unauthorized tool is passed through the spec seal 1020 from the front and inserted into the separation hole 1023, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) will not be able to do so. Since the above insertion (intrusion) to the rear can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, thereby preventing fraudulent activities. To provide a pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against fraudulent actions, capable of preventing fraudulent actions and making the execution of fraudulent actions hesitant because a trace is left on the spec seals 1020 when an unauthorized tool penetrates the spec seals 1020. - 特許庁be able to.

In the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the spec seal sticking portion 1021, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may set it.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 138 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 137, etc.).

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the left-right direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

As shown in FIG. 138, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of left and lower sides from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion and penetrates the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 1008 at its upper portion.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the boundary of the game area 5a from being clearly visible. It is possible to give a sense of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed in the lower portion to the discharged ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 115). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664 .

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169) for controlling game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 133) for setting game performance, A main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 , the peripheral control board 1510 and the setting change board 1311 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, a prize winning opening sensor 2601, It is connected to the V winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the start opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch and confirm setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switching button 1311b that can select and switch setting values, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted is provided. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected by a harness). ). This connector connection (connection between boards) electrically connects the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b to the main control board 1310. FIG. The right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have substantially the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. match.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is located on the center line. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center position of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311, and a pressing operation part is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A switching button 1311b is arranged, and a setting change permission lamp that can emit a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and above the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is arranged. A base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center toward the right side is arranged below the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a depressing operation part is arranged in the .

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction). , the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion opening and can be pulled out from the insertion opening. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion port, other players arranged in a line opposite the island facilities of the game hall can be used. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and turned on for the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON for the decision key. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In addition, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (ie, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the original position. (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn off the setting key switch 1311a. can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In this embodiment, two completely different functions, that is, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. An operation for turning on the setting key and an operation for turning on the determination key can be collectively performed only by the single setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, respectively. However, the "gap" formed between the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering and altering the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for these openings. . The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover and the base and cannot be touched at all. , the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting key switch The wiring pattern to which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are routed so that they do not come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (apart from each other). At the same time, connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. is transmitted (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a. ) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns to which the signals from are transmitted are also formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the settings of the set values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current set values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The "predetermined setting value change permitting condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on must be established. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. After the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the key switch 1311a. As the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it is also possible to set a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. That is, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is activated. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a on. The setting value may be changed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After performing the opening operation, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a shown in FIG. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). (set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to Every time a person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum set value of 6, it returns to the initial set value of 1, increases again by 1, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When the setting value is to be determined, the person who changes the setting value rotates the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, turns the setting key switch 1311a ON. The cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turned off. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the setting key cylinder rotation position to the original position, that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key When the switch 1311a is returned to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to turn it off, a decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is determined simply by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. and workability is improved.

A person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the decision key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting values to not displaying them, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting value pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. to complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the setting values that are currently set must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power failure). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to open the first key. is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), and then confirm that the power is restored. Then, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). of which, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1311c is extinguished is maintained. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the currently set value must turn the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position to the original position (that is, to the original position). The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the set value currently set pulls out the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and displays the current setting. Complete the task of confirming the setting value displayed.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the power supply when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). When power is restored during recovery, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key must be turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. , the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key ON. The setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or a small hit or not, in addition to the probability It is possible to change the probability of lottery determination when transitioning to time, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table that defines the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big win has been won, A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of transition determination from probability variation to normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with set values Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h collects game balls B shot into the game area 5a through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B that have been played is displayed. Out of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 169, etc.), and this detection signal is transmitted through the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a is set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be rotatable only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose key is turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' is turned counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) which is the original position. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it off, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on for the decision key. (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "determination key modification (1)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. A wire penetration prevention part is attached to the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It becomes a structure to be molded. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, there are stickers printed with the names of each button at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b so as not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b. is affixed (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the setting switching button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation part) The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may be changed. A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Further, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b should not be brought close to each other ( spaced apart from each other). Further, when the setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. (The form of the Enter key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification (2) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and a detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and/or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Good.) may be described as “determination key modification (3)”).

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A firing reference pulse is branched in the payout control board 633 from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these firing reference pulses, the determination key is selected. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. The launch reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, and determines that the decision key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The form of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player sitting opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. When a distance measuring sensor that can be used is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor It may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. The light emitted by the light emitting part of the distance measuring sensor passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light-receiving section, thereby detecting the action of the player. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor through the relay board, and determines whether or not there is an action based on this detection signal. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no movement, it is possible to determine that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measurement sensor may be described as "determination key modification (5)"). .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is transmitted to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, the enter key ON, and the It is possible to determine which of OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "determination key modification (6)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to have a pulse width of 1 ms in the case of information indicating that the setting key is ON, and set to a pulse width of 3 ms in the case of information indicating that the enter key is ON. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the set key, the decision key, and OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "determination key modification (7)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The voltage level of the signal is changed between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V in the range of 0V to 5V), By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. ON/OFF may be determined. As a result, it is possible to improve security with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using an intermediate electric potential may be described as "determination key modification (8)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the payout control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

It should be noted that the position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation section which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons are attached to positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so as not to confuse the enter key button and the error release switch. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover). In order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for depressing the depressing operation part) ) may be adopted, the color of the pressing operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error canceling switch, or the shape of the pressing operation part A different type of switch may be employed, or another type of switch that does not have a depressing operation section may be employed as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error cancellation switch, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the error cancellation switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. In the control board 633, they are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance, Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error canceling switch should not come close to each other (separately from each other). ) is formed. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. (The form of the enter key button (which may include the form of the set key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variation (9) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part A signal from the error release switch is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON. good too. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error canceling switch is operated based on the signal from the error canceling switch, while the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON based on the signal from the error canceling switch. Therefore, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON when the depression operation portion of the error canceling switch is not operated. As a result, the security can be improved regardless of whether or not the enter key is ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "determination key modification (10)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error cancellation switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and creates a command, and the payout control unit power-on processing described later. A command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch, and notifies that effect. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives the command to notify that effect. When the button is pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. This makes it possible to improve the security regardless of whether the enter key is ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "the enter key modification (11)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch). 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off 1311a to turn it off, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 to pay out. Input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633, and determination may be made based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as to whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the determination key ON On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON.

The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be pressed. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed in the portion and the corresponding opening to modify the payout control board 633, the wire penetration prevention portion is provided with the cover body for the opening. It becomes a structure that is molded into

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation portion which will be described later. On the cover of the payout control board 633, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover.). Also, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancel switch, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error cancel switch (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the external shape or pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be employed, and a switch of a different type that does not have a pressing operation part may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Various switches can be mentioned. Also, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error cancellation switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the payout control board 633 (separately from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. Also, in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error cancellation switch is transmitted should not be brought close to each other (mutually spaced apart). Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only within the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch). 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off 1311a to turn it off, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring in the process, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the depressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the decision key is ON. When the payout control MPU determines that the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of , and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. As a result, it is possible to improve the security against whether or not the Enter key is ON (RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) as "Modified example (13) of the Enter key"). ”).

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 574 or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and a command is created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the payout unit). The aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON based on the detection signal of , while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. is maintained, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again by pressing the button, remove the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON based on the detection signal of , while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the body frame 4. is maintained, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (door frame opening). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. Then, it is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotating the key switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees to return it to the rotational position ) to turn it OFF, and rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning it on again (turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise). can be turned on, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "determination key modification (18)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of ) to turn it OFF, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it ON. can be set to turn ON the enter key, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the initial position and turning off the setting key switch 1311a. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (19)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. A structure in which a wire penetration prevention part is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the main control board 1310. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so as not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f. is affixed (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover must be opened when the cover is open.), the color of the press operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or the press operation A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the main control board 1310 (separated from each other). Further, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A setting key switch 1311a' can be used (the mode 2 of the Enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "Modified example (20) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input is provided. Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (RAM clear switch). mode 3 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (21)"). It should be noted that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is applied to the payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, the payout control board 633 does not need an error canceling switch when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error canceling switch, which will be described later.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Gate sensor 2801, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2401, big winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2601, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002), body frame 4 The main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the out sensor 664 are input may determine whether or not the Enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (various sensors, etc.). mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to turn on the decision key, sends the game ball B into the gate 2003, or enters various winning ports. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 or send the game ball B to the out port 1008 .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It controls the operation of the movable body (accessory) by controlling the drive of the electrical drive source such as the solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.) When determining the original position, the operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (optical function). The aspect of the object sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 so that the optical sensor detects the original position of the movable body (accessory) in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position, etc.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is inputted may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. FIG. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the magnetic sensor's The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to bring the magnet close to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to enter various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects a fraudulent act of making a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the vibration sensor may The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, radio waves are emitted to the pachinko machine 1 to play A game board 5 and a payout device 580 are provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a game ball B by causing malfunction of various sensors of various winning ports provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580.例文帳に追加In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence or absence of the enter key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (26)"). In this case, it is necessary for the person who changes the setting value to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. It may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (effect operation button The form of the unit (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320 . In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the press operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like from the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding opening. In order to prevent this, a structure is adopted in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening. It should be noted that unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the configuration of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. A setting change board cover open/close switch capable of detecting opening of the cover may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body open/close switch, the case where the cover body is released from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions (setting change board box is sometimes referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected to each other. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting an OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting switching button 1311b. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (main control The connection to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the substrate 1310 is also formed at a distance. , a wiring pattern to which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern to which a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted) and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b. was formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). 1311a through which the decision key ON signal is transmitted, one of the wiring patterns is connected via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. , connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately (connection between boards) may be connected (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. It may be electrically connected to another connector provided on the 1310 via a harness (the mode of routing of the wiring pattern may be described as "determination key modification (29)").

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the decision key is appropriately selected and combined (the selected combination mode of the modification example is referred to as "the modification example (30) of the decision key"). ”).

In addition, in the above-mentioned setting value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, for lottery determination when shifting from probability variable time to normal time , the rate of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player possible) probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has a game specification in which the probability of being advantageous to the player (the degree of advantage) exists as a plurality of set values in advance and requires setting changes, is advantageous to the player. There are game specifications in which only a single set value of the probability (advantage degree) exists in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is desired that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance for the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) that the set value is advantageous to the player Since there is no need to use it as a can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of all areas of the RAM), it is possible to set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns (after clearing the RAM It can be used as a setting value that allows variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the set value 1 is set to "all operations (movable bodies (role Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "movement of object (object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and real machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movable object (character object) operation" is assigned as setting value 2, and set Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "illumination of light emitting body" is assigned as value 3, and detailed operation of movable body (character object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of light emitters per port (lighting of light emitters by predetermined output port units (that is, each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and set value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 specifying "no operation" is assigned (the mode of change setting of actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "modification (1) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the operation of confirming the real machine after clearing the RAM and the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the movable object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 with the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to perform the operation of (accessory) and lighting of the light emitter. By changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the pattern fluctuation until the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned to specify "25 seconds" as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned to specify "30 seconds" as setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 specifying "35 seconds" is assigned as the set value 6 (the mode of changing the setting of the time from the end of the symbol variation to the player waiting state is set as "Modified example by common hardware configuration (2 )”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the player waiting state, it is possible to provide variation in the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the demonstration.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) to be performed after the completion of symbol variation. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "comical effect, action effect of movable body (character object)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 specifying "serious effect" is assigned as setting value 3, and a demonstration effect setting pattern specifying "serial effect, action effect of movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and a demonstration effect setting that specifies "historical drama effect, movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect may be described as "modification (3) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can demonstrate with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the details of the demonstration effect, variations can be given to the details of the demonstration effect performed after the pattern variation is completed.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default volumes to be adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 . By pressing the volume control button 227, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a volume setting pattern 3 that designates ", a volume setting pattern 4 that designates "volume 4" as a setting value 4 is allocated, a volume setting pattern 5 that designates "volume 5" is allocated as a setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 that designates "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting mode of the default volume may be described as "modification (4) based on common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default sound volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the volume control button 227 in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and moved to the end of the volume minimum side. When the adjustment is completed and the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when standing still in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to set value 6 is moved to the end of the maximum volume side by moving the volume control button 227 in the direction of increasing the volume (moving in the direction opposite to decreasing the volume). When the adjustment is completed and adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This mode of change setting of the default sound volume allows variation in the default sound volume adjusted by the sound volume control button 227 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sounds for error notification such as various problems, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by maximizing the volume is played. Although it is easy for hall clerks and other attendants to notice, it may be offensive to players who are playing games on other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and setting value 5 is assigned as " An error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (error notification sound volume is sometimes referred to as "modified example (5) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, and the volume that allows you to recognize the error notification sound when you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitters to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is " A default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of default brightness is sometimes described as "modification (6) by common hardware configuration"). be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light emitters by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default luminance, and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is subject to control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. Variations can be given to the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs by changing and setting the content of the default brightness.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for reporting errors such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates "error notification luminance 1" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned to be specified, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, and an error notification specifying "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4. A luminance setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and an error notification specifying "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as the setting value 6. A luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, so that an error notification can be recognized when stopping in front of the pachinko machine even though it does not turn off), the lamp brightness is increased from setting value 6 (maximum brightness). Brightness is set to high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the brightness of the light emitters in the error notification, and adjust the lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, the light emitters can be turned on, blinked, gradation points, and the like. By changing and setting the brightness of the light emitters in this error notification, it is possible to provide variations in the brightness of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

Further, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration are determined when the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established in the setting value confirmation display processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. However, it may be displayed on the setting display 1310g all the time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (set value display (8) may be referred to as "modification (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area out of all the areas of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. is cleared except for , and then the game proceeds by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. Further, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing to be described later, and stores the main control built-in RAM. The game proceeds by clearing the entire area except for the specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is restored, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission etc. It will happen. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (this may be described as "a modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition"). be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in the setting value confirmation display processing which is performed as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later. displayed on vessel 1310g. Moreover, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the period of pressing is limited. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (in the case described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). there is). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display processing as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing described later when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is satisfied, and In the processing at the time of entry, the game proceeds by performing the initial setting and start-up setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, so the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. A detection signal from the body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by rotating clockwise 60 degrees from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and performing the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a controls the main body frame opening for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the modification of the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs) When the power is restored after the momentary power failure that occurs), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Assuming that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs interrupt permission setting etc. While the game is progressing, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs set value confirmation display processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then, The game progresses by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the set value confirmation display process once the progress of the game is started. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the set current setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a recovers by the out-ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main-control-side power-on processing to be described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 is counted on the base monitor 1310h. to display. Therefore, the current set values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above (sometimes referred to as a "modification of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set values that have been set during the period from when the power is restored until when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 (the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which contributes to cost reduction.

Any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor may be selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in the modified example (30) of the enter key described above.

Any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor may be selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 129 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two indicators for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game ball B is received into the gate 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display made up of LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the reception of game balls B to the gate 2003. - 特許庁

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is "win". It has a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc. can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 136 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 169) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decoration boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 169).

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-like center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes one left fixing piece 1601 protruding leftward from the left side surface and two right fixing pieces 1602 protruding rightward from the right side surface. This performance display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the right inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two right fixing pieces 1602 obliquely behind the 3010, the left fixing piece 1601 side is moved forward to insert the left fixing piece 1601 into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is moved upward in rear view. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144 and the like. FIG. 140(a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and FIG. 140(b) is a back perspective view of the front unit on the game board. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing enlarged parts of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in FIG. 144. FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. there is

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, a gate 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second start port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, and a game to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The big prize winning opening 2005 which enables the reception of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the ball B or the result of the second special lottery and the big winning opening 2005 are provided at different positions. Accessory prize winning opening 2006 that enables acceptance of game ball B according to first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn by acceptance of game ball B to first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 , and a V prize winning port 2007 in which the game ball B received in the accessory prize winning port 2006 is given an opportunity to receive.

A plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 . The accessory winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The V winning opening 2007 is located behind the game panel 1100 at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the second starting opening 2004 .

The first sub-out port 2021 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2022 is arranged on the right side of the right general prize winning port 2001. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002. On the other hand, a side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , is provided on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in front view, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a. It has an attacker unit 2400 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center role item 2500 and having a role item winning opening 2006, and the second attacker unit 2600. A side right center unit 2700 provided above and having one general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022, and a gate provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate 2003. a member 2800;

[5-8a. starting unit]
Next, starting unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 can move in the horizontal direction. Located just below the center.

The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state attached to the game panel 1100, and the back front and bottom of the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the production unit 3160 .

[5-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general prize winning opening 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general prize winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. can be delivered to

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, side upper left unit 2300 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. First Attacker Unit]
Next, the first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. . This first attacker unit 2400 has a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 144, etc.).

In the front view of the first attacker unit 2400, the second start opening 2004 is provided on the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction, and the big winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second start opening 2004. A first sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the big prize winning port 2005 .

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a big winning opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005. 2402 and a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting illegal magnetism (see FIG. 169, etc.). Two prize winning opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starter door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second starter door 2004, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003 through the second starter door 2411. A starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to, a large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 Accept the game ball B and an attacker solenoid 2414 which is opened and closed according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the lottery.

As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a first shelf portion 2421 extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left in a front view, and a left end of the first shelf portion 2421 extending to the left. It extends shorter than the first shelf part 2421 so as to be lower leftward from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf part 2421 while leaving an interval slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the first shelf part 2421 and The second shelf 2422 forming the second starting port 2004 between the second shelf 2422 and the left end of the second shelf 2422 from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left A third shelf portion 2423 extending shorter than the second shelf portion 2422, and a space of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B to the left from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423 and the third shelf and a fourth shelf portion 2424 extending to the left from a lower position than the portion 2423 and forming the big winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2423 .

The right end of the first shelf portion 2421 is away from the right side of the first attacker unit 2400 to the left by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2421, the second shelf portion 2422, and the third shelf portion 2423 are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portion 2421 and so on. ing.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a first vertical wall portion 2425 vertically extending downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 and a lower end of the first vertical wall portion 2425 vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2421 . a second standing wall portion 2426 extending to the same height as the second shelf portion 2422, a third standing wall portion 2427 extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, and the third shelf A fourth standing wall portion 2428 extending vertically downward from the right end of the portion 2423 to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400, a fifth standing wall portion 2429 extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423, and a fourth shelf. It has a sixth standing wall portion 2430 extending downward from the right end of the portion 2424 and a seventh standing wall portion 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 .

The fifth vertical wall portion 2429 extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423 downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower leftward. , further downward to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400 . In addition, the sixth vertical wall portion 2430 extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424 and then lower rightward. It extends upward and further downward to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400 . The horizontal interval between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first vertical wall portion 2425, the second vertical wall portion 2426, and the third vertical wall portion 2427, and the From a position lower than the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, after inclining to lower leftward with an interval that allows the game ball B to circulate between the first horizontal wall portion 2432, the fourth standing wall portion on the left and a second lateral wall portion 2433 that slopes upward toward the middle of 2428 . The second lateral wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 moves from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 toward the respective centers between the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 in the direction of approaching each other. It has a third lateral wall portion 2434 extending to the vicinity and a partition portion 2435 extending upward while connecting the respective opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2434. there is

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 extends stepwise along the upper side so as to be lower leftward, and a space is provided between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423 so that the game ball B can flow. It has a spaced upper shelf 2436 . The right end of the upper shelf 2436 is located just above the left end of the first shelf 2421 and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2424 . Also, the upper shelf 2436 is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lower rightward.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 forms a space in which the game ball B can circulate leftward between the upper shelf portion 2436 and the big winning opening 2005. A plurality of triangular contact portions in plan view protrude into the space so as to alternate in the left-right direction from the front wall and the rear wall. These a plurality of abutting portions circulate the game ball B rolling on the big winning opening door 2413 in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction when the big winning opening 2005 is in the closed state.

The second starting door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the start solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second start door 2411 moves forward due to the spring biasing force of the plunger of the start solenoid 2412, closing the second start door 2004. there is In addition, when the starting solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting door 2411 moves backward by retracting the plunger of the starting solenoid 2412 against the biasing force of the spring. The mouth 2004 is open.

The plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The big prize winning opening door 2413 is in the form of a flat plate elongated in the left and right direction, and is provided so as to move back and forth. The large winning opening door 2413 can open and close the large winning opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 back and forth. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large winning opening door 2413 is moved forward by the spring biasing force of the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 to close the large winning opening 2005 . In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves rearward by retracting the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 against the urging force of the spring, thereby opening the large winning opening 2005. doing.

The plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward by the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and retracts when energized.

In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the starting solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starter solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second starter door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second starting opening door 2411 is positioned above the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening door 2411 makes it impossible to accept the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. ing. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

Also, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the big winning opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the large winning opening door 2413 is located above the large winning opening 2005, and the receiving of the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 is disabled. In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf 2421, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf 2421, the upper surface of the second start door 2411, and the second After rolling on the second shelf portion 2422 , it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf portion 2422 . The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls on the third shelf 2423 or the big winning entrance door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls leftward due to their inclination. In addition, when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 may enter the

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 is placed in the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the big winning gate 2005. It alternately abuts against the abutting portion, and rolls leftward while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that rolls leftward on the big winning opening door 2413 rolls on the fourth shelf portion 2424, and is released to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2421, it passes through the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2425 and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, whereupon the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the part 2433 , it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2021 . Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423, it passes through between the third vertical wall portion 2427 and the fourth vertical wall portion 2428 and the second horizontal wall portion 2433. It drops near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433 , and enters the first sub-out port 2021 .

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, It is discharged from the discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the first shelf portion 2421 and the game ball B that passed through the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423 It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2021, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized (turned on) according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2003, the plunger is pushed against the biasing force of the spring. It retreats and the second starting door 2411 moves backward. Then, by moving the second starting port door 2411 backward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the receiving of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it is released rearward from the first attacker unit 2400 . The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 and discharged backward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the third discharge passage 3183 of the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. and discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger moves backward against the biasing force of the spring, and the big winning opening door 2413 moves backward. By moving the large winning opening door 2413 backward, the large winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the game ball B can be received into the large winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005, it passes through between the fifth standing wall part 2429 and the sixth standing wall part 2430, and is partitioned from the fifth standing wall part 2429. Part 2435, or between the sixth vertical wall part 2430 and the partition part 2435, and after being detected by one of the two large winning opening sensors 2402, on the third horizontal wall part 2434 It falls and is released rearward from the first attacker unit 2400 . The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 and discharged backward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. , is discharged from the fourth discharge passage 3184 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Thus, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partitioning portion 2435 and detected by different large winning opening sensors 2402 respectively. Since the game balls B are released rearward after the game balls B are released, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being stagnant between the big winning hole 2005 and the big winning hole sensor 2402, and to release a large number of the game balls B in a short time. can accept.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141 and the like. Fig. 141 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory and viewed from the front, and (b) is a separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. It is a side cross-sectional view taken from the right side by cutting left and right at the site of . The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward until the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall part 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state assembled to the game board 5 .

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502 ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501 . In addition, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), thereby exerting a reinforcing effect while allowing the player to It is made to be inconspicuous from.

The center accessory 2500 also has a transparent plate-like closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-like peripheral wall portion 2501 . The closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from entering the rear (back unit 3000) through the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2511 which is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter in a portion of the peripheral wall 2501 on the left side in front view and on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). A warp exit 2512, which is open in the frame on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be released, and the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 are moved left and right. It is provided with a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 138, etc.). The stage cover 2515 bounces back the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side, thereby preventing the game ball B from entering from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is positioned on the panel board of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that when it is attached to 1110, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the elevated portion (central release portion 2513a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starter opening 2002 of the starter unit 2100. ing. Thereby, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a guide passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). It is almost in contact with the right rail 1005 near the part 1006 , and is formed so that the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520 .

The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove that is open forward, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and a guide passage 2521 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. and a second guide passage 2522 extending along the The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. In addition, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are laterally adjacent to each other and open obliquely downward and to the right along the arc above the right rail 1005 .

The guide path group 2520 is positioned above the gate 2003 with the center accessory 2500 assembled on the game board 5 . In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have hit the impinging portion 1006 are first guided. It is configured to enter passageway 2521 .

Further, the center accessory 2500 protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and has a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening obliquely downward to the left with a width of one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in the state assembled to the game board 5 and is positioned between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600 . Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

More specifically, the center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, etc., and a lower right guide passage 2530. A transparent and flat plate-like front member 2531 attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side of the lower right guidance passage decoration attached to the front surface of the front member 2531 and having a predetermined decoration printed thereon and a seal 2532 (see FIG. 141).

The center base plate 2540 includes a guide passage flange portion 2540a forming a part of the flange portion 2502 at the lower right corner in front view and extending rightward in a flat plate shape, and a peripheral wall portion 2501 along the lower side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. A guide passage wall 2540b extending shorter than the guide passage flange portion 2540a to the right so that the right end side is lower from a portion forward of the flange portion 2502 on the outer peripheral surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, and a right end near the right end of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. A flat wall portion 2540c extending vertically along the side and extending forward to the same position as the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b; and a left guide portion 2540d that extends obliquely to the lower right and is bent. A gap through which one game ball B can pass is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c.

The center base plate 2540 guides the game ball B flowing down to the guide passage wall 2540b from above to the right by the guide passage wall 2540b, and then makes it flow downward from between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c. After that, it can be discharged obliquely to the lower left by the left guiding portion 2540d. The center base plate 2540 constitutes most of the lower right guide passage 2530 with the guide passage flange portion 2540a, the guide passage wall 2540b, the vertical wall portion 2540c, and the left guiding portion 2540d.

The front member 2531 extends in the left-right direction from the same position as the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the same position as the right end side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. , and the lower end side is located below the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 includes an attachment recess 2531a that is recessed rearward from the front surface along the outer peripheral shape, a separation hole 2531b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a portion of the attachment recess 2531a that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of mounting bosses 2531c projecting rearward in a columnar shape from the rear surface for mounting to the center base plate 2540.

The pasting recess 2531a is recessed rearward deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 (see FIG. 141(b)). In the sticking recessed portion 2531a, the left edge portion and the portion of the upper edge that is in contact with the left edge side are set as abutting surfaces for affixing the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532. As shown in FIG.

The separation hole 2531b is a round hole with a circular inner shape. When this separation hole 2531b is assembled to the center accessory 2500, the front side of the separation hole 2531b is closed by the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 attached to the attached concave portion 2531a, and the front side of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 is closed. , the rear side is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2531b becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2531b of this embodiment has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b is smaller than this, the diameter of the separating rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b will become smaller, making it easier to bend and making it impossible to sufficiently press the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532. If the separation hole 2531b is larger than this, the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532 may be bent, and the appearance of the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532 may deteriorate. It's for.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 cannot be properly pasted to the pasting recess 2531a of the front member 2531, the front member A rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of 2531, and the tip of the rod-shaped member pushes the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the rear to the front, so that the vicinity of the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be turned forward. The lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the pasting recess 2531a by pulling the rolled-up portion by the operator, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be re-applied.

In addition, in a state in which the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and the tip thereof presses the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from behind. Since the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the affixed concave portion 2531a, the replacement work of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 accompanying model change can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated from each other, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the pasting recess 2531a using the separation hole 2531b. The component parts of the machine 1 can be easily sorted by material, and the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front by sticking the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 to the sticking concave portion 2531a, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 2531b. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 2531b.

In addition, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, it is separated by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 assembled on the rear side of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is stuck. Since the hole 2531b is closed from the rear, unlike a conventional pachinko machine, a hole that passes through to the rear side is not penetrated, so that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire can pass through the game board 5. It is possible to avoid being inserted into the inside or the part where the game ball B circulates, and to prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, Further rearward insertion (intrusion) can be prevented by the guide passage wall 2540b, so that unauthorized tools cannot enter the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 2531b or the part where the game ball B circulates. can be prevented and fraudulent actions can be prevented, and the unauthorized tool penetrates the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, leaving a trace on the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, so that fraudulent behavior It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make players hesitate to execute the above and has a high deterrence against fraudulent actions.

Furthermore, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the center accessory at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. 2500, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 through the frame of the center accessory 2500, The decoration and the like of the back unit 3000 can be made more visible.

In addition, since the supporting portion 2503 projecting inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided behind the back. It is possible to reduce hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion where the flange portion 2502 projecting outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501 . As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support part 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared to the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further expanded. It can be widened, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made more visible. In other words, if the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is to be made to look larger, the support portion 2503 is provided along a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind in a front view.

In the above-described embodiment, one separation hole 2531b is provided in the front member 2531, but this is not a limitation, and the separation hole 2531b is formed at a portion coinciding with the guide passage wall 2540b when viewed from the front. You may make it provide more than one.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a portion of the center base plate 2540 inside the bent left guiding portion 2540d (a portion on the right side in front view). When the separation hole 2531b is provided in this part, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly closed by the center base plate 2540, but the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the game panel 1100 are positioned behind the separation hole 2531b. Therefore, since the hole continuous with the separation hole 2531b does not penetrate to the rear of the game board 5, the same effect as described above can be obtained. Also, in this case, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 into the separation hole 2531b, the left guide portion 2540d guides the tip of the unauthorized tool into the lower right guide passage 2530 or the like. It is possible to prevent B from intruding into the area in which it circulates. Furthermore, in this case, since the right side of the left guiding portion 2540d is open, a linear tool bent in a J-shape can be used to make the separation hole from the rear even when the front member 2531 is assembled. A tool can be inserted into 2531b and the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532 can be removed.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of panel plate 1110 in panel 1100 . The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with a prize winning opening 2006 that opens to the left so that it can be opened and closed.

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a prize winning slot sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning slot 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism acting in the vicinity of the prize winning slot 2006 (Fig. 146) and In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 includes a bonus prize winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the bonus winning opening 2006, and a bonus winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the bonus winning opening 2006 by moving the bonus winning opening door 2611. The accessory winning prize opening solenoid 2612, the transmission member (not shown) that transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger of the accessory winning prize opening solenoid 2612 to move the accessory winning prize opening door 2611, and the game received in the accessory winning prize opening 2006 and a guide passage 2613 that guides the ball B and releases it backward.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a prize winning opening 2006 that opens leftward from the center in the left-right direction toward the right, and opens the winning opening 2006 so as to close the prize winning opening 2006 from the left. 2611 are provided.

The prize winning entrance door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a lower side that bulges leftward from the upper end of the right side. and an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the . The prize winning entrance door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction around the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape, and a link pin projecting in a columnar shape rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. (illustration is omitted). The accessory winning opening door 2611 is rotatably attached to the lower rotating shaft so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the accessory prize winning solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the prize winning opening solenoid 2612 and extends in the left and right direction so that the link pin of the prize winning opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that its right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the prize winning opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 are positioned. A space in which the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of the . In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5 , the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 .

In the normal state, the second attacker unit 2600 has the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the accessory winning prize opening door 2611 is upright and the accessory winning prize opening 2006 is closed by the accessory winning prize opening door 2611 . In other words, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 .

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the role When the item winning opening solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the accessory winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member pulls up. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the accessory prize winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotating shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the accessory winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened leftward, and the right end side of the accessory winning opening door 2611 is inclined to be lowered. state. That is, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the falling game ball B abuts against the accessory winning opening door 2611 , it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received by the accessory winning opening 2006 . The game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged backward. The game ball B released rearward from the guidance passage 2613 is delivered to the distribution passage 3158 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is passed to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. After being sorted into one, it is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 .

[5-8g. Side right center unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a and attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . This side right middle unit 2700 is provided with one general prize winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022 .

The side right center unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left and right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the left and right direction is the game ball. A second sub-out port 2022 is always open upward with a width of two spheres B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 includes a first guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 and a second guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022. two guide passages 2702; The first guide path 2701 extends rearward from the general prize winning opening 2001, bends rightward, and further bends rearward to form a crank shape. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2022 more than the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

In this side right center unit 2700, when assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. there is

In addition, the side right center unit 2700, in a state assembled on the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000, and a lower end substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, Between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, a space is formed in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right center unit 2700, the general prize winning port 2001 opens upward slightly to the left of the accessory prize winning port 2006, and the second sub-out port 2022 is between the general prize winning port 2001 and the right rail 1005. is open upwards over substantially the entirety of the (see FIG. 144).

The side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, It can be delivered to the first back guidance passage 3156 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the first back guidance passage 3156 is detected by the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below through the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 . In addition, the side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and then the back unit provided behind It can be delivered to the second back guidance passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the second back guidance passage 3157 is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below through the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 .

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143 and the like. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the gate member, (b) is an exploded front perspective view of the gate member, and (c) is an exploded rear view of the gate member. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 143(a) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a sectional view cut along the saw line in (a).

The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right center unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is The gate member 2800 includes a gate 2003 for performing a lottery for the ordinary lottery result that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes through, and a gate sensor 2801 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2003. ,have. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate 2003 .

The gate member 2800 has a guiding piece 2802 projecting obliquely downward to the left from near the right end of the bottom surface. The guiding piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes through the vicinity of the left end of the general prize winning opening 2001 in the side right center unit 2700 in the state assembled to the game board 5 .

The gate member 2800 is positioned substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5, and is positioned on both left and right outer sides of the game board. A gap is formed through which the sphere B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the right above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

More specifically, the gate member 2800 consists of a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and holds the gate sensor 2801, and a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front of the gate body 2810 and has a predetermined sensor. and a gate seal 2811 on which decoration is printed. The gate body 2810 is made transparent.

The gate body 2810 includes a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2810a that is elongated in the left and right direction, an attachment recess 2810b that is recessed rearward in a horizontally long, substantially rectangular shape on the front surface of the front plate portion 2810a, and is provided at the upper left corner of the attachment recess 2810b. a separation hole 2810d passing through the front plate portion 2810a in the vicinity of the right end of the sticking recessed portion 2810b; and a pair of arms extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 2810a 2810e, and a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2810f extending outward in the left-right direction from the rear ends of the pair of arm portions 2810e and connected to each other at a portion below the front plate portion 2810a.

The surfaces of the pair of arms 2810e that face each other are separated from each other by a distance larger than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 . Also, the flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with its rear surface in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the gate body 2810 is recessed at a constant height in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and the opposed surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e. A rear extension portion 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e so as to extend the arm portion 2810e and the accommodation groove 2810g, and a rearward extension portion from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e. and a locking portion 2810i extending rearward from 2810h and having a rear end bent leftward for locking the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g.

Further, the gate body 2810 has a protrusion 2810j that protrudes into the housing groove 2810g at the intersection of the front plate portion 2810a and the left arm portion 2810e. The protrusion 2810j is formed in a shape corresponding to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. As shown in FIG. The gate body 2810 also has a guide piece 2802 extending downward from the bottom surface of the right arm portion 2810e.

The adhesive concave portion 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed backward (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see FIG. 143(b)). The erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is formed in a C-chamfered shape that is larger than the chamfering of the other corners of the sticking concave portion 2810b. In this gate member 2800, since the gate seal 2811 (adhering concave portion 2810b) has a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right direction, it is difficult to determine the vertical direction of the gate seal 2811, and there is a risk that the gate seal 2811 will be adhered upside down. However, this erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c allows the sticking direction of the gate seal 2811 to be specified, and the gate seal 2811 can be attached in the regular direction (the direction in which the cutout portion 2811a of the gate seal 2811 matches the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c). can be pasted. If the gate seal 2811 is turned upside down and attached to the attachment recess 2810b, the erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c causes part of the gate seal 2811 to protrude from the attachment recess 2810b. It is possible to make the user aware of incorrect attachment of the seal 2811 .

In this sticking concave portion 2810b, the left edge portion and the oblique portion of the wrong sticking prevention portion 2810c are set as contact surfaces for sticking the gate seal 2811 thereon. This makes it possible to secure a clearance for attaching the gate seal 2811 not only in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, but also in the vertical direction of the obliquely extending portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c. In other words, the three effective clearance directions for attaching the gate seal 2811 are the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the oblique direction, which facilitates the attachment work (see FIG. 207(a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular square hole extending vertically. When the gate member 2800 is assembled, the separation hole 2810d is closed on the front side by the gate seal 2811 attached to the attachment recess 2810b, and is closed on the rear side by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g. It is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2810d becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2810d of the present embodiment has long sides and short sides in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d becomes small, and the tool tends to bend, which may make it impossible to press the gate seal 2811 sufficiently. If the separation hole 2810d is larger than this, the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the gate seal 2811 may be bent, and the appearance of the gate seal 2811 may deteriorate.

The right inner peripheral surface of the separation hole 2810d is flush with the bottom surface (leftward surface) of the housing groove 2810g formed in the right arm portion 2810e. In addition, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d. protrudes slightly to the left.

This separation hole 2810d has a function of removing a gate seal 2811, which will be described later, and a core for forming a rear end of a locking portion 2810i that becomes under when the gate body 2810 is injection-molded. Injection molding of the gate body 2810 can be facilitated.

The gate seal 2811 is slightly elongated in the left-right direction with respect to a shape that is offset inward by a certain distance from the outer shape of the attachment recess 2810b. At the upper left corner of the gate seal 2811, a C-chamfered notch 2811a corresponding to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is formed so that the correct sticking direction (vertical direction here) with respect to the sticking concave portion 2810b can be known. It's like The entire rear surface of the gate seal 2811 is a glue surface having adhesive strength.

According to the gate member 2800 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the gate seal 2811 cannot be properly attached to the attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810, the gate body 2810 (front plate portion 2810a), a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear, and the tip of the rod-shaped member pushes the gate seal 2811 from the rear to the front. By pulling the turned-up portion by an operator, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the sticking concave portion 2810b, and the gate seal 2811 can be stuck again.

In addition, with the gate main body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate main body 2810, and the gate seal 2811 is pressed from behind by the tip of the rod-shaped member, thereby attaching the gate seal 2811. Since the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the recess 2810b, it is possible to easily replace the gate seal 2811 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gate main body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the pasting recess 2810b using the separation hole 2810d. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the sorting work for each material, and the cost for disposal of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front by sticking the gate seal 2811 to the sticking concave portion 2810b, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 2810d and prevent the player from seeing the separation hole 2810d. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice its existence, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 2810d.

Further, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 2810d is closed from behind by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached. Unlike the conventional pachinko machine, a hole that passes through to the rear side is not penetrated, so a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire can enter the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 through the hole. It is possible to avoid being inserted into the device, and to prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, even if an unauthorized tool is passed through the gate seal 2811 from the front and inserted into the separation hole 2810d, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 prevents it from moving further. can be prevented from being inserted (intruded) backward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 2810d or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. It is possible to prevent the act from being performed, and since a trace is left on the gate seal 2811 by an unauthorized tool penetrating the gate seal 2811, it is possible to make the person hesitate to commit an illegal act, and the deterrence against the illegal act is high. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is provided in the sticking concave portion 2810b to which the gate seal 2811 is stuck, the gate seal 2811 cannot be stuck correctly when the gate seal 2811 is stuck upside down. It is possible to make the worker aware of incorrect attachment of the gate seal 2811, and to allow the gate seal 2811 to be attached in the normal direction, and to attach the gate seal 2811 upside down. It is possible to prevent the product from being shipped in a state in which it is attached.

In addition, since the protrusion 2810j is provided in the accommodation groove 2810g in the gate main body 2810, if the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 are inserted from behind into the accommodation groove 2810g, It is possible to prevent the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 from contacting the projection 2810j before contacting the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a, so that the locking portion 2810i cannot be locked to the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. In other words, only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the accommodation groove 2810g in such a direction that the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 are aligned, the locking portion 2810i is locked to the rear end of the gate sensor 2801, and the gate is opened. Since the sensor 2801 is held, it is possible to prevent the gate sensor 2801 from being assembled in the wrong direction, and to suppress the occurrence of defects related to the gate sensor 2801. - 特許庁

Furthermore, the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g of the gate main body 2810 from the rear, and the locking portion 2810i is locked to the gate sensor 2801, so that the accommodation groove 2810g, the locking portion 2810i, and the pasting recess 2810b The gate sensor 2801 can be positioned by regulating the movement in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction by the side, and the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800) can be easily assembled. Cost can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole 2810d is located in the portion of the gate main body 2810 on the front side of the accommodation groove 2810g, when the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is separated from the rear by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. will be closed. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 2810d is detected by the gate sensor 2801 attached to the rear side of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is adhered. Since it is closed from the rear and does not have a hole through which it passes to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Further, as described above, by locking the gate sensor 2801 to the locking portion 2810i of the gate main body 2810, movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted. Even if the gate sensor 2801 is pushed rearward by an unauthorized tool, the rearward movement of the gate sensor 2801 can be prevented by the locking of the locking portion 2810i, and the closing of the separation hole 2810d by the gate sensor 2801 from the rear side can be prevented. can be maintained to prevent fraud.

In addition, since the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810 projects into the front projection range of the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d also serves as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted. and the gate body 2810 can be formed by injection molding.

From the above, the following technical ideas A to C can be grasped.

[Technical concept A]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration,
It has a portion to be decorated, to which the decoration is attached from the front, and a separation hole that passes through the portion to be decorated from front to back and allows the attached decoration to be separated by pressing from the rear. a front member having a
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and having a passage portion through which a game medium can flow;
The front member is
An accommodating portion extending rearward from the rear side of the portion to be decorated and recessed forward from the rear end thereof, and having the separation hole positioned on the front end side thereof so as to accommodate at least a portion of the passage member from the rear. and further has".

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decorative body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting concave portion 2810b is the decorated portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , and the accommodation groove 2810g respectively correspond to the accommodation portion.

Accordingly, since the separation hole is positioned in the front part of the front member on the front side of the accommodating portion, when at least part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the separation hole can be closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that achieves the same effects as those described above.

In addition, since the front member has an accommodating portion, at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion from the rear, so that the accommodating portion prevents the passage member from moving vertically, horizontally, and forward. It is possible to regulate and position the game machine, simplify the assembly of the game machine, and reduce the cost of the game machine.

[Technical concept B]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration,
It has a portion to be decorated, to which the decoration is attached from the front, and a separation hole that passes through the portion to be decorated from front to back and allows the attached decoration to be separated by pressing from the rear. a front member having a
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and having a passage portion through which a game medium can flow;
The front member is
It further has a locking portion that projects into the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated portion and that locks the passage member.

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decorative body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting concave portion 2810b is the decorated portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , and the locking portion 2810i respectively correspond to the locking portion.

As a result, the locking portion that is locked to the passage member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, so that when the passage member is locked to the locking portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear. The passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the covering decorative portion and the locking portion, so that the passage member can close the separation hole and restrict the movement of the passage member in the front-rear direction.

Further, as described above, by locking the passage member to the locking portion, the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted. To prevent a fraudulent act by preventing rearward movement of a passage member by locking a locking part even when the passage member is pressed, and maintaining closure of a separation hole from the rear by the passage member. can be done.

Furthermore, since the engaging portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the engaging portion is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[Technical concept C]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration,
a portion to be decorated, which is recessed rearwardly relative to the depth in the front-rear direction of the decoration and to which the decoration is attached from the front; a separation hole that can be separated by pressing from, a storage portion that extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion and is recessed forward from the rear end, and the separation hole is located on the front end side; a front member having a locking portion projecting into the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated portion;
At least a part of the passage is accommodated from the rear in the accommodating portion so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and is locked by the locking portion to provide a passage portion through which game media can flow. and a passage member having".

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decorative body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting concave portion 2810b is the decorated portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , the receiving groove 2810g corresponds to the receiving portion, and the locking portion 2810i corresponds to the locking portion, respectively.

As a result, the decorative body having the predetermined decoration is attached to the front surface of the front member provided on the front side of the passage member having the passage portion through which the game medium circulates. Therefore, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body. In addition, since the portion to be decorated, to which the ornamental body is attached, is recessed rearward from the depth of the ornamental body in the front-rear direction, when the ornamental body is attached to the portion to be decorated, the portion to be decorated in the front member will be dented. Since the surrounding part projects forward from the front surface of the decoration, the decoration can be highlighted by being bordered by the forwardly projecting part of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decoration. The appearance of the game machine can be improved by making it easy to exhibit the

In addition, since the portion to be decorated, to which the ornament is attached, is recessed backward, the ornament can be attached to the correct position by using the protruding periphery of the portion to be decorated on the front member as a guide when attaching the ornament. It is possible to make it easy to attach, reduce the failure of attachment of the decorative body, and suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

In this game machine, since the portion to be decorated of the front member is recessed backward, the contact surface between the ornament and the portion to be decorated is recessed when the ornament is attached to the portion to be decorated. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to remove the decoration attached to the part to be decorated, it is difficult to hook the decoration from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove it. On the other hand, since the part to be decorated is provided with the separation hole, the attachment to the part to be decorated is easily released by pushing the decoration forward by passing the bar member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member. The decorative body can be easily removed from the part to be decorated. Therefore, if the ornament cannot be properly adhered to the portion to be decorated of the front member during manufacture, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the tip of the rod-shaped member pushes the ornament from the rear. By doing so, the attachment to the portion to be decorated can be easily released, so that the decoration can be easily removed from the portion to be decorated, and the decoration can be attached again. In addition, in a state in which the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the front end of the rod-shaped member pushes the decoration from the rear, thereby facilitating adhesion to the portion to be decorated. Since it can be released, the decoration can be easily removed from the part to be decorated, and the replacement work of the decoration can be facilitated when the model is changed. Furthermore, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, the decoration can be easily removed from the part to be decorated using the separation hole. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the sorting work and reduce the cost of disposal of the game machine.

In addition, since the separation hole is provided in the part to be decorated, the separation hole can be made difficult to see or hidden from the front by adhering the decoration body to the part to be decorated, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and to make it difficult for the player to plan a fraudulent act through the separation hole.

At least part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodation portion of the front member from behind, and the engagement portion is engaged with the passage member, so that the accommodation portion, the engagement portion, and the rear side of the portion to be decorated are combined. , the movement of the passage member in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the longitudinal direction can be regulated and positioned, and the assembly of the game machine can be facilitated, thereby reducing the cost of the game machine. At this time, since the separation hole is positioned in a portion of the front member on the front side of the accommodating portion, when at least part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. It will happen. Therefore, when assembled in the game machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member assembled on the rear side of the front member to which the decorative body is attached. Since there is no hole that passes through to the rear side like a machine, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game machine through the hole, and cheating is performed. can be prevented.

In addition, since the passage member closes the separation hole from the rear, even if the unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole through the decorative body from the front, the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole, thereby preventing fraudulent activities and preventing the unauthorized tool from damaging the decorative body. Penetration leaves traces on the decoration, making it possible to discourage the execution of fraudulent actions, and to provide a gaming machine with high deterrence against fraudulent actions.

Further, as described above, by locking the passage member to the locking portion, the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted. To prevent a fraudulent act by preventing rearward movement of a passage member by locking a locking part even when the passage member is pressed, and maintaining closure of a separation hole from the rear by the passage member. can be done.

Further, since the engaging portion of the front member protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the engaging portion is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137, 144, 145 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in both the right and left outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. A windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W for the game ball B struck on the left side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加, and is adjusted to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. As a result, the game ball B can enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center role 2500 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more difficult than the game ball B which has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. It is adjusted so that the game ball B that has circulated through the second guide path 2522 on the left side of the guide path group 2520 passes through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. In addition, the plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game balls B flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side thereof. ing.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 .

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and hit upward along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is hit so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W has a lower probability than these. induced to enter the

The game ball B guided to the left part of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf part 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200 . Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the three general prize winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, after being detected by the general winning slot sensor 3001 , it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. A game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002 . Then, the game ball B that has not been received by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the horizontal direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted into the first starting port 2002 . In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001 of

A game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After being detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 , the substrate is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

It should be noted that the game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a can pass through the gate 2003 or be received in the second starting port 2004, the big prize winning port 2005 and the prize winning port 2006. no gender.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center role 2500 is accepted in the second start opening 2004 is higher than that of the game ball B hit to the left side of the center role 2500 The probability of being accepted at the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 are not open, the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left hitting") can be urged.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved with such a force that the game ball B enters above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of the position directly above the gate 2003 .

A game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is pushed by a plurality of obstructing nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 to the left side of the gate member 2800 and the gate 2003. , the right side of the gate member 2800 , and flow down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 emitted downward from The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide path 2522 is guided such that the probability of the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 is substantially the same, and the probability of the right side of the gate member 2800 is lower than them. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

A game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2022 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and transferred to the second back guidance passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After that, it is discharged out of the game area 5a through the back front and bottom effect unit 3160. - 特許庁Also, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 is released to the side right center unit 2700 after being detected by the gate sensor 2801 . When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery for a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

A game ball B passing through the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of hitting the right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side and is occasionally accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2022 . The game ball B received in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the first back of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the guide path 3156 , detected by the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 , and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 through the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 . At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

A game ball B flowing down the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and is guided to the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. run down the left.

At this time, when the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and "accessory prize" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a. It is transferred to the distribution passage 3158 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the production unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning prize opening sensor 2601, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

Then, the game ball B delivered to the sorting passage 3158 is sorted to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by driving the V sorting solenoid 3007 . The game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 is detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the losing opening 2008 is discharged onto the board holder 1200 after being detected by the losing opening sensor 3004 without being detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 . When the game ball B is received in the V winning opening 2007, a privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

In addition, the game ball B that is not accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 and flows down to the left of the accessory winning opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guide passage 2530. to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

A game ball B released downward (diagonally to the lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400 . In addition, since a plurality of obstructing nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2425 .

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls leftward due to its inclination, and rolls on the upper surface of the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf portion 2422. , and is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2422 . Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls on the third shelf 2423 or the big winning entrance door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls leftward due to the inclination thereof. Then, after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2424 from the big winning opening door 2413 , it is discharged to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf portion 2424 .

By the way, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N, it does not flow down to the first shelf 2421, but to the upper shelf 2436. It may run down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf portion 2436 rolls leftward due to its inclination, is released leftward from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2436, and hits the obstacle nail N planted leftward. After contacting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the large winning opening door 2413, the large winning opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf part 2424 roll leftward to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 is released to Therefore, even if the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf 2436, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf 2436 and the timing at which the big winning hole 2005 opens, the big winning hole 2005 may be accepted.

Also, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it bounces rightward due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2436, and the first shelf 2421 By flowing upward, the first shelf 2421 may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2421 . The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 passes between the first standing wall portion 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and flows down near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2433. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2433 and is received in the first sub-out port 2021 . The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned into the game area 5a, It is discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, and when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, the second start port. Since the door 2411 moves and the second starting port 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2421 can be received by the second starting port 2004. have a nature. When the game ball B is received by the second starting hole 2004, it is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Also, when the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2422, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery As a result, when a "big hit" is drawn, the big winning gate door 2413 moves and the big winning gate 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2422 is dropped. , will be accepted in the big winning slot 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left, by contacting the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436, it flows down diagonally to the right and the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2422 A game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2423 and the shelf 2423 . The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423 passes between the third vertical wall portion 2427 and the fourth vertical wall portion 2428 and reaches near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433. It drops, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433 , and is received by the first sub-out port 2021 .

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the side of the first attacker unit 2400 is not received by any of the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2021. In that case, it is discharged downward behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 and the role winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, It is necessary to draw a lottery for the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to allow the game ball B to pass through the gate 2003 to draw a "normal win" as a result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the chance of accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002. - 特許庁

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first start port 2002 can be enjoyed. It can raise expectations for the acceptance of

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first start opening 2002 and a "character winning" or "jackpot" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the big winning opening 2005 or the winning opening 2006 opens and closes. Therefore, the hitting operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be received in the big winning hole 2005 or the accessory winning hole 2006, and the big winning hole 2005 or the accessory winning hole 2006 It is possible to raise expectations for acceptance of the game ball B to the.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided at the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500. Depending on the guide passage to be circulated, the gate 2003 can be easily passed through, Since it is easily accepted by the second sub-out port 2022, it is possible to adjust the striking strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates in a desired guide passage, and the game ball B is provided to the player. You can enjoy the driving operation of

In addition, by performing "right hitting", by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003, there is a possibility that the "normal hit" in which the second start port 2004 is open is drawn, and the open state first To increase the expectation for a game and to suppress the decrease in interest by having the second start port 2004 receive a game ball B and having the possibility of drawing a lottery for a ``character hit'' or a ``jackpot''. can be done.

[5-8j. magnetic sensor]
Next, the plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is a front view of a game board showing the arrangement of magnetic sensors. FIG. 147(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor unable to detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, and (c) ) is an explanatory view schematically showing the detection range of the magnetic sensor in a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body where the lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected, and ( e) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body that can detect the lines of magnetic force from the magnet. 148(a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the magnetic sensor is held by the holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c). 1] is an exploded view showing a holding member in cross section. [FIG.

A plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5, and are for detecting illegal magnetism (magnetic lines of force) acting within the game area 5a. The magnetic sensor 1050, as shown in FIG. and a transparent sensor case 1053 covering the . In addition to the sensor main body 1051, ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors for connection, and the like are mounted on the sensor substrate 1052, although illustration is omitted.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is rectangular in plan view and is formed in a cuboid shape having a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one portion of the side in the height direction is chamfered. In this magnetic sensor 1050 , the sensor main body 1051 and the sensor substrate 1052 inside can be visually recognized from the outside through a transparent sensor case 1053 .

The magnetic sensor 1050 is capable of detecting passage of magnetic lines of force parallel to the longest side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship between the magnet 1055 and the direction of the magnetic sensor 1050 are as shown in FIG. can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship between the magnet 1055 and the direction of the magnetic sensor 1050 are as shown in FIG. ), the magnetism (magnetic lines of force) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

For this reason, the magnetic sensor 1050 has magnetic detection areas of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side in the long side direction centering on the magnetic sensor 1050, as shown by shading in FIG. 147(c). have a DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA that combines two spheres.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided facing appropriate directions. Each magnetic sensor 1050 is the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the prize winning opening 2006, and the warp opening 2511 in the game area 5a. are arranged so that they can be detected. In other words, each magnetism is adjusted so that the part where it is predicted that cheating using a magnet in the game area 5a will be performed is included in the detection area DA of the magnetic sensor 1050 (the area indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 146). A sensor 1050 is arranged in an appropriate orientation.

Also, in the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 receives signals from the starter solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid, and the drive motor provided in the back unit 3000. In order not to detect magnetism (lines of magnetic force), each detection area DA is kept out of contact with the solenoid and the drive motor.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(d), when the magnetic body 1056 is arranged in parallel with the magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting the magnetic force line from the magnet 1055, the magnetic force line is attracted to the magnetic body 1056, The lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 may decrease, and the magnetic sensor 1050 may become unable to detect the lines of magnetic force (magnetism) from the magnet 1055 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147(e), when the magnetic body 1057 is arranged in series with the magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting the lines of magnetic force from the magnet 1055, the lines of magnetic force are attracted by the magnetic body 1057, thereby The magnetic field lines passing through the sensor 1050 can be increased. As a result, the magnetism of a distant magnet 1055 or a magnet 1055 with a weak magnetic force can be detected.

By the way, in conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using a screw made of a magnetic material. , there is a problem that the magnetic line of force passing through the magnetic sensor is reduced by being attracted to the screw with high magnetic permeability, and it becomes impossible to detect the approach of the magnet. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using screws.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 has an accommodating portion 1061 capable of accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side and an elastic claw 1062 engaged with the magnetic sensor 1050 accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061 . In addition, the holding member 1060 has projections 1063 protruding from the leg portions of the elastic claws 1062 into the housing portion 1061 . This holding member 1060 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

In this holding member 1060, when the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the housing portion 1061 from the outside, the elastic claws 1062 are elastically deformed in a direction away from the housing portion 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the housing portion 1061, the elastic claws 1062 returns and engages magnetic sensor 1050 . At this time, the protrusion 1063 provided on the leg portion of the elastic claw 1062 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed against the portion of the inner surface of the accommodating portion 1061 opposite to the elastic claw 1062. there is

By locking the elastic claws 1062, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving in the direction in which the magnetic sensor 1050 is pulled out of the accommodating portion 1061, thereby preventing the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling off. Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed into the accommodating portion 1061 by the contact of the projection 1063, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from rattling in the accommodating portion 1061. FIG.

In this way, since the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from attracting magnetic lines of force from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the play area 5a. Reduction of magnetic field lines passing through 1050 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity using magnets at an early stage. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraud.

In addition, since the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material can avoid attracting the magnetic lines of force from the magnet and prevent the reduction of the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050, the number of magnetic lines is smaller than that of the conventional pachinko machine. The magnetism acting on the game area 5a can be effectively detected by the sensor 1050, the number of the magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. .

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached and detached from the holding member 1060. Therefore, like a conventional pachinko machine, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be made of metal made of a magnetic material. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claw 1062 without using screws, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1. can be suppressed.

Further, since the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060 urges (presses) the magnetic sensor 1050 toward the housing portion 1061, fine vibration of the magnetic sensor 1050 due to the urging of the protrusion 1063 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 is disconnected or the contact failure occurs due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and is provided on the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 attached to the game board 5 is positioned away from the magnetic sensor 1050. Alternatively, it can be provided at a position outside the magnetic detection area DA in the game area 5a. As a result, the influence of magnetic bodies such as screws for attaching the holding member 1060 to the game board 5 can be reduced as much as possible. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against cheating using magnets.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the transparent holding member 1060 so as to be visible, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is made transparent, the sensor main body mounted on the sensor substrate 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) can be conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible to a person who tries to cheat using a magnet. In addition, deterrence against fraud can be enhanced, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor substrate 1052 can be made inconspicuous, and the sensor substrate 1052 can be used as a decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. can be misidentified as Therefore, even if the sensor substrate 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, ordinary players will not be bothered by it, and it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance of the game area 5a.

Further, since the sensor main body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check whether the sensor main body 1051 is damaged or not, so that maintenance work of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. , and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 149 and the like. FIG. 149(a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 149(b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall and having a box shape with an open front. A lock mechanism (not shown) for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back front effect unit 3100 provided near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back rear upper effect provided on the upper part inside the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back front effect unit 3100. It is provided with a unit 3200 and a rear-back lower effect unit 3300 provided in the lower part in the back box 3010 below the rear-back upper effect unit.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed toward the right from the inside of the frame on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch portion 3010d is provided from the rear end of the rear box 3010 to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 near the center in the vertical direction of the left side of the rear box 3010 to which the lock mechanism is attached.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the back front effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

In addition, the back unit 3000 detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening 2002 which detect the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000. a first starting opening sensor 3002, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 after being accepted in the role winning opening 2006, and It has a loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 (see FIG. 169, etc.).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a V winning opening door 3006 that can move back and forth for opening and closing the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball received in the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth. A V distribution solenoid 3007 for distributing B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 is provided. These general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, V winning opening sensor 3003, loss opening sensor 3004, V winning opening door 3006, and V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the back front effect unit 3100. .

[5-9a. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 150 to 160. FIG. FIG. 150 is a front view of a back front effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 151(a) is a front perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 152(a) is a cross-sectional view of the back front effect unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part of (a), and (c) is It is an expanded sectional view of the right part in (a). FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front left decorative unit of the rear front effect unit, which is disassembled and viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. FIG. 154 shows the rear front left decoration unit disassembled and only the rear front left first decoration, the rear front left second decoration, the rear front left third decoration, and the rear front left decoration base alone are viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the back front left first decoration shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the back front left second decoration shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left second decoration shown in a transparent state. It is a front view of the back front left third ornament shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left ornament base shown in a transparent state.

FIG. 156(a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front effect unit, the light guide plate, and the decoration substrate for luminous decoration of the back front left decoration unit, and (b) is a back front effect unit. Fig. 10 is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate for making the decorative body of the back front and bottom effect unit luminous decoration. FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decoration unit is decorated with light. FIG. 158(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated, and FIG. 158(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the light emission configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. 160 is a front view of the back front effect unit showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated.

A back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end inside the back box 3010 . The back front effect unit 3100 includes a transparent plate-like light guide plate 3110 provided in the center of the front view, a back front left decorative unit 3120 provided on the left end side of the light guide plate 3110, and a right end portion of the light guide plate 3110. A back front right decoration unit 3140 provided on the side and a back front left decoration unit 3120 and a back front right decoration unit 3140 provided on the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 are connected to each other at their lower ends. A back front lower effect unit 3160 and an upper connection base 3190 connecting upper ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 are provided.

The back front right decoration unit 3140 has a general prize winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and a prize receiving opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. A V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 later, and a game ball B distributed to the losing opening 2008 after being received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 are detected. and a failing mouth sensor 3004. In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is a V winning opening door for allocating the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. 3006, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for advancing and retreating (opening and closing) the V winning opening door 3006.

The back front and bottom effect unit 3160 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. and a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back front effect unit 3100 has a first pattern 3111 (see FIG. 158(a)) that is displayed by emitting light by reflecting only the light from the left and right to the front, and only the light from the specific portion below. and a second pattern 3112 (see FIG. 158(b)) that is illuminated by reflecting forward. That is, the light guide plate 3110 includes a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of a back front left decoration substrate 3128 in a back front left decoration unit 3120, which will be described later, and a back front right first decoration substrate 3148 and a back front right decoration substrate 3148 of a back front right decoration unit 3140. When the second decorative substrate 3149 and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs of the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 are caused to emit light, the first pattern 3111 can be displayed by light emission. Further, when the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 are caused to emit light, the second pattern 3112 can be displayed.

As shown, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a pattern of the letter "A" in the center and a pattern of spreading "wings" on both left and right sides. . As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 is configured such that the luminous display has different shades and brightness depending on the part of the pattern, and the design and decorativeness of the pattern are enhanced. More specifically, the first pattern 3111 in FIG. 158(a) is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the color of the light emitted from the LED, and the darkest shaded portion is composed of the lightest shaded portions. The part is composed of a plurality of points that emit light by splitting the cocktail light from the LED, and the other dark and light parts are composed of a plurality of lines that emit light in the color of the light from the LED.

Here, the cocktail light is a color light containing two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red light and green light, is irradiated to the spectroscopic light-emitting portion as cocktail light, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and red light and green light are emitted at the site. A part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated as cocktail light to the spectroscopic light emitting part, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and the part that looks red, green, or blue at that part. , and a mixture of these colors appears, which makes it possible to show a rainbow-colored glittering light emission. Note that if only one of the three primary colors of light is irradiated to the spectral light emitting unit, the light of that color will be emitted because the light has no component to be dispersed. For this reason, the spectral light emitting unit can emit light in a single color or glitter in multiple colors depending on the color of the light being irradiated, enabling a more diverse range of light emission effects. can.

The LEDs (light guide plate LED 3128g, etc.) for emitting light to display the first pattern 3111 are provided on the back front left decoration substrate 3128 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right first decoration substrate 3148 of the back front right decoration unit 3140. , back front right second decoration substrate 3149 and back front right light guide plate decoration substrate 3150 .

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of lines 3113 (straight lines) radially extending upward from a plurality of portions spaced in the left-right direction near the lower end. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decoration substrate 3175 which will be described later. A plurality of lines 3113 forming the second pattern 3112 are formed so as to reflect forward only the light from the corresponding LEDs 3176, and are formed so that they can emit light independently for display. ing.

The second pattern 3112 has a plurality of lines 3113 arranged in five line groups 3114 from the left: a first line group 3114a, a second line group 3114b, a third line group 3114c, a fourth line group 3114d, and a fifth line group 3114e. are divided into Each line group 3114 is composed of five lines 3113 from the left: a first line 3113a, a second line 3113b, a third line 3113c, a fourth line 3113d, and a fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113, ie, the first line 3113a to the fifth line 3113e in one line group 3114, have their lower ends arranged at the same position and radially extend upward from the position of the lower end.

The luminous display of the second pattern 3112 enables the player to see a luminous effect as if it were a searchlight from below on a concert stage, making the inside of the game area 5a look gorgeous and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

LEDs 3176 for emitting light to display the second pattern 3112 are mounted on the light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decoration substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 .

[5-9a-2. Back front left decorative unit]
A back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front effect unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and is a vertically long back front left logo consisting of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. A decorative portion 3121, a back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122 provided above the back front left logo decorative portion 3121 and stylized with the letter “A”, and a back front left logo decorative portion 3121 provided to the left of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121. and a back front left sub decorative portion 3123 .

The back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a transparent back front left first decoration body 3124 having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a back front left transparent back front left decoration body 3124 provided behind the back front left first decoration body 3124 . A second decorative body 3125, a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left third decorative body 3126. and a back front left ornament base 3127.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a back side for decorating the first pattern 3111, the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123 of the light guide plate 3110 with light emission. A front left decoration substrate 3128, a back front top left decoration substrate 3129 for luminous decoration of the back front top left logo decoration portion 3122, and a back surface for luminescence decoration of the back front left logo decoration portion 3121 and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123. A front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is provided.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a back front left reflector 3131 provided on the right side of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 and a back front left reflector 3132 provided below the back front left decoration substrate 3129 . , and a rear front left lower reflector 3133 provided on the upper side of the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 .

The back front left decoration unit 3120 also includes a left diffusion lens 3134 provided between the back front left third decoration 3126 and the back front left decoration base 3127 .

The back front left first decoration 3124 includes a back front left second decoration 3125, a back front left third decoration 3126, a left diffusion lens 3134, and a back front left decoration base so as to sandwich the left end of the light guide plate 3110. 3127 is attached to the front. The back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in the shape of a transparent flat plate and in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangle. The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a partitioning decorative portion 3124a extending leftward and rightward and penetrating in the front and rear at a portion of the height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

In addition, the back front left first decorative body 3124 has a plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b penetrating back and forth. A plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b are provided near the upper end, near the lower end, and near the upper right end of the partitioning decorative portion 3124a. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b is formed in a rhombic shape in which the four sides of a square are replaced by circular arcs that protrude inward.

In addition, the back front left first decoration 3124 includes a first front left logo decoration portion 3124c provided below the partition decoration portion 3124a on the front surface and constituting a part of the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, It has a relief-like first back left logo decoration portion 3124d provided in a portion corresponding to the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c on the rear surface. The right side of the back front left first decoration 3124 is formed in a shape along the character strings of the logos of the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c and the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d.

In addition, the back front left first decoration 3124 is provided in the form of a relief above the partition decoration 3124a on the back, and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration 3122. First upper left logo decoration 3124e. and a plurality of first left sub-decorative portions 3124f that are provided in relief on the back surface to the left of the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d and constitute part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123; have. The first upper left logo decorative portion 3124 e constitutes the outermost portion of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122 . The first left sub-decorative portion 3124f is formed of a cloisonné pattern in which circles of the same size are overlapped quarter by quarter and one portion of the circle is extracted, and a lozenge pattern in which the outer circle of the cloisonne pattern is removed. They are arranged in rows above and below.

The back front left first decoration 3124 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, etc., but is actually transparent, so as shown in FIG. 155(a), it is provided from the front to the back. A first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, a first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e, and a first left sub decoration portion 3124f are visible.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is positioned in front of the back front left second decorative body 3125 in a state assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, and the right side is positioned behind the left side. (see Figure 152). In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is positioned so that the left side surface is in contact with the right side surface of the board holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the back side is located on the left side thereof. A first lower LED 3128a and a first upper LED 3128b of the front left decoration board 3128 are located. In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left first decoration body 3124 has the first LED of the back front left upper decoration board 3129 located above the top surface, and the back front left bottom decoration board 3130 located below the bottom surface. One LED 3130a is located.

When the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decoration substrate 3130 are caused to emit light, the back front left first decoration 3124 is mounted on the substrate holding portion of the back front left second decoration 3125. The first front left logo decoration portion 3124c and the first rear left logo decoration portion 3124c and the first rear left logo decoration portion are formed by light entering from a portion below the left side partition decoration portion 3124a through 3125b and light entering from the bottom surface. 3124d and the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f are decorated with light emission. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3124a and the inner surface of the penetrating decoration portion 3124b provided near the lower end are also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative portion 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the inner peripheral surface on the lower side, A portion of the light that has reached the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3124a. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative portion 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest of the light is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative portion 3124a. will be incident on the upper inner side of the . In this way, the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is largely attenuated by passing through the partition decoration portion 3124a. Light from the first lower LED 3128a of the left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 illuminates most of the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e above the partition decorative portion 3124a (light emitting decoration). Instead, only the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, and the first left sub decoration portion 3124f can be illuminated brightly.

In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decoration substrate 3129 of the back front left first decoration 3124 emit light, the back front left second decoration 3125 substrate The first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e is decorated with light emission by the light that enters from above the partition decoration portion 3124a on the left side through the holding portion 3125b or the light that enters from the upper surface. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3124a and the penetrating decoration portion provided above the partition decoration portion 3124a are also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decoration portion 3124a, when the light incident from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 or the first LED of the back front left decoration substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, Part of the light that has reached the peripheral surface is reflected to the upper inner side of the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3124a. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative portion 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest of the light is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative portion 3124a. will be incident on the inner side below the . In this way, the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left decorative board 3129 is greatly reduced by passing through the partitioning decorative portion 3124a. By the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3129, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c and the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d below the partition decoration portion 3124a, The first left sub-decorative portion 3124f is hardly illuminated (luminescent decoration), and only the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e and the upper penetrating decorative portion 3124b can be illuminated brightly.

In this way, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminous decorated (luminous display) with the dividing decorative portion 3124a as a boundary.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed transparent as a whole, and includes a flat plate-shaped decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the periphery of the decorative plate portion 3125a except for the right side ( and substrate holding portions 3125b provided on the left side, the upper side, and the lower side. The substrate holding portion 3125b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3125a, protrudes forward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface side. The substrate holding portion 3125b cooperates with the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decoration base 3127 to sandwich and hold the back front left decoration substrate 3128, the back front left upper decoration substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decoration substrate 3130. It is for The back front left second decorative body 3125 is inclined so that the front surface of the board holding portion 3125b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, while the right side of the decorative plate portion 3125a is positioned more rearward than the left side. ing.

In addition, the rear front left second decorative body 3125 has a partitioning decorative portion 3125c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back at a portion of the decorative plate portion 3125a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom. there is The partition decoration portion 3125c is formed to have the same size and height as the partition decoration portion 3124a of the back front left first decoration 3124 .

In addition, the back front left second decoration 3125 is provided below the partition decoration 3125c on the rear surface, and is a relief-shaped second back left logo decoration that constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration 3121. 3125d. The right side of the back front left second decoration 3125 is formed in a shape along the logo character string of the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d.

In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided in relief above the partition decorative portion 3125c on the back surface, and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decorative portion 3122. Second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e. and a plurality of second left sub-decorative portions 3125f that are provided in relief on the back surface to the left of the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d and that constitute part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123; have. The second upper left logo decorative portion 3125 e is formed to have a size one size smaller than the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124 e of the back front left first decoration 3124 . The second left sub-decorative portion 3125f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, and is formed in a similar shape that is one size smaller.

The back front left second decoration 3125 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, etc., but is actually transparent, so as shown in FIG. 155(b), it is provided from the front to the back. A second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, a second top left logo decoration portion 3125e, and a second left sub decoration portion 3125f are visible.

When the back front left second decoration 3125 is assembled to the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front left first decoration 3124 is positioned in front of the decoration plate portion 3125a as shown in FIG. A back front left third decorative body 3126 is positioned at the rear side. In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left second decorative body 3125 includes a back front left decorative board 3128, a front end side of the back front left reflector 3131, a back front left decorative board 3129, and a back front left decorative board 3129 on the board holding portion 3125b recessed forward. Also, the front end side of the back front left upper reflector 3132, the front end sides of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 and the back front left lower reflector 3133 are inserted respectively. The second lower LED 3128c and the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decoration board 3128 are on the left side of the left surface of the decoration plate part 3125a, the second LED of the back front left decoration board 3129 is above the top surface, and the back front is below the bottom surface. The second LEDs 3130b of the lower left decoration board 3130 are located respectively.

When the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 emit light, the back front left second decoration 3125 emits light from the partition decoration portion 3125c on the left surface of the decoration plate portion 3125a. The second rear left logo decorative portion 3125d and the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f are decorated with light emission by the light that enters from the lower part and the light that enters from the lower surface of the decoration plate portion 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3125c is also decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the partition decorative portion 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the inner peripheral surface on the lower side, A part of the light that has reached the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative portion 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the rest of the light is reflected from the inner peripheral surface of the partition decorative portion 3125c. will be incident on the upper inner side of the . In this way, the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is largely attenuated by passing through the partition decorative portion 3125c. The light from the second lower LED 3128c of the left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 almost illuminates the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e above the partition decorative portion 3125c (light emitting decoration). Instead, only the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d and the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f can be illuminated brightly.

In addition, when the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 of the back front left second decoration body 3125 emit light, the partition decoration portion on the left surface of the decoration plate portion 3125a The second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e is decorated with light emission by the light that is incident inside from a portion above 3125c and the light that is incident inside from the upper surface of the decoration plate portion 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3125c is also decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the partition decoration portion 3125c, when the light incident from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 or the second LED of the back front left decoration substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, Part of the light that has reached the peripheral surface is reflected to the upper inner side of the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative portion 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the rest of the light is reflected from the inner peripheral surface of the partition decorative portion 3125c. will be incident on the inner side below the . In this way, the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3129 is greatly reduced by passing through the partition decorative portion 3125c. By the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129, the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f below the partition decorative part 3125c are mostly illuminated. Only the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e can be brightly luminous-displayed without being luminous-displayed (luminous decoration).

In this way, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminous decorated (luminous display) with the dividing decorative portion 3125c as a boundary.

The back front left third decoration body 3126 is entirely transparent, and is a flat plate-shaped decoration plate portion parallel to the decoration plate portions 3125a of the back front left first decoration body 3124 and the back front left second decoration body 3125. 3126a and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) of the decorative plate portion 3126a except for the right side. The back front left third decorative body 3126 has the rear surface of the flange portion 3126b parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined so that the right side is positioned more rearward than the left side. there is

In addition, the back front left third decorative body 3126 has a partitioning decorative portion 3126c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back at a portion of the decorative plate portion 3126a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom. there is The partition decoration portion 3126c is formed to have the same size and height as the partition decoration portion 3124a of the back front left first decoration 3124. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided below the partition decorative portion 3126c on the rear surface, and is a relief-shaped third back left logo decorative portion that constitutes a part of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121. 3126d. The right side of the third back front left decoration body 3126 is formed in a shape along the character string of the logo of the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d.

In addition, the back front left third decoration 3126 is provided in relief above the partition decoration 3126c on the back, and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration 3122. Third upper left logo decoration 3126e. and a plurality of third left sub-decorative portions 3126f which are provided in relief on the back surface to the left of the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d and constitute a part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123; have. The third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e is formed in a size one size smaller than the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e of the second back front left decoration 3125 . The third left sub-decorative portion 3126f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f and has the same size between the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f and the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f. It is formed into a shape.

The back front left third ornament 3126 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, etc., but is actually transparent, so as shown in FIG. 155(c), it is provided from the front to the back. A third back left logo decoration portion 3126d, a third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e, and a third left sub decoration portion 3126f are visible.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, and as shown in FIG. The decoration plate portion 3125a of the second decoration body 3125 is positioned, and the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffuser lens 3134 are positioned behind. In addition, in the assembled state of the back front left third decoration body 3126, the third lower LED 3128e and the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decoration board 3128 are on the left side of the left surface of the decoration plate portion 3126a. The third LED 3130c of the front left lower decoration board 3129 and the back front left lower decoration board 3130 are positioned below the lower surface.

When the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 emit light, the back front left third decoration 3126 emits light from the partition decoration portion 3126c on the left surface of the decoration plate portion 3126a. The third rear left logo decorative portion 3126d and the third left sub-decorative portion 3126f are decorated with light emission by the light that enters from the lower part and the light that enters from the lower surface of the decoration plate portion 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3126c is also decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the partition decorative portion 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the inner peripheral surface on the lower side, A portion of the light that has reached the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3126c. When the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative portion 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest of the light is reflected from the inner peripheral surface of the partition decorative portion 3126c. will be incident on the upper inner side of the . In this way, the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is greatly reduced by passing through the partition decoration portion 3126c. The light from the third lower LED 3128e of the left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 almost illuminates the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e above the partition decoration part 3126c (light emission decoration). Instead, only the third back-left logo decorative portion 3126d and the third left sub-decorative portion 3126f can be illuminated brightly.

In addition, when the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 of the back front left third decoration body 3126 emit light, the partition decoration portion on the left surface of the decoration plate portion 3126a The third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e is decorated with light emission by the light that enters inside from above the portion 3126c and the light that enters inside from the upper surface of the decoration plate portion 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3126c is also decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the partition decoration portion 3126c, when the light incident from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 or the third LED of the back front left decoration substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, Part of the light that has reached the peripheral surface is reflected to the upper inner side of the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3126c. When the light radiated to the inside of the partition decorative portion 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest of the light is reflected from the inner peripheral surface of the partition decorative portion 3126c. will be incident on the inner side below the . In this way, the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are largely attenuated by passing through the partition decorative portion 3126c. By the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front left decorative board 3129, the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f below the partition decorative part 3126c are mostly illuminated. Only the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e can be brightly displayed without light emission display (light emission decoration).

In this way, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminous decorated (luminous display) with the dividing decorative portion 3126c as a boundary.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is formed entirely transparent, and includes a flat plate-like decorative plate portion 3127a and substrates provided around the decorative plate portion 3127a except for the right side (left side, upper side, and lower side). and a holding portion 3127b. The decorative plate portion 3127 a is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

The substrate holding portion 3127b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3127a, has a rear surface positioned rearward, and is recessed rearward from the front surface side. The substrate holding portion 3127b cooperates with the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 to sandwich the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front left upper decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130. It is for holding. The left end of the upper connection base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the substrate holding part 3127b, and the left end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the back front and lower effect unit 3160 is attached to the lower part.

In addition, the back front left decorative body base 3127 extends over the entire width at a constant height near the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a, and is provided at a vertical interval. Three back front left band decorative portions 3127c, and a base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d provided in relief near the upper portion of the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a and forming a part of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122. ,have. The base upper left logo decoration portion 3127 d is formed in a size one size smaller than the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126 e of the back front left third decoration 3126 .

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, etc., but is actually transparent. A front left band decorative portion 3127c and a base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d can be visually recognized.

When the back front left decoration base 3127 is assembled to the back front left decoration unit 3120, as shown in FIG. In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left decorative base 3127 has a back front left decorative board 3128, a back front left reflector 3131 rear end side, a back front left upper decorative board 3129, and a back front left decorative board 3128 in a board holding portion 3127b recessed rearward. Also, the rear end side of the back front left upper reflector 3132, the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130, and the rear end side of the back front left lower reflector 3133 are inserted respectively. A lower base LED 3128h and an upper base LED 3128i of the back front left decorative board 3128 are positioned on the left side of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 can illuminate the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the decorative plate portion 3127a by causing the lower LED 3128h of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 to emit light. The three back front left band decorative portions 3127c can be independently decorated with light emission. Further, the back front left decoration base 3127 can light up the upper left logo decoration part 3127d of the base when the LED 3128i on the base of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 emits light.

The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is in the form of a flat plate elongated vertically, and the plate surface is oriented in the horizontal direction. The back front left decorative substrate 3128 includes a back front left first decoration 3124, a back front left second decoration 3125 decoration plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decoration 3126 decoration plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged on the left side of the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127 . The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is held together with the back front left reflector 3131 between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decoration 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decoration base 3127. ing.

The back front left decoration substrate 3128 is positioned to the left of the back front left first decoration 3124, and includes a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a provided below the partition decoration portion 3124a, and the back front left first decoration. A plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b located on the left side of 3124 and provided above the partition decoration portion 3124a, and a plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b located on the left side of the decoration plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decoration body 3125, and the partition decoration A plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c provided below the portion 3125c, and positioned to the left of the decoration plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decoration 3125 and provided above the partition decoration portion 3125c. A plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d, a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located to the left of the decoration plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decoration body 3126 and provided below the partition decoration portion 3126c, and a back front A plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f are provided on the left side of the decoration plate portion 3126a of the left third decoration body 3126 and above the partition decoration portion 3126c.

In addition, the back front left decorative substrate 3128 includes a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g positioned to the left of the left diffusion lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110 ), and a back front left decoration plate portion 3127 a of the back front left decoration base 3127 . Three base lower LEDs 3128h positioned to the left of the left band decorative portion 3127c and a plurality of bases positioned to the left of the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d in the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127 and an upper LED 3128i.

When the plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 are illuminated, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, etc. of the back front left first decoration 3124 are illuminated. can be done. When the plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 are caused to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decoration 3124 and the like can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 are caused to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d of the back front left second decoration 3125 and the like can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 are caused to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e of the back front left second decoration 3125 and the like can be decorated with light emission.

Further, when the plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 are caused to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d of the back front left third decoration 3126 and the like can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 are caused to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decoration 3126 and the like can be decorated with light emission.

When the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are caused to emit light, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed through the left diffuser lens 3134 . When a plurality of (three) under-base LEDs 3128h of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the back front left decoration base 3127 can be decorated with light emission. When a plurality of LEDs 3128i on the base of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are caused to emit light, the base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d of the back front left decoration base 3127 can be decorated with light emission.

First lower LED 3128a, first upper LED 3128b, second lower LED 3128c, second upper LED 3128d, third lower LED 3128e, third upper LED 3128f, light guide plate LED 3128g, lower base LED 3128h and base LED 3128i are full-color LEDs.

The back front left decorative substrate 3128 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes it difficult to see the back front left decorative board 3128 and also reflects the light from the mounted LEDs, so that the first pattern 3111 and the back front left logo of the light guide plate 3110 can be reflected. The decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123, etc. can be decorated with brighter light emission. In addition, on the back front left decorative board 3128, letters and symbols for avoiding confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are printed with ink of a color (e.g., yellow) with high brightness and saturation. It is applied by screen printing using This makes the characters and symbols inconspicuous. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. are mounted on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in addition to the LEDs.

The back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is in the form of a flat plate elongated in the left and right direction, and the plate surface is oriented in the vertical direction. The back front left decoration substrate 3129 includes a back front left first decoration 3124, a back front left second decoration 3125 decoration plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decoration 3126 decoration plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged above the decorative plate portion 3127 a of the body base 3127 . The back front left decorative substrate 3129 is held together with the back front left reflector 3132 between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decoration 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decoration base 3127. ing.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front left decoration substrate 3129 includes a plurality of first LEDs provided above the back front left first decoration 3124 and the decoration plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decoration 3125. A plurality of second LEDs provided above and a plurality of third LEDs provided above the decoration plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decoration body 3126 are provided.

When the plurality of first LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3129 are caused to emit light, the first top left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decoration body 3124 and the like can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of second LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3129 are caused to emit light, the second top left logo decoration portion 3125e of the back front left second decoration 3125 and the like can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of third LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3129 are caused to emit light, the third top left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decoration 3126 can be decorated with light emission.

A plurality of first LEDs, second LEDs, and third LEDs mounted on the lower surface of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are full-color LEDs.

In addition, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on its surface. With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front upper left decoration board 3129 difficult to see and to reflect the light from the mounted LED, so that the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like can be brightly illuminated. can be made In addition, on the back front upper left decorative board 3129, letters and symbols for avoiding confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are printed with ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). It is applied by screen printing using This makes the characters and symbols inconspicuous. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, etc. are mounted on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 in addition to the LED.

The back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is in the shape of a flat plate elongated in the left and right direction, and the plate surface is oriented in the vertical direction. The back front left lower decoration substrate 3130 includes a back front left first decoration 3124, a back front left second decoration 3125 decoration plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decoration 3126 decoration plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged below the decorative plate portion 3127 a of the body base 3127 . The back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second ornament 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left ornament base 3127 together with the back front left lower reflector 3133. ing.

The back front left lower decoration substrate 3130 is provided below the plurality of first LEDs 3130a provided below the back front left first decoration body 3124 and the decoration plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decoration body 3125. A plurality of second LEDs 3130b and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c provided below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126 are provided.

When the plurality of first LEDs 3130a of the back front left lower decoration substrate 3130 are caused to emit light, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, etc. of the back front left first decoration 3124 can be illuminated. can. When the plurality of second LEDs 3130b of the back front left lower decoration substrate 3130 are caused to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d of the back front left second decoration 3125 and the like can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of third LEDs 3130c of the back front left lower decoration substrate 3130 are caused to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d of the back front left third decoration 3126 and the like can be decorated with light emission.

A plurality of first LEDs 3130a, second LEDs 3130b, and third LEDs 3130c mounted on the lower surface of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 are full-color LEDs.

In addition, the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on its surface. This white solder resist can make the back front left lower decoration board 3130 hard to see, and can reflect the light from the mounted LED, making the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the like brighter. can be made In addition, on the back front lower left decorative board 3130, characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are printed with ink of a color (eg, yellow) with high brightness and saturation. It is applied by screen printing using This makes the characters and symbols inconspicuous. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, etc. are mounted on the rear front lower left decorative substrate 3130 in addition to the LED.

The left diffusion lens 3134 is arranged between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front left decoration substrate 3128 (back front left reflector 3131), and is arranged between the back front left third decoration 3126 and the back front left decoration base 3127. is sandwiched between The left diffusing lens 3134 diffuses the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 to irradiate the left side surface of the light guide plate 3110 .

The back front left decoration unit 3120 includes, as shown in FIG. and the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d of the third back front left decoration body 3126 are overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one back front left logo decoration portion 3121 . The first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d have different positions in the front-rear direction. When the position of the person's eyes moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, and a predetermined logo consisting of a plurality of alphabets can be seen three-dimensionally.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first lower LED 3128a, a second lower LED 3128c and a third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decoration board 3128, and a first LED 3130a, a second LED 3130b and a third LED 3130b of the back front left lower decoration board 3130. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3130c, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d are independently illuminated. The back front left logo decoration portion 3121 can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes, as shown in FIG. , the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e of the third back front left decoration 3126, and the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 are overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122. doing. Since the positions of the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e, the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, and the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d are different in the front-rear direction, the position of the player's eyes is different. When moved, the degree of overlap between them changes, so that the logo in which the letter "A" is designed can be seen three-dimensionally.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e, a second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e, a third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e, a base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d, and a base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d. , the back front left first decoration 3124, the back front left second decoration 3125, the back front left third decoration 3126, and the back front left decoration base 3127 are sequentially illuminated to decorate the game. A pseudo-animation with movement can be shown to the player, and can strongly appeal to the player. In this animation-like lighting effect, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first rear left logo decoration portion 3124d, the second rear left logo decoration portion 3125d, and the third rear left logo decoration portion 3126d are sequentially illuminated. Similar effects can be obtained even with

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first upper LED 3128b, a second upper LED 3128d, a third upper LED 3128f, a base upper LED 3128i of the back front left decoration substrate 3128, and a first LED, a second LED 3128i of the back front left decoration substrate 3129, By appropriately lighting the LED and the third LED, the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e, the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, and the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d are each independently illuminated. The back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 can be decorated with various lighting modes.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes, as shown in FIG. , and the third left sub-decorative portion 3126f of the back front left third decorative body 3126 are overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one back-front left sub-decorative portion 3123. As shown in FIG. These first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, and third left sub-decorative portion 3126f have different positions in the front-rear direction. changes, and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123 can be seen three-dimensionally.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first lower LED 3128a, a second lower LED 3128c and a third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decoration board 3128, and a first LED 3130a, a second LED 3130b and a third LED 3130b of the back front left lower decoration board 3130. By appropriately causing the LED 3130c to emit light, the first left sub-decoration portion 3124f, the second left sub-decoration portion 3125f, and the third left sub-decoration portion 3126f can be independently illuminated and decorated, and the back front left sub-decoration can be performed. The portion 3123 can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a division decoration portion 3124a of the back front left first decoration body 3124, a division decoration portion 3125c of the back front left second decoration body 3125, and a division decoration portion of the back front left third decoration body 3126. 3126c, the lower side (back front left logo decoration portion 3121, back front left sub-decorative portion 3123) and the upper side (back The luminous decoration of the front upper left logo decorative portion 3122) can be clearly separated, and the luminous decoration of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121 and the back front left sub-decoration portion 3123 and the luminous decoration of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122 are decorative effects. can be further enhanced. At this time, since the partition decoration portion 3124a, the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the partition decoration portion 3126c are also decorated with light emission, the appearance of the partition decoration portion 3124a, the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the partition decoration portion 3126c can be improved and the partition decoration portion 3126c can emit light. You can enjoy the decoration.

In addition, when the back front left decoration unit 3120 causes the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decoration board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decoration board 3130 to emit light, the rear front left first decoration 3124 is partitioned. A penetrating decorative portion 3124b below the portion 3124a can be decorated with light. In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the penetrating decoration above the partition decoration part 3124a of the back front left first decoration 3124 The portion 3124b can be decorated with light. The luminous decoration of these penetrating decorative portions 3124b can also improve the appearance.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 emits light from the light guide plate LED 3128g of the back front left decoration substrate 3128, so that the back front right first decoration substrate 3148 and the back front right second decoration substrate in the back front right decoration unit 3140 are illuminated. 3149 and the LED for the light guide plate of the decorative substrate 3150 for the back front right light guide plate, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by light emission.

In this way, according to the back front left decoration unit 3120, transparent three-dimensional decorations such as the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123 can be used. , the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the players can be provided.

In addition, since the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes, the player is bored with various light emission effects. It is possible to make it difficult, and to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In the above description, the partition decoration portion 3124a, the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the partition decoration portion 3126c for blocking the light from the LED are shown as penetrating in the front and rear directions. , ridges, may also be used. In addition, the back front left second decoration 3125 is provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the penetrating decoration portion 3124b of the back front left first decoration 3124 so that the back front left first decoration 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. can be That is, the through decorative portion 3124b may be used as the positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decoration unit]
A back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and is a vertically long back front right logo consisting of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. A decoration portion 3141, a back front right logo decoration portion 3142 (see FIG. 151(b)) provided above the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and stylized with the letter "A", and a back front right logo. and a back front right sub-decorative portion (not shown) provided in the vicinity of the decorative portion 3141 .

The back front right decoration unit 3140 includes a transparent back front right first decoration body 3144 having a vertically elongated shape in front view, and a transparent back front right second decoration body 3144 provided behind the back front right first decoration body 3144 . A decorative body 3145, a transparent back front right third decorative body 3146 provided behind the back front right second decorative body 3145, and a transparent back provided behind the back front right third decorative body 3146. A front right decoration base 3147 is provided (see FIG. 152).

The right end of the upper connection base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the back front right decorative body base 3147, and the right end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower effect unit 3160 is attached to the lower part. In addition, the back front right decorative body base 3147 extends over the entire width at a constant height in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and three back front right band decorations are vertically spaced apart. It has a portion 3147a (see FIG. 151(b)).

In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 includes the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub decoration part. A right first decoration substrate 3148 and a back front right second decoration substrate 3149, a back front right light guide plate decoration substrate 3150 for decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 with light emission, and a back front upper right logo decoration part 3142. A back front right upper decoration substrate 3151 for luminous decoration and a back front right lower decoration substrate 3152 for luminous decoration of the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 are provided (see FIG. 156).

In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 includes an upper right diffusion lens 3153 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right first decoration substrate 3148, and between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right second decoration substrate 3149. and a lower right diffusion lens 3155 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 (see FIG. 156). . The upper right diffuser lens 3153 , the right middle diffuser lens 3154 , and the lower right diffuser lens 3155 are provided between the back front right third ornament 3146 and the back front right ornament base 3147 .

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3140 receives the game ball B received in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the first guide path 2701, and guides it downward. 3156, and a second back guiding passage 3157 for receiving and guiding downward the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the second guiding passage. . One general prize winning opening sensor 3001 is provided in the first back guide passage 3156 . The game ball B guided to the first back guide passage 3156 and the second back guide passage 3157 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 .

In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 circulates the game ball B received by the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and guided backward by the guide passage 2613, and the V winning opening 2007 and the losing opening 2008 are distributed. A distribution passage provided, a V winning opening door 3006 for distributing a game ball B that advances and retreats in the distribution passage and is received in the accessory winning opening 2006 to either a V winning opening 2007 or a losing opening 2008, A V allocation solenoid 3007 for advancing and retreating a V winning opening door 3006, a V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting a game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007, and a losing opening for detecting a game ball B distributed to a losing opening 2008. and a mouth sensor 3004 . The game ball B detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 or the losing opening sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 .

The configurations of the back front right logo decoration portion 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142, the back front right sub decoration portion, etc. in the back front right decoration unit 3140 are the same as those of the back front left decoration unit 3120. omitted.

In addition, the back front right first decoration 3144, the back front right second decoration 3145, and the back front right third decoration 3146 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 include the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and the back front upper right decoration. Between the logo decoration part 3142, there is a partition decoration part 3144a extending left and right and penetrating back and forth. The partition decoration portion 3144a allows the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 to be independently decorated with light emission.

Further, the back front right first decorative body 3144 has a plurality of through decorative portions 3144b penetrating back and forth. These plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3144b can achieve the same effect as the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

Thus, according to the back front right decoration unit 3140, like the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, the back front right sub decoration part, etc. The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved by transparent three-dimensional decoration, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players can be provided.

In addition, since the back front right logo decoration portion 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142, and the back front right sub-decorative portion can be decorated with light emission in various lighting modes, it is difficult for the player to get bored with various light emission effects. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, in the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142, which are substantially at the same position when viewed from the front, the back front right first decoration 3144, the back front right second decoration 3145, the back front right second By sequentially lighting up the three decorations 3146 and the back front right decoration base 3147, a pseudo-animation with movement can be shown to the player, thereby strongly appealing to the player.

[5-9a-4. Back front and bottom production unit]
The back front bottom effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 includes a disc-shaped back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 and a back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 with the characters "SPIN" applied on the upper part of the center in the left-right direction. It has a back front bottom rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates about the axis in the front-rear direction, and a back front bottom lift drive motor 3162 that moves the back front bottom middle decorative body 3161 up and down. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161 has translucency.

In addition, the back front bottom effect unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161, and has a disk-shaped back front bottom left interior decoration body 3163 and a back front bottom left interior decoration body 3163 of the same size. A disc-shaped back front lower left outer decoration 3164 of the same size provided on the left side and a disc-shaped back front lower right inner decoration provided on the right side of the back front lower middle decoration 3161 of the same size are provided. A body 3165 and a disk-shaped back front lower right outer decoration 3166 provided on the right side of the back front lower right inner decoration 3165 and having the same size. The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 have translucency.

In addition, the back front bottom effect unit 3160 is provided to the left of the back front bottom left outer decoration 3164 and has a back front bottom logo decoration 3167 on which the characters "Queen" are applied. The back front and bottom logo decoration 3167 has translucency.

Furthermore, the back front bottom effect unit 3160 includes a back front bottom middle decoration board 3168 for luminous decoration of the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 and a back front bottom left decoration board 3168 for luminous decoration of the back front bottom left inner decoration body 3163 . An interior decoration substrate 3169, a back front bottom left exterior decoration substrate 3170 for decorating the back front bottom left exterior decoration body 3164 with light emission, and a back front bottom right interior decoration for decorating the back front bottom right interior decoration body 3165 with light emission. A substrate 3171, a back front lower right outer decoration substrate 3172 for luminous decoration of the back front lower right outer decoration 3166, a back front lower logo decoration substrate 3173 for luminous decoration of the back front lower logo decoration 3167, (see FIG. 156(b)).

Back front bottom middle decoration board 3168, back front bottom left inside decoration board 3169, back front bottom left outside decoration board 3170, back front bottom right inside decoration board 3171, back front bottom right outside decoration board 3172, back front bottom logo decoration. The substrate 3173 includes a back front lower middle ornament 3161, a back front lower left inner ornament 3163, a back front lower left outer ornament 3164, a back front lower right inner ornament 3165, a back front lower right outer ornament 3166, and a back front. It is provided behind the lower logo decoration 3167 .

Back front bottom middle decoration board 3168, back front bottom left inside decoration board 3169, back front bottom left outside decoration board 3170, back front bottom right inside decoration board 3171, back front bottom right outside decoration board 3172, back front bottom logo The decoration substrate 3173 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the surface thereof is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED or from the front, etc., and the decorative bodies provided in front of each can be decorated with bright light.

Back front bottom middle decoration board 3168, back front bottom left inside decoration board 3169, back front bottom left outside decoration board 3170, back front bottom right inside decoration board 3171, back front bottom right outside decoration board 3172, back front bottom logo On the decorative substrate 3173, electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with other decorative substrates are screen-printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (eg, yellow). is applied by As a result, the characters and symbols can be made inconspicuous through the decorative body provided in front, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be reliably exhibited.

It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower-middle decorative board 3168 are top-view type LEDs. On the other hand, it is mounted on the back front bottom left interior decoration board 3169 , the back front bottom left exterior decoration board 3170 , the back front bottom right interior decoration board 3171 , the back front bottom right exterior decoration board 3172 , and the back front bottom logo decoration board 3173 . The plurality of LEDs are side-view type LEDs.

In these decorative boards, non-light-emitting members other than LEDs (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (rear surface) so as not to interfere with the light-emitting decoration. there is

Back front lower middle decoration 3161, back front lower left inner decoration 3163, back front lower left outer decoration 3164, back front lower right inner decoration 3165, back front lower right outer decoration 3166, back front lower logo decoration 3167 is located above the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 from the upper end, as shown in FIG. As a result, the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 is invisible from the player's side (front). In addition, the back front lower middle decoration 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166 each have an upper end. 160, are located below the lower end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and are spaced left and right so as to correspond to each line group 3114 forming the second pattern 3112. placed in the direction

More specifically, the back front bottom middle decoration 3161 is in the third line group 3114c, the back front bottom left inner decoration 3163 is in the second line group 3114b, and the back front bottom left outer decoration 3164 is in the first line group 3114a. , the back front lower right inner decoration 3165 is provided corresponding to the fourth line group 3114d, and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166 is provided corresponding to the fifth line group 3114e. Therefore, the back front lower middle decoration 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166 emit light (upper end When only the part or the whole emits light, the lines 3113 of the second pattern 3112 are displayed as if the back front lower middle decoration 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration 3164, The light from the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 can make the player feel the illusion of light emitting display, and the light emitting performance not found in the past pachinko machines is played. can show people.

The back front bottom effect unit 3160 includes a back front bottom middle decoration board 3168, a back front bottom left inside decoration board 3169, a back front bottom left outside decoration board 3170, a back front bottom right inside decoration board 3171, and a back front bottom right inside decoration board 3171. A light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and a light guide plate lower side are provided behind the decorative board 3172 and the back front and lower logo decorative board 3173 to display the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 with light emission (light emitting decoration). A right decorative substrate 3175 is provided (see FIG. 156(a)).

The light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decoration substrate 3175 have five LED groups 3177 each composed of five LEDs 3176 . The five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in the order of first LED 3176a, second LED 3176b, third LED 3176c, fourth LED 3176d, and fifth LED 3176e from the right. Each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. From the left, the first LED group 3177a, the second LED group 3177b, the third LED group 3177c, the fourth The LED group 3177d and the fifth LED group 3177e are arranged in this order.

LEDs 3176 of a first LED group 3177a and a second LED group 3177b are mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 of the light guide plate. LEDs 3176 of a third LED group 3177c, a fourth LED group 3177d, and a fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate.

A plurality of LEDs 3176 mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 of the light guide plate and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate are side-view type full-color LEDs. The surfaces of the light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decoration substrate 3175 are coated with a white solder resist (protective material). The lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate is made inconspicuous. In addition, on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as the mounted LED 3176 and other decorative substrates are added to indicate brightness and saturation. It is applied by screen printing using high color (eg yellow) ink. As a result, letters and symbols can be made inconspicuous through the decorative body provided in front, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be reliably exhibited.

The light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 light up the first LED 3176a in each LED group 3177, the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. can be displayed by light emission (light emission decoration). Moreover, when the second LED 3176b is caused to emit light, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by light emission (light emission decoration). Further, when the third LED 3176c is caused to emit light, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by light emission (light emission decoration). Furthermore, when the fourth LED 3176d is caused to emit light, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by light emission (light emission decoration). Moreover, when the fifth LED 3176e is caused to emit light, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by light emission (light emission decoration).

As a result, each of the plurality of lines 3113 forming the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be independently luminous-displayed (luminous decoration), and a variety of luminous effects can be presented to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the back front bottom effect unit 3160 includes a back front bottom middle decoration body 3161, a back front bottom left inner decoration body 3163, a back front bottom left outer decoration body 3164, a back front bottom right inner decoration body 3165, and a back front bottom right inner decoration body 3165. Decoration 3166, back front bottom logo decoration 3167, back front bottom middle decoration board 3168, back front bottom left inside decoration board 3169, back front bottom left outside decoration board 3170, back front bottom right inside decoration board 3171, back front bottom It supports a right outer decoration substrate 3172, a back front lower logo decoration substrate 3173, a light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3174, a light guide plate lower right decoration substrate 3175, etc., and has a flat unit base 3178 elongated in the left and right direction. . Near the left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178, the lower ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 are attached.

In addition, the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 receives the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the lower substrate holder 1200. A second discharge passage 3182 that receives the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 and discharges it to the lower substrate holder 1200, and a game ball B received in the second start port 2004 of the first attacker unit 2400. a third discharge passage 3183 for discharging to the lower substrate holder 1200, and a fourth discharge passage 3184 for receiving the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharging it to the lower substrate holder 1200. , and a fifth discharge passage 3185 for receiving the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharging it to the substrate holder 1200 below.

The first discharge passage 3181 is provided with three delivery openings corresponding to the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning opening sensors 3001 are provided corresponding to each of the delivery openings. It is A first starting port sensor 3002 is provided in the second discharge passage 3182 .

The back front bottom effect unit 3160 includes a back front bottom middle decoration 3161, a back front bottom left inner decoration 3163, a back front bottom left outer decoration 3164, a back front bottom right inner decoration 3165, and a back front bottom right outer decoration. The lower part of the game area 5a can be decorated with the body 3166 and the back front and lower logo decoration body 3167, the appearance can be improved, and the player can be entertained by the lighting performance by decorating them with light emission. can. In addition, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 can be rotated by the back front lower rotation drive motor and can be moved up and down by the back front lower elevation drive motor 3162, so that the player can be entertained by the movable effect. .

In addition, the back front and bottom effect unit 3160 can cause the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 to emit light by using the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175. The player can be entertained by the lighting effect by 3112.例文帳に追加

[5-9b. Behind-the-scenes performance unit]
Next, the back-post effect effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 149 and the like. The back rear effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear upper part of the back front effect unit 3100 in the back box 3010 . The back-back-up effecting unit 3200 includes a back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 that is rotatable around a laterally extending axis and that can be raised and lowered, and a back-front-left decorative body of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120. A back left side decorative body 3220 having three back left band decorative portions 3221 extending in the front-rear direction so as to continue from the three back front left band decorative portions 3127c of the base 3127, and a back front right side decorative body 3220. A back right side having three back right side band decorative portions 3231 extending in the front-rear direction so as to continue from the three back side right side band decorative portions 3147a in the back front right side decoration base 3147 of the decoration unit 3140. and a side decoration 3230 (see FIG. 131).

The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided on the rear upper first decoration part 3211 (see FIG. 129 etc.) in which five 7-segment display parts are arranged horizontally, and on the back side of the rear upper first decoration part 3211. and a rear upper second decorative portion 3212 (see FIG. 162) in which predetermined characters (here, “JACKPOT”) are arranged in rows.

In the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 of the rear upper movable decoration 3210, each segment in the five 7-segment display portions can emit light independently, and various characters, numbers, A pattern, etc. can be displayed. As a result, the expectation of whether or not the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is a "big hit". can be displayed. In addition, each character of the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 can emit light independently.

In a normal state, the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is in a raised position with the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 directed forward. This rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, or V According to the acceptance (distribution) of the game ball B to the winning opening 2007, it rotates 180 degrees around the axis extending to the left and right to turn the back rear upper second decorative part 3212 forward or descend from the raised position. It moves to a position (see FIGS. 161 and 162).

According to this back rear upward movable decorative body 3210, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player by rotating or moving up and down, thereby amusing the player and suppressing the decline in interest. be able to.

The three back left band decorative portions 3221 of the back left side decorative body 3220 are the three back front left band decorative portions 3127c extending leftward and rightward from the back front left decorative body base 3127 of the back front left decorative unit 3120. They are provided so as to extend rearward from the respective right ends. The back rear left band decorative portion 3221 is capable of emitting light independently, and is capable of emitting light so that the light flows in the front-rear direction.

The three rear right band decorative portions 3231 of the rear right side decorative body 3230 are the three rear right band decorative portions 3147a extending leftward and rightward from the rear front right decorative body base 3147 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140. They are provided so as to extend rearward from the respective right ends. The back rear right band decorative portion 3231 can emit light independently and can emit light so that the light flows in the front-rear direction.

[5-9c. Back, back and bottom production unit]
Next, the back/back/lower effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to 135 and the like. The back rear lower effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached below the back rear upper effect unit 3200 behind the back front effect unit 3100 in the back box 3010 .

The back-rear-lower effect unit 3300 includes a back-rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and a back-rear-left movable ornamental body 3301 and a back-rear left movable ornamental body 3301, which are supported so as to be rotatable about axes in the front-rear direction at the base end sides adjacent to each other in the left and right directions and also supported so as to be vertically movable. It has a rear right movable decoration 3302 . The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 are formed so as to rotate in directions opposite to each other as the base end side moves up and down.

In a normal state, the back-left movable decorative body 3301 and the back-right movable decorative body 3302 are rotated in the direction in which the respective tip sides are separated from each other, and are hidden behind the back-front effect unit 3100 and forward (game). (See FIG. 129, etc.).

The back rear left movable decoration 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration 3302 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. In response, the tip side rotates and rises around the base end side so as to move upward, and the right side of the back rear left movable decoration 3301 and the left side of the back rear right movable decoration 3302 come into contact with each other. It will be in a state of being in contact. As a result, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 are integrated to form one large decorative body, and the appearance position is visible from the front (see FIG. 163). ).

As a result, the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear right movable decoration 3302 appear in the center, and a large decoration designing the letter "A" appears in the center, thereby surprising the player. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by making people think that something good will happen to them. The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are provided with a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. and attract the player's interest.

As shown in FIG. 167, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 are positioned so as to overlap behind the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 in the appearance position state. As a result, the large decoration formed by the rear-left movable decoration 3301 and the rear-right movable decoration 3302 can be illuminated by the first pattern 3111, so that the rear-left movable decoration 3301 and the rear-right movable decoration can be illuminated. The three-dimensional decoration by the body 3302 and the planar light emission display by the first pattern 3111 can show the player a deep decoration, which can give a strong impact to the player and arouse the interest of the player. It is possible to strongly attract the player and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 168 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back rear upper first decorative portion of the back rear upper movable decoration in the rear rear upper effect unit of the back unit is moved to the lowered position while facing forward. . FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper second decorative portion is directed forward while the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper effect unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position. . FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-left movable decoration and the rear-right movable decoration in the rear-lower effect unit of the rear unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-front-lower middle decoration body in the back-front-lower effect unit of the back-front-lower effect unit of the back unit is raised.

FIG. 165 shows the back front left logo decoration part, the back front upper left logo decoration part, the back front left sub-decorative part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front effect unit of the back unit. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where it made. FIG. 166 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission. FIG. 167 shows that the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission, and the back rear left movable decoration and the back rear right movable decoration in the back rear bottom effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board showing the state where the second pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state , as shown in FIG. 134, a back front left decoration unit 3120, a back front right decoration unit 3140, and a back front bottom effect unit of the back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are passed through them. 3160 back front bottom middle decoration 3161, back front bottom left inner decoration 3163, back front bottom left outer decoration 3164, back front bottom right inner decoration 3165, back front bottom right outer decoration 3166, back front bottom logo The decoration body 3167, the back rear upper movable decoration body 3210 of the back rear upper production unit 3200, the back rear left side decoration body 3220, and the back rear right side decoration body 3230, etc. can be visually recognized well, and the center function is provided. Through the frame of 2500, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

More specifically, the back front left first decoration 3124 and the like of the back front left decoration unit 3120 are located near the left side of the center accessory 2500, and about half of them are located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. . In addition, the back front right first decorative body 3144 and the like of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are located near the right side of the center accessory 2500 and partly located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The back front and bottom effect unit 3160 extends to the left and right at the bottom of the game area 5a, can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center role 2500, and partly passes through the frame of the center role 2500. can be visually recognized.

In addition, the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front-lower effect unit 3160 is located above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 . The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 are located above the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500 . The back front lower right inner decoration 3165 and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166 are located above the big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500 . The upper part of the back front lower middle decoration 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166 is the center function. It is located within the 2500 frame. The back front bottom logo ornament 3167 is located outside the center accessory 2500 and at the bottom left corner of the game area 5a.

In addition, since the rear rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear rear upper effect unit 3200 is positioned at the raised position, it extends to the left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the horizontal direction is transparent. It can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a part can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has a rear upper first decorative portion 3211 having a plurality of seven-segment portions directed forward.

The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-back-lower effect unit 3300 are in a retracted position behind the rear-front-lower effect unit 3160, and are visible from the front (player's side). Impossible.

The game board 5 performs the back front performance of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A unit 3100, a rear-back upper effect unit 3200, a rear-back lower effect unit 3300, and the like perform predetermined movable effects and light-emitting effects.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back rear upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, it has five 7 segment parts. With the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 facing forward, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position. As a result, most of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 can be visually recognized in good condition. At this time, by variably displaying the five 7-segment portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, and the five 7-segment portions can display desired numbers and patterns. It is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not it is displayed.

In addition, as an effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, after moving the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 to the lowered position while facing forward as described above, as shown in FIG. Next, the second decorative portion 3212 having a plurality of character strings is turned forward by 180 degrees around the horizontal axis. As a result, since the characters "JACKPOT" face forward, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a "jackpot", and expectations for an advantageous game state ("jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by increasing the feeling.

Furthermore, as an effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around the axis in the left and right direction, the middle of the rear upper first decoration part 3211 and the rear upper second decoration part 3212 Either the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 or the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 may be rotated forward and stopped by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation. As a result, depending on whether or not the "JACKPOT" of the rear upper second decoration part 3212 faces forward, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited, heighten the player's expectation, and suppress the decline in interest. can be made

In addition, as an effect using the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, while in the state of the raised position, it is rotated 180 degrees around the axis in the horizontal direction and the rear upper second decoration part 3212 is turned forward. You can do it.

Further, as an effect using the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 of the back rear bottom effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. From the state of the retracted position, the proximal ends are rotated in directions opposite to each other around the axes extending back and forth so that the respective distal ends come into contact with each other. to the spawn position where it abuts. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 form one large decorative body in which the letter "A" is designed to be displayed in the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Since it will appear in the center of the player, it can greatly surprise the player, attract the player's interest strongly, and make the player think that something good will happen. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as an effect using the back-front-lower middle decoration body 3161 in the back-front-lower effect unit 3160 of the back-front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. or rotate it. As a result, the back, front, bottom, middle decorative body 3161 rotates in the lower part of the center in the game area 5a, so that the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and have a sense of anticipation for the game. can be raised. In addition, since the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 is provided behind the stage 2513 directly above the first starting port 2002, the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 rotates and moves up and down, thereby allowing the game to be played. A player can be urged to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002, and the game ball B hitting operation inherent in the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed.

Further, as an effect using the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 3130, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, the back front left belt decoration part 3127c, etc. are caused to emit light. A decorative lighting effect can be performed. For example, in the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d are sequentially arranged. By luminous decoration, it is possible to show a luminous effect like a neon sign that flows forward and backward, and the player can be entertained.

Although illustration is omitted, the back-front-right decoration unit 3140 can perform the same light-emitting effect as the back-front-left decoration unit 3120, so that the player can be entertained.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs of the back front right first decoration substrate 3148, the back front right second decoration substrate 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decoration substrate 3150 in the front right decoration unit 3140 are caused to emit light to produce the first pattern. 3111 is light-emitting (light-emitting decoration). As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and in the center of the game area 5a, a large first pattern 3111 in which the letter "A" is designed is displayed by light emission, so that the player can be surprised. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making the player think that something good will happen.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. The ornament 3302 is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. As a result, the first pattern 3111 and the large ornaments made up of the back-rear left movable ornament 3301 and the back-rear right movable ornament 3302 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to entertain the player and make the player think that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur, and the game can be played. can raise expectations for

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the second pattern 3112 is displayed by light emission (light emission decoration). As a result, the back front bottom middle decorative body 3161, the back front bottom left inner decorative body 3163, the back front bottom left outer decorative body 3164, the back front bottom right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front bottom right inner decorative body 3165 in the back front bottom effecting unit 3160 Since a plurality of lines 3113 extending upward from the upper parts of the five decorations of the decorations 3166 are displayed by light emission, the player is given a light emission effect like a searchlight from below on a concert stage. The inside of the game area 5a can be displayed gorgeously to entertain the player.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. The lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 may be decorated with light emission at the upper end portion or as a whole. Alternatively, the decorative body positioned below the line group 3114 displayed in the second pattern 3112 may be decorated with light emission. As a result, the lines 3113 forming the second pattern 3112 are formed into a back front bottom middle decoration 3161, a back front bottom left inner decoration 3163, a back front bottom left outer decoration 3164, and a back front bottom right inner decoration 3165. , the back front lower right outer decoration 3166, etc. can make the player feel as if they are illuminated by the light from the decorations, so that the player can be entertained by seeing an unprecedented luminescence effect. can.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 may be illuminated, and the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 may be moved to the lowered position. As a result, the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 can be shown to the player as if it were illuminated by a searchlight from below, so that the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 can be displayed gorgeously and enjoyed. can.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately combine the light emitting effect and the movable effect as described above, as well as the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195. FIG.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit 1310d, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and errors, and a game board 5 A base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed by division is provided. The main control MPU 1310a has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in a started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main A control built-in hard random number circuit” is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. An opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2801 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate 2003, and a game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005. A large winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the , a winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006, and a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2007. , a loss opening sensor 3004 for detecting the game ball B received in the loss opening 2008, an out sensor 664 for detecting the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, and a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting illegal magnetism within the game area 5a. , and vibration sensors for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5, and the like are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Detection signals from a setting key switch 1311a and a setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame open switch and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (i.e., through the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 as they are), they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starter sensor 3002, and the second starter sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and the main control It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, the general winning gate sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the big winning gate sensor 2402, the prize winning gate sensor 2601, the V winning gate sensor 3003, the losing gate sensor 3004, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , the prize winning opening solenoid 2612, and the V distribution solenoid 3007, through the panel relay board 1710, that is, through the panel relay board 1710; 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special pending number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special pending number indicator, round indicator, Each drive signal is directly output without going through another board. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the big winning sensor 2402, the prize winning sensor 2601, the V winning sensor 3003, the losing sensor 3004, The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the gate 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and the gate sensor Detection of game ball B by 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long service life are used for the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801. FIG.

Also, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the big winning hole sensor 2402 . In addition, since a large amount of game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the game balls B are frequently detected by the out sensor 664. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU 1310 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball A ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extracting operation. , is equipped with

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. input to the MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. A power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and an error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator through the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 through the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (electrical connection is cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the will of the player. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. is electrically connected to the game ball B. , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 195. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In this embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with a discharge control section 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 as well as the firing control by the firing solenoid 542. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, is a peripheral control IC in which CPU, RAM, various I / O interfaces, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various A peripheral control ROM that stores processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC. I have it.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC transmits game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided for the game board decoration drive board. It is transmitted from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or the drive signal to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 are sent to the display control unit serial In addition to transmitting from the I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 to inform that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the performance display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound information to the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. , the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

A sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively.

[7. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 171 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 172 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 . 171, terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are inserted into the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. , but is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 having an open rear side and a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 and an electric It has a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is directly connected, and a base body 1502 which closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

[7-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, and peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape two times larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and connected to the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. there is

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. , bottom side, and right side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e protrude rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is slightly upper right in the center, and the air cooling fan FAN is attached at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, predetermined column-shaped through holes th1 to th4 are inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) (screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan head screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the fan mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front, and volume control buttons. The position corresponding to 2271510d is defined as one closed substantially horizontally long rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with volume control button 2271510d and connector CN1 on top and connectors CN2 to CN7 on the bottom) as a connector recess. 1501ac faces the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to protrude. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment button 2271510d. formed. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control button 2271510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

The cover flat plate 1501a is arranged along its lower side when viewed from the front thereof so that the positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned by 1. Connector recess 1501ad is positioned lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed oblong rectangular regions (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Further, the connector recess 1501ad and the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. are exposed from each other.

Also, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae along its left side when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring draw-out opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is closed and a flexible flat cable (FFC) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected. An abbreviation for Cable, a flexible flat cable has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. )) so that they cannot be touched, the wiring cover body 1503 can function. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and protrudes outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and protrudes outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are opened. are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. By screwing it in, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Become. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where It is Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Wiring patterns 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal round head screw, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face of the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face of the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rf1 to 1530rf having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed toward the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are closed. are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to secure the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other. The seat surface of the pan head screw made by Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal round head screw, thereby grounding the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. A rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side and a rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is designed to be

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (the cover plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By drawing in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume control button 2271510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501 . Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501 The gap formed between the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the gap formed between the volume control button 2271510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gap formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are taken in.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arcuate slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, gaps formed in the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, volume control buttons 2271510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 , a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. , and the area in the gap formed in ). Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , when taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to blow out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes air to be sucked in through the blades. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in opaque black. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e project forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is covered by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is positioned along the lower side at predetermined intervals so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board Terminals of connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of 1510 are inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of peripheral control board 1510 is inserted. 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped due to the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wires to these connectors CN2 to CN7 (positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals). Elongated disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[7-3. Various connectors]
The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, and serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"). ), and a peripheral control IC 1510a in which various I/O interfaces and the like are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, and various controllers that can control the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects performed while the player is waiting). Various control information (peripheral data) stored in a control ROM 1510b, which pre-stores various schedule data (performance data) that defines the progress of programs and performances, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520, is transferred and stored. An SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can be used, a slide-type volume control button 2271510d that can adjust the volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown) are connected to the power supply even when the power is cut off. a backup power source 1510e capable of supplying power, a power source generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power source voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is, as described above, integrated with a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. It has the functions of a peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding functions of various ROMs) and an effect display control unit 1512 (excluding functions of various ROMs).

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 includes the functions of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the functions of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above. Each of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, using SPI communication and I2C communication, electrical drive sources provided on the game board 5 (for example, various motors and various solenoids, communicating via the connector CN6.) and door frames Send drive data to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or send drive data to the game board 5 side light emission data to the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side , receives signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (communicating via connector CN6) as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via connector CN3 are communicating.) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate of SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate of I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from GPIO to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530 are further provided. I have. A surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 . A surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded Display Port), and clockless systems. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there are LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , is equipped with The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24 V, +12 V, and +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via an interface 635 . The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which +5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which +24V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +24V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The provided special connector SCN4 has a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are so structured that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs respectively, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connectors SCN4 provided on the 1530x are sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. are mated. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is oriented forward and backward when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the direction of the back and front of the machine 1 . The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. , even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 will be the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of 1501a.

The special connector SCN4 socket on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the special connector SCN2 plug on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the plug and the socket are connected. Mate. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket moves forward and backward (pachinko machine 1 The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the housing. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the .

Here, the reason for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral data ROM 1520a (function of the image ROM of the effect display control section 1512 described above, etc.). including.). Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effects images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce the cost, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520 a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 socket on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the mounting surface 1510x. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, along with this peripheral control board 1510, the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is absorbed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the game effect (for example, An image to convey that a jackpot game state will occur which is more advantageous than the normal state, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey the fact that the game is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 socket provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510x, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 must be fixed to the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. By adopting the special connector SCN4 socket provided with a floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed into the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body can be operated) can be attached to the game board 5. It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[7-4. Assembling method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. The mounting surface 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. . As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made by the manufacturer and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are dimensional. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In the state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is covered with a metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other (surface contact). The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y. As described above, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are brought into a conducting state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, for connecting a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 through the wire lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 respectively from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 to the rear, whereby the wiring cover body is assembled. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) when viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the side) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

Among the above-described assembling methods, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the inner space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is first placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side of the cover body 1501.) side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is (located close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when the body 1501 is viewed from the back). In the procedure for mounting various substrates as described above, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when the plugs and sockets are pushed in can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are, for example, multiple types of methods of video signals input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is employed, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is sent to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "noise countermeasure effect by peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, there is no need to equip each substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which contributes to cost reduction of each substrate.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the status of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, multidirectional angles In order to confirm the state of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the top, they are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state when +5 V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. , +5V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b. It can contribute to the improvement of visibility.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. can be checked through a vent 1501az having a In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is kept lit while +24 V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Originally, it has a function to check (monitor) the state that +24V is supplied, but the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ) 1520x has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the board-to-board connector, so that the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 The special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x can contribute to improving the visibility of the board-to-board connector.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) are distributed and arranged so that As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be performed using a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having the function as a spotlight, the board-to-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is now possible to contribute to the improvement of sexuality.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have the product numbers and numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c1, 1510c2 are designed so that the type and the status of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the status of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thus, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state when +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 through the interface board 635. Therefore, the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, the SDRAM 1510c1, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin.

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

In the present embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and of a type with weak directivity. is adopted, it is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By turning on the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the area on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the emitted light and direct it toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflecting portions (not shown) may be colored paint having a bright color such as white, or colored paint having gloss, or a metallic sheet having luster may be adhered.

In the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. , the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become noise sources and be affected by noise. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is employed. As a result, noise entering through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like. Noise can be removed by flowing to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

[7-5. Implementation of control ROM]
Here, a method of mounting the control ROM 1510b on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. FIG. 173 is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and a top view (b) showing a state in which a control ROM having a leadless package is attached to the ROM socket. FIG. 174 is a view in the direction of arrow P in FIG. 173(a). FIG. 175 is a through-hole cross-sectional view showing an overview of the positional relationship between the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board and the through-holes formed in the conversion board. FIG. 176 is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM having a leadless package and a ROM socket mounted on a conversion board, and a top view (a) of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket ( b).

First, as shown in FIGS. 173 to 176, a plurality of rectangular pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the control ROM 1510b is arranged. are arranged in two rows spaced apart by Specifically, the pad 1510v is a read-type ROM to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package (SSOP (Shrink Small Outline Package), hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "lead-type package") is detachable. They are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals respectively projecting outward from both longitudinal side surfaces of the socket. The lead terminals of the lead-type ROM socket are soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the lead-type ROM socket is connected to the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. ) is fixed at 1510x. Note that the pad 1510v is arranged near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, which is the electronic component mounted on the front surface, the part number of the electronic component on the front surface and the area indicating the position of the electronic component on the front surface. A surface that indicates the attributes of electronic components (furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic components, the size of the front electronic components, the mounting direction of the front electronic components, and the model of the front electronic components). The side labeling portion is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a white paint that stands out against the green (for example, the part number 1510v1 of the control ROM 1510b in FIG. 173(b), the control ROM 1510b 1510v2 (the inner area indicated by the symbol indicating the four corners (L-shaped symbol)) 1510v2, mounting direction of the control ROM 1510b (mounting direction, symbol indicating the position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (Δ))) 1510v3).

On the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "non-mounting side" as the side on which the control ROM 1510b is not mounted) 1510y, resistors, capacitors, various electronic components mounted on the back side are mounted. In addition to the IC, the part number of the back side electronic component, the attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the back side electronic component is arranged (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, The mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components and the model number of the back-side electronic components may be included. It is printed on the resist by silk printing.

In this embodiment, the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package has a storage capacity of 256 Mbits, and has 35 lead terminals extending outward from both sides in the longitudinal direction (70 lead terminals in total on both sides). ) stands out.

The control ROM 1510b has a lead-type package, but in the event of a supply shortage or discontinuation of production, it is necessary to replace it with another package. However, when the package is changed, a leadless type (so-called LGA (Land Grid Array)) package (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "leadless type package") is replaced with a leadless type package. Since the lead terminals do not protrude from the side surface and the connection terminals are arranged on the bottom surface of the leadless type package, it is necessary to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v. For that reason, it is necessary to manufacture the peripheral control board 1510 even though there are no electrical problems with the other circuits.

Therefore, the pads 1510v are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals protruding outward from both longitudinal side surfaces of a lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached. 1510x are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and by changing the object to be soldered to the pad 1510v, a mechanism capable of coping with the change of the package is adopted. In other words, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v on the peripheral control board 1510 and the routing of the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v (shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v, 35 pads 1510v per row are arranged in two rows separated by a predetermined distance dimension, and the peripheral control board It is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of 1510 .

The control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package has a total of 70 lead terminals as described above, while the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless-type package are located on the bottom surface of the leadless-type package. 56 (connection terminals may be less than 56 in some cases) are arranged to reduce the number of terminals. These are a power supply terminal electrically connected to an external control power supply, a ground terminal electrically connected to the ground (circuit ground) (GND), and an unconnected NC terminal. This is because the number of .

When the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed from a lead type package to a leadless type package, as shown in FIG. This can be handled by using conversion boards 1510t that change the number. The ROM socket 1510s is a leadless type control ROM 1510b that can be attached and detached using a dedicated tool, and is mainly composed of a mounting portion 1510sa, a pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb and 1510sb, and a plurality of lead terminals 1510sc. ing. A control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is mounted on the mounting portion 1510sa, and the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is mounted on the mounting portion 1510sa by the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb and 1510sb. When the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed and held on the placing portion 1510sa, the top surface of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is opened. is rotated and held so that a force acts toward the bottom surface.

By closing the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, the force acting on the top surface of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package toward the bottom surface is maintained, and the leadless package mounted on the mounting portion 1510sa is maintained. The 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the control ROM 1510b having a type package and one ends of the corresponding lead terminals 1510sc (56 terminals) are kept electrically connected.

The 56 lead terminals 1510sc are fixed by soldering to the pads 1510ta (56) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t formed to correspond to the lead terminals 1510sc.

The shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, 2.5 mm×0.5 mm). The shape is the same as the rectangular shape), the size is the same, and the distance dimension between pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (for example, 0.8 mm). The distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is the same as the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510. small in comparison.

The external shape of the conversion board 1510t is a plate having a rectangular shape, which is larger than the external shape of the IC package, and is almost the same as the external shape of the lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having the lead-type package is attached and detached. there is

The plate thickness of the conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the plate thickness (1.6 mm) of the peripheral control board 1510. , non-mounting surface) 1510y, a green resist layer is formed by applying a green resist solution on a layer (copper plane) in which pads 1510ta, wiring patterns, and lands are formed. . The conversion substrate 1510t has through holes (hereinafter referred to as "through holes") having lands electrically connecting wiring patterns formed on a front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and a rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty. ) are formed, and the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper to have conductivity. The holes of the through holes other than the end face through holes 1510tb to be described later are filled with an insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin blocking the holes of the through holes are the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface). ) are processed so as to be flush with 1510ty, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that blocks the through-hole are completely covered with a green coating film together with the land ("resin filling"). called).

As shown in FIG. 174, control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package protrudes outward from both longitudinal side surfaces of the lead-type ROM socket to which the conversion board 1510t is attached and detached. Semicircular end face through holes 1510tb are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of lead terminals, and the inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb are plated with copper to have conductivity. The end-face through-hole 1510tb is shaped into a semi-circular shape by router processing after being formed into a circular shape during manufacturing. In addition, lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t in the end surface through hole 1510tb.

End face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the conversion board 1510t are arranged at the same positions as the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package. ) is the same (for example, 0.8 mm) as the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between pads 1510v formed in 1510x.

As described above, the difference between the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package and the control ROM 1510b having a leadless-type package is that the control ROM 1510b is electrically connected to an external control power supply and the ground (circuit ground). This is the number of ground terminals electrically connected to (GND) and the number of NC terminals that are not connected (non-connected). For this reason, on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package are provided, and the number of power supply terminals, ground terminals, and NC terminals is increased. A wiring pattern is routed so as to be electrically connected to end surface through holes 1510tb so as to match the layout of lead terminals of a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package.

Returning to FIG. 173, a total of 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t, a total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion substrate 1510t, As shown in FIG. 173(b), regarding the positional relationship, the point (central point) where the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right sides. and a point (center point) where a line connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides of the ROM socket 1510s and a line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the ROM socket 1510s coincide with each other (including cases where they almost coincide with each other). , the pad 1510ta and the end face through hole 1510tb are spaced apart with a predetermined distance dimension zd as a clearance so that they do not come into electrical contact with each other.

A total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t are formed by inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb and pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. are soldered, the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact (that is, the conversion board 1510t is connected to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( (mounting surface) 1510x and fixed in a state without a gap).

The surfaces of the exposed copper portions on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are coated with solder (coated with solder) by a solder liber, and are exposed. The surface of the copper part is protected and treated to improve wettability during mounting. A water-soluble flux may be used as the solder liber for the conversion board 1510t.

The lands of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are connected to the inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb and the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. are soldered, they are in surface contact with pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and are electrically connected. This is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface of the pad 1510v is treated with a solder re-veler and preliminarily coated with solder (coated with solder). The lands of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of 1510t are also treated with a solder reveler and are preliminarily coated with solder (coated with solder). When the inner peripheral wall 1510tba and the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 are soldered, the end surface through-holes 1510tb formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t. This is because the lands are in surface contact with the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The solder liberer for the peripheral control board 1510 may be water soluble flux.

Although lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t in the end surface through-hole 1510tb, the lands may not be formed. In this case, a clearance is predetermined so that the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the end face through hole 1510tb and the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the end face through hole 1510tb do not electrically contact each other. Preferably, they are spaced apart with a distance dimension zd (eg, 0.5 mm or greater). In this case, lower pads electrically connected to the lower ends of the end surface through holes 1510tb may be formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. The shape of this lower pad is smaller than the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (eg, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm×0.5 mm) (eg, 1 mm square). 0.5 mm to 1.6 mm×0.5 mm to 0.55 mm), and the distance dimension between the pads (so-called pitch) is the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. is the same as (eg, 0.8 mm). As described above, this lower pad is coated with solder by a solder liber, and is processed to protect the surface of the exposed copper portion and improve wettability during mounting. It has been subjected. Even with this configuration, the lower pad electrically connected to the lower end side of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t is located on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb. and the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact with the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 when soldering. becomes electrically conductive. Further, with this configuration, pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 are connected to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion substrate 1510t and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) of the conversion substrate 1510t. ) It is possible to further increase the peel strength with which the pad 1510v is peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 when the lower pad formed on 1510ty is soldered.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510t of the conversion board 1510t, in addition to the ROM socket 1510s which is the surface-side mounted electronic component, the surface side such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged. A surface that indicates the attributes of electronic components (furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic components, the size of the front electronic components, the mounting direction of the front electronic components, and the model of the front electronic components). The side notation part is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with white paint that stands out against green (for example, the part number 1510s1 of the ROM socket 1510s, the position where the ROM socket 1510s is arranged) (inside area indicated by symbols indicating four corners (L-shaped symbol)) 1510s2, mounting direction of ROM socket 1510s (mounting direction, symbol indicating arrangement position of first terminal (triangle symbol (Δ))) 1510s3).

The number of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is 56 in total, while the number of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is 56 in total. The number is 70, which is larger than the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t. Further, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510, as described above. and have the same size. Furthermore, the contact area (bonding area) between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is equal to the end surface through-hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion substrate 1510t. The contact area between the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the conversion board 1510t and the land formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Therefore, the lands formed on the inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion substrate 1510t and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t (or on the lands) are small. The bonding strength between the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. It is higher than the bonding strength with

Therefore, when the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s are soldered to the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, the peel strength at which the pads 1510ta are separated from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is Pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the control substrate 1510 are soldered to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion substrate 1510t and the land formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t. The peeling strength of the pad 1510v from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 is smaller than that in this case.

In other words, when an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t are separated from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( The surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s is weaker than the peeling strength of the pads 1510v formed on the mounting surface 1510x from the base material of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the pads 1510ta formed in 1510t can be peeled off from the base material of the conversion substrate 1510t, the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion substrate 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t It is possible to prevent the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the lands to be formed from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Damage can be prevented.

On the other hand, the soldered portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t is a thin metal wire and is easily deformed when force is applied to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s in the peeling direction. An extra load applied to each of the lead terminals 1510sc increases, and a force is applied to peel off the pads 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t and the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, pattern peeling is likely to occur in the soldered portion on the ROM socket 1510s side having thin metal wires, but the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the Soldering between the lands (or the above-described lower pads instead of the lands) formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. part) can be said to have a low probability of pattern peeling.

In this way, the ROM socket 1510s is not directly mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, thereby reducing damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s. can do. Therefore, the mounting method of the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed to a new mode, and the convenience can be improved.

In addition, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x and back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are different from each other as described above. In addition, a green resist layer is formed with a green coating film to form a uniform color. In this way, by using the same color (green) for the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t, the presence of the conversion board 1510t can be made difficult for the peripheral control board 1510 to recognize, and the conversion board 1510t is not subject to fraud. It can be difficult to have the recognition of

In addition, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the mounting direction (mounting direction, symbol indicating the arrangement position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (Δ))) 1510v3 of the control ROM 1510b is indicated against the green color of the resist. It is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a conspicuous white paint. As a result, when the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are of the same color (green), it is difficult to determine the arrangement direction of the conversion board 1510t during mounting. The direction of the conversion board 1510t can be made easier to understand by indicating the position of one pin (arrangement position of the first terminal). In other words, since the peripheral control board 1510 has one pin position (the first terminal arrangement position) and the conversion board 1510t also has one pin position (the first terminal arrangement position), the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t Even if the resists are of the same color (green), the direction of the conversion substrate 1510t can be easily recognized.

The through-holes of the conversion board 1510t excluding the end face through-holes 1510tb are filled with an insulating resin. ) 1510tx and the back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty are processed so that they are flush with each other, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the through-hole hole are coated with a green coating film together with the land of the through-hole. Completely covered (filled with resin). As a result, the exposed metal portion of the through-hole is eliminated, thereby avoiding contact with, for example, the exposed metal portion of the through-hole formed in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing the occurrence of electrical troubles.

This will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 175, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t may or may not coincide with each other. If they happen to overlap, the through-hole formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through-hole formed in the conversion board 1510t are electrically connected to each other, resulting in conduction. The through holes formed in the substrate 1510t are filled with the resin described above.

Further, for example, if a board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted is provided with a connector for connecting to the peripheral control board 1510, and a board that is electrically connected to the connector on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 is considered, the mounted The control ROM installed in the peripheral control board box 1505 approaches the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the influence of external noise becomes strong. On the other hand, in the conversion board 1510t of this embodiment, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are connected by the above-described soldering while they are in surface contact. Therefore, the mounted control ROM 1510b can be kept away from the cover flat plate 1501a (substrate case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control substrate box 1505, thereby making it difficult to be affected by external noise.

The number of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is 70 to correspond to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package. The control ROM 1510b having a package has 56 connection terminals on the bottom of the leadless package (the number of connection terminals may be less than 56). For this reason, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are not connected (non-connected), which are assigned in advance to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, for example. In some cases, the number of NC terminals used is excessive as a result. Due to the presence of such excessive pads 1510v, soldering portions on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 (formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t) 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. can contribute. In other words, the number of NC terminals is intentionally increased, and the soldering portion on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t). The bonding surface of the soldered portion with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is strengthened.

In addition, the inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t are connected to the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. Since they are connected by (copper foil), the bonding strength can be increased compared to soldering using simple pads. The soldering part on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering part between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) is a pad only on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, The soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t (or the lower pad described above instead of the land ) and the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) are connected to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. 1510ty are connected by lands (or the lower pads described above instead of lands) (copper foil). A configuration with high bonding strength can be obtained.

Also, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, 2.5 mm×0.5 mm). 5 mm rectangular shape), the same size, and the same distance dimension between pads (so-called pitch) (for example, 0.8 mm). ), the distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on 1510tx is smaller than the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510. , is longer than the distance dimension (pitch) between the pads. The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t are the same (for example, 0 .8 mm). The distance dimension of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t (that is, the distance dimension between both sides of the conversion board 1510t) is the pad formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Of the distance dimension between two rows of 1510v, it is larger than the inner distance dimension of the pads 1510v between the two rows and smaller than the outer distance dimension of the pads 1510v between the two rows; It is longer than the distance dimension between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. As a result, the lands (or the above-described lower pads instead of the lands) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the peripheral control board 1510 By lengthening the pitch of the joint between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect of preventing the deflection of the peripheral control board 1510 can be enhanced. Further, in order to further enhance the effect of preventing bending of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, the board thickness of the conversion board 1510t can be increased.

Also, the soldered portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldered portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) and the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the conversion board 1510t On the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb, the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 The part to be soldered with the formed pad 1510v) can be surface-mounted in a state in which the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t and the rear surface 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 are in surface contact as described above. It has a configuration that allows As a result, the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 can be electrically connected without a gap, so that the distance between the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 and the cover plate 1501a can be increased. A connection method that is resistant to noise can be obtained.

In addition, the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the peripheral control board 1510 By soldering to pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x, they are electrically connected through this solder. As a result, the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 can be electrically connected without a gap, so that the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be separated. A connection method that is resistant to noise can be obtained.

The through holes of the conversion board 1510t excluding the end face through holes 1510tb are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the holes of the through holes are connected to the surface (mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. ) 1510tx and the back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty are processed so that they are flush with each other, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the through-hole hole are coated with a green coating film together with the land of the through-hole. It is completely covered (filled with resin) and can be surface-mounted in a state where the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the rear surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact, so that the conversion board is connected without gaps. Short circuit between 1510t and peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

In addition, although the control ROM 1510b is attached to and detached from the ROM socket 1510s, there is a possibility that the control ROM 1510b and the wiring pattern may be damaged due to manual intervention. Therefore, when the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t and the wiring pattern formed on the control ROM 1510b or the conversion board 1510t is damaged, the conversion board 1510t is removed from the peripheral control board 1510 and replaced with a new one. , the peripheral control board 1510 can be used as it is (the same one).

Further, only the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, when the ROM socket 1510s or the conversion board 1510t is damaged and replaced, only the minimum unit ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t are required.

In addition, the peripheral control soldered to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. A pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the substrate 1510 is arranged near the peripheral control IC 1510a. Since the peripheral control IC 1510a is an IC having a large package and is a surface-mounted electronic component, such a surface-mounted electronic component is particularly vulnerable to bending of the substrate (connection terminals and lead terminals of the electronic component are (There is a risk that it may peel off from the surface of the substrate). Therefore, by mounting the conversion board 1510t near the peripheral control IC 1510a, the bending of the peripheral control board 1510 can be reinforced.

In addition, even if the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is changed to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless-type package, a conversion board 1510t having a ROM socket 1510s to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless-type package can be attached and detached is mounted. is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v of the peripheral control board 1510 and the There is no need to correct the routing of the wiring pattern (the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pad 1510v become the same), so that they can be used in common.

In addition, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, and when performing a sampling inspection (sample) for inspecting the presence or absence of defects in the manufacturing process, the control ROM 1510b can be removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a dedicated tool. Even when the ROM 1510b is caught by the ROM socket 1510s and an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is as described above. In addition, since the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is smaller than the peel strength with which the peripheral control board 1510 is peeled off from the base material, the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s is soldered to the converter. Pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the substrate 1510t are peeled off from the base material of the conversion substrate 1510t, so that the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 soldered to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion substrate 1510t. Since the pads 1510v formed on the (mounting surface) 1510x can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented. As a result, the conversion board 1510t on which the damaged ROM socket 1510s is mounted is removed from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the conversion board 1510t on which the new ROM socket 1510s is mounted is removed from the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. (Mounting surface) It can be mounted on 1510x and can be used without replacing the peripheral control board 1510 itself with a new peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, since the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and fixed without any gap, the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral It is possible to make it difficult to incorrectly arrange an electronic component with respect to the gap between the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the control board 1510 and the surface 1510x.

Further, when changing from the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless-type package, it is necessary to use the conversion board 1510t as described above, but the plate thickness of the conversion board 1510t is As described above, since the peripheral control board 1510 is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm), the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box). A predetermined height distance from the upper surface of the control ROM 1510b mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 in the sealed state is also converted at the maximum. The thickness is about the thickness of the substrate 1510t, and high noise resistance can be maintained against noise entering from the cover body 1501. FIG.

Further, as described above, the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused or when a sampling inspection (sample) is performed to check for defects in the manufacturing process. be In other words, the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted uses a dedicated tool from the ROM socket 1510s when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, or when performing a sampling inspection (sample) for inspecting the presence or absence of defects in the manufacturing process. removed. When changing from the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, as described above, although it is necessary to use the conversion board 1510t, the lead terminals from the conversion board 1510t are directed to the outside. Therefore, even if a person who removes the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool accidentally drops the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted, Unlike the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, the lead terminals are not bent, so that it can be prevented from becoming unusable.

In addition, as described above, semicircular end surface through holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion substrate 1510t, and the diameter of the end surface through holes 1510tb is equal to the surface (mounting surface) of the conversion substrate 1510t. The width dimension (0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface 1510tx (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm×0.5 mm) is formed to have substantially the same dimension. Alternatively, the diameter of the through hole 1510tb on the end face may be the width dimension (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm×0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t. 0.5 mm) may be larger (eg, 0.6 mm to 0.7 mm). In this case, the end face through hole 1510tb has an arc shape that is shorter than a semicircle.

Pads 1510v are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals protruding outward from both longitudinal side surfaces of a lead-type ROM socket to which control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached. 1510x on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and by changing the object to be soldered to this pad 1510v, a mechanism capable of coping with the change of the package has been adopted. mechanism may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 176(a), lead terminals 1510sc (total of 70 terminals) of a lead-type ROM socket 1510s' to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached are soldered to pads 1510v (that is, A conventional ROM socket 1510s' is used as it is), and a conversion board 1510t' to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on a mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s'. , the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb' and 1510sb' are closed. The mounting portion 1510sa', the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb', and the plurality of lead terminals 1510sc' correspond to the mounting portion 1510sa and the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb of the ROM socket 1510s shown in FIG. 173(a). , 1510sb and the plurality of lead terminals 1510sc, the description thereof is omitted here.

Pads, wiring patterns, and lands to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t'. A green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by coating a layer (copper plane) with a green resist solution. On the conversion substrate 1510t', there are through holes having lands electrically connected to the wiring patterns formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through holes"). ) are formed, and the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper to have conductivity. The holes of the through holes are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin closing the holes of the through holes are flush with the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty'. The lands and the one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the through hole are completely covered with a green coating film (resin filling).

Projections projecting downward are formed at both longitudinal ends of the rear surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t', and pads are formed on the projections. The pads are arranged at positions corresponding to the lead terminals 1510sc' of the ROM socket 1510s', and 35 pads at one end and 35 pads at the other end form a total of 70 pads.

A conversion board 1510t' to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on a mounting portion 1510sa' of a ROM socket 1510s', and a pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb' and 1510sb' are closed. Then, as shown in FIG. 176(b), a point (central point) where a line connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion substrate 1510t' and a line connecting the centers of the left and right sides intersect, The points (center points) where the lines connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides of the ROM socket 1510s and the lines connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the ROM sockets 1510s are arranged to match (or substantially match).

When the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package is changed to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 must be corrected. is briefly described with reference to FIG. 177(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing board management numbers of peripheral control boards. It should be noted that when the components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 are changed, it becomes necessary to change the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 .

At a predetermined position (for example, one of the four corners of the peripheral control board 1510) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. On the copper foil surface to be formed, a region formed by removing the copper foil is formed except for each terminal and wiring pattern, and a common part of the control number ( In the same figure, "XYZA") is used as a board management number, and foil-cut characters KBNUM are formed with a wiring pattern, and a green resist liquid is solidly coated on the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510 to form a foil-cut region KBRGN. The foil-cut characters KBNUM are covered, respectively.

When the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package is changed to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, for example, as shown in FIG. Symbol HKBNUM (alphabet letter A in the figure) is printed (engraved to a predetermined depth from the surface along symbol HKBNUM) following foil-cut characters KBNUM arranged in the box. For each replacement (including repair) of 1510t, a board management number ("XYZAA" in the figure) can be obtained by printing the symbol HKBNUM after the foil-cut characters KBNUM. Note that the board control number may be changed by erasing part of the foil-cut letters with a laser marker, or by both erasing part of the foil-cut letters and adding letters. You can change the control number.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 177(c), the common part of the management number ("XYZ-" in the figure) is used as the board management number, and the foil-cut characters KBNUM are formed in the wiring pattern, and the foil-cut region KBRGN is formed. is another area and forms foil extraction areas RGN1, RGN2 and RGN3 in adjacent areas (immediately below the foil extraction area KBRGN in the figure), and a symbol ( 1510 are formed by wiring patterns, and green resist liquid is applied solidly to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510 to form a foil-extracted region KBRGN and a region RGN1. , RGN2 and RGN3 are covered. Around the regions RGN1, RGN2 and RGN3, perforated holes are formed by a router so that the regions RGN1, RGN2 and RGN3 can be removed from the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. When the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are not removed from the peripheral control board 1510, the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 is "XYZA-ABC". When the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package is changed to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, one, two or all of the regions RGN1, RGN2 and RGN3 are removed from the peripheral control board 1510. By doing so, the board control number can be obtained.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages. It is directly soldered in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 . The surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is covered with a metallic cover member which is crimped so as to sandwich the end piece of the substrate. When mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the board of the power supply creation circuit is not a detachable electronic component. The peripheral control board 1510 itself is replaced instead of being directly soldered in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of 1510 .

In addition, conventionally, there is known a game machine provided with an effect control board on which electronic components such as ROM are mounted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0061], FIG. 5)). However, conventional game machines have room for improvement in the method of mounting electronic components on the control board.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 170, which is an effect control means for controlling game-related effects, is provided. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173 which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173 which is a ROM socket in which a control ROM 1510b of FIG. and a conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted. A surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is a surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 where the control ROM 1510b of FIG. Only the ROM socket 1510s is soldered and mounted on the conversion board 1510t.

In this way, the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, thereby reducing damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s. be able to. Therefore, the mounting method of the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed to a new mode, and convenience can be improved.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173 which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173 which is a ROM socket in which a control ROM 1510b of FIG. and a conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted. A surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is a surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 where the control ROM 1510b of FIG. The conversion board 1510t includes pads 1510ta formed on a surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t shown in FIG. The ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t are connected to the lead terminals 1510sc, which are the lead terminal portions of the ROM socket 1510t, and the first through holes 1510tba of the conversion board 1510t. The peripheral control board 1510 conversion board 1510t is the board surface part of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the peripheral control board shown in FIG. The pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the substrate 1510 and the inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the side through holes 1510tb, which are the second plate surface portion of the conversion substrate 1510t, are connected by soldering (not soldered). electrically connected).

In this way, the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, thereby reducing damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s. be able to. Therefore, the mounting method of the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed to a new mode, and convenience can be improved.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173 which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173 which is a ROM socket in which a control ROM 1510b of FIG. and a conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted. On the conversion board 1510t, a surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. Pads 1510ta and side through-holes 1510tb formed on both sides of a conversion board 1510t, which are second terminals for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the mounting surface on which the ROM sockets 1510s are mounted. A peripheral wall 1510tba is provided. The first terminal portion and the second terminal portion are different aspects, and the second terminal portion is electrically connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the plate surface of the peripheral control board 1510, via solder. It is

In this way, the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, thereby reducing damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s. be able to. Therefore, the mounting method of the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed to a new mode, and the convenience can be improved.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine. First, the power supply board will be explained, and then the backup power supply and the power supply to each control board etc. will be explained. The substrate ground (GND) of various substrates and the substrate ground (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is connected to the power outlet of the island equipment of the game hall. plugged in. In the island facilities of game halls, a system is normally adopted in which AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to one transformer as a group of, for example, four pachinko machines 1 . For example, in an island facility of a game hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in one row, four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group. Since a system is adopted in which AC power (AC 24V) is supplied (by a total of five transformers), each transformer is provided with a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, AC power (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on. is turned off, AC power (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility of the game hall is no longer supplied to the power supply board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered off. The power switch 630a is normally kept in an ON state, and when a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall starts operating, the breaker installed in the game hall is turned on (turned on) to turn on the island of the game hall. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in a facility are turned on all at once. After the end of business hours, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall turns off (turns off) a breaker installed in the game hall to simultaneously cut off the power supply of the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a plurality of rows on the island facilities of the game hall. conduct. For this reason, among the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a row on the island facility of the game hall, when turning on or off the power of the pachinko machines 1 individually, for example, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall performs maintenance. When the power switch 630a is turned off at times, and when the power switch 630a is turned on again after the maintenance is completed, the pachinko machine 1 in which some kind of trouble has occurred is occupied by a game hall clerk or the like to solve the trouble. A staff member turns off the power switch 630a, and when the trouble is solved, turns on the power switch 630a again.

As shown in FIG. 178, the power supply board 630 includes, in addition to a power switch 630a, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power breakdown circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply It has a production circuit 630f and a backup power supply circuit 630h. The AC power supply (24V AC (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V")) supplied from the island facilities of the game hall is supplied to the interface board via the power supply board 630 regardless of whether the power switch 630a is ON/OFF. 635 and supplied from this interface board 635 to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 .

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the power switch 630a, and noise is generated in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. removed. The noise-removed AC 24V is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, where it is rectified (converted from alternating current to direct current (AC-DC conversion)) to become a direct current power supply. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to a power factor correction circuit 630d via a power supply breakdown circuit 630g, and a power factor corrected DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") is created in the power factor correction circuit 630d. be done. The generated +35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, where the +35V ripple is removed and smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power generation circuit 630f.

When the voltage supplied to itself exceeds a predetermined voltage, the power supply breaking circuit 630g causes the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to flow a large current exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current (predetermined breaking current) to melt and cut the fuses from the island equipment of the game hall. It electrically disconnects the supplied AC24V. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element parts of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are fused and the AC 24V to the succeeding fuses is supplied through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. block the

The power generation circuit 630f supplied with the smoothed +35V includes a +5V power generation circuit 630fa, a +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and a +24V power generation circuit 630fc. The +5V power generation circuit 630fa generates DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+5V") from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power generation circuit 630fb generates DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power generation circuit 630fc generates DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power supply line (power supply system) to which +5V is applied and supplied by the power supply board 630 is the +5V power supply line, and the power supply line (power supply system) to which +12V is applied and supplied by the power supply board 630 is the +12V power supply. line, and a power supply line (power supply system) to which +24V is applied and supplied by the power supply board 630 is the +24V power supply line.

[8-2. Backup power]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 controls payout control in payout control board 633. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") built in the payout control MPU 633aa of the unit 633a.

+5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the payout control board 633 . +5V supplied to the payout control board 633 becomes +5V power supply line in the payout control board 633 through the payout control filter circuit 633h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0 is applied to the power supply terminal of +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V from +12V from the payout control board 633 as a local power source to be the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control board side generated +5V") passes through the main control filter circuit 1310h and the main control board side generated +5V power supply in the main control board 1310. line, which is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. The +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 (+5V generated on the main control board side) are electrically are not physically connected and are independent of each other.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633. , and is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 633. That is, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and the power supply of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 A current flows toward the terminal and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1.

In this way, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630, and the payout control substrate 633 returns to the power supply substrate 630 again. With such a connection method, +5V can be supplied and charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate, but the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The storage contents of the payout control built-in RAM are held by.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is built in the main control of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. It is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM and electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310 . That is, the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side) flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction due to the diode MD0. , and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0.

Thus, the capacitor BC0 is an electrical connection method in which +5V (+5V generated by the main control board side) generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. Therefore, +5 V generated on the main control board side is supplied and can be charged. As a result, the +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 633, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is +5V. (main control board side creation +5V), the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main control MPU 1310a is blocked by the diode MD0 and the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The stored contents of the built-in RAM are held.

[8-3. Power supply supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the power supply supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the power supply mainly supplied to a payout control board, and the power supply supplied to a main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are as shown in FIG. In addition, it is supplied to the payout control board 633, and of these three power supplies, two power supplies of +12V and +24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The three types of power sources, +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, the +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630, are supplied to the interface substrate 635. It is also supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothes relay board 105, etc. through the interface board 635, respectively.

Three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, are melted down by overcurrent flowing to these power lines. A +5V fuse (not shown), a +12V fuse (not shown), and a +24V fuse (not shown) may be provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, and the like.

In particular, the +12V power line and the +24V power line are monitored for potential drop by a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as will be described later. When the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a executes the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. The payout control MPU 633aa stops the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) by performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. It will be done.

Therefore, when the +12V fuse (not shown) and the +24V fuse (not shown) are provided in the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., the main control board 1310 constituting the main board , when the payout control board 633 is operating normally, the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame main relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 105, etc. Due to electrical trouble for some reason in the relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., a leakage current or a short circuit may occur, and the interface board 635 and the door frame main relay board 104 , +12V fuses and +24V fuses provided in the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. are blown when an overcurrent flows through the door frame clothing relay board 105 and the like. be able to. This suppresses the decrease in the potential of the +12V power line and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure warning signal is the main control by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. No output to the MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa is required, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the processing when the power is turned off on the main control side in the processing when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

The three power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied to the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 via +5V fuses, +12V fuses, and +24V fuses (not shown). ing.

The capacity of the +5V fuse (not shown) is determined in consideration of the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +5V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. It is preset, and the current can flow up to the +5V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (breaking current). In the +5V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the +5V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the +5V fuse (not shown) melts and power is supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown). cut off the +5V power supply line to the following.

The +12V fuse (not shown) is the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, and is used by subsequent boards such as various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510. The current and the current used by the subsequent device via the peripheral control board 1510 are taken into consideration to set the capacity in advance, and the current is allowed to flow up to the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (breaking current). can be done. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the +12V fuse (not shown) melts the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) and supplies power via the +12V fuse (not shown). cut off the +12V power supply line to the following.

The capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is set in advance in consideration of the current used in subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. Current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (breaking current). In the peripheral control board 1510, when +24V is used and a +24V system driver circuit is provided as an electrical drive source (for example, a drive solenoid), the capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is used as the capacity of the +24V power line on the peripheral control board. The current used by 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 are taken into account and set in advance. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the +24V fuse (not shown) melts the element part of the +24V fuse (not shown) and supplies power via the +24V fuse (not shown). cut off the +24V power supply line to the following.

Note that the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are primary fuses through which the +5V power line, +12V power line, and +24V power line are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 to the succeeding board. Therefore, in order to prevent failures due to the thermal shutdown built into the IC due to the influence of this heat, each electronic component (for example, micro processor, VDP, etc.), and near the connector supplied with +5V, +12V, +24V from the interface board 635 (especially the power supply supplied with +5V, +12V, +24V from the interface board 635). It is preferably located in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the line is connected).

The peripheral control board 1510 supplies DC 3.3V (hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 from +12V supplied through a +12V fuse (not shown). ) is provided. The +3.3V generated by a control power generation circuit (not shown) is supplied to the electronic components of the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). The +3.3V generated by the control power generation circuit (not shown) becomes the +3.3V power supply line in the peripheral control board 1510 via the control power supply fuse (not shown). The control power generation circuit (not shown) supplies +5V power supply lines through +5V fuses (not shown) and/or +24V fuses (not shown) except +12V power supply lines supplied through +12V fuses (not shown). Even if an abnormal current flows to the +24V power supply line supplied to the power supply line and melts down, +12V from the +12V power supply line is used as the local power supply that is the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512. .3V can be generated, the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 do not stop but continue to operate, and when the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown, the +24V system electric drive source Although it becomes difficult to drive (the drive solenoid), the progress of the production can be continued.

In addition to +3.3 V, the control power generation circuit (not shown) also has a plurality of control power sources (for example, DC 1.5 V (hereinafter referred to as " +1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.25V"), etc.). In this case, control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to a plurality of control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, and a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V). A fuse for 5V and a fuse for +1.5V are provided for +1.25V, respectively. Through the fuse for +3.3V, it becomes a +3.3V power supply line, and through the fuse for +1.5V, it becomes a +1.5V power supply line. +1.25V power supply line via +1.25V fuse).

The capacity of the control power supply fuse (not shown) is preset in consideration of the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +3.3V power line. The current can flow up to the +3.3V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the control board around the +3.3V power supply line flows in the control power fuse (not shown), the element part of the control power fuse (not shown) melts and the control power fuse (not shown) is closed. cuts off the +3.3V power supply line to the following that is supplied through . Note that when control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to a plurality of control power supplies (for example, +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, If +1.25 V fuses are provided for +1.25 V), the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by the subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510 are considered. The capacity is set in advance so that a current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (breaking current) of the power supply line peripheral control board of each of the plurality of control power supplies, and the allowable current of each power supply line peripheral control board of the plurality of control power supplies. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the current upper limit flows, the element part of the control power supply fuse (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of control power supplies melts, and the melted control power supply fuse (not shown) blows. Cut off the power supply line of the control power supply to the subsequent supply.

The control power supply fuse (not shown) is the main fuse of the +3.3V power supply line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, and the like. However, it is preferable to place it away from the specific electronic parts so that the thermal shutdown built into the specific electronic parts in the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 does not occur due to the influence of this heat generation. It is preferably arranged near the power generation circuit (in particular, near the terminal that generates +3.3V and supplies it as the +3.3V power line).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses. If the current exceeds the allowable current upper limit (predetermined breaking current for each), it will blow. Unlike resettable fuses, once blown, the power line will continue to be supplied even if the current drops. It is an electronic component that cannot be

The +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 may be lead type fuses instead of SMD type chip fuses. Resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used as +5V fuses, +12V fuses, +24V fuses, and control power fuses (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

Of the three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510, +5V is supplied to an input buffer circuit (not shown) through a +5V fuse (not shown), and +24V is +24V (not shown). +12V is supplied to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that drives and controls the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 via a fuse, and +12V is supplied to the +12V system of the game board 5 through a +12V fuse (not shown). It is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that drives and controls a physical drive source (driving motor), and a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter, may be described as "each decorative board of the game board 5"). ), respectively.

The capacity of the +5V fuse (not shown) is set in advance in the +5V power supply line of the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510, taking into consideration the current used by the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510 itself. Current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the board allowable current of the +5V power supply line (not shown) flows, the +5V fuse (not shown) melts the element part of the +5V fuse (not shown) and supplies power through the +5V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +5V power supply line to the following.

The +12V fuse (not shown) is the current used by the subsequent board itself of the peripheral control board 1510 excluding each decoration board of the game board 5 in the +12V power supply line of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and each decoration board of the game board 5. The capacity is set in advance by taking into account the current used in , and the current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current) after the +12V power supply line. In the +12V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the board following the +12V power supply line flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and the +12V fuse (not shown) is supplied. Cut off the +12V power supply line to the following.

The capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is set in advance in the +24V power supply line of the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510, taking into consideration the current used by the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510 itself. Current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (breaking current). In the +24V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the board following the +24V power supply line flows, the element part of the +24V fuse (not shown) melts and the +24V fuse (not shown) is supplied. Cut off the +24V power supply line to the following.

The +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are fuses for supplying the +5V power line, +12V power line, and +24V power line. Compared to fuses and +24V fuses, the flowing current is small, but the current is large and may generate heat. In order to prevent failures due to shutdown, it is preferable to place them away from electronic components such as a +12V driver circuit (not shown). It is preferable that they are arranged in the vicinity of connectors of terminals to which power lines to which +5V, +12V and +24V from the control board 1510 are supplied are connected.

An input buffer circuit (not shown) receives a control signal (either a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, and removes noise from the input control signal. Then, it outputs to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) and a +12V system driver circuit (not shown). Specifically, the input buffer circuit (not shown) is connected to a plurality of wires (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied through a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected. By removing the intruding noise, the noise tolerance can be improved.

The +24V driver circuit (not shown) includes a driver IC that drives the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and a fuse that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC (hereinafter referred to as "+24V driver circuit (not shown) It is mainly composed of +24V supplied via a +24V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) is the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the +24V driver circuit (not shown) in the +24V power supply line of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. is taken into account and the capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the game board side driving solenoid allowable current upper limit (breaking current). The fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) melts and the element part of the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) melts when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side driving solenoid flows. The +24V power line supplied to the following through a fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit is cut off.

The +12V system driver circuit (not shown) includes a driver IC that drives the +12V system electrical drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC (hereinafter referred to as "+12V system driver circuit not shown. It may be described as "the fuse provided"). +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) is the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown) in the +12V power supply line of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. is taken into account and the capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the game board side drive motor allowable current upper limit (breaking current). The fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) melts and the element part of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) melts when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows. The +12V power supply line to the following which is supplied via a fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is cut off.

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, the +12V fuse, the +24V fuse, the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit, and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit, which are not shown in the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, are surface-mounted. It is a type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse that melts when a current exceeding a predetermined upper limit of allowable current (predetermined breaking current for each) flows. Even if the current drops, it is an electronic component that cannot supply the power line to the following. SMD type chip fuses are used as +5V fuses, +12V fuses, +24V fuses, fuses provided in +24V driver circuits, and fuses provided in +12V driver circuits, which are not shown in the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510. A lead type fuse may be used instead. In addition, as the fuses for +5V, +12V, +24V, +24V driver circuits, and +12V driver circuits (not shown) of the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510, the fuses are SMD type or lead type. A resettable fuse such as a thermistor may be used. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

The +12V supplied to each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is supplied to a plurality of LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as "various LEDs of the game board 5") through +12V fuses (not shown). ) is supplied to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various types of light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting. The LED constant current drive circuit is a sink type constant current drive circuit that can pass constant current to various LEDs of the game board 5, and sets the maximum current to be passed to the various LEDs of the game board 5. and a maximum current setting circuit. If the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit, an input buffer circuit may be provided in the preceding stage of the LED constant current drive circuit.

The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is set in advance in the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the game board 5 in consideration of the current used by each decoration board of the game board 5. Current can flow up to the board allowable current upper limit (breaking current). The +12V fuse (not shown) is supplied through the +12V fuse (not shown) by melting the element portion of the +12V fuse (not shown) when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board flows. Cut off the +12V power supply line to the following.

Note that the +12V fuse (not shown) is a fuse that supplies the +12 power supply line. Compared to the original +12V fuse in the peripheral control board 1510, the current flowing is small, but the current is large and may generate heat. In order to avoid damage to the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board due to the heat generated, it is preferable to place the LEDs away from the LED constant current drive circuit, and near the connector to which +12V is supplied (particularly, It is preferable that it is arranged in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which +12V is supplied is connected.

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 is a surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and has a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). When an excessive current flows, it melts, and unlike a resettable fuse, it is an electronic component that cannot supply the power line to the following even if the current drops once it melts. As the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the game board 5, a lead type fuse may be used in place of the SMD type chip fuse. In addition, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used as +12V fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 . In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

The three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the door frame clothing relay board 105 are supplied to the door frame side drive board (not shown) provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3"). ) and a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “each decorative substrate of the door frame 3”) are supplied with the power required by themselves, and the power supply and corresponding fuses (not shown) are provided on the substrate.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 has a power supply and corresponding fuses (eg, +5V fuse, +24V fuse, +12V fuse), as well as, for example, a +24V electrical drive source (eg, drive solenoid). A fuse provided in a +24V system driver circuit for drive control, a fuse provided in a +12V system driver circuit for drive control of a +12V system electric drive source (for example, a drive motor), and the like are also provided. The capacity of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is set in advance in consideration of the current used by each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply line corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3. Upper limit of allowable current for each power supply line drive board (for example, upper limit of allowable current for door frame side +5V power line drive board (breaking current), door frame side +24V power line drive board allowable current upper limit (breaking current), door frame side +12V power line A current can be supplied up to the drive substrate allowable current upper limit (breaking current). The fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supply are the upper limit of the allowable current of each power line drive board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power line drive board on the door frame side, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, and the door frame side). +12V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit), the element part of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply melts, and the fuse (not shown) corresponding to this melted power supply is supplied. cut off the power supply line to the following.

The fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit take into consideration the current used in the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the door frame side driving solenoid allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid flows, the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit melts the element part of the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit, and the +24V system driver circuit It cuts off the +24V power supply line to the following supplied through the provided fuse. The fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit take into consideration the current used in the +12V electrical drive source (driving motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V driver circuit in the +12V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the door frame side drive motor allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive motor flows, the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit melts the element part of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit, and the +12V system driver circuit It cuts off the +12V power supply line to the following supplied through the provided fuse.

The capacity of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is set in advance in the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the door frame 3, taking into consideration the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3. Therefore, current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current) of the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door-frame-side decorative board flows in the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3, the element part of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 melts. , the +12V power supply line supplied to the following through the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is cut off.

For example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12 V, the door frame 3 is provided with +12 V fuses (not shown). It is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls driving of a drive motor, which is an electric drive source. The +12V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) for driving the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the door frame 3 and a fuse (not shown) for interrupting overcurrent to the driver IC. The +12V supplied through the +12V fuse is supplied to the driver IC through the fuse. The capacity of the +12V driver circuit fuse is set in advance in consideration of the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (driving motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V driver circuit in the +12V power supply line of the drive board. Therefore, current can flow up to the allowable upper limit of door frame side drive motor current (breaking current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current limit of the door frame side drive motor flows through the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit will melt and the +12V system driver circuit fuse Cut off the +12V power supply line to the succeeding supply.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided for the drive board on which the +12V system driver circuit is provided (mounted, mounted). A control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, and this input Noise is removed from the control signal and output to the +12V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3 with multiple wires (harnesses) electrically connected to each other for +5V. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied through a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected. By removing the intruding noise, the noise tolerance can be improved. The same effect (that is, improvement in noise resistance) can be obtained by supplying +12V through a +12V fuse instead of +5V supplied to this resistor.

Further, for example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, the door frame 3 is connected via a +24V fuse (not shown). is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) provided in the . The +24V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) for driving the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) for blocking overcurrent to the driver IC. ing. The +24V supplied through the +24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC through the fuse. The capacity of the +24V driver circuit fuse is set in advance in consideration of the current used in the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power supply line of the drive board. It is set, and the current can flow up to the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit (breaking current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current limit of the door frame side drive solenoid flows through the fuse of the +24V driver circuit, the element of the fuse of the +24V driver circuit melts and the +24V driver circuit fuse Cut off the +24V power supply line to the succeeding supply.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided for the drive board on which the +24V system driver circuit is provided (mounted, mounted). A control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, and this input Noise is removed from the control signal and output to the +24V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit applies +5 V to each of the multiple wires (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the drive boards of the door frame 3 . It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V is applied via a fuse and one end of a resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected, and multiple wires (harness) It is possible to improve the noise resistance by removing the noise that has entered the system. Instead of +5V supplied to this resistor, +24V supplied through a +24V fuse, or +12V supplied through a +12V fuse when +12V is also supplied, will have the same effect (that is, noise immunity). improvement) can be played.

Further, for example, if one decoration substrate, a plurality of decoration substrates, or all the decoration substrates among the decoration substrates of the door frame 3 require +12 V, the door frame 3 is connected via a +12 V fuse (not shown). Multiple LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various LEDs of the door frame 3") Control various light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting is supplied to the LED constant current drive circuit. The LED constant current drive circuit is a sink type constant current drive circuit that can pass a constant current to various LEDs on the door frame 3, and sets the maximum current to be passed to the various LEDs on the door frame 3. and a maximum current setting circuit. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is set in advance in consideration of the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power supply line of the decorative board. breaking current). In the +12V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the decorative board on the door frame side flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and the +12V fuse (not shown) is supplied. Cut off the +12V power supply line to the following.

It should be noted that, among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, one decorative board is not provided with an LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the other decorative board of the door frame 3 is used to drive the one decorative board. When light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is controlled, a +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on one decorative substrate. Further, when the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3, an input buffer circuit may be provided.

In this embodiment, each of the above-described fuses provided on the side of the door frame 3 is a surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and the current exceeding the predetermined upper limit of allowable current (predetermined breaking current) Unlike a resettable fuse, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power supply line to the following even if the current is reduced once it is blown. As the above-described fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, lead type fuses may be used instead of SMD type chip fuses. Moreover, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used as the above-described fuses provided on the door frame 3 side. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

[8-3-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 633h and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 633aa and the like. This payout control filter circuit 633h is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a, the payout control input circuit 633ab, and the like. +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal plate 558 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to a hall computer installed in the game hall. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., from signals output from the external communication circuit 558z. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in the payout control board 633 .

[8-3-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and generates +5V, which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In this embodiment, the +5V created by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power source creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the main control board side created +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310. In addition, the main control board side generated +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side), and removes noise from this +5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, etc., for example. +12V from the payout control board 633, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 633, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure notice signal as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 633aa via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

Thus, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, the +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power substrate 630 generate +5V, Of the three power sources of +12V and +24V, the two power sources of +12V and +24V are, as described above, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. and other various substrates. That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the +12V power supply has the same potential on the various boards, and the +24V power supply has the same potential on the various boards. In addition, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. are at the same potential.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown). A fuse is provided (mounted, mounted), and a +12V fuse and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided (mounted, mounted) on the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510 (mounted, mounted). is being used).

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply and the +24V power supply are both monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as described above.

That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, +12V, which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the power supply provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 The +12V fuse not shown and the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are at the same potential, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 +24 V which is the power supply monitored in the , a +24 V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and a board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 (mounted, mounted). ) are at the same potential as the +24V fuse (not shown).

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the above-mentioned As described above, it is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) for controlling the driving of a drive motor, which is an electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3, through a +12V fuse (not shown). If one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all the drive boards require +24V, the electrical drive source ( For example, it is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls driving of a drive solenoid, a drive motor). In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12V which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 and the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 ( A +12V fuse not shown (mounted, mounted), a +12V fuse not shown provided (mounted, mounted) on a substrate subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and driving the door frame 3 The +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the board has the same potential, and the +24V power source monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 , a +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and a fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5. A +24V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 are at the same potential.

[9. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 182. FIG. 179 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 180 is a circuit diagram showing the main control input circuit with error detection function, FIG. 181 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be explained, and the circuit of the payout control board 633 will be explained. Here, an example in which the setting key switches 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above are mounted on the main control board 1310 and only the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 will be described. Wiring to the power supply and input signal boards in the circuits of various boards will also be described as appropriate.

[9-1. Main control board circuit]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with +12V from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, +5V is generated as a local power source to be a control power source for the main control board 1310 in the +5V generating circuit 1310g from the supplied +12V. This +5V local power supply has the same potential as the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630 .

In the +5V generation circuit 1310g, +5V as a local power supply that is the control power supply for the main control board 1310 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h, as shown in FIG. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V from the +5V generating circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and its 3rd terminal +5V with noise components removed is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is firstly superimposed on the ripple (voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). AC components) are removed and smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is a capacitor MC1 and an electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). are electrically connected to the other ends of the . This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is released after the instantaneous power failure occurs. It is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. . The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC3. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). , is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor MR0. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, through the resistor MR0. The diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of , through the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the general prize winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the first start A detection signal from the mouth sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting mouth sensor 2401, a detection signal from the setting key switch 13100a, etc. are sent to the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function or the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function. is entered in

Specifically, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is a main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function (hereinafter simply referred to as "main control input circuit 1310b" in some cases. ) to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the detection signal from the general prize winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, etc. are used for the error detection function. The signals are input to the input terminals PA1 to PA4 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b2.

The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is also input to the payout control board 633 and the effect via the main control output circuit 1310c. It is output to the display device 1600 or the like. Input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. Further, detection signals from other sensors are input to predetermined input terminals of the input ports PA and PB via the main control input circuit 1310b or the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function, and the input terminals that become free terminals are are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) as an empty terminal.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of its predetermined output port through the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c from the output terminal of its predetermined output port, or outputs a drive signal via the main control output circuit 1310c. and output to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

Note that detection signals from other sensors may be input to predetermined input terminals of the port PC in addition to the port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) as an empty terminal. Port PC, like input ports PA and PB, consists of 8 bits.

[9-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, here, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a The main control input circuit 1310b for input will be described.

[9-1-1a. Main RWM signal from RWM switch]
The main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input is, as shown in FIG. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) to which the voltage is applied and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. In addition to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (substrate ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. (A +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and a power supply line created and supplied by a +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of a power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, a +5V power supply line) different), and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as the RWM signal via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, to the other end of the resistor MR2, in order to adjust the waveform of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633, one end is connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and an electric current. It may be electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor which is electrically connected.

In addition, for the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control board side generated +5V power supply line (+5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is generated inside the main control MPU 1310a. generated +5V power supply line, which is different from the power supply line generated and supplied by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). If the resistor MR5 is electrically connected to the up resistor, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 can be connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor MR5 on the main control board 1310. may be electrically connected to the

[9-1-1b. Detection signal from setting key switch]
The setting key switch 1311a has a COM1 terminal, a COM2 terminal, an A terminal, and a B terminal. The B terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The COM2 terminal and the A terminal are electrically connected. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuit of the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal is in a conductive state. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuit of the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal is closed. It becomes conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 .

The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is that when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. It becomes what was done.

One end of the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input is a +5V power line generated by the main control board side (created by a +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310), as shown in FIG. is a +5V power supply line, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). In addition to being electrically connected to the end of the capacitor MC10, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, the other end of the capacitor MC10 is electrically connected to the resistor MR11. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR10 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the resistor MR11 and the other end of a resistor MR12 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (substrate ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (substrate ground). One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and a +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of a power supply creation circuit 630f). is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR13 electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line) created and supplied in 1310iv, and is electrically connected to the main control via the logic inverting circuit 1310iv. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The logic inversion circuit 1310iv is a circuit that inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a that is input through the main control input circuit 1310b. The logic inverting circuit 1310iv is composed of resistors MR14, MR15, MR16 and a transistor MTR11. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b is a +5V power supply line created by the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR13 electrically connected to the power supply line generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the circuit 630f (that is, different from the +5V power supply line). It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR11 via MR14. The base terminal of the transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR15 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310 in addition to the resistor MR14. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (substrate ground). One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and a +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of a power supply creation circuit 630f). is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR16 electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line) created and supplied in the main control MPU 1310a, and the input of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). A detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inverting circuit 1310iv. be.

It should be noted that a +5V power supply line created by the main control board (a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a inside the main control MPU 1310a. and is different from the power line generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power line). If the pull-up resistor is electrically connected, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 can be connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor MR16 on the main control board 1310. terminal). In addition, for input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA, other input terminals PA1 to PA4 and PA6 to PA7 are controlled by the main control board inside the main control MPU 1310a. A +5V power supply line created on the side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and a power supply line created and supplied by a +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of a power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, +5V power supply line)), even if it is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to +5V power supply line), one end of the resistor electrically connected to the main control board side created +5V power supply line The collector terminals of the transistors are electrically connected to the input terminals PA1 to PA4 and PA6 to PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310. can be connected

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit. The resistor MR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b pulls it up to the +5V side created on the main control board side, and the logic becomes HI, turning on the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side of the main control board 1310, the transistor MTR11 of the logic inverting circuit 1310iv is turned off, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 is turned off. The voltage is raised to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR16 of the logic inverting circuit 1310iv, and the setting key signal whose logic becomes HI is input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. to be entered. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the logic of the setting key signal becomes HI (logic indicating that the setting is disabled) and the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. is entered in

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit to ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (substrate ground). , the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a becomes LOW, turning off the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b. Along with this, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR13 of the main control input circuit 1310b, turning on the transistor MTR11 of the logic inverting circuit 1310iv, and the collector of this transistor MTR11. The voltage of the terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key signal whose logic becomes LOW is input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. to be entered. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic for transmitting the setting enabled state) to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. is entered in

When the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is not operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is not done, it is pulled up to the power supply (+5V) side created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f by the resistor PR50 of the payout control input circuit 633ab provided on the payout control board 633 described later. The transistor PTR60 of the payout control output circuit 633ac provided in the payout control board 633 is turned on, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side of the payout control board 633 and the output from the RWM switch 633d The logic of the main RWM signal becomes LOW and is input to the main control board 1310 . When the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d whose logic is LOW is input to the main control input circuit 1310b, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is mainly applied. The RWM signal, which is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR5 of the control input circuit 1310b and whose logic is HI, is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It will happen. That is, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is not operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes HI (logic that conveys the pressed non-operating state) and the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA0 (RWM signal input terminal).

On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633 as will be described later. , the transistor PTR60 of the payout control output circuit 633ac provided on the payout control board 633 is turned off, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is connected to the resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b provided on the main control board 1310. , the voltage is pulled up to the +5V side generated by the main control board side, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes HI. Accordingly, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, and the logic becomes LOW. The RWM signal is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation state) and the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. (RWM signal input terminal).

As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal that conveys that effect becomes HI by the logic inverting circuit 1310iv. The logic of the RAWM signal to that effect becomes HI. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the logic of the setting key signal for conveying that effect becomes LOW by the logic inverting circuit 1310iv, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated, that effect is obtained. The logic of the RAWM signal that conveys is LOW. In other words, the logic for telling that the setting key switch 1311a is ON is the same logic (HI) as the logic for telling that the depressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is being operated. The logic that conveys that the key switch 1311a is turned off (not turned on) and the logic that conveys that the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated are the same logic (LOW). there is

[9-1-2. Main control input circuit with error detection function]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function is the same circuit, the main control input circuit 1310b with error detection function to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described here.

The main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input is mainly composed of a processing circuit 1310b2a, as shown in FIG. The processing circuit 1310b2a is a +5V power supply line created by the main control board side (+5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) supplied via a VCC terminal, and is a +5V power supply line of the power supply creation circuit 630f. The power supply line generated and supplied by the power generation circuit 630fa (that is, the +5V power supply line) is supplied as an internal power supply to each internal circuit, and the ground (GND) of each internal circuit is connected through the GND terminal. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 .

In addition, the processing circuit 1310b2a is a power supply for monitoring the +12V power supply line supplied via the VS terminal (the power supply line generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generation circuit 630fb of the power supply generation circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line). a terminal circuit, a disconnection monitoring circuit that monitors the presence or absence of disconnection based on a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 that is input via the input terminal, and a a short-circuit monitoring circuit for monitoring the presence or absence of a short-circuit through the gate sensor 2801; and a comparison circuit for determining whether or not a game ball has passed through by comparing it with a predetermined threshold value based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal. , a power supply monitoring circuit, disconnection monitoring circuit, short-circuit monitoring circuit, and other monitoring circuits. It comprises an error output circuit that informs of an abnormality based on the result, and an output circuit that outputs the comparison result of the comparison circuit.

When the abnormality processing circuit determines that there is an abnormality based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit (at the time of error detection), the error output circuit outputs that fact (abnormality) to the ER terminal. Logic to be output to the outside is set and controlled via the output terminal, and the logic of the output to the outside is set and controlled to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit output from the output circuit.

The VS terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line), and also connected to the resistor MR50. and the other end of a capacitor MC50, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground).

The input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50. Further, a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (substrate ground) is connected to the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a in order to match the waveform of the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801. may be electrically connected to the other end of the

The VCC terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC51, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground).

One end of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and a +5V power supply creation circuit of the power supply creation circuit 630f). 630fa and supplied to the power supply line (i.e., +5V power supply line). is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the . A detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input as a gate signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2a with an error detection function.

One end of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and a +5V power supply creation circuit of the power supply creation circuit 630f). 630fa and supplied to the power supply line (that is, +5V power supply line). is electrically connected to the input terminal PB7 of the . The ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the ER terminal of another main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function. That is, each signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function is OR-connected. A signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function is input to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a sensor error signal.

Here, when the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that there is an abnormality (error The states of the input terminals of the processing circuit 1310b2a at the time of detection) will be described. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that there is an abnormality based on the monitoring result from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is detected as a power supply abnormality. The logic of is indeterminate. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that there is an abnormality based on the monitoring result from the disconnection monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), it is determined that the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is disconnected. The logic is HI. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that there is an abnormality based on the monitoring results from the short-circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (error detection), the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is determined to be short-circuited. The logic is LOW.

In addition, when the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that there is an abnormality (error detection The states of the output terminal and ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a at time ) will be described. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that there is an abnormality based on the monitoring result from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is detected as a power supply abnormality. In order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a output from the abnormal condition processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is set and controlled so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW. At the same time, the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is set and controlled so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to notify that it is abnormal.

When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that there is an abnormality based on the monitoring result from the disconnection monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a detects a disconnection. In order to stop the output comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW. At the same time, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to notify that there is an abnormality.

When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that there is an abnormality based on the monitoring result from the short-circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (error detection), the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a detects that there is a short circuit. In order to stop the output comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW. At the same time, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to notify that there is an abnormality.

[9-1-3. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 has two types: +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630 and +24V from the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power substrate 630. is supplied through the payout control board 633, and +12V and +24V are input to the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. It outputs to payout control MPU 633aa of 633, peripheral control board 1510, effect display device 1600 and the like. When a power failure warning signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing described below to stop the progress of the game. Then, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later, stops the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls), and stops the peripheral The control board 1510 performs backup processing of the effect information, and the effect display device 1600 can reliably complete the main control side power failure processing by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power failure processing by the payout control 633aa. In order to cut power consumption, an inverter (not shown) that creates a power source for the backlight is turned off to stop the progress of the presentation.

Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-1-3a. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 181, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly comprises a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

One end of the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 is connected to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310). +5V power supply line, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). It is electrically connected to the end and +5 V produced on the main control board side is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20. (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is connected to the +24V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +24V power supply line) monitor voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+24 V monitor voltage V1") and the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC 21B) is used to connect the +12 V power supply line (power supply line) to the reference voltage Vref. A monitor voltage V2 (hereinafter referred to as “+12V monitor voltage V2”) of a power supply line (that is, a +12V power supply line) created and supplied by a +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the creation circuit 630f and a reference voltage Vref. A monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the positive terminal No. 5, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal No. 6 of the MIC 21B. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment.The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, , one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), the other end of a capacitor MC21, and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

[9-1-3b. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 181, one end of the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is connected to the +24V power line (which is generated by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the supplied power line (that is, the +24V power line), the other end of the resistor MR22 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), are electrically connected to each other, and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, set to 21.40 V) when +24 V power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when this occurs.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. and the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is connected. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is controlled by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal raised to the +5V side created on the control board side and having a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the (substrate ground) side and whose logic has become LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3c. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 181, one end of the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21 to which +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the +12V power line (which is generated by +12V power generation circuit 630fb of power generation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the supplied power line (that is, the +12V power line), the other end of the resistor MR25 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) at one end, are electrically connected, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (10.47 V in this embodiment) when the +12 V power failure or momentary power failure starts to drop from +12 V. The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when it becomes.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). are electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is mainly controlled by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal raised to the +5V side created on the control board side and having a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the (substrate ground) side and whose logic has become LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3d. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). (a logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q with the logic inverted is negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a D input terminal 1D terminal and a clock input terminal 1CK terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). To store the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, without changing the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the input terminal, and output it from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The circuit is configured so that there is no The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). The main control board side generated +5V applied to a certain Vcc terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor MC22, and the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), A negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, is electrically unconnected to the outside.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310c to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting to be output in the main control side power-on processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b. A signal output from the terminal is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is connected to the main control output circuit. 1310c outputs to the payout control board 633 as a payout power outage warning signal and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b, which electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, is a D-type flip-flop as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 has a resistor MR29 electrically connected at one end to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, for the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V power supply line generated by the main control board side (+5V power supply generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. line, which is different from the power supply line generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). If connected, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor MR29 on the main control board 1310a.

In addition, for the other input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V power supply line created by the main control board side (created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is provided inside the main control MPU 1310a. +5V power supply line, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). , one end is not electrically connected to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the main control board side +5V power supply line, that is, this resistor is connected to the main control board 1310, the collector terminals of the transistors may be electrically connected to the input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition to the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a, the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a are supplied with a +5V power supply line created by the main control board (main control board side) inside the main control MPU 1310a. A +5V power supply line generated by a +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the substrate 1310, and different from a power supply line generated and supplied by a +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of a power supply generation circuit 630f (that is, a +5V power supply line). one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310, the collector terminals of the transistors may be electrically connected to the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side and the transistor The MTR 20 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V created on the main control board side, and the transistor The MTR 20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the +5V side generated by the main control board side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. be done.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, and a power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. be.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as the payout power outage warning signal is an open collector output type, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via the resistor MR30. electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). there is The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected at one end to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). there is The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness), the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 is is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) which is generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side. As a result, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. The transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on by pulling up to the side of +5V created on the main control board side, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V created on the main control board side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is ground (GND) (substrate ground). ) side, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control substrate side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning ON the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. . As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power outage in which the logic becomes LOW. A notice signal is input to the payout control board 633 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633 .

181, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power outage warning signal is an open collector output type. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 through the resistor MR35. It is connected to the. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), one end of the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) in the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the +12V power supply line (power supply generator). It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the power supply line generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line), and is also connected to the peripheral control unit. 1511 is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, and the transistor The MTR 23 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5 V created on the main control board side, and the transistor The MTR 23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In this way, a main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310c that outputs a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal and a transistor each have one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral control board 1510 The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is applied to the payout control board 633 as the payout power outage notice signal. There are two transistors in the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs as , and the logic of the output power failure warning signal is input to the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral control board 1510. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line produced on the main control board side, and the input of the main control MPU 1310a. While electrically connected to the input terminal of the port PB, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is connected to the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 633ab, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310c is connected to the wiring (Harness), in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510, one end is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. This is because the main control board 1310 connects the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the main control board 1310a, the power failure warning is performed by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using +5V created on the main control board side, which is the control power supply of the main control board 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and Between the payout control board 633 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main Control MPU 1310a, payout control MPU 633aa, and control power supply for peripheral control unit 1511, for example, +12V, which is a DC power supply higher than +5V, is used for power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal).

Thus, the power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is the main control input circuit of the main control board 1310 as described above. 1310b, in addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, a payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633, a control power generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, and a +12V system driver (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board Circuit, LED constant current drive circuit of each decoration board of the game board 5, liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, liquid crystal panel (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, backlight, drive circuit, etc. there is In other words, the +12V power line is supplied to the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board of the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the like. Therefore, even if the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, for example, due to an electrical trouble with the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 for some reason, The potential of the +12V power supply line drops due to the overcurrent flowing to the control power generation circuit (not shown), the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600. Due to electrical trouble for some reason, overcurrent flows to any of the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, the drive circuit, etc. When the potential of the +12V power supply line drops, or when the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 is driven by the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or the game board 5 (while waiting for the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 to be driven), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the illustrated The potential of the +12V power supply line drops due to overcurrent flowing to the +12V system driver circuit that does not operate, or the decoration board of the game board 5 due to some electrical trouble in the LED constant current drive circuit of the decoration board of the game board 5. The potential of the +12V power supply line drops due to an overcurrent flowing into the LED constant current drive circuit. In addition, wiring (harness) for electrically connecting wiring patterns formed on boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the board following the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, and each decorative board of the game board 5, and between the boards. If some electrical trouble causes a leakage current or a short circuit, the potential of the +12V power supply line drops due to overcurrent. Then, a power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

In addition, the power supply line generated and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +24V power supply line) is, as described above, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310, the main control board In addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310, a payout control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a +12V power supply line via the payout control board 633), a peripheral control board 1510, and a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown). In other words, the +24V power supply line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, etc. in addition to the main control board 1310, so that the main control board 1310, which constitutes the main board, Even if the payout control board 633 is operating normally, when the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Or, while waiting to drive the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 solenoid) or a +24V driver circuit (not shown), the potential of the +24V power supply line drops. In addition, some electrical trouble may occur in wiring patterns formed on boards such as the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power supply line and the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, wiring (harnesses) that electrically connects between boards, and the like. As a result, the potential of the +24V power supply line drops even when a leakage current occurs or a short circuit occurs. Then, a power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

[9-1-4. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line and +24V power line]
[9-1-4a. Overcurrent protection to +12V power supply line]
Therefore, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection to the +12V power line, a current can flow to the peripheral control board 1510 up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line peripheral control board as an overcurrent countermeasure. A +12V fuse not shown is provided in the production display device 1600, and a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided in the production display device 1600 as the main fuse of the production display device 1600 to allow current to flow up to the main allowable current upper limit. A +12V fuse (not shown) capable of allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the first branched system is provided as the fuse of the first branched system that branches from the fuse into two systems. A +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the second branch system is provided as a fuse of the second branching system, and the +12V power supply line production drive board upper limit of allowable current is provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. A +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side is provided in a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse capable of passing a current up to the upper limit is provided. Among the decoration boards of the board 5, the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted is provided with a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board. A +12V fuse (not shown) may be provided to allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board to all the decoration boards of the game board 5 supplied with the +12V power supply line regardless of the presence or absence of the current drive circuit. ). The +12V supplied through a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the first branch system is used to generate a liquid crystal panel power supply in a liquid crystal panel power supply generating circuit (not shown), and this liquid crystal panel power supply is supplied to the effect display device 1600 (not shown). Since it is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit, it is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600 via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the first branch system. and +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as a branch second system fuse.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 constituting the main board and the payout control board 633 are operating normally, in the +12 V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, a control power generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board flows to the control power generation circuit (not shown) due to an electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. It's becoming In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board blows the +12V fuse (not shown). , By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the processing when the power is turned off on the main control side in the processing when the main control power is turned on, which will be described later. The progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) can be continued without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in .

Further, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the liquid crystal panel (not shown) of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the +12V power supply line of the effect display device 1600. If an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the branch 1 system flows to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) due to an electrical trouble for some reason in the power generation circuit, the fuse of the branch 1 system of the effect display device 1600 A +12V fuse (not shown) is blown. Also, in this embodiment, due to an electrical trouble for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the voltage is supplied through the +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the second branch system. A liquid crystal panel power source is created from the +12 V that is branched to a liquid crystal panel power source generation circuit (not shown). The fuse is blown, and the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and driving circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600 may be damaged due to an electrical problem for some reason. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the second branch system flows to any of the drive circuits, etc., the +12V fuse (not shown) of the second branch system of the effect display device 1600 is blown. In this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, has a capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system and the fuse of the second branch system. A +12V fuse (not shown) is selected in advance with a larger capacity than any of the fuses and smaller capacity than the sum of the two fuses. For this reason, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, is a +12V fuse (not shown) that is the fuse of the first branch system, a +12V fuse (not shown) that is the fuse of the second branch system, and Even if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses blows, if the overcurrent still flows through the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current, the fuse may blow. As the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system and the capacity of the fuse (not shown) for +12V which is the fuse of the second branch system. When the fuse capacity and the fuse capacity are the same, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, and the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the branch first system fuse, in the +12V power supply line. , and the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the branch second system, if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses blows, overcurrent still flows through this blown fuse system and the main allowable current upper limit is reached. , the fuse for +12V (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the fuse for +12V (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, may be blown. If you also melt it, it melts. In this way, the effect display device 1600 has a +12V fuse (not shown) that is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown) that is the fuse of the first branch system, and a +12V fuse (not shown) that is the fuse of the second branch system. A fuse for +12V (not shown) which is the primary fuse, a fuse for +12V (not shown) which is the fuse for the first branch system, and a fuse for +12V (not shown) which is the fuse for the second branch system are blown by overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is sent by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board 633. Without outputting to the control MPU 633aa, the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game progress without performing main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa , it is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the following board of the peripheral control board is When the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is driven by the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) (or the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is on standby. ), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown) exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the game board side drive motor. When an overcurrent flows, a fuse provided in a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) is blown. The +12V supplied through the +12V fuse (not shown) of the board following the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied not only to the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) but also to each decoration board of the game board 5. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V system driver circuit on the game board side and the upper limit of the allowable current of each decoration board on the game board 5. ing.

Since the +12V electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to drive, the performance by the +12V electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 and each decorative board of the game board 5 Among the various LED light emission effects, the light emission effects of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 are given priority over the effect by the +12V electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5. It has become. For this reason, the game board is designed so that the fuses provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are melted before the +12V fuses (not shown) of the decoration boards of the game board 5 are melted. 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are selected in advance. The +12V power supply (not shown) of the board following the peripheral control board 1510 is used so that the lighting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 can be given priority over the effect by the system electric drive source (driving motor). The fuse capacity is preset.

In the case of continuing the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decoration board of the game board 5 with priority over the effect by the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5, for example, the following board of the peripheral control board 1510 The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is larger than the capacity selected so that each decoration board of the game board 5 can be used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side, and this selected capacity is not shown. If a fuse smaller than the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is selected in advance, the +12V fuse (not shown) is connected to each of the game board side decoration boards of the game board 5. When the upper limit of the allowable current is used, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows into the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V system driver circuit (not shown). Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is blown, it may be blown if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +12V power supply line production drive board. Also, for example, as the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the capacity selected so that each decoration board of the game board 5 can use up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board, If the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit not shown is selected in advance, the +12V fuse (not shown) is connected to each of the decoration boards of the game board 5. When the board is used up to the upper limit of allowable current, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows into the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V system driver circuit (not shown). Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is not blown, it may be blown if overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +12V power supply line production drive board.

Of the effect by the +12 V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decoration board of the game board 5, the +12 V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 Contrary to the case where the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is given priority over the effect by the motor), the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is prioritized. 5, the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) is preferentially continued, rather than blowing the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the game board 5, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decoration board of the game board 5 and the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are adjusted so that the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decoration board of the game board 5 melts first. The capacity of the fuse provided in the game board 5 is selected in advance, and the effect by the +12V electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 is given priority over the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the substrate subsequent to the peripheral control substrate 1510 is set in advance so that the operation can be continued.

Also, due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason on the 12V power line of the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510, an overcurrent flows into the 12V power line of the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510, causing the +12V system of the game board 5 to flow. When stopping both the effect by the electric drive source (driving motor) and the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decoration board of the game board 5, the following board of the peripheral control board 1510 is +12V system (not shown). Between the capacity of the fuse provided in the driver circuit and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5, the capacity of the fuse whichever is smaller is +12V of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity of the fuse is set in advance.

In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse for the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) is provided. is designed to fuse, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure warning signal is mainly generated by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. No output is required to the control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing described later, The payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing payout control unit power-off processing in payout control unit power-on processing described later.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the game board 5 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the game board 5. Due to the +12V fuse (not shown) of the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side is applied to each LED of the game board 5 and the decoration board of the game board 5. When the water flows, the +12V fuse (not shown) of the decorative board of the game board 5 is fused. A +12V fuse (not shown) is provided to allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board to all the decoration boards of the game board 5 supplied with the +12V power supply line regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. When provided, the +12V fuse (not shown) of all the decoration boards of the game board 5 causes an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side to flow through each LED of the game board 5 and all the decoration boards of the game board 5. Then, the +12V fuses (not shown) of all the decoration boards of the game board 5 are fused. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decoration boards of the game board 5, and an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board causes a +12V voltage (not shown). (In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, the +12V power line is supplied to all the decoration boards of the game board 5. Up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side When a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current is provided, all the decoration boards of the game board 5 are provided with +12V fuses (not shown). Because the fuse is blown), the main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. Then, the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, the game In the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the board 5, due to some reason electrical trouble to the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, each decoration board of the game board 5, etc. When a leakage current or a short circuit occurs, an overcurrent flows through the peripheral control board 1510, the board following the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. , +12V fuses (not shown) provided on each board are fused, respectively, thereby suppressing a decrease in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control The power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the substrate 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power failure processing in the main control side power activation processing described later. The payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the game without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later (distributing game balls as prize balls). ) can be continued. If a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to an electrical trouble for some reason in the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510, an overcurrent flows through the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, an overcurrent flows through the peripheral control board 1510, which is the upper board of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the +12V fuse (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 blows.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3 is used to drive the door frame 3. While the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 or the +12V driver circuit is overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the door frame side drive motor allowable current. When it flows, the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse for each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive motor of the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 . The +12V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 prevents the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) and +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 from overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive motor. Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is blown by the current flow, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +12V power supply line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided in each drive board of the door frame 3 and a fuse is provided in the +12V system driver circuit, so that the +12V fuse and the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit are melted by overcurrent. Therefore, the main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 output to the main control MPU1310a and payout control MPU633aa The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the door frame 3 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the door frame 3. When the +12V fuse of the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the boards causes an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side decoration board to flow through each LED of the door frame 3 and the decoration board of the door frame 3 , the +12V fuse on the decorative board of the door frame 3 is blown. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, when providing a +12V fuse capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side decoration board to all the decoration boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power supply line is supplied. , the +12V fuse for all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 causes overcurrent to flow through each LED of the door frame 3 and all the decorative boards of the door frame 3, exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side. +12V fuses of all the decoration boards of 3 are blown. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decoration boards of the door frame 3, and the +12V fuse is blown by overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side decoration board. (In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, all the decoration boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power line is supplied must be supplied with current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board. When installing a +12V fuse that can be ), suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and outputting a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and payout control MPU 633aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +12V power supply for each drive board of the door frame 3, each decoration board of the door frame 3, etc. In the production line, due to electrical trouble for some reason in each drive board of the door frame 3, each decoration board of the door frame 3, etc., a leakage current or a short circuit may occur, causing the door frame to malfunction. 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., the +12V fuse provided on each board is blown, so that the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the supplied +12V power line, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the process when the main control side power is turned off in the process when the main control side power is turned on, and the payout control MPU 633aa can turn off the power of the payout control part in the process when the payout control part is turned on, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing time processing.

[9-1-4b. Overcurrent protection for +24V power line]
In addition, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection to the +24V power line, a current can flow to the peripheral control board 1510 up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line peripheral control board as an overcurrent countermeasure. A +24V fuse not shown is provided in the production display device 1600, and a +12V fuse (not shown) capable of allowing current to flow up to the upper allowable current upper limit of the production display device 1600 is provided in the production display device 1600. A +24V fuse (not shown) is provided to allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the power supply line effect drive board, and a current of up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side is provided to the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. It has a fuse that can

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 constituting the main board and the payout control board 633 are operating normally, in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or the peripheral If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board flows due to an electrical trouble for some reason in the board succeeding the control board 1510, the +24V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is blown. It's becoming In this way, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board blows the +24V fuse (not shown). , By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is not output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the processing when the power is turned off on the main control side in the processing when the main control power is turned on, which will be described later. The progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) can be continued without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510 succeeding peripheral control board 1510 While the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the board (or waits for the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 to be driven) ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) is set to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side drive solenoid. When an excess current flows, a fuse provided in a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) blows. The +24V fuse (not shown) is blown if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +24V power supply line production drive board even if the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) is blown. In this way, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the substrate subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse is provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown). is designed to fuse, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure warning signal is mainly generated by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. No output is required to the control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing described later, The payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing payout control unit power-off processing in payout control unit power-on processing described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, in the +24 V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, etc. Due to electrical trouble for some reason in the peripheral control board 1510, the board succeeding the peripheral control board 1510, etc., a leakage current or a short circuit may occur, causing the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board to malfunction. When an overcurrent flows to the board following 1510, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided on each board is fused, so that the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is cut off. By suppressing the potential drop, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The game progress can be continued without performing the processing when the main control power is turned off, and the payout control MPU 633aa can pay out without performing the processing when the payout control unit is turned off in the processing when the payout control unit is turned on, which will be described later. progress (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) can be continued.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3 is used to drive the door frame 3. While the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 or the +24V driver circuit is overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive solenoid. When it flows, the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit is blown. The +24V fuse capacity of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive solenoid of the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 . The +24V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 prevents the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) and the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 from overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive solenoid. Even if the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit is blown by the current flow, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +24V power supply line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. In this way, a +24V fuse is provided in each drive board of the door frame 3 and a fuse is provided in the +24V system driver circuit, so that the +24V fuse and the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit are melted by overcurrent. Therefore, the main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 output to the main control MPU1310a and payout control MPU633aa The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each of the door frame 3 is connected to the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. Due to an electrical problem with the drive board or the like for some reason, a leakage current or a short circuit occurs. The +24V fuse provided is designed to melt, suppressing the potential drop of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. , the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a continues the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. can be done.

[9-2. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with +5V from the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the payout control MPU 633aa The backup power supplied to the payout control built-in RAM is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as payout VBB.

+5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h as shown in FIG. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V from the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply substrate 630, and its 2nd terminal is connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground) and electric power. , and +5 V from which the noise component has been removed is output from the third terminal. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is firstly superimposed on a ripple (voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). AC components) are removed and smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is a capacitor PC1 and an electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). are electrically connected to the other ends of the . This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is released after the instantaneous power failure. It is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). In addition, since the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is larger than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (In this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is larger than the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)). is selected. As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 Each charged charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary interruption occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. . The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). , is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor PR0. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied via the resistor PR0 to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. A diode PD0 prevents the voltage VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of , through the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout detection sensor 591 A detection signal and a signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d are each payout control. Via the input circuit 633ab, input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa are respectively inputted. This input port PA consists of 8 bits.

A payout power outage notice signal, which is a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. In addition, detection signals from other sensors are input to predetermined input terminals of the input ports PA and PB through the payout control input circuit 633ab, and the input terminals that become vacant terminals are grounded (GND) as vacant terminal processing. (substrate ground).

[9-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the payout control input circuit 633ab will be described. Since the payout control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 The payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power outage notice signal, which is a power outage notice signal, is input will be described.

First, the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is set to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 and the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It functions as a RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) that can clear (delete) various information (game information) stored (stored), and selects a set value for a predetermined period after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It has a function as a setting switching button capable of switching by pressing and a function as an error canceling button capable of canceling the error when an error is notified after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

[9-2-1a. Signal from RWM switch]
The RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 has 1st to 4th terminals, and the 1st and 2nd terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. In addition, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are electrically connected. When the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the 1st and 2nd terminals and the 3rd and 4th terminals are not electrically connected in the internal circuit. When the pressing operation portion is being pressed, the first and second terminals and the third and fourth terminals are electrically connected in the internal circuit so that the first and second terminals and the third and fourth terminals are electrically connected in the internal circuit. The internal circuit with the 4th terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the payout control board 633 (board ground).

The signal from the RWM switch 633d indicates that the first and second terminals and the third and fourth terminals are not electrically connected in the internal circuit when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, the internal circuit of the 1st and 2nd terminals and the 3rd and 4th terminals is conducted, and the ground of the payout control board 633 (GND ) (substrate ground).

The payout control input circuit 633ab to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d is input, as shown in FIG. In addition to being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 electrically connected to the line), in addition to the capacitor PC50 having one end electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633 , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50 via a resistor PR51. The base terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR52 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633 in addition to the resistor PR51. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the payout control board 633 (substrate ground). The collector terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53, one end of which is electrically connected to the power supply line generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). , and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa. A signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa as the RWM signal 2 through the payout control input circuit 633ab.

The other end of the resistor PR50 and the other end of the capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR51 (the side opposite to the other end of the resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50). is electrically connected to the payout control output circuit 633ac. The payout control output circuit 633ac is composed of resistors PR60, PR61 and a transistor PTR60. The other end of the resistor PR50 and the other end of the capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR51 (opposite to the other end of the resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50). It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR60 through resistor PR60. The base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR61 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633 in addition to the resistor PR60. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the payout control board 633 (substrate ground). The collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), and the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line created and supplied by the circuit 630fb (that is, the +12V power supply line). A signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 in is input to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness) as a main RWM signal.

[9-2-1b. Output power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 182, one end of the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power failure notice signal, which is the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input, has one end connected to the +12V power line (+12V of the power generation circuit 630f). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR40 which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) generated and supplied by the power generation circuit 630fb, and is connected via the resistor PR41 to the transistor PTR40. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 includes a resistor PR41 and a resistor PR42 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the payout control board 633 (substrate ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is for power generation. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43 electrically connected to the power line (that is, the +5V power line) generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the circuit 630f, and the input of the payout control MPU 633aa It is electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the port PB.The output power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is transmitted through the output control input circuit 633ab to the power failure warning signal 2. is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa.In addition, at the other end of the resistor PR40, the waveform of the payout power failure warning signal, which is the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and For arranging, it may be electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (substrate ground).

[10. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example in which the setting key switches 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above are mounted on the main control board 1310 and only the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 will be described. FIG. 183 is a perspective view (a) of the main control board box showing a state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body. is a perspective view (b) of the main control board box sealed by a sealing mechanism.

In the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is an important board for controlling the progress of the game. For this reason, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from being illegally altered to acquire illegal game balls. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is accommodated in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are a sealing mechanism. It is caulked by 1303, for example, a one-way screw or the like.

This crimping part 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and is provided in plurality. Main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping cover body 1301 and base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of crimping part 1303 using one sealing mechanism. must destroy its sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

As described above, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the mounting surface (front side) and soldering surface (back side) of the main control board 1310 (unauthorized modification is prevented). or whether an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 . Further, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the following In order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Briefly describing the method of assembling the main control board box 1320, as shown in FIG. The various connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and a part of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 are exposed from the corresponding openings formed in the cover body 1301, respectively. Subsequently, the fixing screws are inserted through the through holes formed at the four corners of the main control board 1310 from the soldering surface (rear surface) of the main control board, respectively, toward the mounting boss holes formed at the four inner corners of the cover body 1301 . The main control board 1310 can be fixed to the inner space of the cover body 1301 by screwing it. Subsequently, the base body 1302 is placed in a predetermined position so as to substantially block the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is moved in a specific direction (the direction of the arrow in the figure) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. The outer peripheral surface of the base member 1302 is slid toward the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 1301 by sliding (movement distance dimension sd), and the opening side of the cover member 1301 is completely closed, so that the cover member 1301 and the base member 1302 are separated. The main control board 1310 is accommodated in the space formed by . Subsequently, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are screwed and crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion 1303, thereby fixing the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 as shown in FIG. The control board box 1320 is sealed (ie the main control board box 1320 can be closed).

In addition, on the inner wall of the cover body 1301, a cover body side rib portion 1301rb is provided which can come into contact with the outer circumference of the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301. A plurality of them are formed separated by a predetermined distance dimension. In addition, a plurality of base body side ribs 1302rb are formed on the base body 1302 at predetermined distances so that they can contact the outer circumference of the solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board 1310 . When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board 1310 has a plurality of cover body side rib portions 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and a plurality of base body side rib portions 1302rb formed on the base body 1302. It will be in a state of being arranged (sandwiched) in the gap (space) formed by.

Further, the base body 1302 is formed with a protruding portion 1302p capable of contacting the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. ing. When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a, the protruding portion 1302p contacts the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 bends due to the force of the insertion. As a result, the main control board 1310 can be prevented from further bending and bending, and disconnection of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of solder can be prevented.

[11. setting key switch]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a perspective view (a) of the setting key switch seen obliquely from the front right, a perspective view (b) of the setting key switch seen obliquely from the front left, and a top view of the setting key switch (c). . Here, an example in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described.

The setting key switch 1311a is of a type in which a resin setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is housed inside a resin outer cylinder (hereinafter referred to as a "resin type cylinder"). setting key switch 1311a"), and a metal setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned to be operated is accommodated in a metal cylindrical outer cylinder. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "metal type setting key switch 1311a"), and the like. The resin-type setting key switch 1311a and the metal-type setting key switch 1311a have the same structure, but are partially different in material.

[11-1. Resin type setting key switch]
As shown in FIGS. 184(a) and 184(b), the resin type setting key switch 1311a has a non-conductive resin cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a setting key switch 1311a for the inside of the outer cylinder 1311aa. A setting key cylinder 1311ab made of non-conductive resin into which a key is inserted and rotated is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and a circuit is formed in which a contact is turned on or off by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac made of resin having non-conductivity and a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa is formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and is bent so as to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. and a metal frame plate 1311ad on which a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada projecting rearward from the base body 1311ac are formed on both side surfaces (the front side surface and the rear side surface in the figure).

The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is provided with an insertion port 1311aba into which a metal setting key is inserted. As shown in FIG. 184(c), the setting key made of metal is operated when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (that is, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a). Insert the setting key into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the cylinder 1311ab at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted (at a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening 1311aba is along the vertical direction). and can be pulled out from the insertion port 1311aba. The base body 1311ac has a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad, and two brass lead terminals are spaced apart from each side by a predetermined distance from the side rotated 90 degrees. right side and left side).

In the figure, the COM1 terminal as the upper lead terminal on the left side and the COM2 terminal as the lower lead terminal on the left side are common terminals, and either one or both terminals can be used. When the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the A terminal that is the upper lead terminal on the right side and the B terminal that is the lower lead terminal on the right side are connected to the base. A circuit formed in the body 1311ac electrically connects the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal, thereby electrically connecting the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal, thereby disconnecting the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal. When the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated by 60 degrees from the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, The circuit formed on the base body 1311ac electrically disconnects and cuts off the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal, and electrically connects and conducts the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal ( As a result, the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted). The distance between the terminals COM1 and COM2 and the distance between the terminals A and B are the same.

A pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada projecting from a metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the soldering surface (rear surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby mainly operating the setting key switch 1311a. It can be fixed to the control board 1310 . The A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 . On the back side of the base body 1311ac, when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa faces upward as shown in FIG. A columnar projecting portion (not shown) for designating the arrangement direction of the switch 1311a protrudes. Due to this columnar protrusion, when the operator of the manufacturer mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, for example, the setting key switch 1311a is turned upside down (incorrectly) and soldered. You can prevent it from being attached.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters through the metal setting key, the resin type setting key switch will 1311a has the outer cylinder 1311aa, the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the base body 1311ac, which are each molded from a non-conductive resin, as described above. has no effect.

[11-2. Metal type setting key switch]
Next, the metal type setting key switch 1311a includes a metal cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated inside the outer cylinder 1311aa. 1311ab and 1311ab have the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a in that the material is different in the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a. Further, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are made of metal and are electrically connected to each other. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. That is, when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic wave noise enters through the metal setting key, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected, there is a possibility that electromagnetic wave noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad.

[11-3. Relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switches and the cover of the main control board box.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with the insertion port 1311aba into which the metal setting key is inserted, as described above. When the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is separated from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box. As shown in FIG. 185, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a diameter ( For example, a tubular rib portion 1301za having a predetermined distance dimension toward the main control board 1310 along the inner circumference of the through hole 1301z having a diameter 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. has the same thickness as the thickness of the cover body 1301). The inner periphery of the through-hole 1301z and the inner periphery of the tubular rib portion 1301za communicate with each other so as to form the same inner peripheral surface without steps. As a result, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane ( flush).

Since the through-hole 1301z is also a portion that contacts the finger or fist of a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a, the strength around the through-hole 1301z can be increased by the rib portion 1301za. As a result, the periphery of the through-hole 1301z is pushed by human force to bend the periphery of the through-hole 1301z to increase the gap between the through-hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab, or the periphery of the through-hole 1301z is damaged and penetrated. Since it is possible to prevent the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab from being increased by increasing the outer diameter of the hole 1301z, for example, a person who illegally accesses the setting key switch 1311a can intentionally point the finger. This can contribute to preventing the insertion of an elongated illegal tool such as a wire into the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab even if a fist is pushed around the through hole 1301z.

The diameter of the through-hole 1301z is designed to fit inside the rectangular surface shape of the base body 1311ac having the rectangular parallelepiped shape of the setting key switch 1311a. The edge of the rib portion 1301za and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are separated by a distance dimension d1 (in this embodiment, about 2 mm). 1311ad is configured so as not to be directly touched by a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a.

As a result, the gap between the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1310za of the cover body 1301 and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab). The diameter of the through-hole 1301z is the surface shape of the base body 1311ac having the cuboid of the setting key switch 1311a even if an elongated irregular tool such as a wire is inserted into the hole 1301z. Since it is formed so as to be accommodated inside the rectangular shape, the tip of the elongated unauthorized tool is bent against the surface of the base body 1311ac and cannot enter toward the main control board 1310 . In other words, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being modified.

In the resin-type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of non-conductive resin. Even if a finger approaches or touches the front surface of the key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge is transmitted through the setting key switch 1311a to the main control board. Intrusion into 1310 can be prevented. The distance d1 is between the end of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover 1301 and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a. (In this embodiment, about 2 mm). Also, it becomes difficult for electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge to enter the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a through the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za. Intrusion into 1310 can be prevented.

In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. It is in a state of Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. That is, if a person charged with static electricity brings his or her finger close to or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its surroundings, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge is transmitted between the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key. Since the cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected, electromagnetic wave noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad. For this reason, if a person charged with static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its surroundings, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge is generated on the metal frame plate 1311ad. and enter the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane. 1), when the operator attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and its surroundings Since the game board 5 is temporarily placed, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 during work and overturns the game board 5 temporarily placed. can. In addition, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane. Therefore, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the operator's leg hits the game board 5 accidentally while working the game board 5 and overturns it.

The front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane. 1), a protective cover (the protective cover is made of polycarbonate resin and is transparent) protects the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab). ) may be provided on the cover body 1301 .

[11-4. Relationship between the setting key switch and the base body of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 187. FIG. FIG. 186 is a diagram (a) showing the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switches are mounted, and the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switches are mounted. 1 is a diagram (part 1) (b) showing the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board, and is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switches are mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. (Part 2) (c). FIG. 187 is a continuation of FIG. 186 and is a diagram (part 3) (d) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control substrate on which the setting key switches are mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control substrate. 4 is a diagram (part 4) (e) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switches are mounted and the corresponding solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board.

When the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 has a plurality of cover side ribs 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and a plurality of bases formed on the base body 1302. It is placed (held) in a gap (space) formed by the body side rib portion 1302rb. As described above, the base body 1302 has a projection capable of contacting the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. A portion 1302p is formed. When the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the protruding portion 1302p bends and bends the main control board 1310 due to the inserted force. By coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the substrate 1310, the main control substrate 1310 is prevented from further bending and bending, and disconnection of the wiring pattern formed on the main control substrate 1310 and peeling of the solder are prevented. It can be prevented.

When the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and the metal setting key is not inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (or the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned ON, and the setting key is released to release the pressing of the setting key)), as shown in FIG. and the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p are separated by a distance dimension d2 (about 1 mm in this embodiment) as a clearance. The solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p are designed not to come into contact with each other.

The projecting portion 1302p has a cylindrical shape and a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the dimension of the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical projecting portion 1302p). .) Here, first, the routing of the wiring pattern to the setting key switch 1311a will be described, and then the columnar protrusion 1302p and the protrusion 1302p having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 will be described.

[11-4-1. Routing of Wiring to Setting Key Switch 1311a]
As shown in FIG. 186(a), the setting key switch 1311a is located near the lower side of the main control board 1310 and is located on the side surface of the rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a (the insertion/removal reference position formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa). 1311aaa is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x so that the lower side of 1311aaa and the opposite side) are parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310. FIG. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x so that the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa faces the upper side of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Specifically, a long slot extending in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board 1310 through which a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “long through holes SLH1 and SLH2”) having a pair of shaped lands facing each other are formed in the vertical direction of main control board 1310 . through-holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 (hereinafter simply " through-holes SLTH1 and SLTH2"), and two lead terminals COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 having a pair of lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4") have a rotation angle of 90 degrees with a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2. are formed on the main control board 1310 respectively.

The main control board 1310 is mounted on the main control board 1310 with a through hole SSTD through which a cylindrical projecting portion (not shown) can be inserted to specify the arrangement direction of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the surface (surface) 1310x, it is on the center line in the left-right direction of the setting key switch 1311a and is surrounded by the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and the long through holes SLH1, SLH2. formed within the

The solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. A vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 for electrically connecting the through hole SLTH3 into which the COM1 terminal is inserted and soldered is formed by being routed in a straight line along the vertical direction of the main control board 1310 . That is, since the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 is routed straight from the through hole SLTH4 toward the through hole SLTH4, its length is the minimum length.

In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a through hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted and soldered. A horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2 electrically connecting the through hole SLTH1 is formed linearly along the horizontal direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board. That is, the left-right direction straight wiring pattern SPTN2 is drawn in a straight line from the through hole SLTH3 toward the through hole SLTH1 in parallel with the lower side of the main control board 1310, so its length is the minimum length. there is

The solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. The other end of the resistor MR10 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line produced on the control board side, or the other end of the capacitor MC10 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) at one end) is electrically connected. A plurality of bending wiring patterns SPTN3 connected to the main control board 1310 are bent in the vertical and horizontal directions of the main control board 1310 and routed.

Also, on the soldering surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there are no various wiring patterns electrically connected to the through-hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. It is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the control substrate 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310. there is

On the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered through a through hole SLTH1 to a predetermined input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (the input terminal of the input port PA). Various wiring patterns forming a setting signal transmission path extending to PA5) are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. FIG. In other words, the setting signal transmission path does not include through holes that electrically connect various wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. Even if the surface (surface) 1310x is visible, it is not possible to know how the wiring patterns electrically connected to the various terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are routed.

Further, the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301 and fixed to the inner space of the cover body 1301 as described above. The base body 1302 is arranged in a predetermined position so as to substantially close the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is slid in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd). to completely block the opening side of the cover body 1301. Therefore, when the base body 1302 slides in the specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301, the projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302. It will happen. During this sliding movement, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p may come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and rub against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, damaging the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. Therefore, various wiring patterns are arranged so as not to be routed in and around the area where the projecting portion 1302p slides. In other words, the various wiring patterns are routed so that the projecting portion 1302p does not straddle the various wiring patterns when the projecting portion 1302p slides. As a result, it is possible to prevent various wiring patterns from being damaged by the projecting portion 1302p that slides while the main control board box 1320 is being assembled.

The solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a through hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and a through hole through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. The copper foil around the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered is removed, and various wiring patterns (for example, the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1, the left and right The copper foil around the directional straight wiring pattern SPTN2, curved wiring pattern SPTN3, etc.) is removed, and the copper foil around the through hole SSTD into which a cylindrical projecting portion (not shown) specifying the arrangement direction of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Foil is removed.

On the other hand, on a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and a soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foils are removed substantially around the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, respectively, and the copper foils are removed in the longitudinal direction of each long hole. Thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are formed in regions provided at both ends of each. The thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) allows the long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 to be electrically connected to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y. connected. On the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foil around the through hole SLTH2, through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, is removed. In addition, a thermal pattern (a cross-shaped pattern) is formed on each. The thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) electrically connects the through hole SLTH2 to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. state.

The mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are, for example, as shown in FIGS. and soldered on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y, electrically connecting wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y, and solid grounding on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x ( GND) (board ground) and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y; Insulated to cover the thin copper layer (copper plane) in which various wiring patterns and various through holes are formed, except for the through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns of the front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. A resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) having properties is applied to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr and a soldering surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. Further, on the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr, a region SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is silk-printed and has insulating properties and is different from the predetermined color of the resist liquid (this embodiment). It is printed in solid lines with white paint. The color of the resist solution may be red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black instead of green. Any color of yellow, orange, blue, white, and black may be used.

The size of the area SSLKSW1 is formed to be larger than the external shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and mounted in the area SSLKSW1 (soldered on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310). In this state, the line (solid square line) of the area SSLKSW1 is arranged outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the line (solid line of the square) of the area SSLKSW1 from overlapping.

[11-4-2. Projection having a cylindrical shape]
When the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p has a circular shape. The distance between the terminals COM1 and COM2 of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the terminals A and B of the setting key switch 1311a are the same as described above. ing. The outer diameter of the projecting portion 1302p having a cylindrical shape is smaller than half the distance between the A terminal and the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. Furthermore, even if the front surface of the sliding projecting portion 1302p touches (abuts) the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the front surface of the sliding projecting portion 1302p is not connected to the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. , and the land of the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the inserted force causes the main control board 1310 to bend and bend, causing the circular projection 1302p to form. and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are in contact with each other. When the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p having a circular shape and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a predetermined insulating color (in this embodiment, , green) resist solution is applied, the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is rubbed by the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p, the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped off, and the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 is removed. ) 1310y may damage the solid ground (substrate ground).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186(b), in the area of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 with which the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p abuts and its surroundings, as shown in FIG. A region SINSy is formed. As a result, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped by the projecting portion 1302p, it is possible to prevent damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the projecting portion 1302p. . The foil extraction area SINSy having a circular shape from which the copper foil is extracted safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

It should be noted that when performing the work of assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd). be. At this time, the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is also slid in a specific direction together with the base body 1302 (movement distance dimension sd).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186(c), a foil extraction area SINSy having an elongated hole shape in which the copper foil is removed may be formed in and around the area where the projecting portion 1302p slides. As a result, when the main control board box 1320 is being assembled, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p that slides (moving distance dimension sd), the main control by the protrusion 1302p is possible. Damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310 can be prevented. The foil-extracted area SINSy, which has an elongated hole shape from which the copper foil is extracted, utilizes the limited substrate area safely and effectively.

[11-4-3. Protruding portion having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body]
A projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the dimension of the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical projecting portion 1302p. ), the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. As shown in FIG. Both ends of the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p having a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 are rounded to have a circular shape. The distance between the terminals COM1 and COM2 of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the terminals A and B of the setting key switch 1311a are the same as described above. ing. The outer diameter of the projecting portion 1302p having a cylindrical shape is smaller than half the distance between the A terminal and the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. In addition, even if the front surface of the sliding projecting portion 1302p touches (abuts) the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the front surface of the sliding projecting portion 1302p will not contact the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. is inserted and soldered, and the land of the through hole SLTH2, through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the main control board 1310 bends and bends due to the force of the insertion. The front surface of the protruding portion 1302p having a long rectangular shape and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other. When the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p having a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is insulated. The solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr formed by applying a resist solution of a predetermined color (in this embodiment, green) having properties is rubbed by the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p, and the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped. , the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 may be damaged.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187(d), the area of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 with which the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p abuts and its surroundings are covered with copper foil removed from the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, as shown in FIG. 187(d). A foil extraction area SINSy having a rectangular shape elongated along the direction is formed. Both ends of the foil-extracted area SINSy are rounded and have a circular shape. As a result, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped by the projecting portion 1302p, it is possible to prevent damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the projecting portion 1302p. . The foil-extracted area SINSy, which has an elongated rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 and has the copper foil removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

It should be noted that when performing the work of assembling the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301, as described above. At this time, the projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is also slid along with the base body 1302 in the specific direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187(e), a foil cutout region SINSy having an elongated hole shape in which the copper foil is cut out may be formed in and around the region where the projecting portion 1302p slides. As a result, when the main control board box 1320 is being assembled, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p that slides (moving distance dimension sd), the main control by the protrusion 1302p is possible. Damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310 can be prevented. The foil-extracted area SINSy, which has an elongated hole shape from which the copper foil is extracted, utilizes the limited substrate area safely and effectively.

[11-5. Notification of location of RWM switch used for setting change]
A main control board 1310 on which setting key switches 1311a are mounted is accommodated in a main control board box 1320, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM switch 633d is mounted is accommodated in the payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is located behind the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. installed in the In this manner, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d can be separated from each other by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate substrates and by differentiating the objects to which the substrates are attached. . If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are collectively arranged on one board, only one board needs to be tampered with, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged on separate boards, and the substrates are attached to different objects. 633d security is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) performs game preparation control and game control (follows game preparation control, and performs game control). The game preparation control is based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the first step (main control described later) that can change the setting value. Judgment of step S14 in the side power-on processing, processing of step S16A), and following this first step, the RWM switch 633d of the payout control board 633 (here, the setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value and a second step (determination in step S216 and processing in step S218 in setting change processing to be described later) in which the setting value can be selected and switched based on the signal from the second step. Following the game preparation control, the game control consists of the main control side main process in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control side timer interrupt process described later, and the like.

Although the crime-prevention property can be enhanced in this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged on separate substrates, and the objects to which the substrates are attached are different. 1311a is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, there is no need to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged, whereas the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting changeover button, is arranged. It may be difficult for staff members such as the store manager of the game hall and the staff of the game hall to know whether the game is being played or not because they may be unfamiliar with the situation.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. Specifically, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is affixed with a sticker (not shown) that indicates the location of the RWM switch 633d. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, red translucent characters (height: 7 mm) are printed, saying, "RWM switch (setting switching button) is on the payout control board." there is As a result, the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switching button) can be communicated to the store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, and other staff members. When operating the switch 633d, the ability to easily find the RWM switch 633d prevents dizziness. Therefore, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Note that even if this sticker is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the visibility of the main control board 1310 is not obstructed. Also, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of the sticker.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. When molding the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body 1301 and the characters may be integrally molded. good). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. Characters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" may be printed in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the board 1310 as silk printing, or the payout control board 633 may be mounted. Characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM switch (setting change button)" may be printed on the surface (surface) in white as silk printing. In addition, the color of silk printing may be the same color, or may be different colors. Also, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of silk-printed characters. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. The mounting surface (front surface) of the substrate 1310 may be masked with letters (height: 7 mm) and may be formed with resist as "RWM switch (setting switching button) is on the payout control board". A character portion may be masked on the mounting surface (front surface) of the substrate 633, and a blank character (height: 7 mm) "RWM switch (setting switching button)" may be formed with a resist. The colors of the resist may be the same color, but it is preferable to use different colors so that the substrates can be distinguished. In addition, instead of the characters, a character such as an arrow may be masked. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. A similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet) on the mounting surface (surface) of the substrate 1310, and this rectangular sheet has, for example, "RWM switch (setting changeover)" in red translucent characters (height: 7 mm) button) is printed on the payout control board"), or on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, in translucent red characters (height: 7 mm), "RWM switch (setting switching button)" may be attached. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. The location of 633d may be announced through various speakers, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, an attendant such as a store manager of the game hall or a store clerk of the game hall operates the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item regarding the arrangement location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, an announcement voice saying "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting switching button." An announcement image (which may be photographed) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to convey the location of the . After grasping the arrangement location of the RWM switch 633d from such announcement voices and announcement images, the staff such as the manager of the game hall and the staff of the game hall turn off the power of the pachinko machine 1 to smoothly change the setting value. can be done. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. When the setting is changed, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral The control of the control board 1510 tells where the RWM switch 633d is placed. please” is repeatedly played from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound and proceeds with various processes based on the received predetermined command. (Proceeding production, production of waiting for customers (demonstration production), etc.). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known. It should be noted that, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys after the setting values are determined may be played from various speakers. Also, while the announcement sound is playing, the effect display device 1600 may display an image of "setting".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. When the setting is changed, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral The control of the control board 1510 tells where the RWM switch 633d is placed. please” is repeatedly played from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker stuck on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 . Although such an announcement sound is played repeatedly from various speakers, assuming that the contents of the announcement sound may be overlooked, before the next announcement sound starts to flow, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is pasted. By visually checking the seal, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be known. In addition to the announcement voice, "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting switching button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value." You may also make it guide the content which tells the place where the seal which shows is stuck. When the RWM switch is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound. Even if the person who changes the setting value has become accustomed to changing the setting value by the work and it is annoying, if the RWM switch is operated immediately after starting the work, this will be a trigger. It is possible to quickly stop the announcement sound, and even if it is necessary to do the work after the opening of the game hall, the work can be started immediately so as not to inconvenience the players. When the RWM switch is operated at this time, the announcement sound can be quickly stopped. It should be noted that, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys after the setting values are determined may be played from various speakers. Also, while the announcement sound is playing, the effect display device 1600 may display an image of "setting".

[11-6. Procedure for changing setting values, procedure for checking and displaying set values]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, and the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 ), the base monitor 1310h also functioning as a setting display will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing setting values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current setting values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab moves clockwise 60 degrees. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being turned ON once, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 is operated. The "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. Perform the work of opening the body frame 4, then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated while operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. FIG.

A person who changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After performing the opening operation, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). value) is displayed on the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row, and can display numerical values up to 6 digits. is. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the set value is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display among the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (that is, the 6-digit (In this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. The dot may also function as a setting change permission lamp. In this case, the LED is lit while the setting is being changed, and is turned off when the setting is changed.), one of the six 7-segment LED displays in a row. indicator, multiple 7-segment LED displays, or all 7-segment LED displays. In the case where it also functions as a lamp, it may be turned on while the setting is being changed, and turned off when the setting is changed.).

A person who changes the set value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is sent from the payout control board 633. It is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the control board 1310 . Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the push operation portion of the RWM switch 633d, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current set value by one based on the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. When the set value reaches 6, which is the maximum value, it returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and is again incremented by 1. Control is performed to display the set value on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value must move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and sends the setting value to the base monitor 1310h that also functions as a setting display. Switching from the display state to the non-display state, after or immediately after, it is collected from the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5 Control is performed to display the number of game balls (total number) on the base monitor 1310h.

A person who changes the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. complete the configuration change task.

When confirming and displaying the set values currently set, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. Therefore, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the setting values that are currently set must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then After the body frame 4 is opened from the frame 2, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d.

The person who confirms and displays the setting values currently set must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Next, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees. is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). set value) is displayed on the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display. At this time, even if the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d, the setting value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the setting display is displayed. The content displayed in 1310g is also unchanged.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of six 7-segment LED indicators with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a line, and can display numerical values up to 6 digits. is. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the set value is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display among the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (that is, the 6-digit (In this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. The dot may also function as a setting change permission lamp. In this case, it lights up when the currently set value is being checked, and turns off when the currently set value has been checked.) Of the 7-segment LED indicators, the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED indicator, a plurality of 7-segment LED indicators, or all 7-segment LED indicators (in this case, the dot may be lit or In addition, if the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it is lit when the currently set value is being checked, and the currently set value is displayed. It may be turned off when confirmation of the set value is completed.).

After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the set value currently set must move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the original position to the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state in which the setting value is displayed to the state in which the setting value is not displayed on the base monitor 1310h that also functions as a setting display, and then or immediately after that, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Control is performed to display on the base monitor 1310h the number (total number) of game balls collected from the specific area of the game board 5 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a.

A person who confirms and displays the set values currently set removes the metal setting key from the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. to complete the confirmation display of the currently set setting values.

It should be noted that, as described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs instantaneously), the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform ON operation. It is necessary that the setting key is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is operated. When the power of the machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on, thereby turning the setting key on and pressing the RWM switch 633d. It is necessary that the part is not manipulated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are set when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). When the power is restored, the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned ON by turning it 60 degrees and turning it ON. When the power is restored after a momentary power failure), the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is operated", whereas the predetermined set value display permission The condition is that "the pushing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily)". The difference is that

[12. Wiring pattern of setting key switch and RWM switch on main control board]
Next, from the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 188 and 189, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal of . FIG. 188 is a schematic diagram explaining the outline of arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board, and FIG. 189 explains the outline of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. It is a schematic diagram of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. Here, an example in which the setting key switches 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above are mounted on the main control board 1310 and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 will be described.

Mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 includes connectors MCN1 to MCN8, crystal oscillators, DIP type electronic components such as various ICs, setting key switches 1311a, resistors, collective resistors, diodes, capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, and transistors. Lead type electronic parts such as are mounted. Each lead terminal of the DIP type electronic component is inserted through a through hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. are fixed by soldering on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. FIG. Each lead terminal of the lead-type electronic component is inserted through a through hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. are fixed by soldering on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Various detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function via connectors MCN1 to MCN5, and the main control input circuit without error detection function. One is input to circuit 1310b. The connectors MCN1 to MCN5 are arranged near the upper side of the main control board 1310 in order from the center of the upper side toward the left side, and the connector MCN5 is arranged near the upper side and near the left side of the main control board 1310. .

Various detection signals input via connectors MCN1 to MCN3 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function, and various detection signals input via connector MCN5 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function. , and the other is input to the main control input circuit 1310b (the above-described circuit composed of resistors and transistors) that does not have an error detection function. The connector MCN4 is for outputting commands to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

On the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a plurality of main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection (in this embodiment, eight main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection function) are integrated. A plurality (two in this embodiment) are mounted as ICs. A plurality of single main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection may be mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 without integrating the plurality of main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection.

The connectors MCN6 to MCN8 are located near the lower side of the main control board 1310, and are arranged from the left side toward the center of the lower side in the order of connector MCN6, connector MCN7, setting key switch 1311a, and connector MCN8. Connector MCN8 is the main control board. It is arranged in the vicinity of the lower side of 1310 and closer to the left side than the center of the lower side. The connector MCN6 outputs a signal for driving an electric drive source (solenoid) provided on the game board 5, and the connector MCN7 inputs and outputs signals related to exchanging commands with the payout control board 633. A detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633") is input It is what is done. The connector MCN8 is for exchanging various signals when performing inspection and collation.

The main control MPU 1310a is located above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is arranged parallel to the lower side (upper side) of the main control board 1310. (that is, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310). The IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is a ZIP (Zigzag In-line Package), and lead terminals protruding vertically from the main control MPU 1310a main body bottom are alternately bent to extend the length of the main control MPU 1310a main control MPU 1310a. It is arranged and formed in two rows along the direction. Here, for convenience of explanation, the lead terminals arranged in two rows will be explained as the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row.

A plurality of lead-type resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc. are arranged above the setting key switch 1311a arranged near the lower side of the main control board 1310, and two lead-type collective resistors are arranged in a line on the left and right above these. It is arranged to be parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310, and above the lead type left collective resistor (that is, in the direction away from the main control MPU 1310a), the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 ( The main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal) is input through the connector MCN7 is provided with the resistors MR2 and MR5 forming the main control input circuit 1310b, and below the lead type left group resistor (that is, the lead type left group resistor as a boundary (protective wall)) the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input through the connector MCN7 resistors MR3, MR4 and transistors constituting the main control input circuit 1310b MTR0 is arranged.

That is, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input via the connector MCN7 is configured with the lead type left set resistance as a boundary (protection wall). Resistors MR3 and MR4 and a transistor MTR0 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b are arranged below the lead type left group resistor, and the main control input circuit is arranged above the lead type left group resistor. Resistors MR2 and MR5 forming 1310b are arranged. As a result, by using the lead type left group resistor as a protective wall, it is possible to prevent the resistors MR2 and MR5 arranged above the lead type left group resistor from being tampered with, contributing to an improvement in security. can do. Furthermore, since the transistor MTR0 has the resistors MR3 and MR4 built in as bias resistors, the resistors MR3 and MR4 can be prevented from being tampered with in this respect as well, contributing to improved security. can do.

Above the connector MCN8 arranged on the right side of the setting key switch 1311a arranged near the lower side of the main control board 1310, there is a resistor forming the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. MR10 to MR13, capacitor MC10, and transistor MTR10 are arranged. The transistor MTR10 incorporates resistors MR11 and MR12 as bias resistors. As a result, the resistors MR11 and MR12 can be prevented from being tampered with, contributing to improved security.

On the right side of the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, a logic inversion circuit for inverting the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a input via the main control input circuit 1310b is provided. Resistors MR14 to MR16 and a transistor MTR11 that form a circuit 1310iv are arranged. The transistor MTR11 incorporates resistors MR14 and MR15 as bias resistors. As a result, the resistors MR14 and MR15 can be prevented from being tampered with, contributing to improved security.

Connectors MCN1 to 5 arranged in a row near the upper side of the main control board 1310 so as to be parallel to the upper side, connectors MCN6 to MC8 arranged in a row near the lower side of the main control board 1310 so as to be parallel to the lower side, When the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, a part of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed from the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as described above. 1301, the connectors MCN1 to MCN8, and the setting key switch 13111a. Electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, resistors, diodes, capacitors, collective resistors, various ICs, and transistors are arranged around MCN8 and the setting key switch 13111a, and resistors and diodes are arranged around the main control MPU 1310a. , a capacitor, a crystal oscillator (arranged near the lower part of the main control MPU 1310a), a set resistor, various ICs, and other electronic parts are arranged. It is necessary to bend a plurality of unauthorized tools (for example, thin wires), and realistically, unauthorized tools (for example, thin wires) cannot reach the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control board 1310 is formed with a plurality of through holes through which lead terminals of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a are inserted. Each lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is inserted through these through-holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. (Back) Fixed by soldering at 1310y.

On the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310 . In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V power supply line created by the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is provided. +5V power supply line) and the power supply line of the main VBB supplied from the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 are formed. In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, an output signal wiring pattern for outputting various signals from the lead terminals and an input signal wiring pattern for inputting various signals to the lead terminals are provided. A pattern is formed.

In the input signal wiring pattern, the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input from the connector MCN7 to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and an RWM signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") forming an RWM signal transmission path extending from the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a to the input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. A setting key signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") forming a setting signal transmission path extending to (setting key signal input terminal) and a detection signal (power failure A power failure warning signal wiring pattern (hereinafter referred to as "various It may be described as "wiring pattern").

On the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the through holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, those that are electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground). +5V power supply wiring pattern, signal output wiring pattern, input signal wiring pattern, and specific through holes (for example, mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and soldering surface (back surface) 1310y is electrically connected to the output signal wiring pattern).

The main control board 1310 except for the area where various wiring patterns are formed, the area where various through holes are formed, and the area where the foil punching is formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is formed as a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, and has a predetermined insulating property so as to cover the base material of the main control substrate 1310 and the thin copper layer (copper plane, copper foil surface). A color (green in this embodiment) resist solution is applied to form a solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr on the entire area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 .

The mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of through holes through which lead terminals of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a are inserted. +5V power supply wiring pattern, output signal wiring pattern, and specific through-holes (for example, output signal wiring between mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y Through holes for electrically connecting patterns) are formed by removing copper foil, but the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lower side in the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a are formed. Between the lead terminals arranged in rows, along the longitudinal direction of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (along the left-right direction of the main control board 1310, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, The upper side of the main control board 1310 (parallel to the lower side or the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the main control board 1310) is not formed with a foil extraction area, but a solid ground (GND) (board ground) is formed. .

The area other than the area where the output signal wiring pattern is formed, the area where various through holes are formed, and the area where the foil punching is formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 It is formed as a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of 1310, and has insulation so as to cover the base material of the main control substrate 1310 and the copper thin layer (copper plane, copper foil surface). A resist solution of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) is applied to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr on the entire area of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 .

On the copper foil layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, various wiring patterns and main control signals are provided by various wiring patterns routed to lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. A small copper area surrounded by multiple lead terminals of MPU 1310a may be formed. Therefore, in order to stabilize the ground in the small copper foil area, the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 are connected. A solid ground through hole for electrically connecting the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) is formed.

It should be noted that there are a plurality of sizes of lands in the solid ground through-holes, and the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 can be electrically connected. The land size of the lead terminal through hole through which the lead terminal of the electronic component is inserted and soldered on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. having the same size as the land size of the wiring pattern through-hole, being larger than the land size of the lead terminal through-hole and smaller than the land size of the lead terminal through-hole, and being larger than the land size of the lead terminal through-hole Some of them are large. As a result, the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are connected. They are stabilized to be the same ground (GND) (substrate ground).

Further, in the main control board 1310, for the wiring pattern to which various signals are input, the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is provided. Although there are no through-holes for the wiring patterns for electrical connection, the wiring patterns for outputting various signals are routed to prevent interference with the wiring patterns. A plurality of wiring pattern through holes may be formed for electrically connecting wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. FIG.

In addition, for the wiring pattern to which various signals are input to the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is provided. Although it is preferable that through-holes for electrically connecting wiring patterns are not formed at all, in order to avoid interference with other wiring patterns due to routing of wiring patterns, wiring to which various signals are input is unavoidable. Wiring pattern through-holes for electrically connecting wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may be formed in the pattern.

However, a wiring pattern through hole (hereinafter referred to as an "input signal wiring pattern through hole") formed for a wiring pattern to which various signals are input is not, for example, a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground). If an unauthorized modification such as switching electrically with the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side is performed, the main control MPU 1310a is an important electronic component that controls the progress of the game, so the cheater can acquire illegal game balls. There is a risk that it will be

Therefore, it is necessary to take security measures against the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1. Security measures against through-holes for input signal wiring patterns]
As a security measure for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes, a configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes are covered with an insulating film (hereinafter referred to as "input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first to fourth embodiments" 190 to 193, the configuration of covering the land with an insulating coating"). FIG. 190 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 with an insulating film. 191 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b), and FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration for covering the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the second embodiment formed in the second embodiment with an insulating film, and is a schematic cross section of the XX line in (a) 192 is an input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration for covering a land of a through-hole for use with an insulating coating, and a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in (a), showing a modification of (b). FIG. 193 is a schematic view (c), and FIG. 193 shows a configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are covered with an insulating coating. It is a schematic diagram (a) to explain, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). In FIGS. 190 to 193, the same reference numerals are assigned to elements having the same function.

The various through-holes have electrical conductivity due to copper-plating on the inner peripheral walls of the through-holes. In addition to the through holes, the main control board 1310 is also provided with non-through holes. In the non-through holes, the inner peripheral walls of the through holes are not plated with copper, and the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is mounted. Since the solder surface (back surface) 1310y has no land, the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper, and the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are plated with copper. It is very different from a through-hole that has a land in it. A non-through hole is formed to attach a substrate to a member or to fix an electronic component to which an external force is applied (such as a connector to which wiring is attached/detached) to the substrate. The configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating coating may be applied to through-holes for mounting electronic components (that is, through-holes for inserting lead terminals of electronic components). Also, the configuration of covering the land of the through-hole with an insulating film is a wiring pattern through-hole formed for the wiring pattern for outputting various signals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "output signal wiring pattern through-hole"). There is no problem in adopting it for the land of ). In addition, the configuration for covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating film is divided into a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. There is no problem in adopting the land of the solid ground through-hole electrically connecting the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

[12-1-1. Configuration for Covering Lands of Input Signal Wiring Pattern Through Holes with Insulating Coating According to First Embodiment]
In the configuration of covering the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes with an insulating coating according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. A thin through-hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310, and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control board 1310 A mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and a soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil from the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of . A mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN and a soldering surface (back) side wiring pattern are formed. A through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. Outer diameter of mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on mounting surface (front) 1310x of main control board 1310 and soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on soldering surface (back) 1310y of main control board 1310 is the outer diameter KTHD1, which is the same size.

A mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and another mounting surface (surface) side formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 The land KRDx1 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

A solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 and one end of the solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 are electrically connected to each other, and the other end of the solder surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 or the electronic component are electrically connected to lands (pads) to which specific terminals of are soldered.

The mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the soldering surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are: The mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 and the wiring pattern SPTN on the main control substrate 1310 are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1. a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y; They are electrically connected via a solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr. A mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. It is

In addition, on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a green resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr, but the solder surface side insulation In a region of the coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1, there is a solder surface (rear surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1. formed.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the soldering surface (back) side resist opening KByra are the same size.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as the process of fixing a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to the manufacturing equipment and coating, the drying process, the process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. .

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr is provided with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. Since the mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 is formed, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is formed from the outer circumference of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. The peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. As a result, the entire peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be covered with the green resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be kept small. This makes it difficult to tamper with the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern, for example, to electrically switch the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Security measures can be taken against the pattern through-holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of security for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

In addition, since both the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 are exposed from the copper foil, the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310 can be separated from the mounting surface (front) side. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 to perform an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310. Electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 can be performed by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the surface (rear) side land KRDy1. In other words, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when the main control board 1310 is electrically tested. The contact probes may be dedicated probes, or may be test leads of a so-called "tester" for continuity check.

In the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film, the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a solder surface ( A solder surface (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region corresponding to the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1. From the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (back) side land KRDy1, the outer peripheral portion of the solder side (back) side land KRDy1 is covered with green resist as an insulating film. However, as shown in FIG. 190(c), a region of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1. A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5. This is because only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be viewed when modifying it. Further, when an operator who inspects the main control board 1310 determines which through hole among the plurality of various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is the input signal wiring pattern through hole, Comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the size of the land on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y can contribute to determining whether or not it is a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-2. Configuration for Covering Lands of Input Signal Wiring Pattern Through Holes with Insulating Coating According to Second Embodiment]
In the configuration in which the lands of the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment are covered with an insulating film, as shown in FIGS. A thin through hole is formed in the direction (perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control A mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and a soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310. At the same time, a mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN and a soldering surface (back) side wiring pattern are formed. A through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. Outer diameter of mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on mounting surface (front) 1310x of main control board 1310 and soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on soldering surface (back) 1310y of main control board 1310 is the same size as the outer diameter KTHD1, and the mounting surface (surface) side in the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1.

A mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and another mounting surface (surface) side formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 The land KRDx1 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

A solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 and one end of the solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 are electrically connected to each other, and the other end of the solder surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 or the electronic component are electrically connected to lands (pads) to which specific terminals of are soldered.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a green resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr. In a region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a through hole for input signal wiring pattern smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and according to the above-described first embodiment is provided. A mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the structure in which the land of the hole is covered with an insulating film and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 is formed. It is The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid penetration prevention area that spreads concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (surface) side. In order to prevent the green resist liquid from entering the through holes KTH1 of the main control board 1310, the resist liquid penetration prevention distance dimension from the (surface) side inner peripheral edge is at least 0.5 mm. A distance dimension of 5 mm or more is required, and in the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment are covered with an insulating film, a distance of 0.5 mm is adopted. It's becoming Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the sum of the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 and twice the resist liquid penetration prevention distance (0.5 mm). It is larger by 1.0 mm.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a green resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. A solder surface (back) side resist opening having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 is provided in a region corresponding to the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 in the surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. Part KByra is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the structure in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as the process of fixing a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to the manufacturing equipment and coating, the drying process, the process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. .

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr is provided with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. It is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 and further smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the lands of the through-hole for input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film, and the outer diameter of the through-hole KTH1 is Since the mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 larger than the inner diameter of the hole is formed, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is formed from the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, the resist liquid intrusion preventing area (that is, the resist liquid intrusion preventing distance dimension (0.5 mm) from the mounting surface (surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1. The outer peripheral portion is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating except for the region extending to a distant position. As a result, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 extends from substantially the inner side to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the mounting surface on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310. Since the (surface) side land KRDx1 can be covered with a green resist as an insulating coating over the area excluding the resist liquid penetration prevention area, the part where the copper foil is exposed is the resist liquid. The land of the through-hole for input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating coating on the area of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed by forming the intrusion prevention area. It can be kept extremely small compared to that in the configuration. This makes it difficult to tamper with the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern, for example, to electrically switch the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Security measures can be taken against the pattern through-holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of security for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

In addition, since a resist liquid penetration prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, a green insulating coating is applied on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. When the resist solution is applied, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward (the main control board 1310 is actually a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed length. ), the front surface of a single copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward, and is actually fixed to the manufacturing equipment. Even if a green resist liquid is applied to , the green resist liquid penetrates into the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and dries without blocking the hole.

In addition, since both the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 are exposed from the copper foil, the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310 can be separated from the mounting surface (front) side. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 to perform an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310. Electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 can be performed by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the surface (rear) side land KRDy1. In other words, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when the main control board 1310 is electrically tested. The contact probes may be dedicated probes, or may be test leads of a so-called "tester" for continuity check.

In the configuration of covering the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface ( A solder surface (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region corresponding to the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1. From the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (back) side land KRDy1, the outer peripheral portion of the solder side (back) side land KRDy1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating. However, as shown in FIG. 191(c), a region of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (rear surface) land KRDy1. A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5. This is because only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be viewed when modifying it. Further, when an operator who inspects the main control board 1310 determines which through hole among the plurality of various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is the input signal wiring pattern through hole, Comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the size of the land on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y can contribute to determining whether or not it is the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-3. Configuration for Covering Lands of Input Signal Wiring Pattern Through-holes with Insulating Coating According to Third Embodiment]
In the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the third embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, as shown in FIGS. A thin through hole is formed in the direction (perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control A mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and a soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310. At the same time, a mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN and a soldering surface (back) side wiring pattern are formed. A through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. Outer diameter of mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on mounting surface (front) 1310x of main control board 1310 and soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on soldering surface (back) 1310y of main control board 1310 is the same size as the outer diameter KTHD1, and the mounting surface (surface) side in the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1.

The mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to the other end of the mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN and the other mounting surface (front) side formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr. A region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is also coated with a green resist liquid as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as the process of fixing a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to the manufacturing equipment and coating, the drying process, the process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. . Therefore, when a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating onto the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward. (Since the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out, It is fixed to the manufacturing apparatus so that the front surface of the copper clad laminate (base material) of the length faces vertically upward), and the green resist liquid is applied from the inner periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 enters and blocks the hole. The green resist liquid that has entered the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 dries in a recessed state from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (surface) side toward the center of the hole due to its own weight. It will be done.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a green resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. A solder surface (back) side resist opening having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 is provided in a region corresponding to the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 in the surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. Part KByra is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the structure in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film.

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr is also covered with green resist as an insulating film. At the same time, the green resist liquid penetrates from the mounting surface (surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and blocks the hole. As a result, the entire mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be covered with green resist as an insulating coating. The copper foil is not exposed on the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, and the electrically conductive plated portion applied to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole KTH1 is the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310. It can be prevented from being exposed from 1310x. Also, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be closed. This makes it difficult to tamper with the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern, for example, to electrically switch the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern to a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Security measures can be taken against the pattern through-holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of security for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

In addition, the green resist liquid penetrated from the mounting surface (surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and although the hole was blocked, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 was closed. The solder surface (rear surface) side of the hole is in an open state. That is, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed with the green resist solution on the mounting surface (front surface) side, but is open on the solder surface (back surface) side. This is because the green resist liquid penetrates from the mounting surface (surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and air remains inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. If the solder side (back side) of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is blocked, liquid such as a resist remover may remain inside the through hole KTH1. Contact failure may occur due to corrosion of the conductive plating inside, and the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 may momentarily evaporate and expand (so-called "steam explosion") during soldering (reflow, etc.) processes where heat is applied. ”) may damage the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1, which may cause electrical disconnection of the through hole KTH1.

Although the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 are present, they can be hidden by the green resist. The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made inconspicuous, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous with respect to the solid green resist. As a result, a fraudulent person who attempts to tamper with the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern, for example, by electrically switching to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, It is possible to make it difficult to find the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern (holes of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1).

In addition, since the copper foil is exposed on both the solder surface (back) side lands KRDy1, the tips of the contact probes are applied from the solder surface (back) side of the main control board 1310 to the solder surface (back) side lands KRDy1. The main control board 1310 can be electrically inspected (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) by bringing the parts into contact with each other. In other words, the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as a check terminal when electrical inspection of the main control board 1310 is performed. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a so-called "tester" test lead for continuity check.

In the configuration of covering the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface ( A solder surface (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region corresponding to the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1. From the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (back) side land KRDy1, the outer peripheral portion of the solder side (back) side land KRDy1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating. However, as shown in FIG. 192(c), a region of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1. A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5. This is because only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be viewed when modifying it. Further, when an operator who inspects the main control board 1310 determines which through hole among the plurality of various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is the input signal wiring pattern through hole, Comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the size of the land on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y can contribute to determining whether or not it is the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-4. Configuration for covering lands of through-holes for input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment with an insulating film]
In the configuration of covering the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. A thin through hole is formed in the direction (perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control A mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and a soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310. At the same time, a mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN and a soldering surface (back) side wiring pattern are formed. A through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. Outer diameter of mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on mounting surface (front) 1310x of main control board 1310 and soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on soldering surface (back) 1310y of main control board 1310 is the same size as the outer diameter KTHD1, and the mounting surface (surface) side in the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1.

A mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and another mounting surface (surface) side formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 The land KRDx1 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr. A mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. It is The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the structure in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a green resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to a region of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (rear) side land KRDy1 to form the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as the process of fixing a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to the manufacturing equipment and coating, the drying process, the process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. . Therefore, when a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating onto the copper foil surface of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward. (Since the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out, It is fixed to the manufacturing apparatus so that the rear surface of the copper-clad laminate (base material) of the length faces vertically upward), and the green resist liquid enters and blocks the hole. The green resist liquid that has entered the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 dries in a state of being depressed from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 on the solder side (back side) toward the center of the hole due to its own weight. It will be done.

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr is provided with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. Since the mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 is formed, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is formed from the outer circumference of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. The peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. Further, on the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the area corresponding to the solder surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is also covered with a green resist as an insulating coating. At the same time, the green resist liquid penetrates from the solder surface (rear surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 to block the hole. As a result, the entire peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be covered with the green resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be reduced, and the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be closed. This makes it difficult to tamper with the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern, for example, to electrically switch the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Security measures can be taken against the pattern through-holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of security for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

In addition, since the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 has an exposed copper foil, the tip of the contact probe is applied to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310. can be brought into contact with the main control board 1310 for electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check). That is, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310 . The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a so-called "tester" test lead for continuity check.

In addition, the green resist liquid penetrated from the solder surface (rear surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and although the hole was blocked, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 was closed. The mounting surface (surface) side of the hole is in an open state. That is, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed on the solder surface (rear surface) side with the green resist solution, but is open on the mounting surface (front surface) side. This is a state in which the green resist solution penetrates from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 on the solder side (rear surface) side, and air remains inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. If the mounting surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is blocked, liquid such as a resist remover may remain inside the through hole KTH1. Contact failure may occur due to corrosion of the conductive plating inside, and the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 may momentarily evaporate and expand (so-called "steam explosion") during soldering (reflow, etc.) processes where heat is applied. ”) may damage the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1, which may cause electrical disconnection of the through hole KTH1.

Although the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 are present, the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 are hidden by the green resist on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The green resist on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 hides the existence of the through hole KTH1, so the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made inconspicuous, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous with respect to the solid white resist 1310x. As a result, a fraudulent person who attempts to tamper with, for example, electrically switching the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, It is possible to make it difficult to find the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern (holes of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1).

Note that in the configuration of covering the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) of the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr A mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region corresponding to the surface) side land KRDx1. From the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (front) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1, the outer peripheral portion of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. However, as shown in FIG. 193(b), the area corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr has an outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. A mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD2 smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 may be formed. . The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid penetration prevention area that spreads concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (surface) side. In order to prevent the white resist liquid from entering the through holes KTH1 of the main control board 1310, the resist liquid penetration prevention distance dimension from the (surface) side inner peripheral edge is at least 0.5 mm. A distance dimension of 5 mm or more is required, and in the configuration in which the lands of the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment are covered with an insulating film, a distance of 0.5 mm is adopted. It's becoming Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the sum of the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 and twice the resist liquid penetration prevention distance (0.5 mm). It is larger by 1.0 mm.

As a result, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 extends from substantially the inner side to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the mounting surface on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310. Since the (surface) side land KRDx1 can be covered with a green resist as an insulating coating over the area excluding the resist liquid penetration prevention area, the part where the copper foil is exposed is the resist liquid. By forming the intrusion prevention area, the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small.

In addition, since a resist liquid penetration prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, a green insulating coating is applied on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. When the resist solution is applied, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward (the main control board 1310 is actually a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size. ), the front surface of a single copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward, and is actually fixed to the manufacturing equipment. Even if a green resist liquid is applied to , the green resist liquid penetrates into the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and dries without blocking the hole.

In addition, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 extends from substantially the inner side of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 (surface) 1310x. The area of the side land KRDx1 excluding the resist liquid penetration prevention area is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, so that the part where the copper foil is exposed is the resist liquid penetration prevention area. Although it becomes smaller, the electrical inspection (operation check) of the main control board 1310 is performed by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310. and abnormal potential), the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when electrical inspection of the main control board 1310 is performed. The contact probes may be dedicated probes, or may be test leads of a so-called "tester" for continuity check.

[12-2. Wiring pattern to input terminal]

A detection signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is transmitted through various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal, among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a. It is input as a power failure warning signal to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB arranged third from the left in the figure. The detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The RWM signal is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is the eighth lead terminal from the left in the drawing. A detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal. The signal is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA located 20th from the left in the figure (13th from the right in the figure).

Various wiring patterns for transmitting detection signals from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) and detection signals from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 (main RWM signal) are transmitted. Various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) and various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switches 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 are arranged close to each other and parallel to each other. It is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so as not to run (do not run parallel).

In addition, various wiring patterns for transmitting detection signals from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) and detection signals from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 (main RWM signal) Various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) for transmission and various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switches 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 have mounting surfaces (front surfaces). It is routed only to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 without passing through a through hole that electrically connects the wiring pattern of 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y.

In this way, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switches 1311a capable of changing the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to the player are connected to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. , it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize how various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This can contribute to making it difficult to tamper with the pattern (setting key signal wiring pattern). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to security improvement. In addition, various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) for transmitting detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 used for setting changes are on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. By being formed, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize how various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and various wiring patterns ( RWM signal wiring pattern) can contribute to making unauthorized alteration difficult. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to security improvement. In addition, various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) for transmitting detection signals from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, thereby enabling the main control It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize how various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the substrate 1310. It can contribute to making unauthorized alteration difficult. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to security improvement.

In order to change the settings of the set values, as described above, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are important signals for changing the setting of the probability of generating a game state advantageous to the player. , it is necessary to make it difficult for the person in charge of the hall to illegally change the setting to an unintended probability.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which can change the setting of the probability of giving a profit to the player, and RWM switch 633d. The various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) for transmitting the detection signals of the main control board 1310 are routed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that they are not arranged close to each other and do not run in parallel. ing. As a result, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are interconnected. It is separated and input to predetermined input terminals (PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted. The various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for the RWM switch 633d and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d can be made difficult to be tampered with at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security for setting changes.

A detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). , and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern). It is The input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA is arranged eighth from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. Terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is arranged at the 20th lead terminal from the left in the figure (13th lead from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are connected. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used as the setting key signal so that the predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, which is input as the RWM signal, is not placed next to each other. A predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a that receives input, and a predetermined input of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a that receives the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d as the RWM signal. Between the terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and another lead terminal (specifically, among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, the 9th to 19th lead terminals from the left in the drawing , and a total of 11 lead terminals arranged in the lower row) are arranged so as to intervene.

As described above, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) among the through holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a are inserted. +5V power supply wiring pattern, signal output wiring pattern, input signal wiring pattern, and specific through holes (for example, mounting surface (surface) 1310x and A foil extraction region is formed by removing the copper foil around the through hole for electrically connecting the output signal wiring pattern with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (the logic for conveying the setting enabled state) as described above, and the input terminal PA5 (the setting signal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. key signal input terminal), and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal is LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation state) is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, by removing foil around the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) can be grounded. (GND) (substrate ground) can be made difficult to be tampered with by electrically switching between (GND) and (substrate ground), which can contribute to an improvement in security.

Setting of the main control MPU 1310a electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switches 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 The key signal input terminal and the main control MPU 1310a electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 In addition to between the RWM signal input terminal and the terminals, the peripheral terminal (other adjacent terminal) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminal (adjacent terminal) of the RWM signal input terminal are operated by pressing the RWM switch 633d. The logic of the RWM signal indicating that the part is not operated is HI (the logic that conveys the pressed non-operating state), and the logic of the setting key signal that indicates the state that the setting key switch 1311a is OFF-operated is HI (the setting disabled state). It may be electrically connected to a wiring pattern to which other signals are input or to a wiring pattern which outputs other signals so as to achieve logic to transmit. This makes it difficult for the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal to be tampered with, contributing to improved security.

A detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). , and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern). As a result, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are input to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal may be input from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). The input terminal PB7 of the port PB is arranged 22nd from the left (11th from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this manner, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is mainly input. By inputting to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the control MPU 1310a, even if adopting a configuration in which two detection signals are input to the lead terminals of the upper and lower rows respectively, it contributes to the improvement of the security of setting change. can be done.

The logic states of the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information on the address space according to the memory mapped I/O method. The logic state of each input terminal can be obtained. As for the input port PB, similarly, the main control MPU 1310a can acquire the logic state of each input terminal at the same address (address different from that of the input port PA) at the same time. The input ports PA, PB of the main control MPU 1310a are 8-bit input ports, and the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminals) to PA7, PB0 to PB7 of the input ports PA, PB are 0th to 7th bits. Each is pre-allocated to any of the bits.

[Summary A]
A1. Although the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b as described above, it is also applied to the lead terminal (COM1) of the setting key switch 1311a. terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal), lead terminals of electronic components (resistors MR10 to MR13, capacitor MC10, transistor MTR10) constituting the main control input circuit 1310b, and lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a (input port PA The wiring patterns for electrically connecting the input terminals PA5) are formed on a solder surface (back surface) 1310y opposite to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. FIG.

A2. In the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a, the wiring pattern of the main control board 1310 is changed. Since the wiring pattern is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, as described above, there is a through hole for electrically connecting the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. , through holes for this wiring pattern are not formed in the main control board 1310 .

A3. In the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a, the wiring pattern of the main control board 1310 is changed. It is difficult to route only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, and the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 must also be used. 190 to 193, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and/or the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is formed. In , the perimeter and the whole of the land of the through hole are covered with a green resist that is an insulating film.

A4. As described above, the main control board 1310 is accommodated and sealed in the main control board box 1320 that can be opened and closed by sliding in the longitudinal direction, which is composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 . The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301 . In this state, when the base member 1302 is aligned with the predetermined position of the cover member 1301 and moved in the longitudinal direction, the outer peripheral surface of the base member 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 1301, and the cover member 1301 and the base member 1302 move together. The main control board 1310 is housed in the space thus formed. Thereafter, by screwing the one-way screw or the like of the crimped portion 1303, which is the sealing portion, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed and the main control board box is sealed.

A5. The setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is rotated by inserting the setting key into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, as described above. be. If the setting key switch 1311a is pressed and the main control board 1310 bends when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 may be disconnected. There is Therefore, in order to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending, a setting key switch 1311a mounted on a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which is the solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board 1310, is provided. A projection 1302p shown in FIG. 185 is formed on the base body 1302 in the corresponding region.

When the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and is turned). When the pressing of the setting key is released (when the setting key is not inserted in the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a), as described above, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the main body 1302p are separated from each other. A distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the control board 1310, and when the setting key switch 1311a is pressed, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p moves toward the main control board. It comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of 1310 and prevents the main control board 1310 from bending.

A6. As described above, the distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. , in a state where the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and turned to set the setting key). When the pressing of the key is released (when the setting key is not inserted in the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a), the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other. There is nothing to do. When the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are slid when assembling the main control board box 1320, or when the main control board 1310 is taken out, the sealed state of the main control board box is released and the cover body 1301 is removed. and the base body 1302, the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p does not contact the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 and damage the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310. ing.

The front surface of the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. 186(b), a copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) is removed in the region corresponding to the surface (back surface) 1310y and its surroundings, and the copper foil portion copper foil layer, The entire area from which the copper plane) is removed is covered with a green resist, which is an insulating film. Even if the green resist, which is an insulating film formed on the upper surface of the protrusion 1302p, is rubbed and peeled off, the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p and the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) do not come into contact with each other. As a result, the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p does not come into contact with the wiring pattern or the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, and the wiring pattern may be damaged or disconnected by the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p. In addition to preventing damage to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control substrate 1310 .

A7. As described above, the main control board 1310 is accommodated and sealed in the main control board box 1320 that can be opened and closed by sliding in the longitudinal direction, which is composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 . The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301 . In this state, when the base member 1302 is aligned with the predetermined position of the cover member 1301 and moved in the longitudinal direction, the outer peripheral surface of the base member 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 1301, and the cover member 1301 and the base member 1302 move together. The main control board 1310 is housed in the space thus formed. When the base body 1302 is aligned with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301 and moved in the longitudinal direction, the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is also moved in the longitudinal direction. The solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the area where the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p moves is formed so that the wiring pattern is not routed. Although a distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the base member 1302 is separated from the cover member 1301. A case where the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 rubs against the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board, when moving in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the wiring pattern from being damaged or disconnected.

In addition to the wiring pattern, a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) is provided on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the area where the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 moves. may not be formed. Although a distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the base member 1302 is separated from the cover member 1301. When moving in the longitudinal direction to a predetermined position, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p may rub against the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. This is because it is necessary to prevent (GND) (substrate ground) from being damaged.

A8. A protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape. In this way, the area in which the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p moves can be the area in which the front surface (circular shape) of the cylinder that is the projecting portion 1302p moves. When the portion 1302p slides along the lower side of the main control board 1310 in parallel (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the distance dimension in the horizontal direction becomes the length of the slide movement of the projecting portion 1302p. By making the distance dimension in the direction the diameter of the cylinder, the area over which the front surface of the projection 1302p moves can be reduced. This can contribute to increasing the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern when routing the wiring pattern while avoiding the area where the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p moves.

In addition, when the protruding portion 1302p slides along the lower side of the main control board 1310 in parallel (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the region where the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p moves is the diameter of the cylinder and becomes constant. It is possible to prevent (suppress) interference with lead terminals of electronic components (lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) soldered to the surface (back surface) 1310y. .

A9. The protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a shape having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (a shape whose constant width dimension is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protruding portion 1302p). may be formed in In this way, the area where the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p moves can be moved horizontally by sliding the projecting portion 1302p parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310). is the length of sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p, and the distance in the vertical direction can be the constant width of the protrusion 1302p. As a result, when the wiring pattern is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the region where the protrusion 1302p moves, the wiring pattern is mainly routed along the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p. By routing to the solder surface (back surface) 1310 y of the control board 1310 , the wiring pattern and the shape of the protrusion 1302 p in the longitudinal direction can be parallel to each other. It is possible to prevent the wiring pattern from being damaged or disconnected by rubbing the green resist, which is an insulating film formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y.

In addition, when the projecting portion 1302p slides along the lower side of the main control board 1310 in parallel (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the region where the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p moves becomes a constant width of the protruding portion 1302p. Prevents (suppresses) interference with lead terminals of electronic components (lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of setting key switch 1311a) soldered to the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of 1310. be able to.

A10. The protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is not formed to have a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. If the protruding portion 1302p is formed to have a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, when the base body 1302 is aligned with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301 and moved in the longitudinal direction, the protruding portion The side surface of 1302p interferes with the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. FIG. Therefore, the projecting portion 1302p is not formed to have a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. In this way, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side surface of the projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are aligned. It is possible to prevent (suppress) interference with the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to (lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a).

A11. As shown in FIG. 184, the setting key switch 1311a is connected to a setting key cylinder 1311ab into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and an outer cylinder 1311aa. A rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac in which an ON or OFF circuit is formed, and a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa is formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and is bent to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. A frame plate 1311ad having a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada protruding rearward from the base body 1311ac formed on both side surfaces thereof. The setting key cylinder 1311ab is molded from a non-conductive resin, and the frame plate 1311ad is molded from a conductive metal. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected to each other and are electrically insulated.

A12. The lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted through the through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the solder surface (rear surface) of the main control board 1310. 1310y and is soldered, and is electrically connected to a wiring pattern forming a signal transmission path to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 by the internal circuit of the setting key switch 1311a. A frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is formed with a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada. 1310 are inserted into long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and protruded from the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and soldered to electrically connect the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. , and the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected.

The pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 through the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 to form the solder surface of the main control board 1310. 1310y, but not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, and the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically floating. It may be.

A13. A locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 is made of conductive metal. Unlike the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the locking unit 650 is grounded to the island facility of the game hall via a ground wire (not shown).

A14. Since the operator who operates the setting key switch 1311a must first release the body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, a key (this key is , which is a metal key having electrical conductivity. Even if the operator is charged with electric potential, when the operator inserts the metal key into the key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 in the locking unit 650, the electric potential charged by the operator is transferred to the locking unit. 650, and through a ground wire (not shown), it is grounded to the island facility of the game hall and can be released, so that the electric potential charged to the operator can be removed.

Even if the operator inserts the setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the electric potential charged to the operator is already applied to the island equipment of the game hall. Since the setting key switch 1311a is already grounded and removed, it is possible to prevent damage due to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge of the potential charged to the operator against the setting key switch 1311a. Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the frame plate 1311ad are electrically insulated as described above, even if the setting key switch 1311a is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba, the operator is not charged with electric potential. Prevents damage to the main control board 1310 without penetrating into the conductive metal frame plate 1311ad connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab. be able to. (As a matter of course, the signal terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) which are the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are insulated from the frame plate 1311ad and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.)

Furthermore, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a remains charged. nor will it be.

When the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is connected to the main control board together with the frame plate 1311ad. It is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) of 1310 (substrate ground). Even if an operator inserts the setting key into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab in a charged state, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is connected to both the frame plate 1311ad and the main control board 1310. Since it is not electrically connected (in an insulated state) to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground), the potential charged to the operator is applied to the main control substrate 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. This prevents damage to the main control board 1310 without intrusion into the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground). However, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, when the setting key switch 1311a is charged, it cannot discharge.

The long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' to which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are soldered are electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. It is in an electrically floating state. A through hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, a through hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, and a through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted are wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2. is electrically connected, the through hole SLTH1 is electrically connected to the wiring pattern SPTN3, and the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted is connected to the solid ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (substrate ground).

As described above, since the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are present around the long through holes SLH1′ and SLH2′, the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SLH2′ and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 are interposed between the long through holes SLH1′ and SLH2′ and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3. The solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed, and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through holes SLH1′, SLH2′ and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4. ), the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is charged. In order to avoid this influence even if it becomes impossible, the long through holes SLH1′ and SLH2′ and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 are arranged adjacent to each other without the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control substrate 1310 intervening. should be avoided. In addition, it is necessary to prevent the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 from being adjacent to each other without the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310 intervening.

[Summary B]
B1. The setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 is connected to the input terminal PA5 ( setting key signal input terminal) and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA.

The logic state of the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is memory mapped I/O. It is treated as memory information on the address space according to the method, and the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously acquire it at the same address. That is, the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a have 8 bits as described above. Bits 0 to 7 are pre-allocated to predetermined ports.

The IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is, as described above, a ZIP (Zigzag In-line Package). It is arranged and formed in a row. The input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA are not arranged adjacent to one of the two columns.

For example, when arranging the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA in one of the two columns, Input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are arranged so that input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are not arranged next to each other. It is arranged such that another lead terminal is interposed between it and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA.

B2. The setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 is connected to the input terminal PA5 ( setting key signal input terminal) and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, one of the two lines is connected to the input port PA. input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are arranged. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the switch 1311a and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are arranged in two rows. Electrical connection may be made so that they are arranged in separate columns.

B3. The setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 is connected to the input terminal PA5 ( setting key signal input terminal) and electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA. A setting key signal input terminal to which a setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the mounted setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected, and an RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. The logic state of the RWM signal input terminal electrically connected to the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM signal input terminal may be acquired at different addresses. In other words, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal may be allocated in advance so that they can be obtained separately from different input ports. When the input terminals (lead terminals) are collectively arranged for each input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal can be separated from each other by having different addresses. .

B4. Mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which is transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, includes a logic (HI) that conveys a setting disabled state and a logic (LOW) that conveys a settable state. The logic (HI) for notifying the setting disabled state is generated by a +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 for the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The logic (LOW) that conveys the settable state is the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side of the main control board 1310 (board ground).

Therefore, the main control board 1310 is provided with a +5V generation circuit 1310g that has other input terminals adjacent to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) (or other input terminals around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)). The circuit is configured to be electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created in . As a result, even if an unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit another input terminal adjacent to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) can still be electrically connected. The voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern is pulled up to the +5 V power supply line side generated by the +5 V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, so that the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the electric power line are connected. The logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a transmitted through the setting key signal wiring pattern that is connected to the setting key switch 1311a, becomes the logic (HI) that conveys the setting disabled state as a result, and the setting can be changed. can be eliminated.

RWM switch mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from 633d, includes a logic (HI) that conveys the pressing non-operation state and a logic (LOW) that transmits the pressing operation state. The logic (HI) that conveys the pressing non-operating state is +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 from the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). The logic (LOW) that conveys the pressing operation state is mainly the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). It is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side of the control substrate 1310 .

Therefore, for input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), as with input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), another input terminal adjacent to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) (or input terminal PA0 ( The circuit is configured such that another input terminal (around the RWM signal input terminal)) is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 . As a result, even if an unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit another input terminal adjacent to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is electrically connected. The voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern is pulled up to the +5V power supply line generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, thereby electrically connecting to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). The logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d transmitted through the RWM signal wiring pattern, becomes the logic (HI) that conveys the pressed non-operation state, making it impossible to change the setting. .

Setting of the main control MPU 1310a electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switches 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 The key signal input terminal and the main control MPU 1310a electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 In addition to between the RWM signal input terminal and the terminals, the peripheral terminal (other adjacent terminal) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminal (adjacent terminal) of the RWM signal input terminal are operated by pressing the RWM switch 633d. The logic of the RWM signal indicating that the part is not operated is HI (the logic that conveys the pressed non-operating state), and the logic of the setting key signal that indicates the state that the setting key switch 1311a is OFF-operated is HI (the setting disabled state). It may be electrically connected to a wiring pattern to which other signals are input or to a wiring pattern which outputs other signals so as to achieve logic to transmit. This makes it difficult for the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal to be tampered with, contributing to improved security.

B5. When the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (the logic that conveys the setting enabled state), and the input terminal PA5 (the setting key signal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a input terminal), the setting key signal wiring pattern is electrically connected to the periphery of the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). , the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern are not improperly shorted to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground). (substrate ground) is not formed and serves as a foil extraction area. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is provided around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and around the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). A ground (GND) (substrate ground) is not formed (arranged) in which the logic of the setting key signal that is in the ON-operated state is LOW (logic that conveys the settable state). This can prevent the voltage applied to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being illegally lowered to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground). .

Further, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic for transmitting the pressing operation state) to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the PA, the periphery of the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). Around the RWM signal wiring pattern, the ground ( GND) (substrate ground) is not formed and serves as a foil extraction region. That is, around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), there is a pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d. A ground (GND) (substrate ground) for which the logic of the RWM signal indicating the operated state is LOW (logic for conveying the pressing operation state) is not formed (arranged). This can prevent the voltage applied to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being illegally lowered to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground).

B6. Mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which is transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, is a logic (HI) that conveys the setting disabled state and a logic (LOW) that conveys the setting enabled state. It is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 transmitted through the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of The logic states of the operation signal are a logic (HI) that conveys the pressing non-operating state and a logic (LOW) that conveys the pressing operation state. HI) have the same logic (HI), and the logic (LOW) that conveys the settable state and the logic (LOW) that conveys the pressing operation state have the same logic (LOW). Instead, the same logic (HI or LOW) is used for the logic that conveys the settable state and the logic that conveys the pressed state, and the logic that conveys the settable state and the logic that conveys the pressed non-operated state. may be the same logic (LOW or HI). Compared with the same logic that conveys the settable state and the logic that conveys the pressed state, it is better to make the logic that conveys the settable state and the logic that conveys the pressed non-operated state the same logic. A person who intends to tamper with the terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), setting key signal wiring pattern, input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and RWM signal wiring pattern should not attempt to tamper with the logic until he or she understands the logic of this combination. As a result, one side is shorted to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) and the other side is shorted to the power supply. , the setting key signal wiring pattern, the setting key signal input terminal, and the RWM signal wiring pattern can be prevented from being tampered with, thereby contributing to an improvement in security.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board 1310 is formed on the cover body side rib portion 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and on the base body 1302, as described above. and the base body side rib portion 1302rb. As described above, the base body 1302 has a projection capable of contacting the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. A portion 1302p is formed. When the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the protruding portion 1302p bends and bends the main control board 1310 due to the inserted force. By coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the substrate 1310, the main control substrate 1310 is prevented from further bending and bending, and disconnection of the wiring pattern formed on the main control substrate 1310 and peeling of the solder are prevented. It can be prevented. As shown in FIG. 186(b), a copper foil is removed from the area of the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 with which the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 abuts and its surroundings. A foil extraction area SINSy having a circular shape is formed. As a result, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped by the projecting portion 1302p, it is possible to prevent damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the projecting portion 1302p. . The foil extraction area SINSy having a circular shape from which the copper foil is extracted safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

B7. The setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, whereby the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch are mounted. 633d are mounted on separate control boards. Thereby, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the RWM switch mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 provided on the main body frame 4 633d are spaced apart from each other, and even if an attempt is made to tamper with them, it is necessary to tamper with both the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. A fraudulent person who sees the arrangement of 1311a and the RWM switch 633d loses the will to tamper with it, making it difficult to be fraudulent.

When actually changing the setting, after operating the setting key switch 1311a, it is necessary to operate the power switch 630a for turning on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RWM switch 633d. Since the power switch 630a is mounted on the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM switch 633d, and the power switch 630a required for changing settings are Each is mounted on a separate board.

B8. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. As shown, a main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function mounted on a mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, and has a common circuit configuration circuit) to the predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a, but via dedicated ICs each having an input circuit (that is, input from the setting key switch 1311a). A detection signal may be input to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via a dedicated IC for setting key input, and a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d via a dedicated IC for RWM input. good. This makes it difficult for the logic states of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d to be tampered with, thereby contributing to the improvement of countermeasures against tampering.

In addition, the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors. Therefore, it may be configured as a DIP type transistor array in which a plurality of transistors of the main control input circuit 1310b are integrated into one IC.

B9. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. As shown, a main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function mounted on a mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, and has a common circuit configuration circuit) to the predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a, but via dedicated ICs each having an input circuit (that is, input from the setting key switch 1311a). A detection signal may be input to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via a dedicated IC for setting key input, and a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d via a dedicated IC for RWM input. good. In this case, the resistors and transistors constituting the main control input circuit 1310b without other error detection functions are arranged between separate dedicated ICs. This makes it difficult for which circuit to distinguish between the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which contributes to the improvement of fraud countermeasures.

B10. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. As shown, it is input to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function. When using a DIP-type transistor array in which transistors of a plurality of main control input circuits 1310b are integrated into one IC, an input terminal of the DIP-type transistor array to which a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, The input terminal of the DIP type transistor array to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input is arranged so as not to be adjacent, or among the plurality of input terminals protruding from one side surface of the DIP type transistor array A wiring pattern is formed so that a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to one of the input terminals. A wiring pattern is formed so as to receive the detection signal from the switch 633d. In this way, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of anti-fraud measures.

B11. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. As shown, the respective voltages are pulled up to the power line side by resistors MR16 and MR5, respectively. These resistors MR16 and MR5 are pull-up resistors MR16 and MR5, and are arranged apart from the setting key switch 1311a. Specifically, the resistor MR16 forming the logic inverting circuit 1310iv has one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end connected to the main control circuit. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a, and is arranged to the right of the connector MCN8 arranged to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. One end of the resistor MR2, which constitutes the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end is It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is arranged above the lead-type collective resistor arranged above the setting key switch 1311a. there is Since the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are arranged apart from the RWM switch 633d. If the resistors MR16 and MR5 are tampered with, the logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, may be tampered with. Therefore, by separating the resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), the resistors MR16 and MR5 are mixed with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The existence of important resistors MR16, MR5 can be hidden.

In addition, by separating the resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), it is possible to temporarily remove an elongated illegal tool such as a wire from the gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Even if unauthorized access for insertion is made, unauthorized modification of the resistors MR16 and MR5 can be made difficult, and security can be improved.

B12. One end of the resistor MR16 constituting the logic inverting circuit 1310iv is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end is connected to the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a, and is arranged to the right of the connector MCN8 arranged to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. One end of the resistor MR2, which constitutes the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end is It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is arranged above the lead-type collective resistor arranged above the setting key switch 1311a. there is Thus, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are spaced apart. As a result, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are mixed with the other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that the logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the RWM It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the switch 633d is an important electronic component related to the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal.

Further, by separating the resistors MR16 and MR5 from each other, it is possible to make it difficult for the resistors MR16 and MR5 to be tampered with at the same time, which contributes to an improvement in security.

B13. An error in which a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are input. Between the main control input circuit 1310b without the detection function and the main control MPU 1310a, various DIP type ICs, lead type resistors, lead type diodes, lead type , a lead-type electrolytic capacitor, and a DIP-type crystal oscillator are interposed. In this way, even if an illegal tool such as a wire is inserted into the main control board box 1320 and attempts to short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the penetration of the illegal tool can be prevented by another circuit. It is possible to prevent the operation of the main control board 1310 by inducing a short-circuit to another circuit so that the game cannot be played. A detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are input. Even when the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function is replaced with a dedicated IC having an input circuit, another circuit is arranged between the dedicated IC and the dedicated IC. Even with this configuration, even if an illegal tool such as a wire is inserted into the main control board box 1320 to short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the penetration of the illegal tool can be prevented by another circuit. At the same time, it is possible to induce a short circuit to another circuit and prevent the operation of the main control board 1310 so that the game cannot be played.

B14. A detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 may be configured to be transmitted by connecting the game board side drawer connector and the main body frame side drawer connector. In this case, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the game board side drawer connector is mounted is formed on the surface opposite to the board side where the game board side drawer connector is mounted (or on the game board side Even if formed on the mounting surface on which the drawer connector is mounted, it is covered by the drawer connector, making it difficult to see. Since the pattern is formed on the surface opposite to where the main frame side drawer connector is mounted (or even if it is formed on the mounting surface where the main frame side drawer connector is mounted, it is covered by the drawer connector), it is difficult to see. there is

Now, the drawer connector will be described. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically electrically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board that is connected to the main body frame 4, and a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer of the game board 5 is guided. Each terminal of the connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the body frame 4 .

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 will be described. It has a box-shaped main body elongated in the direction, and a plate-like base body elongated in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped main body to form an English letter T shape as a whole.

Around the opening of the box-shaped main body, the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is attached to the box-shaped main body over a predetermined distance from the front of the opening toward the bottom of the box-shaped main body. A ramp is formed in each for guiding toward the bottom surface. The game board side drawer connectors (convex type) is not turned upside down in a normal direction and inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is in the normal direction. to prevent lateral misalignment between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the game board 5 when they are inserted into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). Grooves for enhancing engagement between the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) of the game board 5 extend from the vicinity of the front surface of the opening of the box-shaped main body toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body. formed.

Pin-type terminals (six pin-type terminals are arranged in one row in the left-right direction) are arranged in two rows in the left-right direction on the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. It penetrates the box-shaped main body and the base body.

Mounting through holes are formed on the left and right sides of the base body, respectively. When mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side relay board, first rivets are inserted from the front of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) into the mounting through holes to connect the body frame side relay boards. The end portion is crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate. As a result, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is fixed to the body frame side relay board.

Also, on the back of the base, when mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main body frame side relay board, attach the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main body frame side relay board. A cylindrical protrusion is formed to be mounted.

In addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), the body frame side relay board is mounted with a small DIP (Dual Inline Package) type connector that is electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type). , is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is guided. ) and each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side are electrically connected, the main control provided on the game board 5 is connected via a DIP type small connector and wiring (harness). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals is formed by the board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provided in the body frame 4 .

In addition, the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4, and various power supplies from the power supply board 630 It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that supply power to various boards provided on the board 5, and is separate from the drawer connector (concave type) on the frame side of the main body. A frame-side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on another body frame-side relay board different from the body frame-side relay board. The other body frame side relay board is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) that is electrically connected to the other body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) as well as the other body frame side drawer connector (recessed type). type small connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to each decorative substrate, various sensors, etc. provided in the door frame 3 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, another game board side drawer separate from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). The connector (convex type) is guided to the other body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) ), the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 are connected via a DIP type small connector and wiring (harness). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals from various sensors and various speakers are formed. The structure of the other body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is the same as the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and the other body frame side drawer connector (concave type) has the same structure. The fixing method to the side relay board' is the same as the fixing method (fixing method using rivets) to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the body frame side relay board.

In addition, a method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board, and other bodies of the main body frame 4 The other game board side relay board of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the frame side drawer connector (concave type) It is different from the game board side relay board on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is mounted.) The fixing method to the main body frame is It is the same as the method of fixing the side drawer connector (concave type) to the body frame side relay board (fixing method using rivets).

Rivets are used when fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board. Although the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be electrically connected at the same time, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side. Since a large force may be applied to the box-shaped main body of the drawer connector (concave type), this large force causes the pin-type terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side to move to the back of the relay board on the main body frame side ( This is to prevent the soldered surface from peeling off. In addition, when fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board or when fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) to the game board side relay board using bolts and nuts, , there is a drawback that the nut may be loosened when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the body frame 4.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, a pin type terminal is used as each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal and each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 is powered. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 with the is turned on, the contact between the terminal and the contact (specifically, a large current (rush current) flows in the contact for various power supply lines) is welded. Become. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in this welded state, the contacts of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side may be bent and broken, or the game board 5 may be separated from the main body frame 4. The problem is that when removing the contacts, the contacts are peeled off from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) and damaged, making the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) unusable.

In addition, if the terminals and contacts are welded together, the connector may be damaged, which may cause various control boards to malfunction or damage the electronic components mounted on the various control boards. problem that needs to be established.

In this embodiment, by using pin-type terminals as the terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, the above-described problem does not occur at all. In other words, even if an operator mistakenly attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The terminals of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the frame 4 are not welded, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing welding.

B15. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 may be a pulse signal or a serial signal (command transmission) instead of the ON signal and OFF signal.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. The main control board 1310 of FIG. ing.

On the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a ZIP type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. A setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 188 is mounted as an operation unit, which is an electronic component capable of changing the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to a player.

A lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is soldered to the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and a lead terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is soldered. A wiring pattern for electrically connecting the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a is formed only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. FIG.

In this way, a wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is an operation unit capable of changing the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to the player, is formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to see how the wiring pattern is routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it difficult to tamper with the wiring pattern. can. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to security improvement.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. A setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 188 as a first operation unit capable of changing settings, and a ZIP type main control shown in FIG. 188 as a storage unit capable of storing game information. A main control built-in RAM of MPU 1310a is provided, and a main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 as a control board on which a ZIP type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. It has an RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board of FIG.

The main control MPU 1310a can change the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to the player based on the operation signal that is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the operation signal that is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. be.

A setting key signal wiring pattern serves as a first transmission path for inputting an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, to the main control MPU 1310a, and an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, is input to the main control MPU 1310a. The RWM signal wiring pattern is formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to run in parallel as the second transmission path.

In this way, an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is a first operation unit capable of changing the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to the player, is input to the main control MPU 1310a. An operation signal that is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which is a second operation unit capable of clearing (erasing) a certain setting key signal wiring pattern and game information held in the main control built-in RAM provided in the main control MPU 1310a. is formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to run parallel to the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path for inputting to the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path, are separated from each other and input to the main control MPU 1310a. It is possible to make it difficult for the signal wiring pattern and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission line, to be tampered with at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security.

[13. Game content]
Game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more the handle 195 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "accessory hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "time reduction (time reduction) hit" will be drawn.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 .

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 , or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 is guided. A plurality of obstructing nails that are discharged above the gate 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate 2003. After coming into contact with N, it passes through the gate 2003 with a certain probability.

The group of guide passages 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance is open near the impinging portion 1006, and an entrance which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not hit the impingement portion 1006 (right hitting). When the game ball B is hit with a strength somewhat weaker than the ball B, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 at a higher probability when the second guide path 2522 is used than the first guide path 2521 . Further, the second guide passage 2522 is more likely to pass through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 than the first guide passage 2521 .

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result of the lottery is "normal win", the first attacker unit 2400. The closed second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

It should be noted that if the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 before the normal lottery result is suggested after the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reservations for the ordinary lottery result is four, and even if the game balls B pass through the gate 2003, they are discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

A game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 has a high probability of hitting the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down and is sometimes accepted into the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700, or rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2022. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 , a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2022, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received in the accessory winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004 or the big winning port 2005.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right center unit 2700, and the side right center unit 2700 has a general winning port 2001, a prize winning port 2006, and a second starting port. There is no chance of being accepted in 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, and it is discharged out of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2022 on the downstream side of the guide path group 2520, the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a hitting operation such that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2022.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, in the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide path 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2022 than the first guide path 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, it is possible to encourage a hitting operation that requires fine adjustment of the rotation operation of the handle 182 rather than a "right hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the impingement portion 1006, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be encouraged. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 mainly having .

A game ball B that has passed through the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the prize winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. After passing through the left side, it is released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 .

At this time, when the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and "accessory prize" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the accessory winning opening 2006 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 output a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 580. ) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 .

The game ball B received by the accessory winning opening 2006 and detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2601 circulates through the sorting passage 3158, and is moved forward and backward by the V winning opening door 3006, which advances and retreats to the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. be assigned to any of the When the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2007, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern as an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the game ball B is sorted to the losing hole 2008, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player does not occur.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 is the first shelf 2421, the second starting door 2411, and the second shelf 2422, and the top is left. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and furthermore, it rolls leftward on the third shelf 2423, the big winning opening door 2413, and the fourth shelf 2424 and is released into the game area 5a. .

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2411, the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003 is "ordinary hit", and the second starting door 2411 is retreating, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big win", "middle win", "minor win", "accessory win", "probability variation (probability variation) win", A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "time reduction (time reduction) hit" will be drawn.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the big winning opening door 2413, a special lottery result (first special If the lottery result and the second special lottery result) is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot"), after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes the game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, a lot of the game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. can.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A lottery will be held for special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "accessory hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit". The special lottery result obtained is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).In addition, the game ball B is placed in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The special lottery results that are drawn by being accepted include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "short time (time Shortened) hit”, “probable variable time short hit”, “probable variable time short hit”, “second big hit”, etc.

When the special lottery result is "a winning prize", the prize winning opening 2006 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big win", after the big winning hole 2005 becomes an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or to the big winning hole 2005 Acceptance of a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) to make the game ball B unacceptable in a closed state. is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second big hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is able to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time ). This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific variation number of times.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without holding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small winning" game, a "big winning" game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation-type effect can be performed in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301 .

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back By appropriately using the rear upper production unit 3200, the back rear lower production unit 3300, etc., it is possible to perform light emission production, display production, etc., and various productions can also entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type performance of operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. to notify the player to that effect.

[14. Second Embodiment of Game Board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196 and the like. FIG. 194(a) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) is the same part as (a) showing an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment. It is a front view showing. Figure 195 (a) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) shows a state in which the back front left decoration unit of the back front effect unit in (a) is decorated with light emission. It is an explanatory diagram shown in . FIG. 196 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the panel board of the game panel is decorated with light in FIG. 195(a).

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is the same as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the front component member 1000A and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are made of translucent milky white synthetic resin. , and the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100 (the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120) are made of transparent synthetic resin, so as shown in FIG. , the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front (player's side).

On the other hand, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, the front structural member 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are made of a milky white synthetic resin. A portion of the back unit 3000 or the like provided behind the game panel 1100, excluding the inner side of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A, cannot be visually recognized from the front (player's side).

The front structural member 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are made of a translucent milky white opaque synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110A may be obtained by cutting a milky-white synthetic resin plate, or may be formed by injection molding using a milky-white synthetic resin.

In the game board 5A of the present embodiment, since the panel plate 1110A and the like of the game panel 1100 are milky white, a portion of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110A and the like (from the opening 1112 in the front view). outer part) can be made invisible. Since the panel plate 1110A and the like are translucent, when the decorative body or the like provided behind is decorated with light, the light from the rear decorative body passes through the panel plate 1110A and the decorative body is illuminated. The luminous decoration can be visually recognized by the player.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 195(a), in the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110A, etc., when viewed from the front, the panel plate 1110A The back front left logo decorative portion 3122, the back front left sub decorative portion 3123, and the like positioned outside the opening 1112 are invisible from the front. Then, when the back front left logo decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123, etc. are decorated with light emission, as shown in FIG. Light from the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123 provided on the rear side through the panel plate 1110A is transmitted, and the back front top left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front left sub decoration are illuminated. The portion 3123 and the like become visible.

Since the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white, the luminescent color of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, and the like, which are decorated with light emission, can be transmitted in the same color. A player can be shown a rich luminescence performance.

It is preferable that the translucent opaque material of the panel plate 1110A has a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to decorate with light with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. On the other hand, if the haze value is lower than this, the shapes and decorations of the members provided on the rear side become easily recognizable, and there is a possibility that the presentation effect by concealment cannot be obtained sufficiently.

In addition, the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)). / 0.5)”, “Ubana color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)”, “Unbleached color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)”, “Lead white Munsell value (N 9)”, “Oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)”, “Greyish white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)”, “White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)”, “Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)”, “ivory Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)”, “cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)”, “cherry color Munsell Value (10RP 9/2.5)", etc., may also be a white color.

By the way, since the panel plate 1110A and the like are translucent and milky white, if black, red, and blue colored decorations are provided behind the panel plate 1110A, the decorations will emit light. Depending on the color of the decoration, it may be visible through the panel plate 1110A even when it is not decorated. Since the decoration can be seen through the panel plate 1110A, the player notices the existence of the decoration behind the panel plate 1110A, and the impact (surprise) given to the player when the decoration is illuminated is reduced. There is a risk that the performance will drop and the desired performance effect will not be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back front left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, etc. of the back front left decoration unit 3120 provided behind the panel plate 1110A. Since the left first decoration 3124, the back front left second decoration 3125, the back front left third decoration 3126, and the back front left decoration base 3127 are formed of colorless and transparent members, they are translucent. The back front left logo decorative portion 3122 and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123 cannot be seen through the milky white panel plate 1110A. Therefore, when the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, etc. are not decorated with light emission, they cannot be seen by the player, so that it is difficult for the player to notice their existence. . When the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, etc. are decorated with light emission, they can be seen through the translucent milky white panel plate 1110A, which surprises the player. The light of the light emitting decoration can be seen through the panel plate 1110A, so that the inside of the game area 5a can be made bright and beautiful, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. .

In addition, the game board 5A of the present embodiment is provided with a panel decoration substrate 1130 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 1130a for emitting light to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110A outside the translucent milky-white panel plate 1110A. It is The plurality of LEDs 1130a are full-color LEDs. When the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are illuminated, the panel plate 1110A can be decorated with light emission, as indicated by hatching in FIG. As a result, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) through which the game ball B circulates in front becomes self-illuminating, so that the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened and the inside of the game area 5a is circulated. The game ball B can be easily seen, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 self-illuminates, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be seen as a silhouette, so that the game ball B can be easily visually recognized, and the shooting intensity can be finely adjusted. can be made easier. Also, if the panel decoration substrate 1130 is provided on both the left side and the right side of the panel plate 1110A, the player can intuitively understand the advice of "right-handed" or "left-handed" advice. become. More specifically, depending on the game situation, the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 on either the left side or the right side is caused to emit light, and the left part or the right part of the panel plate 1110A is decorated with light, thereby It is possible to make the player intuitively understand that the advice of ``left-handed'' or ``right-handed'' is given, and the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B. The player can be entertained with a new sense of light emission performance.

More specifically, in a conventional pachinko machine, a game board using an opaque veneer plywood as a game panel is covered with a decorative film printed with a predetermined pattern or the like on the front surface of the plywood so that the inside of the game area is covered. I am trying to decorate it. However, when the plywood is used for the game panel, the decoration with the decorative film does not look like other game machines, and it is difficult to enhance the appeal to the players. On the other hand, like the game board 5 of the first embodiment, when the panel plate 1110 through which the game ball B circulates in front is made transparent, the decoration of the back unit 3000 provided in the rear and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 are displayed. While the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a feeling of openness by making it easy to see such as, the game ball B flowing in front of the transparent panel plate 1110 looks like it is floating in the air, and some players feel that the game ball There is a risk that B's movement will be difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 can decorate the translucent panel board 1110A with light emission. By appropriately combining the above, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be changed in a variety of ways, and the player can see the self-illuminating game board 5A that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, and at the same time attract the player's attention. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can strongly attract players and has high appeal to players. In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is illuminated by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, the game ball B flowing in front of the panel plate 1110A can be easily seen, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

According to the game board 5A of the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described above, the panel plate 1110A and the like are made of a milky white synthetic resin, and it is sufficient to use a resin of a lower grade than a transparent resin. The cost of the panel plate 1110A can be reduced compared to the case of using resin.

In the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is provided outside the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110A. You can do it. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above. In addition, compared to the case where the panel plate is transparent, point-like light from the LEDs 1130a and the like provided in the rear can be diffused by the milky-white panel plate 1110A having light properties. can be softly decorated with light emission, and glare can be suppressed to provide a game board 5A that is easy on the eyes.

In the game board 5A of the present embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also referred to as a cell) having a predetermined pattern may be pasted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wear of the panel plate 1110A due to the circulation of the game balls B, and to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the game area 5a when the rear decorative body is not decorated with light emission by the pattern of the cell, thereby improving the appearance. can be improved. In addition, by the light from the LEDs provided behind the panel plate 1110A, the pattern of the cells can be illuminated together with the panel plate 1110A, and the decoration of the panel plate 1110A can be made to look more beautiful.

In addition, as described above, when the cells are provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the patterns applied to the cells are used as outlines, so that the light-emitting decoration ( illumination) can be made clear, and the decorative effect of the luminous decoration can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, cells may be provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. As a result, the shadow of the cell (or the pattern applied to the cell) is reflected on the panel plate 1110A by the light emitted from the LED or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A (cell), so that the LED emits light. The decoration of the panel board 1110A can be changed by , and the player can be entertained and the decline of interest can be suppressed. The shadows reflected on the panel board 1110A may be characters such as "Right-handed", "Left-handed", "Chance", etc., suggesting changes in the game situation to entertain the player. can be done.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a decorative body (rear front left decorative unit 3120) whose position is fixed is provided behind the milky white panel plate 1110A, but it is not limited to this. A movable decorative body may be provided behind the panel plate 1110A, which is movable between a retracted position behind the panel plate 1110A and an appearance position inside the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the whole including the inside of the panel plate 1110A and the like is milky white, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be milky white. Specifically, for example, at least one surface of a panel plate formed by two-color molding with a transparent resin and a milky-white resin, a panel plate in which a transparent resin plate and a milky-white resin plate are bonded together, and a transparent resin plate A panel plate with a milky white film (cell) attached, a panel plate with a back surface of a transparent resin plate that has been subjected to shrinking processing with ultraviolet curable ink, a panel plate with a sandblast processing on the back surface of a transparent resin plate, etc. be done.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A and the like are shown to be milky white, but the present invention is not limited to this. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front constituent member 1000A is translucent milky white, but the present invention is not limited to this. The component 1000 may be used, or the front component may have a color different from that of the panel plate 1110A.

[15. Third Embodiment of Game Board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of the panel plate and cells in the game board of the third embodiment, seen from the front. The game board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the cell 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, and the parts having the same configuration will be described in detail. are omitted.

In the game board 5B of the second embodiment, a film-like cell 1140 having a predetermined pattern is detachably provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100. . The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and is printed with a predetermined pattern. The materials of the cell 1140 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", and "polyethylene resin". , “polystyrene resin”, “impact-resistant polystyrene resin”, “polyvinyl chloride”, and the like.

The cells 1140 are sized to cover only a portion of the entire surface of the panel plate 1110 (here, the portion extending from the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the bottom). Although not shown, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 with a screw with a predetermined amount of backlash. As a result, compared to the case where the cell 1140 is attached to the entire surface of the panel plate 1110, it is possible to simplify the time and effort required to attach the cell 1140, and the amount of the cell 1140 used can be reduced. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the cells 1140 are provided on a part of the panel plate 1110, the number of the cells 1140 that can be removed from the resin sheet can be increased compared to the conventional cells that are attached to the panel plate, thereby increasing the number of the cells 1140. 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with rattling, even if the cell 1140 expands and contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction with the panel plate 1110 can be absorbed by the rattling. can. As a result, even if the cells 1140 shrink with respect to the panel plate 1110, the cells 1140 can be prevented from being wrinkled or cracked, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the cells 1140 can be maintained. .

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are attached to the panel plate 1110 with screws, the cells 1140 can be easily attached and detached from the panel plate 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cells 1140 with different patterns, the pachinko machine 1 can be changed in specifications and models. It is possible to easily respond to changes, design changes, etc., suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and replace it with a cell 1140 having a pattern with a higher decorative effect. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the cell 1140 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel plate 1110, the distance from the player to the cell 1140 is increased compared to the case where the cell 1140 is provided on the front side of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to reduce the feeling of pressure on the person.

In addition, it is desirable that the cells 1140 have translucency, and the pattern of the cells 1140 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the LEDs provided behind the panel plate 1110 (the cells 1140). The appearance of the area 5a can be improved, and the luminous decoration of the cells 1140 can strongly attract the player's interest, and the appeal of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the cells 1140 are attached to the panel plate 1110 using screws, but this is not a limitation. You may make it attach by pinching between.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in which the center accessory 2500 is provided is provided at a position that is biased to the upper right direction with respect to the panel plate 1110 (eccentric to the upper right). Although shown, it is not limited to this. By providing the cell 1140 behind the portion widened by the opening 1112 being shifted (eccentrically), the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 is provided may be biased against the center or the outer edge of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), or may be biased against the center or the outer edge of the game area 5a. good. Therefore, for example, when the centers of the panel plate 1110 and the game area 5a do not coincide with each other, even if the center of the opening 1112 that is biased with respect to the center of the panel plate 1110 coincides with the center of the game area 5a. Alternatively, the center of the opening 1112 that is biased toward the center of the game area 5a may coincide with the center of the panel plate 1110.

[16. Another embodiment of function display unit]
Next, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board 5 or the like will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 198 to 203 and the like. 198(a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a saw-to-saw line sectional view in (a), and (c) is the function display unit in (a) in front. (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from behind. 199 is an exploded front perspective view of the function display unit in FIG. 198, and FIG. 200 is an exploded rear perspective view of the function display unit in FIG. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display units of FIG. 198 and the player. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit and the player according to the third embodiment. FIG. 203 is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

Like the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment, the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment blinks a plurality of LEDs 1401 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 to provide a variable display. Later, by lighting or extinguishing each in a predetermined combination, the game state (game situation), ordinary lottery result, special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), ordinary lottery result , the number of pending special lottery results, the number of rounds in the event of a "jackpot", and the like.

More specifically, in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, for example, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays a special lottery result as internal processing. is selected. Then, the main control board 1310 transmits a control signal for displaying the special lottery result of the lottery to the function display unit 1400, and the function display unit 1400 displays the special lottery result of the lottery using the corresponding LED 1401. I'm trying

In addition, the control signal of the special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 as an effect suggesting the special lottery result. Is displayed. Since the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is focused on entertaining the player, the special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 can be roughly recognized, but the details are difficult to understand. It's becoming On the other hand, the function display unit 1400 accurately displays the result of the special lottery drawn, but since it is displayed by light emission of a plurality of small LEDs 1401, the displayed contents can be understood at a glance. It has become difficult.

Therefore, by photographing the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera, a camera attached to a mobile phone, or the like, the light emission state of the LEDs in the function display unit 1400 is analyzed, and the contents displayed on the function display unit 1400 are analyzed. It is conceivable to try to know as soon as possible.

However, when the result of the special lottery drawn by the function display unit 1400 can be easily discriminated by the light emission of the LED in the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is displayed as "losing". Even if the effect image for suggesting the result of the special lottery is displayed in the device 1600, the effect by the effect image cannot be enjoyed because the result is known, and the user wants the effect image to end early. However, some players may feel frustrated and lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, although the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be clearly recognized by the player's eyes, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 cannot be seen when photographed with a digital camera or the like. It is obscured so that what is being displayed cannot be determined.

Specifically, the function display unit 1400A includes a function display board 1402 having a plurality of LEDs 1401 mounted on its front surface, and a function display board 1402 provided on the front side of the function display board 1402, which independently transmits light from the LEDs 1401 forward. a light-transmitting sheet 1404 having translucency provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1403; and a front reflector 1405 that radiates in different directions.

As shown in FIG. 199, a plurality of LEDs 1401 are randomly mounted on the function display board 1402 . A plurality of through holes 1403 a are provided in the rear reflector 1403 so as to correspond to the LEDs 1401 of the function display substrate 1402 . A plurality of through holes 1403a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1402 (see FIG. 198(b), etc.).

The front reflector 1405 has a plurality of display holes 1405a corresponding to the through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The plurality of display holes 1405a are positioned just before the corresponding through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403 on the rear end side, and the front end side of the plurality of display holes 1405a extends from the front vertical line of the function display board 1402 passing through the center of the rear end side. located at a distance from each other. That is, the axial directions of the plurality of display holes 1405a are oriented in different directions with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the function display substrate 1402 .

In addition, the front reflector 1405 has a discriminating recess 1405b that is recessed rearward from the front so as to connect the plurality of display holes 1405a. The plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into two, a display hole 1405a (LED 1401) related to the first special lottery result and a display hole 1405a (LED 1401) related to the second special lottery result, by the discrimination recess 1405b.

A plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405, as shown in FIG. The light from the eye is directed in three different directions: visible only to the left eye, visible only to the right eye, and visible to both the left and right eyes. That is, the plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into three for left eye, right eye, and both eyes.

According to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, the light from all the LEDs 1401 can be seen when the player sees it with both eyes. It can be visually recognized, and the same function as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be exhibited without inferiority.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, when a photograph is taken with a digital camera or the like, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, either the left eye and both eyes or the right eye and both eyes are photographed. Therefore, it is difficult to photograph the light emission state (light emission state) of all the LEDs 1401 . In other words, when photographed with a digital camera or the like, it is possible to obscure the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401, making it difficult to distinguish the display contents on the function display unit 1400A. Therefore, based on the photographed photograph, the display contents on the function display unit 1400A are clarified, and the special lottery results drawn are "losing", mere "big hit", "probable odd hit", "short time hit", By knowing the ``second big win (ST win)'', etc., it becomes impossible to enjoy the performance for suggesting the result of the special lottery, or to enjoy the advantageous game state (for example, ``big win'' game) in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from falling in interest by entertaining the player.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, the direction of the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is changed, and the display contents are displayed according to the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. can be seen well, the display contents of the function display unit 1400A can be seen unclearly from behind the seated player. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, it is possible to reduce the chance that other players will look into the game, and the player can play the game without worrying about other players. can entertain.

In addition, as described above, since the display content is made to look good according to the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the function of using a digital camera or the like from a position behind the player can be displayed. It is possible to make it more difficult to photograph the content displayed on the display unit 1400A, and it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400A, the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is oriented vertically as well as horizontally, so that the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. When viewed from a height, the contents of the display are made to look good. As a result, when trying to photograph with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to adjust the height direction as well, making it more difficult to photograph the display content on the function display unit 1400A.

In addition, since the direction of the display hole 1405a in the front part of the reflector 1405 is changed for the left eye and the right eye, etc., it is possible to suppress the increase in the distance of the plurality of LEDs 1401 in the left-right direction on the function display board 1402, thereby improving the function. The horizontal width of the display unit 1400A can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented in different directions for the left eye, the right eye, etc., but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a function display unit 1400B configured as shown in FIG. 202 may be used.

The function display unit 1400B includes a function display substrate 1411 on which a plurality of left LEDs 1411a and a plurality of right LEDs 1411b are mounted at a predetermined distance (interval between the left and right pupils of the player) in the horizontal direction, and a function display substrate 1411. A rear reflector 1412 that is provided on the front side of the substrate 1411 and independently transmits the light from the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b forward, and a translucent translucent light that is provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1412. It is provided with a sheet 1413 and a front reflector 1414 that is provided on the front side of the translucent sheet 1413 and emits forward the light from the left LED 1411 a and the right LED 1411 b transmitted through the rear reflector 1412 .

The left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 are separated from each other by 40 mm to 80 mm in the horizontal direction. A rear reflector 1412 is provided with a plurality of through holes 1412 a corresponding to the left LED 1411 a and the right LED 1411 b of the function display substrate 1411 . A plurality of through holes 1412a are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the function display substrate 1411 . The front reflector 1414 is provided with a plurality of display holes 1414 a corresponding to the plurality of through holes 1412 a of the rear reflector 1412 . A plurality of display holes 1414 a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1411 .

The function display unit 1400B is configured so that when viewed from a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a is visible only with the left eye and the light from the right LED 1411b is visible only with the right eye. ing. Therefore, when the player sees with both eyes, the light from both the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, so that the same function as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be exhibited without inferiority.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the LED 1411a for the left and the LED 1411b for the right are separated in the left-right direction, only one of them can be photographed with a monocular digital camera or the like. It is possible to obtain the same effect as the function display unit 1400A.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the plurality of display holes 1414a in the front reflector 1414 are oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, it can be seen from a position other than the front surface of the function display unit 1400B. Since the displayed contents cannot be clearly seen, it is difficult to photograph the displayed contents with a digital camera or the like.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of display holes 1414a of the front reflector 1414 are oriented in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, and all of them are oriented in the same direction. , and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B having a configuration that is difficult to photograph with a monocular digital camera or the like are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display having the configuration as shown in FIG. A unit 1400C may also be used.

This function display unit 1400C emits invisible light (infrared rays, ultraviolet rays, etc.) that can be photographed by a digital camera or the like, thereby making it difficult to distinguish display contents. Specifically, a function display board 1421 on which a plurality of LEDs 1421a are mounted on the front surface, a rear reflector 1422 provided on the front side of the function display board 1421, and a flat plate-shaped lamp provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1422 A light guide plate 1423 , an auxiliary board 1424 on which invisible light LEDs 1424 a for emitting invisible light are mounted on the side surface of the light guide plate 1423 , and a front reflector 1425 provided on the front side of the light guide plate 1423 .

The rear reflector 1422 has a plurality of through holes 1422a corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 1421a of the function display substrate 1421, respectively. When the light from the invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 is incident on the light guide plate 1423 from the side, at least the portion of the display hole 1425a in front of the reflector 1425 emits light.

The invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 emits either infrared rays or ultraviolet rays as invisible light. The invisible light LED 1424a emits light and emits invisible light from the light guide plate 1423 when the special lottery result or the like is displayed by the plurality of LEDs 1421a. The front reflector 1425 has a plurality of display holes 1425 a corresponding to the through holes 1422 a of the rear reflector 1422 . A plurality of through holes 1422 a in the rear reflector 1422 and a plurality of display holes 1425 a in the front reflector 1425 are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display substrate 1421 .

According to this function display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light from the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see the invisible light. You can see the light and you can see the display contents in good condition.

On the other hand, when this function display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or the like, if it is capable of photographing invisible light, the light guide plate that emits light with invisible light makes it appear that all the display holes 1425a are emitting light. , the display contents can be made unclear, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In the above embodiment, the post reflector 1403 (post reflector 1412) and the light-transmitting sheet 1404 (light-transmitting sheet 1413) are provided. A front reflector 1405 (front reflector 1414) may be provided directly on the front surface of the display substrate 1411).

In addition, as a configuration for making it difficult to photograph the display contents on the function display unit with a digital camera or the like, for example, LEDs may be dispersed and displayed in a wider range than the photographing range of the digital camera or the like. It may be displayed by blinking the LED at a speed that makes it appear as if it is turned off when photographed with a digital camera or the like, or the LED that is not related to the display is turned off for the player. A plurality of dummy LEDs may be used in combination, which appear to be lit or extinguished when photographed with a digital camera, etc. Alternatively, high-brightness LEDs may be placed near the function display unit. It is also possible to cause halation when photographing with a digital camera or the like so that the display contents are not captured.

[17. Second Embodiment of Attachment of Magnetic Sensor]
Next, a second embodiment of attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050 different from the game board 5 and the like will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 204(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of attachment of the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor in (a) in a perspective view, and (c) is a ) is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor, and (d) is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor with a holding member different from (c).

A second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor 1050 includes a holding member 1071 which is mounted at a predetermined position on the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a formed of through-holes, and the locking of the holding member 1071. and a holding container 1072 that has an elastic claw 1072a that is engaged with the portion 1071a and that houses the magnetic sensor 1050 . The holding member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. Holding container 1072 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and magnetic sensor 1050 can be visually recognized from the outside. Also, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of a non-magnetic material.

In addition, the holding container 1072 has holes on the surface opposite to the elastic claws 1072a. An electric wire from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the holding container 1072 can be drawn out through the hole of the holding container 1072 .

According to the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, since the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of a non-magnetic material, when the magnet is brought close to the play area 5a, the holding member 1071 or the like draws a line of magnetic force from the magnet. It is possible to prevent the magnetic force lines from being brought together, and to prevent the reduction of the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 . Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity using magnets at an early stage. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraud.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding member 1071. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 without using a metal screw, and the time and effort required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. cost increase can be suppressed.

In addition, since the holding member 1071 is provided with an engaging portion 1071a penetrating therethrough, and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are engaged with the engaging portion 1071a, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached. The configuration of the attached holding member 1071 can be simplified, and the cost of the holding member 1071 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are engaged with the engaging portions 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 1071a is provided and an elastic claw 1072a is engaged with an arbitrary engaging portion 1071a, the position at which the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached can be arbitrarily set. Alternatively, another locking portion 1071a may be provided on the holding member 1071 at a position different from the locking portion 1071a where the elastic claw 1072a is locked. Accordingly, when it is desired to change the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 or when it is desired to add more magnetic sensors 1050, it is possible to cope with this without exchanging the holding member 1071 with a new one. The versatility of the member 1071 can be enhanced.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the holding container 1072 and is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily standardized. , the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, a plurality of locking portions 1071a are provided in the holding member 1071 in advance, and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 are locked to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions. can be provided at any position and the position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or added, a pachinko machine 1 capable of easily coping with design changes and model changes while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. be able to.

Further, an urging portion such as a protrusion that presses the magnetic sensor 1050 housed therein may be provided inside the holding container 1072 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely. Sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

In the above-described embodiment, a penetrating hole is shown as the engaging portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, but the present invention is not limited to this. , slits, or the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the holding container 1072 that accommodates the magnetic sensor 1050 in the vertical direction is shown, but the holding container is not limited to this, and may be a holding container that stores the magnetic sensor 1050 in the horizontal direction.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claws 1072a and attached to the holding member 1071. However, the sensor case of the magnetic sensor 1050 is not limited to this. An elastic claw may be formed on 1053 to be engaged with the engaging portion 1071 a of the holding member 1071 .

Moreover, although the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050 has been described above, this attachment structure may be used for attachment of a vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be mounted by housing the vibration sensor in a holding container having elastic claws and engaging the elastic claws with the locking portions of the holding member. The vibration sensor is not affected by surrounding magnetic bodies, but if a mounting structure similar to that of the magnetic sensor 1050 is used, it is effective in changing/moving the mounting location and reducing mounting costs.

[18. Another embodiment related to attachment of decorations such as seals]
Next, another embodiment relating to attachment of decorations such as seals different from the above embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 205 to 208 and the like. In this chapter, a member to which a predetermined decoration is applied is referred to as an ornamental body, a member to which the ornamental body is attached on one side is referred to as a first member, and a member attached to the other side of the first member is referred to as These members will be referred to as second members respectively. The decorative body, the first member, and the second member may be arranged in the front-rear direction, may be arranged in the up-down direction, or may be arranged in the left-right direction.

FIG. 205(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as the positioning hole for the second member, and (b) is for removing the decoration. FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole of the first member, and (c) is a state in which decorations having different thicknesses are attached in (b) FIG. 4D is an explanatory view showing a cross section of an example in which a separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as a mounting hole of the decoration. FIG. 206(a) is an explanatory view showing the state in which the decoration is attached to the first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is a decoration different from (a) is an explanatory view showing the first member to which the is attached from the front.

207(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the oblong rectangular ornament and the first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular ornament and the first member, and (c ) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the symmetrically provided decorative body and the first member, and (d) is an explanation showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member that are symmetrically provided in a different shape from (c). It is a diagram. Figure 208 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the tarter line in (a), and (c) is Fig. 10(a) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member, and (d) is a front view showing the relation between the decorative body having a form different from that of (a) and the movable first member. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing from 1 to 1, and (e) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Chi-Chi line in (d).

First, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(a), a decoration body 1801 made of a sheet-like seal on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1821 to which the decoration body 1801 is attached on one side. , and a second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821 .

The first member 1821 includes a flat plate portion 1821a, a mounting recess 1821b recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and the mounting recess 1821b of the flat plate portion 1821a. A boss portion 1821c protruding from the other surface, a separation hole 1821d passing through the boss portion 1821c and the flat plate portion 1821a, and a protrusion extending from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. and ribs 1821e. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. As shown in FIG.

The second member 1841 has a base portion 1841a with one surface in contact with the tip of the boss portion 1821c and the rib 1821e of the first member 1821, and the first member 1821 protruding from one surface of the base portion 1841a. and a positioning projection 1841b inserted into the hole 1821d. By inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned relative to each other.

When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1821b and on the other side by the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841. The inside is a closed space. The separation hole 1821d is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1821b. This separation hole 1821 d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 to the second member 1841 .

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821, the other side of the first member 1821 By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1821d and pressing the decoration 1801 from the other side to one side with the tip of the rod, the vicinity of the edge of the decoration 1801 can be turned up to one side and removed. By pulling the portion by the operator, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b, and the decorative body 1801 can be reattached.

Further, in a state in which the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, and the tip thereof presses the decorative body 1801 from the other side. Since the decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b, it is possible to easily replace the decoration 1801 when changing the model.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated, the decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b using the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to make it easy to separate the component parts by material, and to reduce the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, since the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1821b, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1821d and prevent the player from seeing the separation hole 1821d. can be made difficult to notice the existence of the separation hole 1821d, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1821d.

Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1821d is moved by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached. It is closed from the other side, and unlike conventional pachinko machines, it does not have a hole that passes through it all the way through. An illegal tool can be avoided from being inserted into the game board 5, and illegal acts can be prevented.

Further, since the separation hole 1821d is closed from the other side by the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decoration body 1801 from one side into the separation hole 1821d, the second Since the positioning protrusion 1841b of the member 1841 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) to the other side, the unauthorized tool is prevented from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, and since traces are left on the ornamental body 1801 by piercing the ornamental body 1801 with an illegal tool, execution of fraudulent acts can be discouraged and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 is replaced by the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, second the attacker unit 2600, the side middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1841 may be the game panel 1100 (the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(b), a decoration body 1801 made of a sheet-like seal on which predetermined decorations, letters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1822 to which the decoration body 1801 is attached on one side. and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 . The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration not shown.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and a portion of the mounting recess 1822b that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a. and a plurality of ribs 1822d projecting from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. As shown in FIG. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and on the other side is a plurality of ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842. It is open in a closed space surrounded by planes, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822, the other side of the first member 1822 By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decoration 1801 from the other side to the one side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, the vicinity of the edge of the decoration 1801 can be removed so that it can be rolled up to one side. By pulling the portion by the operator, the decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, and the decoration 1801 can be reattached.

In addition, in a state in which the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the end of the rod-shaped member presses the decoration body 1801 from the other side. Since the decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, it is possible to easily replace the decoration 1801 when changing the model.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to make it easy to separate the component parts by material, and to reduce the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by attaching the decoration body 1801 to the mounting recess 1822b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed, and the separation hole 1822c can be prevented from affecting the player. can be made difficult to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached. Unlike the conventional pachinko machine, a hole that passes through the whole is not penetrated, so that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire passes through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842. The game board 5 It is possible to avoid being inserted into the inside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

In addition, since the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842, even if an unauthorized tool is passed through the decoration 1801 from one side and is inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 prevents the removal of the tool. can be prevented from being inserted (intruded) into the other side, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, and cheating To provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence power against fraudulence, since a mark is left on the decoration body 1801 when an illegal tool pierces the decoration body 1801, making the execution of fraudulent activity hesitant. can do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, third second attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(c) has a decorative body 1802 made of a seal having a certain thickness (for example, 0.4 mm to 5 mm) with a predetermined decoration and a decorative body 1802 on one side. It has a first member 1822 that is attached and a second member 1842 that is attached to the other side of the first member 1822 . The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration not shown.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, and a portion of the mounting recess 1822b that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a. and a plurality of ribs 1822d projecting from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821 b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decoration 1802 . Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1802 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and on the other side is a plurality of ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842. It is open in a closed space surrounded by planes, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1802 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1802 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822, the other side of the first member 1822 By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decoration 1802 from the other side to the one side with its tip, the vicinity of the edge of the decoration 1802 can be removed so that it can be rolled up to one side. By pulling the portion by the operator, the decoration 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, and the decoration 1802 can be reattached.

Further, in a state in which the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip thereof presses the decoration body 1802 from the other side. Since the decoration 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the work of replacing the decoration 1802 when changing the model can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to make it easy to separate the component parts by material, and to reduce the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by attaching the decoration body 1802 to the mounting recess 1822b, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c, and to prevent the separation hole 1822c from appearing to the player. can be made difficult to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is attached. Unlike the conventional pachinko machine, a hole that passes through the whole is not penetrated, so that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire passes through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842. The game board 5 It is possible to avoid being inserted into the inside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

In addition, since the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842, even if an unauthorized tool is passed through the decoration 1802 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 prevents the removal of the tool. can be prevented from being inserted (intruded) into the other side, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, and cheating To provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence power against fraudulent actions by preventing fraudulent actions and leaving traces on the decorations 1802 when an illegal tool penetrates the decorations 1802. can do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, third second attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decoration holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decoration substrate, or the like.

Examples of the decorative body 1802 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like. The decorative body 1802 may be formed by injection molding, vacuum molding, air pressure molding, high frequency molding, or the like.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(d) has a thick (for example, 2 mm to 20 mm) and rigid decorative body 1803 with a predetermined decoration, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1803 is attached on one side. and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 .

The decorative body 1803 has a mounting dowel 1803a protruding to the other side. The decoration 1803 can be attached to the first member 1822 by press-fitting the attachment dowel 1803a into a separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822, which will be described later.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and with which the decorative body 1803 abuts, and a mounting dowel that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It has a separation hole 1822c into which 1803a is press-fitted, and a plurality of ribs 1822d projecting from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821 b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803 . Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed by a mounting dowel 1803a protruding from the decorative body 1803 on one side, and the plurality of ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842 on the other side. It is open in a closed space surrounded by , and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1803 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1803 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822, the decoration body 1803 is separated from the other side of the first member 1822. A rod-shaped member is passed through the hole 1822c, and the mounting dowel 1803a of the decoration 1803 is pushed by the tip of the rod from the other side to one side. can be easily removed from the first member 1822, and the decoration 1803 can be reattached.

In addition, while the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 is pressed by the tip of the rod-shaped member from the other side. By doing so, the decoration 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822, so that the work of replacing the decoration 1803 when changing the model can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decoration 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 using the separation hole 1822c. The component parts can be easily sorted by material, and the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, by press-fitting the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and attaching the decorative body 1803 to the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and to make it difficult for the player to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. To prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, since the hole is not passed through the entirety. and prevent fraudulent activities from occurring.

In addition, since the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fitted into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decorative body 1803 has rigidity, it is attempted to insert an unauthorized tool from one side through the decorative body 1803 and into the separation hole 1822c. Also, penetration can be prevented by the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the mounting dowel 1803a. For example, even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and passed through the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side, so that the separation hole 1822c is closed. It is possible to prevent an illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through which it is passed, to prevent fraudulent acts, and to pierce the decorative body 1803 by the illegal tool. Since a trace is left on the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to make the execution of fraudulent actions hesitant, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent actions.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, third second attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decoration holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decoration substrate, or the like.

Moreover, as the decorative body 1803, a relief-shaped decorative body formed by injection molding can be used. The mounting dowels 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be integrally molded with the decorative body 1803, may be insert-molded, or may be assembled separately. good.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b), a decoration body 1804 made of a sheet-like seal on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and the decoration body 1804 is attached to one side. a first member 1823; The configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the first member 1823 may have any of the configurations described above.

The decorative body 1804 is a seal having a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like printed on its surface, and has translucency. The decorative body 1804 has a substantially square outer shape, and chamfered portions 1804a with a predetermined radius are provided at three corners. Since the overall shape of the decorative body 1804 is such that it is difficult to specify the direction, the direction can be specified by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. . Although the chamfered portion 1804a is shown as being R-chamfered here, it may be C-chamfered.

In addition, the decorative body 1804 has an adhesive surface 1804b (the shaded portion in FIG. 206(a)) provided on the back surface with a substantially constant width (width within the range of 3 mm to 6 mm) along the outer peripheral edge. have. The width of the adhesive surface 1804b is set appropriately according to the size of the decoration 1804. FIG. Restricting the adhesive surface 1804b to only the outer peripheral edge in this manner is often used particularly when a transparent seal (decorative body 1804) is desired to show an electrical decoration such as an LED or a design surface behind it.

The first member 1823 is composed of a flat plate portion 1823a and a flat plate portion 1823a extending from one side of the flat plate portion 1823a in a size slightly larger than the decoration 1804 and deeper than the thickness of the decoration 1804 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) It has a recessed mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c penetrating the flat plate portion 1823a at the site of the mounting recess 1823b. This first member 1823 is formed transparent.

The separation hole 1823c is provided at a position close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b and not covered by the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached (inside the adhesive surface 1804b). As a result, the adhesive surface 1804b is applied to the separation hole 1823c, thereby avoiding a reduction in the bonding strength of the decorative body 1804. FIG.

This separation hole 1823c is a round hole. The separation hole 1823c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separating rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c will be reduced, which will make it easier to bend and may not be able to press the decorative body 1804 sufficiently. If the separation hole 1823c is larger than this, the decoration 1804 may be bent at the separation hole 1823c and the appearance of the decoration 1804 may deteriorate.

In addition, the first member 1823 is formed at three corners of the mounting recess 1823b and has chamfered portions 1823d that are larger (with a radius) than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804 . The remaining one corner serves as an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e. As a result, the mounting recess 1823b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. As shown in FIG. The two edges forming the corners of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as reference surfaces for attaching the decorative body 1804. As shown in FIG. As a result, at least two clearance directions are secured for attaching the decorative body 1804, and the attachment work can be easily performed.

In addition, the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f indicating the part of the contact surface in the mounting recess 1823b. The identifying portion 1823f is recessed from the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By looking at the identifying portion 1823f, the operator can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface for pasting the decorative body 1804, thereby preventing a mistake in the position of the contact surface and facilitating the pasting work. It is easy to do.

In addition, in the first member 1823, the distance from the outer peripheral edge of the flat plate portion 1823a to the outer peripheral edge of the mounting recess 1823b is preferably 0.5 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1823b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b, first, the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered portion 1804a is not provided is placed on the contact surface of the mounting recess 1823b indicated by the identification portion 1823f. The adhesive surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1823b from the relevant portion and adhered. When the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered portion 1804a is provided is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e), the shape of the wrong sticking prevention portion 1823e with respect to the chamfered portion 1804a are different from each other, it is possible to make the person notice that the attachment direction of the decoration 1804 is wrong, and to allow the decoration 1804 to be attached in the correct direction.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, a rod-like member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823, and the tip of the rod-shaped member pushes the decoration 1804 from the other side to the one side, thereby The vicinity can be removed so that it can be rolled up to one side, and the worker can pull the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1804 from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823). The same effect as the configuration can be obtained.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position where the adhesive surface 1804b does not overlap when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, the adhesive surface 1804b overlaps the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing the decoration. It is possible to prevent the attachment strength of the body 1804 from being lowered, and to make it difficult to remove the decorative body 1804 .

Furthermore, since the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decoration 1804 is attached is provided with an erroneous attachment prevention portion 1823e, if the decoration 1804 is attached in a direction different from the regular one, the decoration 1804 cannot be attached. Since the shape of the chamfered portion 1804a and the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e are different, it is possible to make the user aware of the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1804, and to stick the decorative body 1804 to the first member 1823 in the correct direction. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decoration body 1804 from being shipped in a state of being stuck in the wrong direction.

In addition, since the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 is provided with an identifying portion 1823f indicating the contact surface, the operator can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface that serves as a reference for attaching the decorative body 1804. This makes it possible to prevent mistakes in the position of the abutting surface and facilitates the pasting work.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 is the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, third Second attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or members provided in front unit 2000 or back unit 3000 (decoration holding member).

The decoration 1804 includes a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment of FIG. 206(c), the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is added to the portion along the outer peripheral edge in the embodiment of FIGS. 206(a) and (b), It is designed to be provided also in the part of . Other configurations are the same as those of the embodiment of FIGS. 206(a) and (b), and description thereof is omitted.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effect as described above, since the adhesive surface 1804b is also provided on the diagonal line on the back surface of the decoration 1804, the attachment strength is increased and the decoration 1804 is more difficult to come off. In addition, even if the decorative body 1804 shrinks at a rate different from that of the first member 1823 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the central portion is attached by the glue surface 1804b on the diagonal line. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration body 1804 from swelling or waving, and to prevent the appearance of the decoration body 1804 from deteriorating.

In addition, since the paste surface 1804b is provided on the diagonal line, the paste surface can be reduced compared with the case where the paste surface is provided on the entire surface of the decorative body 1804, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can. Moreover, since the attachment strength of the decoration 1804 is lower than in the case where the adhesive surface is provided on the entire surface, the work of removing the decoration 1804 using the separation hole 1823c can be facilitated.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 207(a) has a horizontally elongated rectangular decoration 1805 (hatched portion) made of a sheet-like seal on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a decoration on one side. and a first member 1824 to which 1805 is attached. The configuration of the other side of the first member 1824 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in the present embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and contact surface of the first member 1824 is omitted.

The decorative body 1805 is a sticker having a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like printed on its surface. The decorative body 1805 has a laterally long rectangular outer shape, and one corner (lower left corner in the drawing) is provided with a chamfered portion 1805a that is obliquely cut into a C-shaped chamfer. Since the decorative body 1805 has a shape that makes it difficult to specify the vertical direction, the direction can be specified by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. The paste surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG.

The first member 1824 is composed of a flat plate portion 1824a and a flat plate portion 1824a which extends from one side surface of the flat plate portion 1824a in a size larger than the decoration 1805 and deeper than the thickness of the decoration 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) and a mounting recess 1824b that is recessed and to which the decorative body 1805 is attached.

In addition, the first member 1824 has a C-chamfered erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c protruding into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner (lower left corner in the drawing) of the mounting recess 1824b. As a result, the mounting recess 1824b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1805. As shown in FIG. In this first member 1824, the obliquely extending end side portion of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c serve as the reference for sticking the decorative body 1805. It is set to the contact surface. As a result, three clearance directions for attaching the decoration 1805 are secured: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the direction perpendicular to the oblique side of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c. It is made easy to perform pasting work.

In addition, in the first member 1824, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b is 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1824b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1805 to the mounting recess 1824b, first, the oblique side of the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative body 1805 and the short side connected to the chamfered portion 1805a are aligned with the abutting surface (error) of the mounting recess 1824b. The oblique side portion of the sticking prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c are brought into contact with each other, and the adhesive surface on the back side from this portion is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1824b and stuck. wear.

If the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c), the shape of the wrong sticking prevention portion 1824c with respect to the chamfered portion 1805a are different from each other, it is possible to make the user realize that the attachment direction of the decoration 1805 is wrong, and to allow the decoration 1805 to be attached in the correct direction. Also, if the decorative body 1805 is pasted in the mounting recess 1824b in the wrong direction, the right-angled corner of the decorative body 1805 will protrude from the mounting recess 1824b at the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c, which is a problem for the operator. It is possible to make the user aware of incorrect pasting of the decorative body 1805 .

According to this embodiment, the attachment recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decoration 1805 is attached is provided with the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1824c. Then, the shape of the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided differs from the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c, so that the wrong direction of the decorative body 1805 can be noticed. The decoration body 1805 can be attached to the first member 1824 in the correct orientation, and shipping with the decoration body 1805 attached in the wrong orientation can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 is the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, third Second attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or members provided in front unit 2000 or back unit 3000 (decoration holding member).

Examples of the decoration 1805 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 207(b), a circular ornament 1806 (hatched portion) made of a sheet-like seal on which predetermined ornaments, characters, etc. are printed, and the ornament 1806 on one side and a first member 1825 to which is attached. The configuration of the other side of the first member 1825 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in the present embodiment, description of an identification portion indicating a separation hole and a contact surface in the first member 1825 is omitted.

The decorative body 1806 is a sticker having a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like printed on its surface. The ornamental body 1806 has a circular outer shape, and is provided with a notch portion 1806a cut out in an arc from the outside (lower side in the figure). Since the ornamental body 1806 has a shape that makes it difficult to specify the direction, the notch 1806a is provided so that the direction can be specified. The paste surface of the decorative body 1806 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG.

The first member 1825 has a flat plate portion 1825a and a portion larger than the decoration 1806 and deeper than the thickness of the decoration 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) from one side surface of the flat plate portion 1825a. ) and a mounting recess 1825b that is recessed and to which the decorative body 1806 is attached.

In addition, the first member 1825 has an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c that protrudes in an arc shape with a radius that matches the notch portion 1806a of the decorative body 1806 at the peripheral edge of the mounting recess 1825b (lower end of the peripheral edge in the figure). doing. As a result, the mounting recess 1825b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1806. As shown in FIG. In this first member 1825, the arc-shaped end side of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1825c is set as a reference surface for pasting the decorative body 1806. As shown in FIG. As a result, there are at least two clearance directions for pasting the decorative body 1806: a direction along the arc of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c and a direction away from the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c (vertical direction in the figure). It is ensured, and it is made easy to perform affixing work.

In addition, in the first member 1825, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b is 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1825b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decoration 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first, the notch 1806a of the decoration 1806 is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous pasting prevention portion 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b, and the adhesive surface on the back side is removed from the portion. It is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b and attached.

In addition, when the decoration 1806 is applied to a peripheral surface other than the contact surface (erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b, the decoration 1806 protrudes from the mounting recess 1825b at the portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c. state, and it is possible to make the operator aware of the erroneous attachment of the decoration body 1806 .

According to this embodiment, the attachment recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decoration 1806 is attached is provided with the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c. Then, the decorative body 1806 protrudes from the portion of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c, so that the wrong direction of the decorative body 1806 can be noticed, and the decorative body 1806 can be stuck to the first member 1825 in the correct direction. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decoration body 1806 from being shipped in a state in which it is pasted in the wrong direction.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 is the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, third Second attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or members provided in front unit 2000 or back unit 3000 (decoration holding member).

Examples of the decorative body 1806 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 207(c) and (d), a pair of left and right decorative bodies 1807L and 1807L and a right 1807R (hatched portion), and a pair of first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R to which left decoration 1807L and right decoration 1807R are attached to one side. The configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R may have any of the above-described constructions. In addition, in the present embodiment, description of identification portions indicating separation holes and contact surfaces in the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R is omitted.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are stickers having predetermined patterns, characters, etc. printed on their surfaces. The left decoration body 1807L and the right decoration body 1807R are symmetrical to each other. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have edges that are close to each other and extend vertically in a straight line. They are formed in a substantially semicircular shape elongated vertically as if they were connected.

A left ornament 1807L and a right ornament 1807R in FIG. 207(c) have different radii for R chamfering provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction, that is, at the upper end and lower end of the semicircle. On the other hand, the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R shown in FIG. 207(d) are chamfered on the semicircular upper end side (one end side in the longitudinal direction) and straightened on the lower end side (the other end side in the longitudinal direction). Notched. Both the left and right decorations 1807L and 1807R have a shape that makes it difficult to identify whether they are for the left or the right when they are turned upside down. making it identifiable.

The adhesive surfaces of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG.

The left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R are formed symmetrically to each other. The first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R are composed of a flat plate portion 1826a and a left decoration body 1807L and a right decoration body 1807R which are one size larger than the decoration 1806 from one side surface of the flat plate portion 1826a. and a mounting recess 1826b recessed deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the mounting recess 1826b to which the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are attached, and an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c at the lower end of the mounting recess 1826b. doing.

The erroneous pasting prevention portion 1826c of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R in FIG. is provided in On the other hand, the erroneous sticking prevention portions 1826c of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R in FIG. In the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the edges of the erroneous pasting prevention portions 1826c are set as reference surfaces for pasting the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R. It is

As a result, in the embodiment of FIG. 207(c), the clearance direction for sticking the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R is the arc direction for rolling along the arc of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c. At least two directions are secured, one being the direction away from the prevention portion 1826c (vertical direction in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 207(d), the clearance directions for attaching the left decoration body 1807L and the right decoration body 1807R are the direction along the straight line of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1826c (horizontal direction in the figure), At least two directions are secured, one being the direction away from the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c (in the figure, the vertical direction). In this way, in any embodiment, at least two clearance directions are ensured, making it easier to perform the sticking work.

In addition, in the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b is 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1826b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R, the longitudinal direction of the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R is fixed. Of both ends, the one with the larger R-chamfered radius or the one that is notched linearly faces downward, and contacts the contact surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c). Then, the adhesive surface on the back side is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b from the relevant portion and attached.

In addition, if the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are turned upside down and left and right are reversed and pasted, the contact surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c) have different shapes, it is possible to make the viewer aware that the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R are attached in the wrong direction, and the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R are attached in the correct orientation. can be attached.

According to the present embodiment, the attachment recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R to which the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R are attached are provided with the erroneous attachment prevention portions 1826c. If the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are pasted in an orientation different from the normal one, the shape of the ends of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in the longitudinal direction and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1826c may change. , the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R can be made aware of the wrong orientation, and the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R are oriented in the normal direction, and the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R can be made to notice. In addition, it is possible to prevent the left decoration body 1807L and the right decoration body 1807R from being shipped in a state of being stuck in the wrong direction.

In this embodiment, for example, the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R may be members (decoration holding members) provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000. FIG.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 208(a) to (c), a decorative body 1808 made of a sheet-like seal on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and the decorative body 1808 are attached to one side. and a movable first member 1827 . The configuration of the other side of the first member 1827 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in the present embodiment, description of an identification portion indicating a contact surface of the first member 1827 is omitted.

The decorative body 1808 is a sticker having a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like printed on its surface. The ornamental body 1808 has a laterally long rectangular outer shape, and two upper corners are R-chamfered and two lower corners are C-chamfered. The difference in chamfered shape between the upper side and the lower side allows the orientation of the ornament 1808 to be specified. The paste surface of the decorative body 1808 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG.

The first member 1827 has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1827a and a flat plate portion 1827a which is one size larger than the decoration 1808 and deeper than the thickness of the decoration 1808 (0. 4 mm to 1.0 mm) recessed mounting recess 1827b to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, a separation hole 1827c penetrating the flat plate portion 1827a at the site of the mounting recess 1827b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b. and an erroneous sticking prevention part 1827d provided in the part.

In addition, the first member 1827 has a pair of shaft portions 1827e projecting in the left-right direction in a cylindrical shape from near the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces of the flat plate portion 1827a. As shown in FIG. 208(b), the shaft portion 1827e is located on the other side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b. A pair of shaft portions 1827e of the first member 1827 are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1827 is rotatable (turnable) about the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1827e. The shaft portion 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, may be insert-molded, or may be assembled separately. good.

The separation hole 1827c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner in the mounting recess 1827b. Since the two separation holes 1827c are provided at positions far from the axial center of the shaft portion 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at positions far from the axial center of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. The rotational moment acting when the 1827 is rotated (turned) can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved lightly. can. In addition, since the two separation holes 1827c are provided near the left and right corners of the upper side, the forces applied to the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be equalized, and the first member 1827 is balanced. By doing so, it is possible to reduce uneven wear and the like.

The separation hole 1827c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separating rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c becomes small, and the tool tends to bend, which may make it impossible to press the decorative body 1808 sufficiently. If the separation hole 1827c is larger than this, the decoration 1808 may be bent at the separation hole 1827c and the appearance of the decoration 1808 may deteriorate.

The erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827 d projects into the mounting recess 1827 b in a shape corresponding to the chamfering of the lower corner of the decorative body 1808 . In this embodiment, the oblique edge of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1827d and the lower edge of the mounting recess 1827b are set as a reference surface for attaching the decorative body 1808. FIG.

Since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b, the weight of the first member 1827 is increased. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in the load applied to the rotational driving of the first member 1827 can be suppressed. In addition, since the erroneous attachment prevention portions 1827d are provided at the two corners on the lower side of the mounting recess 1827b, the first member 1827 can be balanced, and uneven wear of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. and the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In addition, in the first member 1827, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b is 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1827b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decoration 1808 to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of the decoration 1808 is brought into contact with the contact surface of the mounting recess 1827b (erroneous attachment prevention portion 1827d). Then, the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1827b from the corresponding portion to adhere. Note that if the decorative body 1808 is attached upside down, since the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is different from the shape of the R-chamfered corners of the decorative body 1808, the sticking direction of the decorative body 1808 will be changed. can be made to notice that it is mistaken, and the decorative body 1808 can be pasted in the regular direction. Also, if the decorative body 1808 is pasted in the mounting recess 1827b in the wrong direction, the corner of the decorative body 1808 protrudes from the mounting recess 1827b at the erroneous sticking prevention part 1827d. 1808 can be made aware of pasting errors.

In addition, the first member 1827 has a separation groove 1827f that is recessed in the mounting recess 1827b near the edge and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 208(b)). The separation groove 1827f is straddled by the decoration 1808 when the decoration 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, forming a space between the separation groove 1827f and the decoration 1808. As shown in FIG. When the part of the separation groove 1827f of the decoration 1808 is pressed from the outside while the decoration 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, a part of the decoration 1808 sinks into the separation groove 1827f. At the same time, the edge side of the decoration 1808 is lifted from the mounting recess 1827b, and by pulling the lifted portion, the decoration 1808 can be removed from the mounting recess 1827b.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, a rod-like member is passed through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827, and the tip of the rod-shaped member pushes the decoration 1808 from the other side to the one side. The vicinity can be removed so that it can be rolled up to one side, and the worker can pull the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827). The same effect as the configuration can be obtained.

In addition, since the attachment recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decoration 1808 is attached is provided with the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1827d, if the decoration 1808 is to be attached in a different orientation from the regular one, the decoration 1808 will not be attached. and the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention part 1827d are different, it is possible to make the user aware of the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1808, and to stick the decorative body 1808 to the first member 1827 in the correct direction. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decoration body 1808 from being shipped in a state of being pasted in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1827c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the erroneous sticking prevention part 1827d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1827 is rotated. Since the torque due to the rotational moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational driving of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved (rotated) smoothly.

In addition, since the first member 1827 is provided with two separation holes 1827c and two erroneous attachment prevention portions 1827d, it is possible to balance forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1827e. It is possible to reduce uneven wear and the like, and to rotate (rotate) the first member 1827 in a stable state.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be a door member of a variable winning opening such as a big winning opening or a prize winning opening, or may be provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. You may make it the movable member for production|presentation.

Examples of the decorative body 1808 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

By the way, when the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc., the game ball B comes into contact with the decorative body 1808. It is desirable to have the following relationship with the one member 1827 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208(c), the distance from the front surface of the flat plate portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, and the distance from the upper side of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 is When the distance to the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is c, and the radius of the game ball B is r, the distance d is within the range of [0<d<r], and the distance It is desirable that c be in the range of [0≦c<(2rd̂2−d̂2)̂0.5]. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate an expression.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from contacting the top edge of the decoration body 1808, so that the decoration body 1808 can be prevented from coming off due to the contact of the game ball B, thereby suppressing the occurrence of problems. can be made

It is desirable that the distance d be within the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. If the distance d is smaller than this, the decoration 1808 may protrude forward from the flat plate portion 1827a depending on the tolerance of the decoration 1808, and the game ball B may come into contact with the upper edge of the decoration 1808. If is larger than this, the shadow of the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b is likely to fall on the decorative body 1808, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 1808 may deteriorate.

Also, the contact surface of the mounting recess 1827b may be set to the upper edge. As a result, the upper edge of the decoration 1808 contacts the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, so that the game ball B does not contact the upper edge of the decoration 1808, and the same operation as described above is performed. Operation and effects can be achieved.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 208(d) and (e), a decorative body 1809 made of a sheet-like seal on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and the decorative body 1809 are attached to one side. and a movable first member 1828 . The configuration of the other side of the first member 1828 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in the present embodiment, description of an identification portion indicating a contact surface of the first member 1828 is omitted.

The decorative body 1809 is a seal having a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like printed on its surface. The decorative body 1809 has a laterally long rectangular outer shape, and two corners on the upper side are chamfered, and two corners on the lower side are provided with notches 1809a that are cut into squares. . The notch portion 1809a is formed in a shape corresponding to an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d of the first member 1828, which will be described later. The orientation of the decorative body 1809 can be identified by the difference in shape between the upper and lower corners. The paste surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG.

The first member 1828 includes a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1828a and a flat plate portion 1828a which is one size larger than the decoration 1809 and deeper than the thickness of the decoration 1809 (0. 4 mm to 1.0 mm), a mounting recess 1828b to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, a separation hole 1828c passing through the flat plate portion 1828a at the site of the mounting recess 1828b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b. and an erroneous sticking prevention part 1828d provided in the part.

The first member 1828 includes a semi-cylindrical shaft support portion 1828e that bulges out to one side toward the left-right direction at the left and right corners on the lower side of the flat plate portion 1827a, and a shaft support portion 1828e. It has a shaft hole 1828f provided in each of the left and right outer end faces of 1828e, and a columnar shaft portion 1828g inserted into the shaft hole 1828f. A pair of shaft portions 1828g of the first member 1828 are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1828 is rotatable (turnable) about the axis of the pair of shafts 1828g. The shaft portion 1828g of the first member 1828 may be inserted during molding of the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, or may be assembled separately.

The shaft support portion 1828e is provided up to the portion of the mounting recess 1828b, and a part of the shaft support portion 1828e constitutes an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d. Due to the shaft support portion 1828e (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d), the lower left and right corners of the mounting recess 1828b are formed into a square cut-off shape.

The separation hole 1828c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner in the mounting recess 1828b. Since the two separation holes 1828c are provided at positions far from the axial center of the shaft portion 1828g, the weight of the first member 1828 at positions far from the axial center of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. The rotational moment acting when the 1828 is rotated (rotated) can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved lightly. can. In addition, since the two separation holes 1828c are provided near the left and right corners of the upper side, the forces applied to the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be equalized, and the first member 1828 is balanced. By doing so, it is possible to reduce uneven wear and the like.

The separation hole 1828c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c becomes small, and it is likely to bend, which may make it impossible to press the decorative body 1809 sufficiently. If the separation hole 1828c is larger than this, the decoration 1809 may be bent at the separation hole 1828c and the appearance of the decoration 1809 may deteriorate.

The erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d has a rectangular shape that protrudes from the lower corner of the mounting recess 1828b by the shaft support portion 1828e, and has a shape corresponding to the notch 1809a at the lower corner of the decorative body 1809. It's becoming In this embodiment, the upper edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is set as a reference surface for sticking the decorative body 1809. As shown in FIG.

Since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d protrudes into the mounting recess 1828b, the weight of the first member 1828 is increased. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in the load applied to the rotational driving of the first member 1828 can be suppressed. In addition, since the erroneous attachment prevention portions 1828d are provided at the two corners on the lower side of the mounting recess 1828b, the first member 1828 can be balanced, and uneven wear of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. and the first member 1828 can be rotated (pivoted) in a stable state.

In addition, in the first member 1828, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b is 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1828b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1809 to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828, first, the notch 1809a of the decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d) of the mounting recess 1828b, and the part is attached. Then, the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1828b and stuck. Note that if the decorative body 1809 is attached upside down, since the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is different from the shape of the R-chamfered corners of the decorative body 1809, the sticking direction of the decorative body 1809 will be changed. can be made to notice that it is mistaken, and the decorative body 1809 can be pasted in the regular direction. Also, if the decorative body 1809 is pasted in the mounting recess 1828b in the wrong direction, the corner of the decorative body 1809 protrudes from the mounting recess 1828b at the erroneous sticking prevention part 1828d. 1809 mispasting can be made to notice.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, a rod-like member is passed through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828, and the end edge of the decoration 1809 is pressed from the other side to the one side by the tip of the rod-like member. The vicinity can be removed so that it can be rolled up to one side, and the worker can pull the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1809 from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828). The same effect as the configuration can be obtained.

In addition, since the attachment recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decoration 1809 is attached is provided with the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1828d, if the decoration 1809 is attached in a different orientation from the regular one, the decoration 1809 will be removed. and the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d are different from each other, it is possible to make the user aware of the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1809, and to stick the decorative body 1809 to the first member 1828 in the correct direction. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decoration body 1809 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1828c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation, and the erroneous sticking prevention part 1828d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1828 is rotated. Since the torque due to the rotational moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational driving of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved (rotated) smoothly.

In addition, since the first member 1828 is provided with two separation holes 1828c and two erroneous attachment prevention portions 1828d, it is possible to balance forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1828g. It is possible to reduce uneven wear and the like, and to rotate (rotate) the first member 1828 in a stable state.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be a door member of a variable winning opening such as a big winning opening or a prize winning opening, or may be provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. You may make it the movable member for production|presentation.

Further, examples of the decorative body 1809 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

[19. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The decoration 1804, the decoration 1805, the decoration 1806, the decoration 1807L, the decoration 1807R, the decoration 1808, the decoration 1809, and the gate seal 2811 in the present embodiment are the decorations of the present invention, and the adhesive surface 1804b in the present embodiment. is the first member 1823, the first member 1824, the first member 1825, the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R, the first member 1827, the first member 1828, the gate The main body 2810 is the base member of the present invention, and the flat plate portion 1823a, the flat plate portion 1824a, the flat plate portion 1825a, the flat plate portion 1826a, the flat plate portion 1827a, the flat plate portion 1828a, and the front plate portion 2810a in the present embodiment are the flat plate portions of the present invention, They are equivalent.

The mounting recess 1823b, the mounting recess 1824b, the mounting recess 1825b, the mounting recess 1826b, the mounting recess 1827b, the mounting recess 1828b, and the attaching recess 2810b in the present embodiment are the mounting recesses of the present invention, and the separation hole 1823c and the separation hole 1823c in the present embodiment. The hole 1827c, the separation hole 1828c, and the separation hole 2810d are the separation holes of the present invention, and the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1823e, the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1824c, the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c, the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1826c, and the erroneous attachment prevention portion in the present embodiment. 1827d, erroneous sticking prevention section 1828d, and erroneous sticking prevention section 2810c correspond to the erroneous sticking prevention section of the present invention, respectively.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the contact surface of the first member 1823, the contact surface of the first member 1824, the contact surface of the first member 1825, the contact surface of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R, and the contact surface of the first member 1827 , the contact surface of the first member 1828, and the contact surface of the gate body 2810 correspond to the positioning portion of the present invention.

[20. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Next, the characteristic effects of this embodiment will be described. From here to paragraph [1835], the decorative body is the decorative body 1804, the pedestal member is the first member 1823, the flat plate portion is the flat plate portion 1823a, the mounting recess is the mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole is the separation hole 1823c, and erroneous pasting prevention. The erroneous sticking prevention part 1823e is the part, and the positioning part is the contact surface of the first member 1823 (erroneous sticking prevention part 1823e). has the same effect, so the description is omitted here.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first member 1823 has a portion of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached as a contact surface of the first member 1823 (erroneous attachment prevention portion 1823e). Therefore, when attaching the decoration 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, two adjacent sides of the decoration 1804 are placed against the first member 1823 on the peripheral wall portion of the mounting recess 1823b. By affixing the decorative body 1804 to the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 can be positioned relative to the first member 1823. can be facilitated, and the decorative body 1804 can be accurately pasted at a regular position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the decorative body 1804 is attached to the first member 1823 in an inclined or misaligned state by the abutting surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823. And since it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance of the first member 1823, the decoration effect of the decoration body 1804 can be surely exhibited, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved to prevent the player from losing interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the decorative body 1804 can be accurately pasted at the correct position by the contact surface (erroneous pasting prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 can be easily pasted at the correct position. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed by reducing failures in pasting the body 1804.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the decoration 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, it is possible to prevent the orientation of the decoration 1804 from being mistaken. The decoration effect by 1804 can be exhibited reliably.

In addition, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e protruding from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b in the first member 1823 is provided, if the decorative body 1804 is pasted in the wrong direction, the decoration will be damaged at the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e. Since the body 1804 is turned up, it is possible to recognize that the attachment direction of the decoration body 1804 is wrong, and the decoration body 1804 is reattached in the correct direction to ensure the decoration effect of the decoration body 1804. - 特許庁can be exhibited.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c penetrating the flat plate portion 1823a is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823. Then, when the back surface of the decoration 1804 is pressed by the tip thereof, a part of the decoration 1804 is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 to the front side against the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b. By pulling this portion, it can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decoration body 1804 having a predetermined decoration is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate part 1823a of the first member 1823. The appearance of the first member 1823 can be improved, and the decorative body 1804 can be supported by the first member 1823 . In addition, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the surface of the flat plate portion 1823a, when the decorative body 1804 is adhered to the mounting recess 1823b, the mounting recess in the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 Since the portion around 1823b surrounds the periphery of the decoration 1804, the decoration 1804 can be highlighted by being bordered by the portion, and the decoration effect of the decoration of the decoration 1804 can be easily exhibited. By doing so, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

The adhesive surface 1804b of the decoration 1804 attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a consists of a band frame-shaped part on the periphery of the decoration 1804 and a band-shaped part diagonally crossing the band frame-shaped part. Since it is provided only on a specific portion and is not provided on the entire back surface, the adhesion strength is weaker than conventional ones. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823, and the tip of the rod-shaped member is pressed against the back side of the decoration 1804, even a relatively weak force resists the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b and the first member is pushed. The decoration 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the 1823, and even if the strength of the decoration 1804 itself is weak, the decoration 1804 can be removed without being broken in the middle, and the workability of removing the decoration 1804 is improved. can be improved.

Also, from the above, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the decorative body 1804 cannot be properly attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 is separated from the back side of the first member 1823. The decoration 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1823c and pressing the decoration 1804 from the back side with the tip of the rod, so that the decoration 1804 can be easily reattached. . Further, in a state in which the first member 1823 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, a rod-like member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823, and the front end of the rod-shaped member is pressed against the decoration body 1804 from the back side. Since the decoration 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, the replacement work of the decoration 1804 can be facilitated when the model is changed. Furthermore, as described above, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a using the separation hole 1823c, so that the constituent parts of the pachinko machine 1 can be easily sorted by material. Therefore, the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position that does not contact the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire surface of the adhesive surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Accordingly, by providing the adhesive surface 1804b only on a part (specific portion) of the decorative body 1804, the attachment strength is lower than in the conventional art. The adhesive surface 1804b is covered with the separation hole 1823c, which can prevent the adhesion strength from lowering more than necessary. can be attached.

In addition, since the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided on the belt-shaped portion of the peripheral edge and the obliquely crossing belt-shaped portion (diagonal portion), the decorative body is formed by the belt-shaped portion of the adhesive surface 1804b. Since the peripheral edge of the decoration 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, the peripheral edge of the decoration 1804 can be prevented from rising from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decoration 1804 can be made difficult to peel off starting from the peripheral edge. In addition, since the belt-like portion that crosses obliquely across the adhesive surface 1804b allows the portion near the center of the decorative body 1804 to be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, the first member may be affected by changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity. Even if the shrinkage difference between the decoration 1823 and the decoration 1804 becomes large, swelling or wrinkling of the decoration 1804 can be reduced, and deterioration of the appearance of the decoration 1804 can be prevented. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be exhibited without fail, and a larger decorative body 1804 can be adhered to the flat plate portion 1823a in good condition, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. A highly appealing pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since the adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 are translucent, and the rear side of the first member 1823 is placed on the decorative body 1804 side. When a light source such as an LED for irradiating light is provided, the band frame-shaped glue surface 1804b is positioned at a position that does not interfere with the light from the light source, and the light is diffused or attenuated by the glue surface 1804b for decoration. Since deterioration of the appearance of the luminous decoration of the body 1804 can be reduced, the decorative body 1804 can be luminous decorated in a good state, and the light source can be visually recognized in a good state through the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high performance effects and display effects.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a in the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be made difficult to see or hidden from the front side by attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b. This makes it possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1823c, to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1823c. be able to.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c is provided at a portion close to the periphery of the decoration 1804, a rod-like member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 to press the back side of the decoration 1804. Then, since the portion of the decoration 1804 that is pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the peripheral edge of the decoration 1804, the peripheral side of the decoration 1804 tends to be lifted from the portion that is in contact with the rod-shaped member, and the attached decoration is lifted. 1804 can be made easier to remove.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided at a portion close to the peripheral edge of the decoration 1804, when the rod-shaped member presses the decoration 1804 from the rear side of the first member 1823 through the separation hole 1823c, the decoration 1804 is pressed as described above. In addition, since the portion of the decorative body 1804 that is in contact with the rod-shaped member is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a, the lifted portion of the decorative body 1804 is grasped and pulled, thereby separating the decorative body 1804 from the flat plate portion 1823a. can be easily removed by turning it over.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c is provided with a size that allows contact with a circle with a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm, in addition to the same effects as above, the upper limit of the size of the separation hole 1823c is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the paste surface of the decorative body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary due to the presence of the separation hole 1823c, thereby maintaining the desired adhesion strength to the flat plate portion 1823a.

Further, as described above, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decoration 1804 is attached is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a, the decoration 1804 is pasted using the boundary between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide. By attaching the decoration body 1804, it is possible to easily stick the decoration body 1804 at the correct position, and it is possible to reduce the failure of sticking the decoration body 1804 and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the decoration 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b recessed from the flat plate portion, in order to remove the decoration 1804 from the front side, a slotted screwdriver is inserted between the decoration 1804 and the bottom surface of the mounting recess 1823b. Even if an attempt is made to insert such a tool, the insertion of the tool is blocked by the peripheral wall portion of the recessed mounting recess 1823b. Since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decoration 1804 is attached, the rod-like member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side to attach the decoration 1804 as described above. By pressing to the front side, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the conventional technology (pachinko machine), since the hole for peeling off the seal penetrates to the rear side of the pachinko machine (game board), a linear tool such as a piano wire is passed through the hole. This makes it possible for the game ball B to reach the path, the signal line, etc., thus posing a problem that fraud is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see the second member 1841, the second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 205) that can close the separation hole 1823c on the back side of the first member 1823. FIG. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear side of the separation hole 1823c is closed from the outside by the second member. can be prevented from inserting a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire into the game board 5 through the hole, and fraud can be prevented.

Further, when the second member (refer to the second member 1841, the second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 205) for closing the separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 as described above, the unauthorized tool can be removed from the front side. Even if it is inserted through the decorative body 1804 and into the separation hole 1823c, the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the second member, blocking the insertion (intrusion) of the second member to the outside (into the game board 5). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 from the front side through the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing fraudulent actions and preventing the unauthorized tool from entering the decoration body 1804. Since a mark is left on the decoration body 1804 by piercing the hole, it is possible to make the execution of fraudulent act hesitant, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided on the board unit 700 below the game board 5 in the main body frame 4, the game When the game ball B released from the board 5 is clogged, the security cover 714 closing the release port 711b of the front base 711 is opened, and the notch portion 713q above the release port 711b among the plurality of notch portions 713q is minus. By inserting a bar-like tool such as a screwdriver and striking the clogged game balls B, the clogging can be easily eliminated by breaking the game balls B.例文帳に追加After that, by closing the removal opening 711b with the security cover 714, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 through the removal opening 711b and the notch 713q. can be blocked by the security cover 714 . If an unauthorized tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the notch 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the tip of the tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 And in order to extend from the entrance of the second ball path 702 (the ball socket 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, the tip of the illegal tool is brought into contact with the inner surface of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. However, if it abuts against one of a plurality of obstruction ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the obstruction rib 713o obstructs the movement of the unauthorized tool. can do. In this way, the security cover 714 and the plurality of obstruction ribs 713o can prevent cheating on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and the deterrence against cheating is high. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the base unit 710 is formed transparently, when clogging of the game balls B occurs in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the place where the ball clogging occurs can be easily seen from the outside. can be easily recognized, and the work for solving the problem can be facilitated, thereby reducing the burden of maintenance on the game hall side.

Further, in the base unit 710, since the discharge passage for discharging the game balls B is composed of the independent first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, many game balls B are discharged from the game board 5 in a short time. 701 and the second ball path 702. Therefore, many game balls B can be distributed to the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. It is possible to reduce the concentration of the game balls B, avoid the easy occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of the game balls B, and increase the number of game balls released from the game board 5. B can be quickly discharged to the island facility side (out receiving section, bucket, etc.) of the game hall.

Further, since the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be detected by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 can be detected. Since the number of game balls B ejected from the path 702 can be counted, by comparing with the number of game balls B counted on the upstream game board 5, the game board 5, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 can be counted. It is possible to determine whether or not there is fraudulent action on the two-ball path 702, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent action.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 that are independent in the front-rear direction constitute the discharge path, the game ball B (safe ) and a game ball B (out ball) not accepted in the winning opening are released to different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball B accepted in the winning opening and the game ball B received in the winning opening are released. The game balls B that have not been accepted can be discharged through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 which are different from each other. Since the game board is provided with the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 that can detect the game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 one by one. 5, the number of game balls B (safe balls) accepted in the winning openings and the number of game balls B (out balls) not accepted in the winning openings can be counted. By comparing with the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted in 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity with respect to the prize winning opening of the game board 5, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect on fraudulent actions.

Furthermore, since the number of game balls B released from the game board 5 can be counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 provided in the base unit 710 (ball path member 713), the game There is no need to provide the board 5 with a sensor, an electronic circuit, or the like for counting the number of game balls B released (discharged) to the outside, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the crime prevention cover 714 for opening and closing the security opening 711b is hinge-rotatably attached to the front base 711, even when the crime prevention cover 714 opens the security opening 711b, the crime prevention cover 714 is still held by the hinge shaft of the hinge rotation. It will be in a state of being attached to the front base 711 . Therefore, even if the security cover 714 is opened in order to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to lose the security cover 714 .

In addition, the crime prevention cover 714 is provided on the lower surface of the base unit 710, and the crime prevention cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Since it is provided so as to extend to the right (horizontal direction), when clogging the game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the outer frame attached to the island facility of the game hall 2, the body frame 4 is opened forward, the security cover 714 is opened, and a predetermined tool is inserted into the elimination opening 711b to eliminate ball clogging. After that, after closing the crime prevention cover 714, the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. At this time, if the crime prevention cover 714 is open, the tip of the crime prevention cover 714 may touch the outer frame 2. Since the body frame 4 cannot be closed due to contact with the object, it is possible to remind the user that the security cover 714 has been forgotten to close, and the security cover 714 can be closed to reliably close the release port 711b. Even if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 contacts the outer frame 2 when the body frame 4 is opened. As a result, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction, so that the main body frame 4 does not become blocked, and the main body frame 4 can be opened satisfactorily. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 is provided with a plurality of notches 713q, dust and dirt entering the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 , the dust adhering to the game ball B can be discharged below the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 through the notch 713q, and the dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged. can reduce the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B caused by dust, and the burden of maintenance on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since a part of the plurality of cutouts 713q is also used as a tool insertion opening for inserting a tool for eliminating ball clogging, there is no need to separately provide a tool insertion opening, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. can be simplified, an increase in cost can be suppressed, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the base unit 710, since the dust falling through the notch portion 713q is prevented from getting on the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the adhesion of dust can It is possible to prevent the sensor 704 from malfunctioning, and to reliably detect the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 .

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first member ( Front component member 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and second member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) and the flat plate portion of the first member (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.). Part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) are provided with predetermined decorations (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, Since the decorative bodies 1801, 1802, 1803, etc.) are adhered, the appearance of the first member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative bodies. In addition, since the adhesion portion to which the decoration is adhered is recessed from one side surface of the flat plate portion, when the decoration is adhered to the adhesion portion, the adhesion portion in the flat plate portion of the first member Since the surrounding part surrounds the periphery of the decoration, the decoration can be highlighted by being bordered by the part, and the decoration effect of the decoration of the decoration can be easily exhibited. 1 can be made to look better.

In addition, the adhering portion (spec seal sticking portion 1021, Attaching recessed portion 2531a, attaching recessed portion 2810b, mounting recessed portion 1821b, mounting recessed portion 1822b, etc.) are attached to the flat plate portion (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.). Since it is recessed from the base, the decoration can be easily attached to the correct position by attaching the decoration using the boundary between the flat plate portion and the attachment portion as a guide. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by reducing failures.

In this pachinko machine 1, the flat plate portion (the front surface of the front structural member 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1821a, Decorate the recessed bonding portions (specification seal sticking portion 1021, sticking concave portion 2531a, sticking concave portion 2810b, mounting concave portion 1821b, mounting concave portion 1822b, etc.) recessed from the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc. Since the body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached, the decorative body is removed from one side. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a slotted screwdriver between the decorative body and the attachment portion, the insertion of the tool is blocked by the recessed peripheral wall portion of the attachment portion. On the other hand, the separation holes of the first member (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided in a portion where one side is closed by the decoration. Therefore, a separation hole is provided in the adhesion part to which the decorative body is adhered. The attachment to the part can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the recessed attachment part. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if the flat plate portion of the first member cannot be properly adhered, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decoration body is pushed by the tip of the bar-shaped member. By pressing from the other side, the attachment to the flat plate portion can be easily released, so that the decoration can be easily removed from the flat plate portion of the first member, and the decoration can be attached again. . In addition, in a state in which the first member and the second member are separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the tip of the rod-shaped member is pressed against the decoration body from the other side, whereby the flat plate of the first member is Since the attachment to the part can be easily released, the decoration can be easily removed from the flat plate part, and the decoration can be easily replaced when the model is changed. Furthermore, as described above, when the first member and the second member are separated, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion using the separation hole. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material, and reduce the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, the flat plate portion (the front surface of the front structural member 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the flat plate portion 1822a, Since separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc., the decoration body By adhering (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.), the separation hole is made difficult to see or hidden from one side. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole, make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act through the separation hole. .

Then, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the first members (the front component member 1000, the second From the other side of the flat plate portion (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, etc.) of the first member 1821, the first member 1822, etc., the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c) , etc.) so as to surround the extension part (insertion pin 1022, boss part 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) extends to the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) , the second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and the other side of the separation hole forms a closed space insulated from the outside by the extending portion and one side surface of the second member, It is possible to prevent an illegal tool from being inserted into the separation hole from the outside of the extension part or the other side of the second member, and at the same time, unlike a conventional pachinko machine, a hole that passes through to the other side is not passed through. Instead, it is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, thereby preventing fraud.

In addition, the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) makes the other side of the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) a closed space. Even if the unauthorized tool is passed through the separation hole from one side through the decoration (spec seal 1020, decoration 1801, decoration 1802, decoration 1803, etc.), the tip of the unauthorized tool is cut off from the outside. It will be inserted into the closed space, and the extending portion (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) of the first member (front component member 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and the second Since it is possible to block insertion (intrusion) into the passage part (game area 5a, etc.) side and the pachinko machine 1 by the two members, illegal tools entering the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole Intrusion can be prevented, and fraudulent actions can be prevented through the separation holes and passages. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make players hesitate to play and has a high deterrent to fraudulent actions.

Further, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned relative to each other. Such labor can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In addition, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned by inserting the positioning projection 1841b into the separation hole 1821d, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning projection 1841b. 1821d itself can be made into the closed space mentioned above, and the pachinko machine 1 with the same effect as the above can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a passage member ( Game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) provided on the front side (front component 1000, front member 2531 of center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) A decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body. In addition, since the portion to be decorated, to which the ornamental body is attached, is recessed rearward from the depth of the ornamental body in the front-rear direction, when the ornamental body is attached to the portion to be decorated, the portion to be decorated in the front member will be dented. Since the surrounding part projects forward from the front surface of the decoration, the decoration can be highlighted by being bordered by the forwardly projecting part of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decoration. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by making it easy to exert

In addition, the parts to be decorated (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking concave part 2531a, sticking concave part 2810b, etc.) to which decorations (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) are attached are rearward. Since it is recessed, the decoration body can be attached using the protruding periphery of the decorated portion of the front member (the front component member 1000, the front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) as a guide. By attaching the ornaments, it is possible to easily attach the ornaments to the correct positions, reduce failures in attaching the ornaments, and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In this pachinko machine 1, the front member (the front component 1000, the front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, the gate main body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) is decorated (spec seal sticking portion 1021, sticking concave portion 2531a, sticking concave portion 2810b, etc.) are recessed backward, the decoration body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is attached to the part to be decorated. Since the contact surface with the decorative part is at a recessed position, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side even if the decorative body adhered to the part to be decorated is to be removed, and it takes time and effort to remove the decorative body. On the other hand, since the part to be decorated is provided with separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.), a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and the decoration is pushed forward. Thus, the attachment to the part to be decorated can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the part to be decorated. Therefore, if the ornament cannot be properly adhered to the portion to be decorated of the front member during manufacture, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the tip of the rod-shaped member pushes the ornament from the rear. By doing so, the attachment to the portion to be decorated can be easily released, so that the decoration can be easily removed from the portion to be decorated, and the decoration can be attached again.

In addition, the front member (the front component member 1000, the front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage member (the game panel 1100, the center base plate 2540, the gate sensor 2801, etc.) In the separated state, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the rear of the front member, and the tip of the bar-shaped member is attached to the decoration (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532). , gate seal 2811, etc.) can be easily released from adhesion to the parts to be decorated (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking concave part 2531a, sticking concave part 2810b, etc.). The decoration can be easily removed from the decoration part, and the replacement work of the decoration accompanying model change can be facilitated. Furthermore, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, the decoration can be easily removed from the part to be decorated using the separation hole. It is possible to make it easy to perform the sorting work for each, and to reduce the cost of discarding the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, since separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided in the part to be decorated (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.), the part to be decorated By adhering decorations (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the separation hole can be made difficult to see or hidden from the front, and deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole can be suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and to make it difficult for the player to plan a fraudulent act through the separation hole.

Then, in the state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front member (the front component member 1000, the center role A separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear, unlike conventional pachinko machines, holes that pass through to the rear side are not penetrated, so that the piano wire can be passed through the holes. It is possible to prevent such a linear fraudulent tool from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 and to prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) close the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the back, is inserted into the separation hole from the front through the decorative body (the spec seal 1020, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, the gate seal 2811, etc.), the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Since it can be blocked, an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, detection hole (gate 2003) of gate sensor 2801, etc.) It is possible to block and prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and since a mark is left on the ornamental body by the unauthorized tool piercing the ornamental body, it is possible to make the execution of the fraudulent act hesitant. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 and the LED 3176 for displaying the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted. In front of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer side of the back front lower effect unit 3160 are arranged. Decoration substrate 3170, back front lower right inner decoration substrate 3171, back front lower right outer decoration substrate 3172, etc. are mounted on the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, back front lower middle decoration, which can be decorated with LEDs emitting light forward. A left inner decoration 3163, a back front lower left outer decoration 3164, a back front lower right inner decoration 3165, a back front lower right outer decoration 3166, etc. are provided. By providing the LED 3176 (light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175), the LED 3176 can be made invisible (hidden) from the player by the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. However, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the LED 3176, that is, the light guide plate 3110. In this state, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated by the LEDs 3176, and the LEDs mounted on the back front, bottom, middle decoration substrate 3168, etc. emit light to decorate the back, front, bottom, middle decorations 3161, and the like. Then, the light from the LEDs 3176 is light reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, whereas the light from the LEDs such as the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 is light emitted directly forward. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161 or the like decorated with light emission can be made to shine more brightly than the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 or the like. can be made Further, since the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 that is displayed by light emission extends upward from a predetermined position (a position slightly above) close to the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 or the like decorated with light emission, Since the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 strongly misleads the player as if the light from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 or the like decorated with light emitting light is used as a light source, it is strongly misunderstood. A player can be shown a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3110, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine until now, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, since the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174, the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, and the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, etc. are provided in front of the light guide plate 3110, the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate The light from the LED mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 3175 illuminates the light guide plate 3110, and the transparent light guide plate 3110 can be prevented from being seen by the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the production effect by the light emitting display such as 3112 and surely exhibiting the above-described operational effects.

In addition, since the light-transmitting rear front lower middle decoration body 3161 and the like are provided in front of the light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decoration substrate 3175, the light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decoration substrate 3175 are arranged. When the LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 3175 emit light, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 and the like can be decorated with light emission. , back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like can be shown to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with various effects and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated and the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate are illuminated, as described above, the lower left of the light guide plate is displayed. The back, front, bottom, middle decorations 3161, etc. are brightly illuminated by the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decoration substrate 3175, and the back, front, bottom, middle decorations 3161, etc. are decorated with light to attract the attention of the player. At the same time, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from the upper predetermined position close to the back front lower middle decoration 3161 attracts the player's attention to the back front lower middle decoration 3161. From 3161 or the like, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be directed upward to where the second pattern 3112 extends. Therefore, a part of the display screen of the production display device 1600, the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 in the rear rear upper production unit 3200, etc. are provided at the upper end where the second pattern 3112 skein extends. At the point where the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extends, it is possible to make the player excited and excited depending on whether or not further effects (effects by means of effect images, movable effects, etc.) are executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of line groups 3114 each having five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position, and each line 3113 emits light independently. Since it is possible to display and LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided so as to correspond to each line 3113, the first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177 are caused to emit light in order. A pseudo animation can be shown by changing the displayed line 3113 . Further, since the rear front lower middle decoration body 3161 and the like are provided at a lower position close to the positions (predetermined positions) of the lower ends of the plurality of lines 3113, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with light emission. Since the light from the front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 and the like can be used as a light source to make it look as if it is moving, a strong impact can be given to the player, and it is possible to make the player think that something good is about to happen. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special lottery lottery result (special lottery result) is drawn by establishment of the start condition by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Then, in the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of LEDs 1401 of the function display board 1402, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 light up and blink, so that the special symbol is variably displayed. A special pattern suggesting a special lottery result is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of a plurality of LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b. At this time, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b is partially emitted by the plurality of display holes 1405a of the front reflector 1405 and the plurality of display holes 1414a of the front reflector 1414, which are independently emitted forward. is emitted only to one eye of the player, and at least a portion of the remainder is emitted only to the other eye of the player, so that the player can see with both eyes at the same time. Therefore, since the light from all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b can be seen, it is possible to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b in a good condition. The LED 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be clearly visually recognized, and the display functions of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be exhibited without inferiority.

When a plurality of LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b (function display unit 1400A and function display unit 1400B) are photographed with a digital camera or mobile phone camera, as described above, when viewed with both eyes of the player, all Since the light from the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, only one of the two eyes can be photographed with a monocular camera, and all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen. It can make it difficult to shoot accurately. Therefore, since the lighting conditions of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b cannot be displayed accurately, a special symbol that generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player is displayed. It is possible to make it impossible to easily determine whether or not the player is present, and to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the performance suggesting the lottery result of the special lottery to the end.

Also, in the function display unit 1400A, part of the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is tilted in the front-rear direction toward the position of one of the player's eyes, and the rest is tilted toward the position of the other eye of the player. It is slanted with respect to the front-rear direction toward the position, and it is made to face straight in the front-rear direction. As a result, in addition to the same effect as described above, the inclination of the display hole 1405a allows players other than those seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the light from all the LEDs 1401 in good condition. Since it is possible to make it difficult, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that other players will look into the game. The game can be enjoyed without hesitation.

In addition, in the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of left LEDs 1411a and the plurality of right LEDs 1411b mounted on the function display substrate 1411 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) in the left-right direction, and are positioned in front of them. Since the front reflector 1414 having a plurality of display holes 1414a is provided in the front reflector 1414, the same effect as described above can be achieved. It becomes easy to remove the mold when molding the hole 1414a, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400C, since the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a mounted on the function display substrate 1421 can be seen from the player side through the transparent light guide plate 1423, the special symbols by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be played in good condition. can show people. At this time, if the invisible light LED 1424a irradiates the side surface of the light guide plate 1423 with invisible light, the invisible light incident from the side surface is emitted from the light guide plate 1423 forward toward the player. Since the emitted invisible light cannot be seen by the player, the special pattern by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be exhibited without inferiority. When the invisible light LED 1424a is emitting light, if a photograph is taken from the front using a digital camera or the like, depending on the model of the digital camera or the like, invisible light emitted forward from the light guide plate 1423 may be captured. The light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a provided behind is difficult to be reflected by being brightly reflected, and it is possible to make it difficult to determine the light emission state of the plurality of LEDs 1421a. can be materialized.

Also, in the function display unit 1400 or the like, the main control board 1310 may blink a plurality of LEDs at a speed at which the player can recognize that the special symbols are lit. As a result, even if the plurality of LEDs of the function display unit 1400 are blinked at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310, the display of the special symbols by the plurality of LEDs can be clearly displayed because it appears to the player that they are lit. It is possible to fully demonstrate the display function of the plurality of LEDs. When the LED blinking at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 is photographed with a digital camera or the like, depending on the shutter speed, the LED may appear to be turned off even though the LED is turned on. state), the LEDs may appear lit or unlit depending on the timing at which the shutter is released, making it difficult to determine the lighting conditions of the multiple LEDs. , the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty. The predetermined speed of blinking the LED by the main control board 1310 is preferably within the range of 30 Hz to 100 Hz. This is because the light will appear to flash as if it were flashing.

Also, a high-brightness LED capable of forwardly emitting light with higher brightness than the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 or the like may be provided near the function display unit 1400 or the like. As a result, when a high-brightness LED provided close to the function display unit 1400 or the like is caused to emit light, the high-brightness light emitted from the LED makes the player (human) feel dazzling, but the dynamic range allows the player (human) to feel the brightness. Since the area is wide, it is possible to see the light from the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 etc. even though it is dazzling. The display function can be exhibited without inferiority. When the function display unit 1400 or the like is photographed with a digital camera or the like while the high-brightness LED is emitting light, halation is caused by the light from the high-brightness LED because the dynamic range of the brightness of the digital camera is narrower than that of a human being. occurs, and a portion of the function display unit 1400, etc., can be hidden from view by overexposure in the vicinity of the LED. Therefore, it is possible to obscure the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 and the like, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 having the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, the plurality of decorations of the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 (back front left first decoration 3124, back Front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127) (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left logo decoration part 3122 and back front left decoration part 3121) The left sub-decorative portion 3123) is provided in front of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in a normal state where the light emission means (the LED mounted on the back front left decoration substrate 3128, etc.) is not decorated. The translucent opaque white panel plate 1110A can make the upper left back logo decoration part 3122 of the left front back decoration unit 3120 invisible and difficult to recognize for the player. The existence of the logo decoration part 3122 and the like can be made difficult to notice, and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be brightened by the white color, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous.

As the game progresses, the plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration unit 3120 are used to light-embellish the back front upper left logo decoration portions 3122 and the like. is projected forward through the translucent panel plate 1110A, and the luminous decoration such as the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 is reflected on the white panel plate 1110A. The luminous decoration such as the front upper left logo decorative portion 3122 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the luminous decoration such as the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122 to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, the back front left top logo decoration part 3122 and the like of the back front left decoration unit 3120 are illuminated to make the player aware of the existence of the back front top left logo decoration part 3122 and the like which could not be foreseen. Therefore, it is possible to greatly surprise the player, make the player strongly think that the chance has arrived, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a highly effective light emitting effect, thereby entertaining the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the color of the translucent opaque panel plate 1110A is white, the plurality of decorations (back front left first decoration 3124, back front Left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127) of each decoration (first front left logo decoration 3124c, first back left logo decoration 3124d, third First upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, second back left logo decorative portion 3125d, second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e, second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, third back left logo decorative portion 3126d, third It is possible to show the player through the panel plate 1110A the color of light emitted from the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, the third left sub-decorative portion 3126f, and the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d). In addition, it is possible to make the player less likely to get tired of the player with various light emitting effects, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, the decoration portions of mutually related shapes (“first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, third back left logo decoration portion 3126d”, “second back left logo decoration portion 3126d”, First upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e, third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d, first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, third Left sub-decorative portion 3126f") provided with a plurality of decorations (back front left first decoration 3124, back front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration) The base 3127) is superimposed in the front-rear direction, and each decorative portion is independently illuminated by light emitting means (the LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front left upper decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130). Since the positions of the respective decorative parts in the front-rear direction are different from each other, if the respective decorative parts are decorated with light, the player can see the light-emitting performance with a sense of depth. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, decorations associated with each of the plurality of decorations (back front left first decoration 3124, back front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127). Part ("first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, third Second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d", "first left sub decoration part 3124f, second left sub decoration part 3125f, third left sub decoration part 3126f") 3128, the left upper back decorative substrate 3129, and the lower left front back decorative substrate 3130). The performance can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by increasing the interest.

Further, it is provided on each of the plurality of decorations (back front left first decoration 3124, back front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127). Decorative parts ("first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, third back left logo decorative part 3126d", "first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, Second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e, third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d”, “first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, third left sub-decorative portion 3126f”) can be illuminated independently by the light emitting means (the LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3128, the back front left decoration substrate 3129, and the back front left bottom decoration substrate 3130). By appropriately combining the decorative parts, it is possible to show the player a variety of light emitting performances, to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest. In addition, since each of the decorative portions can be independently decorated with light, the combination of the decorative portions that are light-emitting and decorated according to the progress of the game results in an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous. ) can be suggested to the player.

In addition, each decoration of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decoration 3124, back front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127). , between the decorative portions (back front left logo decorative portion 3121, back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and back front left sub-decorative portion 3123) provided at different positions, light shielding portions (separating decorative portions 3124a, Since the partition decoration part 3125c and the partition decoration part 3126c) are provided, the other decoration part emits light while the other decoration part is blocked by the light shielding part for light emitting decoration of one decoration part. Decoration can be prevented, and only one (desired) decoration can be illuminated. Therefore, since a plurality of decorative parts provided in one decorative body can be independently decorated with light emission, appropriate decoration parts can be light-emitting decoration according to the progress of the game, thereby providing various light-emitting effects. can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, each decoration of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decoration 3124, back front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127). , a plurality of decorative portions (back front left logo decorative portion 3121, back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and back front left sub-decorative portion 3123) are provided at mutually different positions, and a light shielding portion (separating decorative portion 3124a , partition decoration part 3125c, and partition decoration part 3126c) are provided so that they can be illuminated independently of each other. The light emitting decorations of different modes can be shown to the player according to the situation, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, the player can be entertained by the light emitting performance, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. can be made

Furthermore, each decoration of the back front left decoration unit 3120 (back front left first decoration 3124, back front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127). , between a plurality of decorative portions (back front left logo decorative portion 3121, back front left logo decorative portion 3122, and back front left sub-decorative portion 3123), hole-shaped light shielding portions (dividing decorative portion 3124a, dividing decorative portion 3125c , Separating decorative portion 3126c) is provided, light for luminous decoration of one of the decorative portions is radiated to the outside from a part of the light shielding portion. can be made Therefore, by forming the light-shielding portion in a predetermined shape, the light-emitting decoration of the light-shielding portion can be shown to the player in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decorative portion, so that more diverse light-emitting effects can be performed.

In addition, since the first back front left decoration 3124 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 has a penetrating decoration portion 3124b penetrating back and forth in a predetermined shape, the decoration portion can be changed according to the progress of the game. When (the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e, and the first left sub decoration portion 3124f) are decorated with light emission, the peripheral surface of the through decoration portion 3124b emits light. Since the game is decorated, the luminous decoration of the penetrating decorative portion 3124b can be shown to the player in addition to the luminous decoration of the decorative portion.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 may be removed from the panel plate 1110 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity on the game board 5B. Since the cell 1140 is provided in a state that can be expanded and contracted with respect to the panel plate 1110, the cell 1140 can be expanded and contracted freely even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes. The cell 1140 does not wrinkle or crack, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be maintained. At this time, the cell 1140 is provided behind the portion of the panel plate 1110 opposite to the predetermined direction in which the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 is attached is biased, that is, behind the wide portion of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the pattern of the cells 1140 seen through the transparent panel plate 1110 can be easily seen by the player, and the decoration effect of the cells 1140 can be fully exhibited, and the cells 1140 seen through the transparent panel plate 1110 can be displayed. The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved by the pattern, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the cells 1140 are provided on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a stretchable state and are not attached to the game panel (panel plate) as in the conventional art, the decoration of the transparent panel plate 1110 can be simplified. , and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. More specifically, since the cells 1140 can be provided after cutting the panel plate 1110 to be cut, the cells 1140 are not damaged during the cutting of the panel plate 1110 . In addition, the machined surface will not be roughened due to the difference in material between the panel plate 1110 and the cell 1140, and a finishing step after the cutting can be omitted. On the other hand, in a game panel (panel plate) formed to have openings by cutting or injection molding, since the cells 1140 are not attached, it is possible to eliminate the trouble of attachment. Therefore, the cells 1140 can be provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 more easily than in the prior art, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided behind a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the amount of use of the cells 1140 is lower than in the case where the cells 1140 are provided on the entire surface of the panel plate 1110. can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the cells 1140 are detachable from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, by attaching or exchanging the cells 1140 with different patterns to the panel plate 1110, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5B) ), it is possible to easily cope with the specification change and the model change, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the cells 1140 can be decorated with light emission by various LEDs provided in the back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the pattern of the cells 1140 that can be seen through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 emits light. By being decorated, the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a, and the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened, thereby allowing the game to be played. It is possible to make it easier to see the game ball B flowing through the area 5a.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be illuminated by various LEDs provided in the back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the cells 1140 The game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be illuminated from behind by the luminous decoration to make it look like a silhouette, and by making the game ball B easily visible, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and interesting. The decrease can be suppressed and the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be visually recognized by showing it in a silhouette, so the striking strength of the game ball B is delicately adjusted. The pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game by devising the driving operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the cells 1140 are provided behind a part of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the player looks at the inside of the game area 5a, the pattern of the cells 1140 can be easily focused. Therefore, just by looking at the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused, and the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is visually recognized. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B enjoyable and suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, since a cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern is provided behind a part of the transparent panel plate 1110, the back front of the back unit 3000 provided at the back is produced by the pattern of the cell 1140. The ornaments and the like of the unit 3100 can be hidden from the player side. Therefore, when the decorative body provided behind the cell 1140 is not decorated with light emission, the pattern of the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the presence of the decorative body. Then, when the decorative body is light-emitting decorated according to the progress of the game, the cell 1140 is light-emitting decorated with the light from the decorative body. can be made to notice, the player can be greatly surprised, the player can strongly think that the chance has arrived, and the player can see the light emission performance with a higher performance effect, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, the rear-left movable decoration body 3301 of the rear-back-lower effect unit 3300 as a movable decoration provided in the rear side can be hidden from the player side by the cell 1140. The back-rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is moved according to the progress of the game from the invisible state by the cell 1140 to the visible state through the opening 1112 passing through the front and back of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加, it is possible to show a movable presentation in which the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 appears in accordance with the progress of the game. Therefore, the appearance of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 or the like can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. It is possible to make the player strongly think that a "jackpot" game state) will occur, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in which the game balls B circulate in front of the game board 5A is made opaque milky white with translucency. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a look brighter, making it easier to see the game balls B flowing through the inside of the game area 5a, and the LEDs, the effect display device 1600, and the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. , light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, etc., when the game panel 1100 is irradiated with the light is diffused on the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the panel plate 1110A can appear dimly and self-illuminating. Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 capable of irradiating the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110A with light is emitted, the light is diffused by the translucent opaque milky-white panel plate 1110A. Therefore, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be softly and softly illuminated like a fluorescent lamp for indirect lighting, and the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened, and the glare of the LEDs 1130a can be reduced. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be suppressed and which is easy on the eyes of the player. Therefore, compared with conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as game panels (panel boards), it has a game area 5a that emits light like a fluorescent lamp that has never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game panel 1100 (the game area 5a), and the player can feel that something good is going to happen. To heighten expectations and to make the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a look like silhouettes by the light from the rear panel plate 1110A and to make the game balls B easily visible. , the movement of the game ball B can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, if a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the coloring of the pattern applied to the decorative film can be improved by the milky-white panel plate 1110A. The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved by the decoration of the pattern, and the pattern of the decorative film can be decorated with light emission through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 by causing the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 to emit light. Therefore, the appearance of the game area 5a can be further improved, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players can be provided.

In addition, when a decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the portion decorated with light emission by the LEDs 1130a and the like tends to be unclear due to the translucent opaque panel plate 1110A. By devising the pattern (or devising the arrangement of the LEDs 1130a and the like) so that part of the pattern of the decorative film hides the part where the luminous decoration is unclear, the pattern is devised. The decoration can be clearly seen, and the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, when a decorative film is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, by using a material having excellent wear resistance as the decorative film, the panel plate can be prevented from distributing the game ball B by the decorative film. The front face of 1110A can be protected. As a result, it is not necessary to use a highly wear-resistant material for the panel plate 1110A, and a low-grade, inexpensive material can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the shadow of the pattern of the decorative film is reflected on the panel plate 1110A by the light emitted from the rear to the front of the decorative film. The pattern can be shown to the player, and the player can see the light emission effect of projecting the pattern, characters, etc. of the lightly damaged film onto the panel board 1110A from behind. It is possible to make the player think that something good is going to happen in the game, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest. Alternatively, as the luminescence effect, a pattern, characters, or the like that urges "right-handed hitting" with a decorative film, operation of the effect operation unit 301, or the like is projected from behind onto the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100. , the operation of the performance operation unit 301 in the player participation type performance, etc., can be enjoyed, and the decline in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the case where decorative films are provided on both the front surface and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, when the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 irradiates the side surface of the panel plate 1110A with light, as described above, the panel When the plate 1110A self-illuminates, the decorative film on the front side is decorated with light, and the player can enjoy the design of the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when light is emitted from the rear to the front of the game panel 1100 by means of an LED or the like, the shadow of the design of the decorative film on the rear side is reflected on the panel board 1110A, and the shadow overlaps the pattern of the decorative film on the front side. The pattern of the decorative film on the side appears to change. As a result, it is possible to show a variety of light emitting effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest.

Further, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are provided behind the translucent opaque milky white panel plate 1110A. is decorated with light according to the progress of the game, the light passes through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 to some extent forward (toward the player). The decoration part 3122 and the back upper right logo decoration part 3142 can be partially illuminated in the same manner, and the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 provided in the rear can be realized. Players can be made to notice. Therefore, by seeing the luminous decorations of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think about the game, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 provided behind the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a colorless and transparent material, the panel plate 1110A is milky white. , the color of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decorative portion 3142 can be assimilated with the color of the panel board 1110A and cannot be seen from the front. The presence of the upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 can be made invisible. Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 are decorated with light emission, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 are illuminated through the panel plate 1110A as described above. Therefore, by noticing the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, the existence of which could not be foreseen, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can think that the chance has arrived. It is possible to make the player think strongly and to show the player a light emission performance with a higher performance effect, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-back and bottom effect unit 3300 are normally positioned behind the opaque and milky-white panel plate 1110A, so that they cannot be seen from the front. By moving to the part behind the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A according to the progress of the game, it becomes visible through the opening 1112. It is possible to show a movable effect in which the movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 appear. Therefore, the appearance of the rear-left movable ornament 3301 and the rear-right movable ornament 3302 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big win" game state) will occur, and to heighten expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by making the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 capable of emitting light, when the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are not visible, Light-emitting decorations of the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear rear right movable decoration 3302 (or the rear front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration portion 3142) are turned on and off to create a translucent panel. Through the plate 1110A, the player can notice the presence of the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear right movable decoration 3302, and the rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear right movable decoration 3302 can be visually recognized. (whether or not the rear-left movable decoration body 3301 and the rear-right movable decoration body 3302 appear) can make the player nervous and excited, and further entertain the player. It is possible to perform movable effects that are possible.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 on which the game area 5a is provided in front is made opaque with translucency, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, the panel plate 1110A can be seen in front of the panel plate 1110A. Since it becomes easy to focus, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused just by looking at the panel plate 1110A. At this time, as described above, the panel board 1110A is in a state of being self-illuminating due to light from the outside or the like from the emitting LED 1130a. The light from the panel plate 1110A behind the game ball B can be seen as a silhouette, so that the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball B can be seen. A pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the deterioration of interest by entertaining the game ball B, facilitating delicate adjustment of the hitting strength of the game ball B, and devising the hitting operation of the game ball B. You can enjoy the game of the main body.

Furthermore, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made of translucent, opaque and milky white material (synthetic resin), a lower grade synthetic resin is used compared to the case where the panel plate is transparent. It can be used and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is translucent and opaque milky white, the color of the decoration provided in the pachinko machine 1 is made relatively conspicuous, and the decoration effect of the decoration is strongly exhibited. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's interest, and the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the decoration provided behind the game panel 1100 When the body or the like is decorated with light, the color of the light emitted can be transmitted forward, and the player can be entertained by the richly colored light emission performance.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is translucent, opaque and milky white, decorations (for example, the back front left decoration unit 3120) provided behind the game panel 1100 can be seen from the front (player side). Can be invisible. When the decorative body provided behind the game panel 1100 is light-emitting, the light from the decorative body is transmitted forward through the translucent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A). It is possible to partially illuminate the decoration and to make the player aware of the presence of the decoration provided at the rear. Also, when the decoration provided behind the game panel 1100 is moved to the rear of the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110A, the decoration can be visually recognized from the front through the opening 1112. It is possible to show the player a movable performance in which the ornament hides and appears. In this way, it is possible to present a variety of light-emitting effects and movable effects to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the light from the LEDs 1130a and the like of the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be diffused by the translucent opaque milky-white panel plate 1110A, the game panel 1100 can be softly and softly decorated with light emission. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the player's eyes by making the inside of the game area 5a bright like indirect lighting and suppressing the glare caused by the LEDs 1130a.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, for example, the LEDs 1130a can be provided on the left side and the right side of the panel plate 1110A, and can emit light independently of each other. In addition, if the right side of the game area 5a is illuminated according to the state (progress) of the game, the right side of the game area 5a becomes bright through the panel plate 1110A. , and can be urged to hit the game ball B to the right part of the game area 5a ("hit to the right"). On the other hand, when the left side is illuminated, the left part in the game area 5a becomes bright through the panel plate 1110A. It can be urged to hit the game ball B into ("left hit"). In this way, by causing the LEDs 1130a at appropriate positions to emit light, it is possible to intuitively understand that the light-emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) advises “left-handed” or “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be entertained with the operation of hitting the game ball B, and the player can be entertained with a new sense of luminous performance not found in the past pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Also, the game panel 1100 is configured by a plate-like panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) and a frame-like panel holder 1120 that is thicker than the panel plate 1110A and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A. Therefore, if the panel holder 1120 has the same thickness as the game panel of the conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) on which the game area 5a is provided in front is made thicker than that of the conventional game panel. Since the amount of material used for the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel plate 1110A) is reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is composed of the panel plate 1110 or the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be detachably attached, and the panel holder 1120 can be used as a common general-purpose component. becomes. As a result, by mass-producing the panel holder 1120, the cost of the panel holder 1120 can be reduced. etc., can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by locking the elastic claw 1062 to the magnetic sensor 1050 while the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the housing portion 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 in the holding member 1060, A magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 . Further, in a state in which the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claws 1072a, by locking the elastic claws 1072a to the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be detected through the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072. A magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 . At this time, since the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1060 and the like attract the magnetic line of force from the magnet 1055. It is possible to prevent the magnetic force lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity using the magnet 1055 at an early stage. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can dissuade a player from committing an act and has a high deterrence against fraudulent acts.

In addition, as described above, the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 made of non-magnetic material avoid attracting the lines of magnetic force from the magnet 1055, thereby preventing the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a with a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than the conventional pachinko machine, and the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced more than before. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the housing portion 1061 and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding member 1060 and the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071. Therefore, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claws 1062 and 1072a without using a metal screw made of a magnetic material as in the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. Such labor can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, a plurality of locking portions 1071a are provided in the holding member 1071 in advance, and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 are locked to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions. can be provided at any position and the position can be easily changed. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of easily coping with design changes and model changes while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 because the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed and added. be able to.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged into the housing portion 1061 by the projection 1063 of the holding member 1060, fine vibration of the magnetic sensor 1050 due to the urging by the projection 1063 can be suppressed. Therefore, the disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 or the occurrence of poor contact can be reduced, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 so as to be visually recognizable, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is made transparent, the sensor substrate 1052 can reach the sensor substrate 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053. The mounted sensor body 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) can be conspicuous. Therefore, the player can be made to strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one. The execution of the action can be made to hesitate, the deterrence against fraudulent actions can be enhanced, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

Also, even if the sensor main body 1051 is visible through the transparent sensor case 1053, ordinary players do not pay much attention to the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, so they do not notice it. On the other hand, since a person who intends to commit fraud gazes at the inside of the game area 5a, the contrast between the white sensor substrate 1052 and the black sensor main body 1051 makes the magnetic sensor 1050 easily noticeable. I can see it. Therefore, by noticing the existence of the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to make the player hesitate to commit a fraudulent act using a magnet, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrent power can be provided.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor substrate 1052 can be made inconspicuous, and the sensor substrate 1052 can be used as a decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. can be misidentified as Therefore, even if the sensor substrate 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, ordinary players will not be bothered by it, and it is possible to avoid the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating.

Further, since the sensor main body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check whether the sensor main body 1051 is damaged or not, so that maintenance work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. , and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, etc., the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071 are attached to the game board 5. When attaching using a magnetic body such as a screw, the portion of the holding member 1060 or 1071 to be attached to the game board 5 is positioned away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or in the game area 5a. It becomes possible to provide at a position outside the magnetic detection range. As a result, the influence of magnetic bodies such as screws can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence.

[21. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 215. FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 210, and FIG. 212 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, error Display processing will be described.

[21-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbols and minor winning symbols derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the winning type), and a random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc are provided. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether to open or close the second start opening door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second start opening 2004, and this normal For determining the initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit determination for determining the initial value of the random number for determining the symbol hit determination, and for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers etc. for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern are prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

[21-2. Operation of initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the stored various information as numerical values is the stored checksum value ( sum value), etc., when clearing except for a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM, the initial value determination random number for determining per normal symbol is built in by the main control MPU 1310a An ID code is extracted from a non-volatile RAM, and an initial value derivation process is executed for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for determining a normal winning pattern based on the extracted ID code. The derived fixed value is set. That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution is taken to prevent analysis by taking a two-step security measure.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained, and the game ball is passed through the gate 2003 at each predetermined interval, the second start opening door 2411 is opened and closed to move the game ball B to the second start opening 2004. cannot induce a state.

[21-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancel switch), and completely erases the information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. functions as a RAM clear switch for In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed and the RAM clear switch is operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. The player turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) is to be erased. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and detects whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This is done based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the key is turned ON. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is an extremely short period of time. , the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 from the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and furthermore, determines that the setting key switch is turned on by the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. is a flag that indicates whether or not it is permitted to change or confirm the setting of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when is turned ON. A value of 1 is set when display is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when setting changes of set values and confirmation display are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510. ) can receive various commands.

After step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it returns to step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. (step S25). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, so that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1. Also, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, so that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not met. , it is determined to erase various information in the same manner as when a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). . This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not ended normally, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is shifted from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After turning it clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it on, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, and this routine is executed again. The main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-described step S20A, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the determination of the above-described step S25. Also, it is determined that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, and that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. In the process of S38, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error “Release method”).

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and the setting key cylinder remains at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch is turned on by the setting key ON signal. 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned ON, and sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information should be erased, and in the processing of step S38 described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error is displayed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM If there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM (or it is unreliable), there are two canceling methods: the first RAM error canceling method and the second RAM error canceling method. It can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, the main control built-in A working area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

After step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various types of information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processing, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- is set. If FLG is not set to 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). The main control MPU 1310a judges that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied by judging that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In step S27, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and the predetermined set value display permission condition is established. When it is determined that there is, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, which will be described later in detail, the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the predetermined set value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, setting change processing is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be detailed later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 . As described above, the RAM clear switch has three functions (the RAM clear switch, the setting switching button, and the error canceling switch). functions as a function of Every time the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal (setting value selection switching signal) is input to change the setting value and display it on the setting display 1310g. Based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is turned from ON to OFF, the changed set value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the predetermined Although the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, when it is determined to erase various information in the same way as when the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area to clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process ends, the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" includes a setting value dedicated area in which setting values are stored, an out port 1008, a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5. 2022 and an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2022 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores set values to be changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the out hole 1008, the first sub-out hole 2021 and the first sub-out hole 2021 that are counted in the ball number counting process described later. A counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2022 is stored.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the push operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 has been operated (RAM clear signal) instructs RAM clear and erases various information, sum If the values do not match, or if the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and this taken out ID code An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determination per normal symbol is performed, and this fixed value is the initial value of the random number for determination per normal symbol described above. It is set to the initial value determination random number for normal design hit determination for use in determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can be operated normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware. Along with making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit/fall random number update process (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a outputs to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the starter solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the prize winning solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the special monitor, and the like. stop the driving signal (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main-control-side power-off processing, and the main-control-side power-on processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing is not stored immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied due to the fact that the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) and the value (sum value) match, and the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, when it is determined in step S25 that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is permitted to change the setting value, setting change processing is performed in step S37, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). When it is determined that the various information should be erased, in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the setting value is changed and determined. When changing settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability variation (probability variation)). state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above before the start of the next business. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. Also, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM.As described above, the setting key can change the set value as well as the current setting Since it is an important key that can be used to check the setting values, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people. is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a staff member such as a game hall clerk can clear the RAM when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while depressing the depressing operation portion of the switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. +5V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, and the island facility of the game hall The main control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply is cut off from the main control side. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power cut-off processing.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the standby time, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. is applied as +5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main-control-side power-off processing in the main-control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a game hall clerk or other attendant, and even if the game hall clerk or other attendant does not indicate the intention of clearing the RAM, the memory is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is erased (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, supplies game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU 1310a of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 In S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is continued. By repeating this, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). By blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output determination A mechanism was adopted in which updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for use) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) and other information are not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls)) are reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, power is turned on (power restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and built in the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2412 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414 . Here, first, the problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, Next, a problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is not performed for the main control return destination command at power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, and the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven to open and close the big winning port 2005. The state of being closed by the member is transferred to the state of being open.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of In other words, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402, the main control board issues a large winning hole 1 count display command that conveys the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 2005. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2414 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the large prize winning port 1 closing display command instructing the transition from the state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the large winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400) When the information is sent to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a 5th time display command for opening the big winning hole 2005, which instructs the transition to the state of being opened from (that is, the start of opening the 5th round of the big winning hole 2005). . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen according to the probability and time-saving state described above to display the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

Also, for example, a screen (for example, the second start door 2411 is open While the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2412 to open the second starting door 2411. When the momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the game ball B can be guided to the second start port 2004 by the opening operation, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control of step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the built-in RAM, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, the starting opening solenoid 2412 Driving is started to close the second starting port door 2411 to shift to a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004, and it is in a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a state command at power-on classified as power-on, a command to return to main control at power-on, and a command at power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 is restored, and the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven to open the large winning opening 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 to shift to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is in a jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. The big winning slot is open. It is possible to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored. In a state in which a game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and in a state in which the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen (for example, "The second starting door 2411 is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting opening." It is possible to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored by displaying in the display area 1600 .

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 side can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize ball when power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure) when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is cleared. When the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the above-mentioned low Information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return from among probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, low probability non-time-saving state, and high probability non-time-saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine It consists of information and Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of being played.

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[21-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 210 and 211 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. Then, when the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a detects, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401. signal, detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the out sensor 664, detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, detection signal from the RAM clear switch Operation signal (RAM clear signal), detection signal from the door frame open switch, detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, signal from the setting key switch 1311a, signal from the setting switching button, sent by prize ball control processing described later. A payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the winning ball command is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into others is stored in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 3002, a start win prize command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start sensor 2401 When there is a detection signal, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Note that in this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing). , are read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. A determination is made as to whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or as if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the states in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) are checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the big prize Detection signal from mouth sensor 2402, detection signal from out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), A detection signal from the door frame open switch, a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switching button, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. It is possible to increase the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which informs that the payout control board 633 has received the money normally.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of those input terminals to which idle terminal processing has been applied among the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU 1310a judges that the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is applied is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a classifies the notification display to inform that the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a has a problem. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win-lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs ball count processing (step S107). In this number-of-balls counting process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input, the ball is ejected from the game board 5, and circulates through the out-ball passage 663. A game ball (thrown into the game area 5a and accepted by a winning opening such as a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, etc.) The game ball discharged from the board 5 is received in any one of the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 without being received in any winning port after being hit into the game area 5a. When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball ejected from the game board 5 by the first ball sensor 703, a calculation is performed to add (increment) the value of the total recovered ball counter by 1, and a detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 is input and received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022, and the first ball sensor 703 detects the game ball flowing through the first ball path 701, the out port 1008, An out-ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 (so-called out balls) is added (incremented) by 1, and the second A detection signal from the ball sensor 704 is input and driven into the game area 5a to open a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, and the like. When the second ball sensor 704 detects the game ball accepted by the winning opening and flowing through the second ball path 702, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are detected. , Accessory prize winning port 2006, etc., the value of a safe ball counter that counts the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, received in a prize winning port 2006 is added (incremented) by one. That is, in the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 receives the game balls received in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, and the like. and a game ball received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022, and the first ball sensor 703 detects the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 The collected game balls are detected by the second ball sensor 704, and the second ball sensor 704 accepts the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. A game ball that has been dropped is detected.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the total collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, and the like. store the total number of game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 in a dedicated area for total collected ball count in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, The value of the out-ball counter is stored as the total number of out-balls collected by the out-ball counter 1008, the first sub-out-ball 2021, and the second sub-out-ball 2022 in the out-ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the safe ball counter is executed. is the total number of safe balls received in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the prize winning opening 2006, etc. The main control built-in RAM is specified. Store in the area dedicated to safe ball counting in the area. In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of paid out prize balls) to the value of the total collected ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of paid out prize balls) to the total number of game balls hit is calculated. Then, the calculation result is stored in the base calculation area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the total collected balls counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the prize winning opening 2006, Each time the total number of game balls collected at winning openings such as winning openings, out opening 1008, first sub-out opening 2021 and second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is created to notify that effect, and is used as transmission information. Store in the output information storage area. Note that the main control MPU 1310a determines that each of the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value, which are the calculation results, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment), and the recovered ball When the value of the counter, out-ball counter, and safe-ball counter is incremented by 1, the values of the recovered-ball counter, out-ball counter, and safe-ball counter overflow and become 0. conduct.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10. Therefore, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball When the payout control board 633 does not receive a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It creates it and transmits it to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. , second start hole 2004, big prize hole 2005, accessory prize hole 2006, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "various prize holes provided on the game board 5"). The number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. there is In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. is read from the input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output judgment counter value. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnetic goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. A value of 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnetic goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent activity detection processing. ), a magnet informing command classified into informing display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnetic goto with such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can discover the magnetic goto at an early stage. It's becoming

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402 is input when it is not in the jackpot game state (big winning opening 2005), etc.), a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Or, the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting dedicated area is the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, and the prize winning opening. The total number of game balls detected by the sensor 2601, that is, the game actually accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. If it is different from the total number of balls, a prize winning abnormality display command classified as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and/or the magnet goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the radio wave emission goto and the magnet When no fraud is detected, the value 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as no fraud is detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Further, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs firing enable signal setting processing (step S113). In this shooting permission signal setting process, the logic of the shooting permission signal that tells the shooting control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the shooting of the game ball B is allowed is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, based on the value of the above-described fraud detection flag FD-FLG, determines that fraud has not been detected when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. is detected, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, receives a detection signal from the door frame opening switch to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame open switch detects that the door frame open switch 4b detects that the body frame open switch 4b is open with respect to the outer frame 2, a detection signal is input from the body frame open switch 4b. is set to a firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the firing permission signal is set after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic is set until the start of the firing.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is A hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a is obtained, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 3002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2401 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the display is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big win game state, etc.) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening and closing member. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set so as to light the round indicator lamp, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area. A function display unit 1400 for setting the output of a lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so as to light the 15-round display lamp, storing it in the output information storage area as output information, and lighting the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening prize information is stored in the 0th to 2nd divisions of the normal winning opening winning information memory, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening Winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning prize winning information in the second region of the normal winning prize information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning prize information storage, and the normal winning prize winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 In order to light up the suspension indicator, the output of the lighting signal for the normal suspension indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the second starting door 2411 is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start opening door 2411 becomes a state in which the opening operation is performed, so that the game ball can be received into the second start opening 2004. A game advantageous to the player. become a state. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, setting the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2412 so as to open and close the second starting opening door 2411, and storing as output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area, When the value of the taken-out random number for normal symbol hit determination does not coincide with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display is performed based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A pattern is determined, various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization production relation are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the normal pattern of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal pattern fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the display device, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU 1310a, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the payout control board 633 Or output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005 when it is in the jackpot game state, and the second start opening door 2411 for opening and closing the second start opening 2004 In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2412 that performs the opening and closing operation, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to games such as information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal are output to payout control board 633, firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) output to the payout control board 633, or output a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of paid out prize balls) to the total number of game balls hit. Also, it outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and are classified into jackpot related Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2402 when a game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power on, various commands categorized as related to normal drawing synchronization effects, various commands categorized as normal electric role effects related, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display Commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 is scheduled to pay out prize balls based on the game balls that enter various winning holes provided on the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 as main prize ball number information. number information output command, etc.), and various commands classified into specific history (for example, general winning gate 2001, first starting gate 2002, second starting gate 2004, big winning gate 2005, prize winning gate 2006, etc.) Each time the number of game balls collected at the outlet, the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10, a ball recovery command to notify that effect, and the fact that the set value has been changed. Setting change command to convey, error display command to convey that there is an abnormality (or unreliable) in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, dedicated setting value described later in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM A setting key ON operation command for confirming the setting value stored in the area, etc.) is stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management section, and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circumference serial data. It is possible. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation settings of the command to be performed, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize number information output judgment counter when power is turned on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the output determination counter notification command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

In addition, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the prize winning opening 2006, etc., and the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 Every time the number of game balls to be collected reaches 10, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that effect. 2, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the prize winning opening 2006, etc., and the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 The number of collected game balls is counted, and ball collection information (counted values) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) The total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022) and the updated date and time and information) is updated. It should be noted that, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off due to the end of the business hours of the game hall without being able to receive the ball recovery command, the last counted value (that is, the general prize winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022; ) and updated date and time are stored in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 stores and retains ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is generated again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. It should be noted that the counted value to be stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and terminates this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. output to the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control is to be returned to the peripheral control board 1510 when power is turned on. It is possible to do so. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when the power is turned on. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[21-5. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting values as shown in FIG. 213 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum of them. This is the same processing as the calculation of .

Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main-control-side power-off processing (at power-off) in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power failure processing described later. A flag indicating whether or not data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. be done.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not ended normally, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. It is determined whether or not it is in any of the values, and when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. However, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process of step S210 may proceed to set the setting value 1, which is the initial value, to the setting value obtained in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a When the MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button, and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, and determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. determine that it is not.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a updates the setting value by adding (incrementing) the value by 1 (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the decision key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. When the key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key cylinder is rotated from the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotation position) is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and it is further turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it back to the second turning on position. 1311a determines that the decision key has been operated based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and determines that the decision key has been operated when the decision key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a; When the determination key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has not been operated.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs steps S218 and S220 again, determines step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. When the determination is made, the process returns to the determination of step S216, and each time the setting switching button is operated, the setting value is updated by adding 1 to the setting display 1310g until the enter key is operated. , and if the setting switching button is not operated, the setting value updated by operating the setting switching button immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is used by the main controller. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the decision key has been operated, it stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area , the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing of step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated set values when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are stored in the main control built-in RAM. is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of

After step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a moves the setting key cylinder from the initial position (that is, setting key 1311a) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and the decision key is turned on. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the switch 1311a. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting values are hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

After step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

After step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). This setting change permission flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the first ON state). A flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permitting setting change of setting value It is set to a value of 1, and to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. In the processing of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change of the setting values thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). "Normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is abnormal. A determination is made as to whether or not it is in any of the range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, that set value is used as it is.

In the judgment of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236), Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting of step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 prior to the serial communication initial setting of step S44. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, but this is prioritized before the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved and set at step S50 in the processing at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[21-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not being acknowledged.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned on. is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. A setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed. is open, and it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established. On the other hand, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied by determining that there is no display.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a ends this routine as it is, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and then the current setting value is obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. A value of 3, a set value of 4, a set value of 5, and a set value of 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether or not the setting value is abnormal, so that the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM set value stored in ) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, use the set value as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360). ) to end the routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, confirms the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is the command to send.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the setting key ON operation history information (set value confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. information that associates the message with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the above-mentioned ball collection history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information are generated. A predetermined specific history information display permitting condition is satisfied that the display of the specific history information can be permitted. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is configured so that a person who confirms the specific history information can perform the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where the predetermined condition for permitting display of the specific history information is satisfied. , the image that has been displayed so far is switched to a specific history information display image for selectively displaying specific history information, and control is performed to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is pressed. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a receives an off signal from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. On the other hand, when the OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , the OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has ended (that is, indicates that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM have been confirmed). is a command that tells

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range in the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt non-permission setting (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212, which is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

After step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared. By setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the control MPU 1310a, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and when the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is started. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. In addition, the infinite loop keeps the state in which the error display processing is finished, so that the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[21-7. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 214), and is the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 215 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is to be stopped (non-permission). .

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 or the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function, when the power is restored, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the fire enable logic.

Therefore, the error display processing, which is this routine, is performed at step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 or at step S37 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU 1310a restores the power in step S400 and then displays an error display in this routine. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot even after the process has started, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), and its predetermined output port is set. output terminal to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 through the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing enable signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display processing, which is this routine, is the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 214) and step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is used as main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410. Sending to 1510.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. ).

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." In addition to performing control to display a message image of white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." Various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker of the body frame 4, etc.) are forcibly set to the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjusted by pressing the button 227. ) to control the flow. The processing for notifying the RAM error by means of the error display command is the processing with the highest priority. Prioritize error reporting.

[22. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219. FIG. FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 216, and FIG. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[22-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the process at the time of power failure of the payout control unit is normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in the determination of step S528, that is, When it is determined that the processing at the time of power failure of the payout control unit has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

After step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various kinds of information are read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that informs that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) have been received normally, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game balls is executed by the payout device 580 and cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be put out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU, while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, when the game balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, the momentary power failure or power failure causes the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting processing, As an error state output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible when the CR unit is not in communication is output as the PRDY signal. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the above-described full-tank determination time is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls, and the full-tank information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is conveyed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands classified into state displays (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are generated based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls introduced into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is less than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, frame state 1 is entered. It creates commands and transmits them to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control unit main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Incidentally, the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[22-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIGS. 216 to 218.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 219, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[23. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 224. FIG. FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 223 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") includes the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and Various I/O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[23-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V-blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC that indicates that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when determining to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (direction of rotation) and rotation of the contact operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). Various kinds of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the contact operation unit 303, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the production progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described scale set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to achieve the specified specified brightness value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. The specified brightness value can be set to one brightness specified value in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (turns off) to the 31st brightness specified value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation section 301 (a contact operation section 302 and a pressing operation section 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) presses the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228, and if the current brightness is the minimum brightness (lights off), the 0th (zero) When the first luminance designation value, which is the second highest luminance level after the luminance designation value, is set, a predetermined formula (for example, a straight line The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along a tone curve or a spline tone curve), while the light amount adjustment button 228 When the "-" side of is pressed and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined formula (for example, , a linear tone curve, or a spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. The desired brightness can be set by pressing the light amount adjustment button 228 by a staff member such as a staff member. In addition, when the player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228, the specified brightness value to the 31st brightness are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and are directly illuminated as light, the palette value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0 (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the gradation information described above along predetermined mathematical expressions (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance step after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Brightness by operating While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) touches the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit for the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The brightness designation value by the operation of 303 and the corresponding special palette value are set. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 in order to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and in conjunction with this Then, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decoration substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other decorations By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be very easily changed. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (contact operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one brightness specified value is set up to the brightness specified value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specified value is set for the specific decoration board, Since one specified luminance value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark) is set. The brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship).

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process to be described later. Drawing data for one frame is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called dropped frames may occur. 622 and the like (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") can give priority to performances by sound effects such as music and sound effects that match various performances.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is set to indicate the number of the light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that is originally supposed to be instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands received. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Execution, the player (or staff such as game hall staff) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, press operation unit 303), the above-mentioned, from the first specified luminance value to the maximum luminance When one specified brightness value is set up to the 31st brightness specified value, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to achieve the set brightness specified value. It is possible.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a start winning prize command for instructing the start of the starting winning prize effect, normal symbol Ordinary design storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), variation pattern for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative designs in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special designs It is analyzed whether it is a command, a pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and which game is currently being played. recognize the state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands classified as related to figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a number of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. is read (extracted) from and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 for one screen. A minute (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the volume control button 227 is operated based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume control button 227. Identifies the rotational position. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponding to the rotational position of the volume control button 227 is obtained, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the setting is made in the sound data creation process. Sound data is output to various speakers from the output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume control button 227, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, resulting in a value of 0. It is converted to a value of 1024 steps up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and music are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4. Sound effects are flowing. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control button 227, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass sound on the main body frame 4. It's becoming

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used.

Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume control button 227 is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume control button 227 The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when stopping the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) (in this example, it is stopped by the peripheral control unit Except until 0.5 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern was confirmed and displayed based on the reception of the display command (until 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received)), the effect operation unit 300 Adjustment can be made by operating the contact operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern was confirmed and displayed based on the reception of the stop display command (until 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received)), except for the production By operating the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control button 227 is adjusted to seven levels of the board volume 0 to 6 in the sound data creation process. A predetermined value is added or added to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control button 227 according to the operation of the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300. By subtracting, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to a master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, and serializes this amplified production sound to audio data. It is designed to be output as

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value, The volume of sound emitted from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume control button 227 set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually adjusted to the top of the door frame 3 side. Amplifies to a master volume value which is the volume of sound flowing from the central speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, serializes the amplified production sound, outputs it as audio data, and outputs it as audio data for the notification sound. is the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume control button 227 set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4. The signal is amplified up to a master volume value that becomes a flowing volume, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the performance sound is played from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine 1 is fraudulent. To briefly explain the control of playing the notification sound to notify the staff of the hall of the action, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound effect is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this synthesis is performed. The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume actually flowing from the top central speaker on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. Then, the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the notification sound with the maximum volume is actually emitted from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is generated as described above. progressing according to the schedule data for

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top central speaker on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data for sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute until now is reduced to the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume control button 227. (At this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound ), and the sound flows from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound on the body frame 4.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine 1 is affected. When a notification sound is played to notify a hall clerk of a fraudulent act, the volume of the effect sound is muted, and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass sound of the main body frame 4. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker, this muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation. When the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4 ceases to flow, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point at which the informative sound started to flow, but the sound generation schedule data is maintained until a predetermined period has elapsed since the informative sound started to flow. It is designed to start flowing again from the point where it progressed according to

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch or the pressing operation of the volume control button 227, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be controlled by the program. The CPU of the control IC can control and adjust the sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played, and the player presses the volume control button 227. Even if the sound volume is reduced by operation, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but if there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or if the player commits a fraudulent act. A notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when the user is present. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. Thus, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts by setting a value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1008, and starts 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is, as described above, a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the signal is input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[23-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the judgment of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, ie, a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral controller steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral controller power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[23-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220 will be described. . When the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 222 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt process has started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series. Every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, the pointer is updated. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 or obtain the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top central speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the door frame 3 and the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[23-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 223 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the judgment of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, following the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, reads the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. In a certain mode and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated. in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is When it is determined that the period for which information can be received has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[23-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 224, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) to determine whether a power failure warning signal has been input. (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, power saving processing is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control ICs can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

After step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it is no longer possible to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 220 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (especially the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in one special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit", 15R A process of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big winning game state. Further, when the state of suggesting "5R big win" is reached, processing for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 5R big win gaming state, and when the state of suggesting "2R big win" is brought about, A process for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 2R big winning game state.

Also, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each setting process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating the time saving state, and the 2R big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery processing at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state has become a mode suggesting "2R big hit". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the mode suggesting the ``5R jackpot'', when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and non-time saving state. . Then, the time saving flag is the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times of continuation of the time saving state, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In that case, when the big hit game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The time saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value becomes '0', but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes '0'. Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 236 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0" (Step S237), execute the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), the second stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special design including the lottery process related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passing process (step S232).

Now, in the processing of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, reach random number, first symbol random number, and fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S245 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, the random numbers obtained in step S241 are stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol. is to be a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the processing of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reservation memory changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. Along with updating to correspond to the number, a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4). It's like

FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S241, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, and if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will be determined. The mode type of the game presentation is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600) Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and the corresponding first special symbol pre-determination command are set (step S262).

By transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), it is stored corresponding to the first starting port 2002 where the starting winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning is a big win, the kind of big win if it is a big win, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big win. Preliminary determination information such as whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is performed by peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning. You will be able to understand the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be announced in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "1" (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253- The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

However, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the second reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reservation memory. While updating to correspond to the number, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-1). It's like

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball enters the second start port 2004. The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on the entry is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the second special symbol variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed for a long period of time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second start port 2004 Even if a game ball enters the game ball, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being able to obtain the chance of a big winning lottery.

FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S239 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and the random number used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 210).

FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Random numbers (for example, first special random numbers, first pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the first special symbol that is stored in the first storage area out of the random numbers are read out from the RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 232 (A) is for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state ( A low-probability jackpot determination table used in a low-probability time-saving state)) and a high-probability jackpot determination table used in a high-probability game state (high-probability time-saving state) are provided. . Then, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value is 3 1/299 if the set value is 4, 1/289 if the set value is 4, 1/279 if the set value is 5, and 1/269 if the set value is 6. The first special random number coincides with the big hit determination value indicating that the small win was won with a probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned losers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is. Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the setting value is 1, 1/319, with the setting value 2 1/309 if set value 3, 1/299 if set value 3, 1/289 if set value 4, 1/279 if set value 5, 1/269 if set value 6 The second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the jackpot with a jackpot probability, and the second special random number matches the small hit judgment value that indicates that the second special random number has won the jackpot with a small hit probability of 144/319. The second special random numbers are associated with each other such that the second special random numbers coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are lost. That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. and when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 is executed is more advantageous to the player. In addition, the high-probability win determination table is constructed such that the jackpot probability for each set value is ten times higher than that of the low-probability win determination table.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S312), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S313), and the win determination process is terminated.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S302 are compared (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is a time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. Then, in the reach determination table during the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number will reach, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers will not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 233 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 233, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 232(B). to determine the type of jackpot, and determine the mode (stopped pattern of the first special pattern) of the first special pattern corresponding to the decided type of jackpot when the variation control is stopped (step S322).

In particular,
1. After the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated 15 times. (15 rounds) By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the big winning hole 2005 (easily) in a 15R jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are generated. 2. A 15R probability variable jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display more than usual until the variable display is executed 77 times and controls to a high-probability time-saving state in which special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual. After the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated five times ( 5 rounds) By repeating this, the game ball is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the jackpot 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) change. 5R short-time jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the display is executed 77 times,
3. After the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice ( 2 rounds) By repeating this, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big win game state, the big win game state ends. After that, control is made to a short-time state in which the game is terminated unless a big hit occurs until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, and non-starting before the start of the 2R big win game state. A 2R jackpot controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends if controlled to a time-saving state;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

Also, if the big hit flag is set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the second symbol random number read out in the second special symbol normal process and the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 232(B) are compared. to determine the type of the big hit, and determine the mode (stop design of the second special design) when the variation control of the second special design corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is stopped.
In particular,
1. After the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated 15 times. (15 rounds) By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the big winning hole 2005 (easily) in a 15R jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are generated. 2. A 15R probability variable jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display more than usual until the variable display is executed 77 times and controls to a high-probability time-saving state in which special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual. After the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated five times ( 5 rounds) By repeating this, the game ball is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the jackpot 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) change. 5R short-time jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the display is executed 77 times,
3. After the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice ( 2 rounds) By repeating this, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big win game state, the big win game state ends. After that, control is made to a time-saving state in which the game is terminated unless a big hit occurs before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, and non-starting before the start of the 2R big win game state. A 2R jackpot controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends if controlled to a time-saving state;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, in the big hit pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number, 8 decision values are distributed when the 15R probability variable jackpot is obtained, and 100 decision values are distributed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is obtained, and the 2R jackpot is distributed. 92 judgment values are distributed when . That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big win has a probability of 4%, a 5R big win has a probability of 50%, and a 2R big win has a probability of 46%. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 92 determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 determination values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R. Eight determination values are distributed when a big hit is achieved. That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the probability of the 15R variable jackpot is 46%, the jackpot of the 5R is 50%, and the jackpot of 2R is 4%. . Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability that the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number is determined to be a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher than the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002 The state is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 2R big win is determined, the 2R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, when the 5R big win is determined, the 5R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, and when the 15R big win is determined, the big win is determined. A 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the pattern.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 reads in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process if the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set in step S131. The type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. The opening and closing pattern in which the accessory winning opening 200 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game ball to enter the accessory winning opening 200 (easily) in a small winning game state. When the game ball received in the item winning opening 2006 is distributed to the V winning opening 2007 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time. After (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated 14 times so that the game ball wins a big prize. Control to the 15R jackpot game state in which the ball can be entered (easy) into the mouth 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the fluctuation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. 2. The first sub-win which shortens the display execution period than usual and controls to a high-probability time-saving state in which the special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual. The opening and closing pattern in which the accessory winning opening 200 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game ball to enter the accessory winning opening 200 (easily) in a small winning game state. After the game ball accepted in the object winning opening 2006 is distributed to the V winning opening 2007 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or the large winning opening 2005 is opened. 14 times the opening and closing pattern of closing when 10 game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402, so that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 2005 (easy) 15R jackpot. If it is controlled to the game state and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is executed 77 times after the jackpot game state is finished. If no big win is achieved during this period, control is made to a time-saving state to end, and if controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 15R big win game state, the second small win is controlled to a normal state after the big win game state is finished. One of the two types of small hits is determined.

In addition, 200 determination values are distributed in the small hit design determination table compared with the first design random number in the case of the first small hit. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 100%, and the second small win is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small prize is obtained, and 180 judgment values are distributed when the second small prize is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 10%, and the second small prize is obtained with a probability of 90%.

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the first small winning pattern is determined, the first small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern, and when the second small winning pattern is determined, the second small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern. .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, determines the winning pattern (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, as the process of step S328. (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328 ). And after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and left decorative design → right decorative design → middle Stop and display in the order of the decorative patterns (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. is determined to be a small hit pattern ("Final Battle"), and if the 5R short-time jackpot is specified, the 5R short-time jackpot pattern (left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same among the patterns "0" to "9" If the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same odd pattern among the patterns of "0" to "9"). combination). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss If it is determined to be a design), and if a loss is specified, it is determined to be a design that does not involve reach (a combination in which at least the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns) and fluctuates When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and controlled.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the jackpot game state, but the time saving state The time saving state may be ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of big hits have occurred after the shift control is performed to the state. Specifically, after the jackpot game state, control is performed to the time saving state, and when a predetermined number of (for example, two) jackpots occur after that, control is not performed to the time saving state after the predetermined number of times of the jackpot game state is completed. , may be controlled to a normal state. Also, even if the number of occurrences of big wins is less than a predetermined number, control may be performed to the non-time-saving state during the big-win game state, and control of the time-saving state may be performed again after the big win game state.

FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If it is (step S341), select a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and select a small hit flag. is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop design setting process is selected (step S344). , If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is acquired from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, as the processing of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter in which the number of times the time saving state continues is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) ends is set (step S354).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point , the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, while the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second during the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), A special pattern variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special pattern variation time information set to about 12 seconds in a non-working time state is associated with the special pattern random number (first special pattern, second special pattern). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during the time saving state, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the non-time saving state, so that the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, Variation time information of the above special design is set.

FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thereby, when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times) of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Normal state control) will start.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S387), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process to be described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win control process described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning mouth opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big win number counter reaches "0", and the big win is performed. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), when the big win frequency counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth post-opening process (step S403) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R short-time jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R short-time jackpot, 2R jackpot). As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R timing short jackpot) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time short jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) are set.

In addition, when the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically, the jackpot is executed in the jackpot control processing (step S235A) after the jackpot opening (step S403). Opening and closing control of the big winning hole 2005 according to the type (for example, after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when 10 game balls have won the big winning hole 2005, the big winning hole sensor 2402 It is reset when the opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern that is closed when detected twice, five times, or fifteen times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). While the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) until the start of the small-hit game is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S393). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the kind of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second Second small hit start command) is set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later ), when the opening/closing control of the role prize winning port 200 corresponding to the type of the small win (for example, the opening and closing pattern in which the role prize winning port 200 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is repeated twice) is completed. reset. By resetting the small hit executing flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variable display is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (step S395), and the process ends.

FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the above-mentioned jackpot game state based on the fact that the mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a big hit symbol. 1510 or waits until the next round is started pre-opening large winning a prize opening pre-processing (step S401)
2. The large prize winning port 2005 is controlled to be opened based on the fact that the mode of the stop of the variable display of the special symbols becomes a big win pattern, or the big prize winning port 2005 is opened to the state based on the start of the next round. After the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won the big winning hole 2005, the big winning hole is closed. Open process (step S402)
3. After all rounds are completed, the player is waited until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state is completed (step S403).

The big win process flag is manipulated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. In addition, in the process during the opening of the big winning prize gate (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the opening of the big winning prize gate 2005, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the big winning prize gate 2005 is closed. At the end of the round controlled by the state, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

[Rainbow effect]
Next, a description will be given of the rainbow color effect executed when the probability of a big win is high (for example, when a big win is achieved (big win confirmation effect) or when the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win game (read-to-win notice). The rainbow effect in this example means that after displaying a predetermined form (pattern, character, letter, etc.) using a plurality of colors on the effect display device 1600, the display color in an arbitrary display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed for a short time. , and in conjunction with the transition of the display color in the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are changed to a plurality of luminescent colors (at least two or more luminescent colors ), and the light emission color is changed in a short time. Below, the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are all interlocked to execute a rainbow effect, and a predetermined form displayed on the effect display device 1600 Although the display color and the emission color of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are shown to change in a short time, Either one of the LEDs of the decoration substrate and the LEDs of various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5, or any combination thereof, may change the display color or the emission color in a short time. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 238(A), in this example, when the rainbow color effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into five areas of the first display area a to the fifth display area e. A rainbow effect display mode with different colors is displayed. Then, as the fluctuation time elapses, the display colors of the first display region a to the fifth display region e of the effect display device 1600, the sizes of the first display region a to the fifth display region e of the effect display device 1600, and Change shape in a short time.

In addition, as a form of the rainbow color effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600 has a form in which information such as characters and letters is not provided in the entire area, for example, a plurality of stripes as shown in FIG. 238(A). The lines divide the display area of the effect display device 1600 into a plurality of areas (five display areas of the first display area a to the fifth display area e in the example shown in FIG. 238(A)), or the lines shown in FIG. ), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of areas (in the example shown in FIG. 238(B), the first display area a to the sixth display area f). The first display area a to the fifth display area may be divided and colored with different colors for each area, and the color of part or all of these multiple areas may be changed in a short time. Characters (persons, plants, animals, things, landscapes, etc.) and characters, etc., in different colors for each character and/or for each character (each character, character, word, etc., which has one meaning) Coloring (for example, the letter "CHANCE", the first "C" is "white", "H" is "yellow", "A" is "green", "N" is "blue", the second "C" is displayed in purple and "E" is displayed in red.), one character or character is divided into a plurality of areas and each area is colored with a different color (for example, each petal is colored with a different color). 238(C), the characters "CHANCE" are displayed in the first area a by seven virtual lines 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. 238(C). (The area surrounded by lines 1 and 2 in the characters "CHANCE") to the sixth area f (the area surrounded by lines 6 and 7 in the characters "CHANCE"). By displaying the areas in different colors, each character of "CHANCE" is displayed in a striped pattern in a plurality of colors (for example, the first area a (the area surrounded by lines 1 and 2 of the characters of "CHANCE") is white, the second area b (the area surrounded by lines 2 and 3 of the characters "CHANCE") is "yellow", and the third area c (the characters of "CHANCE" are indicated by lines 3 and 4 The fourth area d (the area surrounded by lines 4 and 5 in the letters "CHANCE") is "blue", and the fifth area e (the area surrounded by lines 5 in the letters "CHANCE") is "green". and line 6) is displayed in purple, the sixth area f (the area surrounded by lines 6 and 7 in the letters "CHANCE") is displayed in red), etc.), these shapes The color or shape of the state, or both the color and shape of the state may be changed in a short time, or the size and shape of each of a plurality of regions displayed in a predetermined color may be changed, The display position may be changed (moved) to change the display color in any display area of the effect display device 1600 (the area where the background other than the characters "CHANCE" is displayed is the character "CHANCE"). It is also possible not to perform display similar to characters (such as changing the display in a short period of time).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are divided into a plurality of groups, and light emission can be controlled for each group. When the rainbow color presentation is executed, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are caused to emit light of predetermined emission colors for each group. The emission color of each group is changed in a short time as the fluctuation time elapses.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 239, a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 are mounted on the upper left back decoration substrate for luminous decoration of the upper left logo decoration portion 3122 on the back front. A plurality of LEDs mounted on 3129 is a back front left decoration substrate for lighting and decorating the first panel light emitting group, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the board 3128 constitutes the second panel light-emitting group, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front-lower logo decoration substrate 3173 for decorating the back front-lower logo decoration body 3167 constitutes the third board light-emitting group. A back front lower middle decoration substrate 3168 for luminous decoration of the front lower middle decoration 3161, a back front lower left inner decoration substrate 3169 for luminous decoration of the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, and a back front lower left inner decoration substrate 3169. A back front lower left outer decoration substrate 3170 for luminous decoration of the decoration 3164, a back front lower right inner decoration substrate 3171 for luminous decoration of the back front lower right inner decoration 3165, and a back front lower right outer decoration. A back front lower right outer decoration board 3172 for decorating 3166 with light emission, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower right decoration board for decorating the fourth panel light emission group and the back front right logo decoration part 3141 with light emission decoration. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the board 3152 are divided into a fifth panel light-emitting group, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for decorating the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 are divided into a sixth board light-emitting group. When the rainbow color effect is executed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group so that the LEDs in the same group emit the same color, and the LEDs in the different groups emit light in a different color. It's like

In addition, as a rainbow color effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the same board among the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are divided into the same group and the light emission is controlled for each group. Even the mounted LEDs may be divided into different groups and light emission may be controlled for each group. For example, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front and bottom logo decoration board 3173 for luminous decoration of the back front and bottom logo decoration body 3167 on which the characters "Queen" are applied are divided into different groups for each character. The light emission may be controlled for each group, or each character may be divided into a plurality of areas by a predetermined imaginary line, grouped, and the light emission may be controlled for each group (for example, each character of "Queen" may be grouped). is divided into three areas, upper, middle, and lower, and among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front and bottom logo decoration board 3173, the LEDs belonging to the upper area are grouped as an upper group and light emission is controlled. Among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the logo decoration substrate 3173, the LEDs belonging to the middle region are grouped together as a middle group and light emission is controlled, The LEDs belonging to the group are put together as a lower group and light emission control is performed to control the light emission of the letters "Queen" in a striped pattern, for example).

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. , a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative board 457 are a frame light emitting group A, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 are a frame light emitting group. B. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the plate left decorative board 273 provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 are included in the frame light emitting group C, effect operation. A plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation section of the unit 300, a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the ring-shaped outer button decorative board 355, and an LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 belong to the frame light emitting group D, and the door A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 of the frame right side unit 430 and the plate right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the plate right decorative lens 277 are mounted on the frame light emitting group E and the door frame right side unit. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame of 430 is divided into the frame light emission group F, and when the rainbow color effect is executed, the LEDs of the same group are controlled to emit light for each group. Light emission is controlled to be the same color, and light emission is controlled to be different from the light emission colors of the LEDs of different groups.

FIG. 241 is a timing chart showing an example of rainbow effect. As described above, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the effect display device 1600 changes such as the variation display of the decorative symbol. When the effect starts, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are controlled to emit light in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600 (timing t0).

When the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310 is a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing t1. , a plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on at least the production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320 of the production operation unit 300 among the LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the annular button external decoration board A plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on 355, LEDs 364a of the button middle decoration board 364, and five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged in the left and right, and the rear upper first decoration part 3211 is light-emitting decoration. , and the LEDs are extinguished, and the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that prompts the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 (for example, “Push the button!” Light emission of a plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the performance operation section peripheral decoration board 320 of the unit 300, a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decoration board 355, and an LED 364a of the button center decoration board 364 is controlled.

Then, at timing t2, the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without pressing the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Then (timing t2), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into the first display area a to the fifth display area e, and the first display area a to the fifth display area e are displayed in different display colors, respectively. The display mode is displayed, and the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are divided into the above-described frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F, and included in each of the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F. The LEDs provided on the game board 5 are made to emit light of different emission colors for each group, and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are divided into the above-described first board light-emitting group to sixth board light-emitting group, and each group The LEDs included in are made to emit light with different emission colors for each group.

In addition, according to the passage of the variable time, the display color of each of the first display region a to the fifth display region e of the effect display device 1600, the emission color of each group of the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F, and the first The emission color of each group from the board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group is changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (timing t2 to t100).

In this example, when the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player at the timing t2, the button operation promoting effect (in this example, "Press the button!" is displayed), the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, and the first display area a of the effect display device 1600 displays "white" and the second display "Yellow" is displayed in the area b, "Green" is displayed in the third display area c, "Blue" is displayed in the fourth display area d, and "Purple" is displayed in the fifth display area e. Each time, the display area displaying "white" is changed to "yellow", the display area displaying "yellow" is changed to "green", and the display displaying "green" Change the area to "blue", change the display area displaying "blue" to "purple", change the display area displaying "purple" to "red", and change the display area displaying "purple" to "red". Change the display area where is displayed to "white".

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the first board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 is "white", the second board light emitting group is "yellow", and the second board light emitting group is "yellow". The 3rd board light emitting group is caused to emit light in "green", the 4th board light emitting group in "blue", the 5th board light emitting group in "purple", and the 6th board light emitting group in "red". Seconds), the luminescent color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting ``white'' is changed to ``yellow'', and the luminescent color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting ``yellow'' is changed to ``green''. , change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "green" to "blue", and change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" to "purple" , change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "purple" to "red", and change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "red" to "white" change to

Similarly, when the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the frame light-emitting group A provided on the door frame 3 is set to "white", the frame light-emitting group B is set to "yellow", and the frame light-emitting is performed. The group C emits green light, the frame light emitting group D emits blue light, the frame light emitting group E emits purple light, and the frame light emitting group F emits red light. Change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group that emits white light to "yellow", change the emission color of the LEDs that belong to the group that emits "yellow" to "green", and change the emission color of the LEDs that belong to the group that emits "yellow" to "green" Change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "green" to "blue", change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" to "purple", and change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" to "purple". The luminescent color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting 'purple' light is changed to 'red', and the luminescent color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting 'red' light is changed to 'white'.

In this way, by controlling the light emitting colors of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 so as to sequentially switch between a plurality of light emitting colors in a short unit light emitting time, a rainbow color can be visually seen. It is possible to make it visible as if the light is being emitted, and it is possible to execute an impactful light emission effect. In addition, the display of the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are interlocked and controlled, and the effect display device 1600 display in a plurality of colors, LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors, and further, for a short time By switching the display color and emission color with , you can perform a more impactful effect than usual.

In this example, the display colors of the first display region a to the fifth display region e of the effect display device 1600 and the light emission of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F provided on the door frame 3 The colors and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided on the game board 5 are regularly displayed in a predetermined order for each display area or each group. Although those to be changed are shown, they belong to the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 and the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F provided on the door frame 3. Any one or any combination of two or more of the light emission color of the LED and the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided on the game board 5 (all ) may be changed irregularly, and the rest may be changed regularly.

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F, and the first board light emission group to the sixth display color The display colors of the first display region a to the fifth display region e of the effect display device 1600 and the frame light emission groups A to Any one or any combination of two or more of the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame emission group F and the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth emission groups (all may be used), a different order (for example, the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F are set to "white→yellow→green→blue→purple→red→white→yellow→→...". , and change the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the 1st panel to the 6th panel in the order of "red → purple → blue → green → yellow → white → red → purple → → ..." , etc.).

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F, and the first board light emission group to the sixth display color Any combination of one or more of the LEDs belonging to the board light emission group (may be all) is a combination of a plurality of colors in which at least part of the color is different (for example, frame light emission The LEDs belonging to Group A to Frame Light Emitting Group F are controlled to emit light in any of "white", "yellow", "green", "blue", "purple", and "red". Emission control of the LEDs belonging to the light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group with one of the emission colors of "white", "orange", "yellow green", "blue", "pink", "red" etc.) may be

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F provided in the door frame 3, The light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided on the game board 5 is changed at the same timing (the timing of changing the color is matched). , the timing of changing the display color of the effect display device 1600, the timing of changing the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F provided on the door frame 3, and the timing of changing the light emission color of the LEDs provided on the game board 5 Any one or any combination of two or more (or all) of the timing of changing the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth emission groups are the same. It may be changed at a timing (for example, after 1 second), and the rest may be changed at a different timing (for example, every 1.5 seconds).

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F provided in the door frame 3, The period (predetermined period) from when the light emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 are changed until they are changed again is always constant. You may make it differ not only a thing but a part or all the periods. For example, at odd timings (t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t99) of timings t2 to t100, the display color and emission color are changed every second, and at even timings (t2, t4, t6, t8, t10) , t98, t100), the display color and the emission color may be changed every two seconds.

In this example, prior to the rainbow effect, the LEDs that decorate the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged horizontally are controlled to emit light. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 and starts a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600. After that, during the period from timing t0 to timing t1 until the execution of the button promotion effect, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged left and right, and the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 is turned off. , and when the button promotion effect is executed at timing t1, the rear upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged in the left and right direction corresponds to the rainbow color effect. Light emission is controlled according to the light emission mode. In this example, when the button operation prompting effect is started (timing t1 to timing t2), the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper first decoration unit 3211 are controlled to emit red light, and the rear-upper upper decoration is controlled to emit red light. Light emission is controlled so that the characters "Atsui!"

In addition, during execution of the button operation promotion effect, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, the button operation prompting effect is completed, and then the rainbow color effect is started (timing t2), the luminous colors of the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are changed. Until the rainbow effect is completed (timing t2 to timing t100) while maintaining the red emission color, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are displayed from right to left. Chance!” is controlled to flow repeatedly. As described above, in this example, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to emit red light. In addition, in the rainbow color effect, either the LEDs belonging to the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F or the LEDs belonging to the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group Light emission is controlled in red color similar to the five 7-segment display portions of the decorative portion 3211 . Therefore, although the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper first decoration portion 3211 do not change the light emission color, the player can be made to recognize that the light emission control related to the rainbow color effect is being performed. .

In addition, around the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged horizontally, frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group provided on the door frame 3 LEDs belonging to F (decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted), LEDs (decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to the 1st board light-emitting group to 6th board light-emitting groups provided on the game board 5, is provided, and when the button operation promotion effect is completed, it is possible to give the impression that the light emitting decoration spreads around the five 7-segment display parts of the back rear upper first decoration part 3211 that is decorated with red light. The effect can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this example, even after the rainbow effect is completed (timing t100 to timing t101), the light emission control is continued without changing the light emission color of the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211. It has become. Specifically, after the completion of the rainbow effect (timing t100), for example, in response to the occurrence of the reach of the decorative pattern, the five seven-segment display portions of the back rear upper first decoration portion 3211 are displayed from right to left with "reach! ” is controlled to repeatedly flow, or while the reach of the decorative pattern occurs and the reach effect is being executed, the five 7-segment display portions of the first decorative portion 3211 from the right to the left of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 say “Gekiatsu! ” are controlled to flow repeatedly. In addition, in this example, five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to be turned off based on the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable effect has ended. After the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 may be controlled to be extinguished when a predetermined period elapses, in this case. When the variable display of the decorative pattern stops, the moving display of the characters in the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 may be stopped. In this case as well, the player can recognize that the variable effect has ended by stopping the moving display of the characters in the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 .

In this way, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to emit light prior to the rainbow color effect, and the five 7 segments of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are also controlled after the rainbow color effect is completed. Since the segment display portions are continuously controlled to emit light, the light emission control of the five 7-segment display portions of the first rear upper decorative portion 3211 executed in advance increases expectations for the start of the rainbow color effect. Even after the completion of the rainbow effect, the expectation for a big win can be heightened by light emission control of the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decoration portion 3211.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the light emission control of the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper first decoration portion 3211 is started at least prior to the rainbow color effect, and is continuously executed even after the rainbow color effect ends. It may be started at any timing between the timing t0 at which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing t2 at which the rainbow effect is started (including the timing t0 at which the light emission control is started). However, it may be ended at any timing (including the stop of light emission control at timing t101) between the timing t100 at which the rainbow effect is ended and the timing t101 at which the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped. In addition, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, if the variable display of the decorative pattern is started again before the predetermined period elapses, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are extinguished. In this case, when the variable display of the decorative pattern stops, the moving display of the characters in the five 7-segment display portions of the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and upper side is stopped (timing t101 ), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the characters to be displayed in the five seven-segment display portions of the first upper rear decoration portion 3211 are updated, and the five seven-segment display portions of the first upper rear rear decoration portion 3211 are updated. The moving display of the character may be resumed from right to left (timing t0). Even in this case, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of variable display of the decorative pattern by the presence or absence of movement display of the characters in the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper first decoration portion 3211 .

In addition, the aspect displayed on the back rear upper first decoration portion 3211 during the execution of the rainbow color effect is not limited to the one described above. As a display to supplement the variation effect of the decorative pattern executed in 1600, the mode of displaying the variation of the pattern is displayed, or a plurality of LEDs are controlled to blink in a predetermined lighting pattern, and after execution of the rainbow color effect (For example, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed), the mode corresponding to the special lottery result may be derived, or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated by the player during the execution of the variable effect. The number of LEDs that are lit when a predetermined increase condition or decrease condition is satisfied may be changed. As a result, the execution of the rainbow color effect makes it difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the fear that the variable display of the decorative patterns is not executed or that the special lottery result is not derived. It is possible to avoid giving Also, the display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden during execution of the rainbow color effect, and in this case as well, the above-described anxiety can be avoided.

Also, in the above example, the end of the button operation promotion effect (when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player during execution of the button operation promotion effect, or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is Although the rainbow effect is started when the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) passes without being pressed, the predetermined execution condition is not accompanied by the execution of the button operation promotion effect. The execution of the rainbow effect may be started when the condition is established. For example, when the elapsed time after the start of the variable performance or the non-variation performance period in which the variable performance is not executed after the end of the variable performance reaches a predetermined period, the execution of the rainbow color performance is started. good too.

In addition, in this example, when the rainbow effect ends, the decorative pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win state at a high rate (those not in the ready-to-win state (including so-called fake)) (timing t100). Then, when the rainbow effect is completed, the rainbow effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 is extinguished and the ready-to-win effect is executed. and the LEDs belonging to the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3, the light emission control of the rainbow color effect is finished, and the ready-to-win effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 is completed. Light emission is controlled in a corresponding light emission mode.

In this way, in this example, the rainbow effect is performed as the ready-to-win notice executed during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols until the ready-to-win state is displayed. In addition, if the decorative pattern does not become a reach (the decorative pattern may be a big hit without being a reach, or the decorative pattern may be a hit without being a reach), or even if the decorative pattern is a reach The rainbow color performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio even when it does not occur, or the rainbow color performance may be executed (as a big win confirmation performance) only when a big win is guaranteed. Also, the execution timing is not limited to the ready-to-win advance notice, and a rainbow-colored effect may be performed as a ready-to-win effect during the period from when the ready-to-win state of the decorative pattern is displayed until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. It may be executed as a production such as a pre-reading notice before the start of the pattern fluctuation, and regardless of the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the customer wait executed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started over a predetermined period A rainbow effect may be executed as a demonstration effect).

Also, as described above, the rainbow effect is executed when the probability of winning a big hit is high, and is an important effect for improving the player's expectations. Therefore, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate on which the LEDs are mounted is characterized so that the colors of the LEDs whose light emission is controlled in the rainbow effect are bright. Specifically, a plurality of decoration substrates mounted with LEDs provided on the game board 5 and controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, that is, a back front top left decoration substrate 3129 for lighting up the back front top left logo decoration portion 3122 . A back front left decoration substrate 3128 for luminous decoration of the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front left logo decoration portion 3122, and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, and the back front bottom logo decoration body 3167 are decorated with light emission. a back front bottom logo decoration substrate 3173 for luminous decoration, a back front bottom bottom middle decoration substrate 3168 for luminous decoration of the back front bottom middle decoration 3161, and a back front bottom left decoration 3163 for luminescence decoration. A lower left inner decoration substrate 3169, a back front lower left outer decoration substrate 3170 for luminous decoration of the back front lower left outer decoration 3164, and a back front lower right for luminous decoration of the back front lower right inner decoration 3165. An interior decoration substrate 3171, a back front bottom right exterior decoration substrate 3172 for luminous decoration of the back front bottom right exterior decoration 3166, and a back front bottom right decoration substrate 3152 for luminescence decoration of the back front right logo decoration portion 3141. and a back front top right decoration substrate 3151 for decorating the back front top right logo decoration portion 3142 with light emission. Characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with components and other decorative substrates are applied by screen printing using an ink with high brightness and saturation (eg, yellow). In other words, the surface of a plurality of decorative substrates mounted with LEDs that are provided on the game board 5 and whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect is coated with white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency. In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates are applied by screen printing using ink with high brightness and saturation (e.g. yellow). ing.

In addition, a plurality of decorative substrates mounted on the door frame 3 and mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, that is, a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right A decoration board 457, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422, a door frame left side lower decoration board 423, a plate left decoration board 273, an effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320, a button outside decoration board 355, and a button inside. The surfaces of the decorative substrate 364, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the dish right decorative substrate 278, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, etc. are coated with a white solder resist (protective material). In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates are applied by screen printing using ink with high brightness and saturation (e.g. yellow). ing. In other words, a plurality of decorative substrates mounted on the door frame 3 and mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect are coated with white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency. In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates are applied by screen printing using ink with high brightness and saturation (e.g. yellow). ing.

In addition, a rear upper first decoration substrate (illustrated ), the surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates are added with brightness and color. It is applied by screen-printing using high-concentration colored (eg yellow) ink. However, full-color LEDs are mounted on a plurality of decoration boards provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 and mounted with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, whereas full-color LEDs are mounted on the back, back, and top first decorations. A monochromatic (red in this example) LED is mounted on the substrate. Therefore, even if the LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are decorated to emit light and a rainbow color effect is executed, the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decoration body 3210 do not change the emission color, It only executes an effect of displaying characters, numbers, patterns, etc. on the five 7-segment display units with the same luminescent color (red in this example). In other words, in the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that displays characters, numbers, patterns, etc., the characters, numbers, and patterns are displayed by not changing the emission color even when the rainbow color effect is executed. Information such as patterns is displayed in a state that is easy for the player to see, and erroneous information is prevented from being conveyed to the player.

In this way, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) to increase the reflection efficiency, so it is possible to emit light in multiple full colors. Even when LEDs are emitted in a wide variety of colors, it is possible to uniformly reflect all the light and produce vivid colors. Logo decoration portion 3121 , back front left top logo decoration portion 3122 , back front left sub decoration portion 3123 , back front bottom logo decoration 3167 , back front bottom middle decoration 3161 , back front bottom left inside decoration 3163 . , back front lower left outer decoration 3164, back front lower right inner decoration 3165, back front lower right outer decoration 3166, back front right logo decoration 3141, back front upper right logo decoration 3142, can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side unit 420, the dish left decorative lens 272, and the door Each of the frame right side unit 430, the plate right decorative lens 277 and the door frame right side unit 430 can be brighter and vividly (clearly) luminous and decorated, and the production effect is enhanced. In addition, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 that emit only a single color (in this example, red) can also be brighter and more vividly illuminated, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates are applied by screen printing using ink with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). As a result, it is possible to bring the reflection efficiency of the white solder resist (protective material) closer to that of the screen-printed characters and symbols, making the reflection efficiency on the substrate surface nearly uniform, resulting in multiple full-color lights. Even when possible LEDs are caused to emit light in a wide variety of colors, all light can be uniformly reflected, and the occurrence of light emission unevenness in light emission decoration is suppressed to enhance the presentation effect. In addition, since the contrast between the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed characters and symbols can be reduced, regardless of whether the LED is emitting light or not, when viewed through the lens that covers the decorative substrate, the When the characters and symbols screen-printed on the surface of the decoration board become inconspicuous and the player directly looks at the LED mounting surface of the decoration board, information irrelevant to the game can be visually recognized to increase the interest in the game. can be suppressed. In addition, in conventional decorative substrates in which characters and symbols are applied by screen printing using ink with low brightness and saturation (dark color) such as black, characters and symbols are clearly visible when viewed through a lens that covers the decorative substrate. Even if you can't see it, the lens itself may look dark and it may look bad, but by using ink with high brightness and saturation to apply letters and symbols by screen printing, the lens will look brighter. It also has the effect of not degrading the appearance. As a color with high brightness and saturation, it is desirable to use yellow, which has the closest reflection efficiency to white. If there is, it is possible to achieve the above effects.

In the above example, all of the plurality of decorative substrates mounted with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow colors are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on their surfaces, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, some of the plurality of decorative boards mounted with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow colors are coated with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black) on the surface. Alternatively, for all or some of the plurality of decorative substrates on which LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect are mounted, white solder resist ( protective material), and the back surface on which no LED is mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) in a color other than white (for example, green or black).

In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative substrates to be mounted are also printed on the LED mounting surface by screen printing using ink with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). Ink of a color with low brightness or saturation (for example, black, etc.) may be applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing using the LED mounted LED In order to avoid confusion with other electronic components and other decorative substrates, letters and symbols are printed with foil-cut letters (i.e., in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, letters are created with a wiring pattern that is copper foil and surrounded by The surface of the foil letter may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LED. Some of the decorative boards on which LEDs whose light emission is controlled by color rendering are mounted are formed as white resist removed characters using two coats of white resist (the entire LED mounting surface is white After coating with the solder resist (first layer), the entire area excluding electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative substrates is masked to avoid confusion with other decorative substrates. By coating again with solder resist (second layer), the masked area (that is, characters and symbols are formed as characters without white resist), or LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow colors can be mounted. For all or some of the multiple decorative boards that do, other than screen-printing characters and symbols on the surface where the LED is mounted using ink with high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow) means, for example, on the back surface where the LED is not mounted, by screen printing using ink of a predetermined color (including not only colors with high brightness and saturation but also colors with low brightness and saturation), or foil-cut characters Avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs mounted on the decorative board and other decorative boards by forming them with white resist or forming them as white resist-cut letters using two coats of white resist. may Even in these cases, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LED is mounted, and furthermore, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface can be made substantially uniform to achieve uniform light emission, so it is possible to enhance the performance effect. .

The LED mounted on the decorative substrate is an electronic component whose package color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory, beige, cream), and the LED mounting surface of these decorative substrates has Only packaged LEDs are mounted and no other electronic components are mounted. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the reflection efficiency even by the package of the LED, and realize uniform light emission on the LED mounting surface. In addition to connectors for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative substrate, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and circuits for controlling the light emission of multiple LEDs (for example, constant current drive circuits) are located on the non-LED mounting surface. One or more may be implemented. Also, the connector is an electronic component whose housing is white or nearly white (for example, ivory, beige, or cream), and the constant current drive circuit is black as an integrated circuit. It is an electronic component that is a surface mount type (SMD type) LED driver IC housed in an IC package, and the resistor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component that has black, blue, white, etc. , the capacitor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component with black, brown, gray, white or the like. In addition, in the above-described decorative substrate, at least electronic components having colors with low brightness and saturation such as black, brown, and gray may be mounted on the LED non-mounting surface without being mounted on the LED mounting surface. , or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream) and other high-brightness or saturated electronic components may be mounted on either the LED-mounted surface or the non-LED-mounted surface. . As a result, the electronic components mounted on the surface of the decorative board become less noticeable when viewed through the lens covering the decorative board, and the reduction in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface is suppressed to make the reflection efficiency substantially uniform. Therefore, it is possible to realize highly efficient and uniform light emission and enhance the presentation effect.

In this example, even when the rainbow color effect is executed as a variable effect, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted, and various decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 at the timing when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. It is possible to change (adjust) the light amount of the LED on the board. Specifically, when the button with the character "+" of the two light amount adjustment buttons 228 is pressed, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are immediately brightened. (strengthen the amount of light), and press the button with the character "-" to immediately dim the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (reduce the amount of light). It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 241, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group regardless of whether the LED is in the off state or not. Immediately change the light intensity of the LEDs in the group and the multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F to perform the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect, and with the light intensity after the change, the 1st board light-emitting group ~ Light emission of the plurality of LEDs of the sixth board light emission group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F is controlled. In this example, during the execution of the button operation promotion effect, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group, the plurality of frame lighting groups A to C, and the plurality of frame lighting groups E to F , and the LEDs of the frame light-emitting group D (the plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320 of the effect operation unit 300, the annular button external decoration board 355 A plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the inside of the button decoration board 364 LED 364a) are turned on, and when the player operates the light amount adjustment button 228, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320 of the effect operation unit 300 Since the plurality of mounted LEDs 320a, the plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the ring-shaped outer button decorative board 355, and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 are immediately controlled to emit light with the changed light amount, the production operation unit 300 A plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the ring-shaped button outer decoration board 355, and LEDs 364a of the button center decoration board 364 While observing the change in the light amount, the first board It is possible to adjust the light amount of all LEDs of the plurality of LEDs of the light emission group to the sixth board light emission group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F.

On the other hand, among the various decoration boards provided on the game board 5, the rear upper and lower rear upper first decorations 3211 are provided on which the five 7-segment display portions of the upper rear upper movable decorations 3210 are arranged horizontally. Regarding the LED mounted on the first decoration board and not performing the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect, the light amount is not changed (adjusted) even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect. is set (the amount of light is fixed). In this way, the five seven-segment display units of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 are arranged horizontally during the execution of the variable production that executes the rainbow color production. Since it is impossible to change (adjust) the amount of light (brightness) of the LED mounted on the first decorative board and the amount of light (brightness) is constant regardless of whether or not the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the first panel It can be used as a reference when changing the light amount of the plurality of LEDs of the light emission group to the sixth board light emission group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F. The difference from the luminance of the LED mounted on the rear upper first decoration substrate provided in the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 becomes clear, and the brightness can be easily adjusted to the player's preference. In addition, the LED mounted on the rear upper first decoration board provided in the rear upper first decoration part 3211 where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged left and right is a rainbow color effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable effect is being executed, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the light amount may always be made impossible to be changed (adjusted).

In addition, in this example, five rear upper movable decorative bodies 3210 are provided with a rear upper first decoration substrate on which LEDs that are not adjustable for light intensity (brightness) and do not perform rainbow color effect light emitting decoration are mounted. LEDs belonging to the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 (the LEDs are mounted decoration board) and LEDs (decoration boards on which the LEDs are mounted) belonging to the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided on the game board 5 (decoration board on which the LED is mounted) can be adjusted. LEDs are provided. In this way, the LED that serves as a reference for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) and the LED that changes the amount of light (brightness) are arranged close to each other. brightness).

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example executes the rainbow color presentation when the probability of winning a big hit is high, but there are situations where the rainbow color presentation cannot be properly carried out depending on the state of the game machine. In such a case, not only can the effect of improving interest by the rainbow color presentation not be expected, but there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be lowered.

For example, an abnormality that makes it difficult to display the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 (abnormality in which LEDs (part or all) of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 do not emit light, an abnormality in which the display is disturbed due to noise, etc. etc.) occurs, or an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow color effect of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the door frame 3 and the game board 5 When there is an abnormality in which the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided (may be partly or entirely) do not emit light or an abnormality in which the light emission mode is disturbed due to noise, etc., the display by the effect display device 1600 and the door The rainbow color effect cannot be realized in a complete form as designed using the light emission by LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, and the display by the effect display device 1600 and the door frame 3 and the game An imperfect rainbow color presentation is performed in which part of the light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the board 5 is missing.

Such imperfect execution of the rainbow color rendering makes it impossible to expect the original effect of improving the interest of the rainbow color rendering, and furthermore, the player recognizes that a rendering different from the rainbow color rendering is being executed. It can be confusing and misleading. In this example, such misunderstandings are prevented from being given to the player as much as possible. Description will be made with reference to FIG.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an abnormality that makes it difficult to display the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 at timing t6 during execution of the rainbow color effect and LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow color effect of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5. When an abnormal state occurs, a plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and a plurality of frame light-emitting groups A to F provided on the door frame 3. , the lighting decoration of the rainbow color effect is completed, the multiple LEDs of the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group are controlled to turn off, and the multiple LEDs of the frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F are turned off. Light emission is controlled in an abnormality notification light emission mode (in this example, a mode in which red flashing light is emitted at maximum luminance (light amount)) to notify occurrence of an abnormality.

As shown in FIG. 242, it is difficult to display the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 at an arbitrary timing from the timing t0 to the timing t2 before the start of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect in which the rainbow color effect is executed. an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the light emission of the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3; In the event of an abnormal state in which any one of the abnormalities in which light emission control is difficult occurs, the first display device provided on the game board 5 will be provided on the game board 5 even at the timing t2 at which the rainbow color effect is normally started. A plurality of LEDs of the board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group and a plurality of LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 do not start the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect. An abnormality notification light emission mode (this In an example, light emission is controlled in a mode of flashing red light at maximum luminance (light amount).

Further, if the above-described abnormality occurs at timing t6 during execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is extinguished to indicate that the abnormality has occurred. Display to notify. Similarly, when the above-described abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing from timing t0 to timing t2 before the start of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect, the rainbow color effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed. A display notifying that the abnormality has occurred is performed without starting the display of the mode. Note that part of the rainbow effect display mode may not be executed, and even in this case, the occurrence of an abnormality can be recognized by the display notifying that an abnormality has occurred.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the display by the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are used to create a perfect rainbow as designed. Since the rainbow color effect is controlled so as not to be interrupted or started when the color effect cannot be realized, it is possible to prevent the rainbow color effect from being executed in an incomplete form, thereby preventing the player from being misunderstood. can be suppressed.

In addition, the LED mounted on the rear upper first decoration board provided in the rear upper first decoration part 3211 where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged left and right is a rainbow color effect. Even if an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the variable performance that executes good. In this case, due to the occurrence of an abnormal state, a plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and a plurality of frame light-emitting groups A to F provided on the door frame 3 Even if the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect is not completed or started, or the multiple LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F are controlled in the abnormality notification light emitting mode, the variable effect continues. The player can be made to recognize that the variable presentation is finished, and the player will not be misunderstood that the variable presentation has ended.

In addition, whether or not to turn off the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 may be changed according to the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency). Error (minor error: when the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected (due to the opening of the door frame 3, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3) case), when the vibration sensor (not shown) detects the vibration of the game board 5 continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (when it detects that an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, Due to the vibration of the door frame 3 and various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the light emitted by the LEDs and the display of the effect display device 1600 are blurred and difficult to see), the full tank detection sensor When a detection signal from 154 is input (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is filled with game balls), when a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is input (in the guidance passage 570a Errors such as when it is detected that there is no game ball in the back) are unlikely to be performed. While controlling the light emission without turning off the LED that is turned off, an error that has a serious effect on the execution of the game and the rainbow effect (serious error: when radio wave irradiation is detected (door frame 3 or game board 5 by electromagnetic waves etc. If there is noise in the light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided in the display device 1600 or noise is present in the display of the effect display device 1600), the second start port 2004 is not opened when the magnetic goto is detected. When the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 is input in the case, when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402 is input when it is not in the big winning game state or the small winning game state, etc. error), the variable performance may be interrupted or terminated even during the execution of the variable performance by controlling the first decoration part 3211 to be turned off. As a result, the control state of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 can be varied according to the degree of the error, making it possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, whether or not the display of the rainbow color effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 disappears may be changed according to the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency). For errors that have a small effect on the execution of , a warning display (for example, "Door is open" etc. is displayed so that a part of the rainbow color effect display mode is overlapped without disappearing the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600. ), the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 disappears and a warning display (e.g., ``Illegal winning has occurred! ), the display of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect display mode) may be interrupted or terminated even during execution of the rainbow effect. As a result, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 can be varied according to the degree of the error, making it possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality. In addition, for an error that seriously affects the execution of the game or the rainbow color effect, control is performed to turn off the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is extinguished. In the case of such control, the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode or the like in the effect display device 1600 may be ended at a timing delayed by a predetermined period from the timing of turning off the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211. . In this case, sudden switching of the display contents in the effect display device 1600 can be suppressed, and the display contents can be switched while leaving the afterglow of the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode.

In addition, when an abnormal state occurs, depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), the effect display device 1600 displays a notification that the abnormal state has occurred, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 Any one or any combination of two or more (including all of them) of notification by controlling light emission in an error mode and notification that an abnormal state has occurred by voice output may be executed. For example, when a minor error with little effect on the game occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays a notification of an abnormal state, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 emits light in an error mode. Either one or a combination of two of notification by control and notification of the occurrence of an abnormal state by voice output is executed, and a serious error that seriously affects the game occurs In this case, the effect display device 1600 displays a notification of an abnormal state, a notification by controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in an error mode, and an abnormality by voice output Notification that a state has occurred may be executed.

Also, in this example, in the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow color effect (timing t6) or before the start of the rainbow color effect (any timing from timing t0 to timing t2), When the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow color effect (before the rainbow color effect ends) and the normal state is restored from the abnormal state, the abnormality is notified by the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F. Although the light emission mode ends, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided on the game board 5 and the plurality of frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3. , Do not execute the rainbow color rendering luminous decoration (do not restart the rainbow colored luminous decoration (do not return to the rainbow colored luminous decoration)).

That is, when an abnormality occurs in which the light emission mode of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 is disturbed due to noise or the like, the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect is terminated, or the light emission of the rainbow color effect is terminated. If decoration is not started, noise may occur again even if it is once determined that the abnormality has been resolved. In such a case, if the control is performed so that the rainbow-colored light emitting decoration is restarted in response to the elimination of the abnormality, there is a risk that the rainbow-colored light emitting decoration is repeatedly executed and ended, which confuses the player. There is a risk of Therefore, in this example, if the rainbow color effect is terminated or the rainbow color effect is not started based on the occurrence of an abnormality, the rainbow color effect will be displayed even if the abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow color effect. The luminous decoration of the presentation is not executed or restarted.

For example, as shown in FIG. 242, at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect, noise or the like causes a plurality of the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided on the game board 5 to change. When an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect by any of the LEDs (timing t6), the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 , the plurality of LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 complete the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration, and the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group are turned off. The light emission is controlled to the state, and light emission is controlled in an abnormality notification light emission mode in which a plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F blinks in red at the maximum luminance (light amount).

At this time, the effect display device 1600 disappears the display of the rainbow effect display mode and displays a warning (such as "abnormal occurrence"), but the control data of the rainbow effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler. It has become. In addition, the LED mounted on the rear upper first decoration board provided in the rear upper first decoration part 3211 where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged left and right is a rainbow color effect. Although the light emission decoration is not executed, the light emission control corresponding to the variable performance for executing the rainbow color performance is continued, and even if the display of the rainbow color performance display mode in the performance display device 1600 disappears, the variable performance continues. The player can be made aware of what is being done. In addition, in the abnormal state described above, a warning sound is output, and the player and the game staff can recognize that the abnormal state has occurred by listening to the warning sound.

In addition, at timing t10 after the abnormal state occurs, the noise and the like are eliminated, and the plurality of LEDs of the first to sixth board light emission groups provided on the game board 5 can be controlled to emit rainbow colors. (timing t10), the effect display device 1600 terminates the warning display and restarts the display of the rainbow color effect display mode. As described above, even during the occurrence of an abnormal state, the control data of the rainbow color effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the elapsed time after the start of the variable effect. The rainbow color effect display mode is displayed, and the rainbow color effect by one of the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided on the game board 5 due to noise etc. Instead of the rainbow color performance display mode displayed at timing t6 when an abnormality that makes light emission control difficult occurs, a rainbow color performance display mode is displayed according to timing t10 when noise or the like is eliminated and an abnormal state is recovered.

Further, in this example, even if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F blinks in red at the maximum luminance (light amount) to emit an abnormality notification light. The mode is continued (timing t10 to timing t11). In other words, after the abnormality is resolved (timing t10), if an abnormality occurs again before a certain period of time elapses, the abnormality notification light emission mode is not terminated at the timing of the elapse of the certain period of time, and the abnormality is notified even after the certain period of time has elapsed. The light emission mode is continued. As a result, when the occurrence and resolution of an abnormality occur frequently, a game clerk or the like can continuously perform light emission control in the abnormality notification light emission mode without repeating the termination and restart of the light emission control in the abnormality notification light emission mode each time. becomes easier to notice.

Also, when an abnormality occurs at timing t6, after turning off the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 (timing t6), even if the abnormality is resolved at time t10, A plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 continue to be extinguished, and do not return to the rainbow color effect light emitting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Similarly, when an abnormality occurs at timing t6, after the plurality of LEDs of frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in the abnormality notification light-emitting mode (timing t6), an abnormality occurs at timing t10. When the problem is resolved and a certain period of time elapses without an abnormality occurring again, the plurality of LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to be extinguished to produce a rainbow color effect. It does not return to the light emitting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Then, when the rainbow color effect ends and the ready-to-win effect starts at timing t100, the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the frame provided on the door frame 3 A plurality of LEDs of the light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F are controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow color effect, the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect is not restored, so whether or not the abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow color effect is checked. It is identifiable. If an abnormality occurs before the start of the rainbow color effect and is resolved before the start of the rainbow color effect, the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect is started at the timing t2 at which the rainbow color effect is started. can be

In addition, it is provided on the game board 5 not at the timing t10 when the abnormality is resolved, but at the timing t100 when the rainbow color effect ends (the timing when the effect (in this example, ready-to-win effect) executed next to the rainbow color effect is started). It is not limited to starting the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel light emission group to the 6th panel light emission group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F provided on the door frame 3 (at timing t100 Not limited to starting light emission control), when the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect is finished, or when the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect is finished and the next variable effect is started, the rainbow color effect It may be the case that the demonstration effect is started without starting the next variable effect after the variable effect that executes is completed. Even in this case, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred during execution of the rainbow color effect or during execution of the variable effect.

In addition, when the abnormality is resolved after the end of the variable performance for executing the rainbow color performance, a plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 at the timing when the abnormality is resolved. Light emission control of at least the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 among the plurality of LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 is started. In this case, the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the variable performance different from the variable performance in which the abnormality occurred, and if the rainbow color performance is executed at the timing when the abnormality is resolved, the timing The light emission mode may be controlled to produce a rainbow effect.

Further, when the abnormality is resolved, some of the LEDs may be returned to the rainbow-colored lighting decoration. For example, when the abnormality is resolved, among the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5, the plurality of LEDs of the 4th board light-emitting group are restored to the rainbow color effect light-emitting decoration. Then, when a certain period of time elapses after the abnormality is resolved, the frame light-emitting group A among the plurality of LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 is returned to the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration. can be In this case, the schedule data of the light emission control pattern is advanced even though the light emission is not controlled during the occurrence of the abnormal state, and the light emission mode is restarted from the light emission mode at the timing when the abnormality is resolved instead of the light emission mode at the timing when the abnormality occurs. Become so. In this way, when some of the LEDs are returned to the rainbow color effect lighting decoration when the abnormality is resolved, and the other LEDs are turned off, only some of the LEDs are in the rainbow color effect. It becomes possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred during execution of the rainbow color presentation by not performing the luminous decoration.

In addition, in this example, even in an abnormal state, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted, and the plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel emission group to the 6th panel emission group and the plurality of frame emission groups A to F of the frame emission group are activated. The set value of the amount of light (brightness) can be changed.

However, in a normal state where no abnormality has occurred, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group and the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F are activated at the timing when the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is received. The light intensity (brightness) of a plurality of LEDs is immediately changed, and with the light intensity (brightness) after the change, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group and the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel emission group to the 6th panel emission group and the frame are controlled at the timing when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated Although the setting value of the light intensity (brightness) of the multiple LEDs of the lighting groups A to F is changed, the multiple LEDs of the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group are changed at the timing when the operation is accepted. , and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F are not emitted to the light intensity (luminance) after the change, and after the abnormality is resolved, specifically, the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting The plurality of LEDs in the group are controlled to emit light with the changed light amount (luminance) after the timing t10 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved. LED is controlled to emit light with the changed light amount (luminance) after timing t11 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved and a certain period of time has elapsed.

In this way, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated in a state where an abnormality has occurred, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel emission group to the 6th panel emission group and the plurality of frame emission groups A to F of the frame emission group Since the light amount (luminance) of the LED is not changed, it is possible to prevent the abnormality notification light emitting mode from becoming difficult to notice. In addition, even when an abnormality occurs, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted to change the set value of the light amount (brightness). Even in a state where a is occurring, the player will not be deprived of the opportunity to adjust the amount of light (brightness).

In this example, a plurality of LEDs (hereinafter referred to as a dimming LED group) that belong to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and are capable of adjusting the light amount are mounted. Separately from the decoration substrate, a first decoration substrate on the back and on which a plurality of LEDs (hereinafter referred to as non-dimmable LED group) whose light quantity cannot be adjusted for decorating the 7-segment display section is mounted is provided. However, the 7-segment display part is not limited to this, and the 7-segment display part is emitted from a part of one of the plurality of decoration substrates on which the plurality of LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group are mounted. You may make it mount LED for making it decorate. That is, a plurality of LEDs whose light quantity can be adjusted (group of dimming LEDs) and a plurality of LEDs whose quantity of light cannot be adjusted (group of non-dimming LEDs) may be mounted on a single decorative substrate.

For example, a dimming LED group consisting of a plurality of LEDs whose light quantity can be adjusted and a non-dimming LED group consisting of a plurality of LEDs whose light quantity cannot be adjusted may be arranged at a predetermined interval, In this case, the distance between adjacent LEDs in the dimming LED group and the distance between adjacent LEDs in the non-dimming LED group are more than the distance between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group. may be arranged so as to be close to each other. With this configuration, it becomes easy to distinguish between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group, and it becomes easy to compare the brightness of the LEDs whose light amount can be adjusted and the LEDs whose light amount cannot be adjusted.

In addition, a resin-made LED with a color (white in this example) that is the same as or very similar to an LED whose light quantity can be adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a dimming LED) and an LED whose light quantity cannot be adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a non-dimming LED) In addition, the same type of package may be used. This allows the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED to emit light under the same conditions. By contrasting the brightness with the non-dimmable LED, the difference between the brightness of the non-dimmable LED and the brightness of the non-dimmable LED becomes clear, and the brightness can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

Also, a plurality of through holes may be formed between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group. In the area where the through holes are formed on the surface of the decorative board, the light emitted from the LEDs is not reflected and leaks to the back side of the decorative board (non-LED mounting surface), so the dimming LED group and the non-adjustable By forming a through hole between the group of light LEDs, interference between the light from the dimming LED and the light from the non-dimming LED is suppressed, and the light from each LED can be visually recognized individually. As a result, the brightness can be adjusted based on the light from the dimmable LED group only, and the light from the non-dimmable LED group only can be used as an index for brightness adjustment, thus improving the contrast accuracy. is increased, making it easier for the player to adjust the brightness to his liking. In addition, the through-holes are formed with an outer diameter smaller than that of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED (ratio (area) occupied by one through-hole in the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the decorative substrate ≤ one adjustment By reducing the ratio (area) occupied by the light LED or one non-dimmable LED, the light of the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED is leaked from the through-hole to the back surface of the decorative substrate (LED non-mounting surface) more than necessary. It may be deterred. In this case, the number of through-holes formed between the dimming LEDs and the non-dimming LEDs should be larger than the number of the dimming LEDs and the number of the non-dimming LEDs mounted on the sides of the through-holes. By increasing the number of LEDs, it is possible to suppress the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimming LEDs and the non-dimming LEDs. can be set to

In addition, on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the decorative substrate, a three-dimensional object (electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness, etc.) that separates part or all of the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group may be provided to suppress reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. For example, electronic components mounted on circuit boards such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, and LED drivers are mounted between dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the decorative substrate. You may make it In this way, by providing an electronic component that has a predetermined thickness and is mounted so as to protrude from the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the decorative substrate between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED, Part or all of the LED and the non-dimmable LED may be separated to suppress reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED.

In addition, the electronic parts provided between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED have a dark color (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.) appearance with low reflection efficiency (some are different from dark color). It may have a portion (for example, it may have a metallic color such as silver or a transparent portion). As a result, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LEDs and the non-dimming LEDs can be further enhanced.

Further, in the above example, the rear upper first decoration in which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 provided with the rear upper first decoration substrate on which the non-dimming LED is mounted is arranged in the left and right direction. The portion 3211 is formed in a size that extends over the left and right ends of the effect display device 1600, and the characters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed by the 7-segment display portion of the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 can be displayed by the player. Although the ones that are easy to notice are shown, the first decoration part 3211 on the back and on the back side may be formed by, for example, one 7-segment display part, or a decoration board smaller than other decoration boards on which LEDs are mounted may be provided. For example, an effect that is difficult for the player to notice may be executed. In this case, the player who notices the existence of the 7-segment display can be given further enjoyment by the effect executed by the 7-segment display in addition to the effect by the effect display device 1600 or the like. In addition, the surface of a single decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is divided into a region where a plurality of LEDs are mounted for luminous decoration of the decorative body covering the decorative substrate, and 7 segments provided on a part of the decorative body. In the case where the display part is divided into a region in which a plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration are mounted, and the decorative body covering the decorative substrate is arranged in such a manner that the display portion is divided into a region in which the plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration are mounted, the decorative body is more decorated than the region in which the plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration is mounted. A region in which a plurality of LEDs for decorating a 7-segment display provided on a part of the body are mounted may be narrowed.

In this way, the non-dimming LEDs that serve as a reference for brightness adjustment and the dimming LEDs that change the brightness are mounted on a single decorative substrate and arranged close to each other. Compared to mounting on different substrates, it is possible to arrange the dimming LEDs and the non-dimming LEDs closer to each other, making it easier to compare the brightness of the dimming LEDs and the non-dimming LEDs.

In the above example, the LEDs that perform the rainbow-colored lighting decoration, specifically, the LEDs included in the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group and the LEDs included in the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F. LEDs that are capable of adjusting the brightness and do not perform the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect, specifically, the five 7-segment display parts of the back rear upper movable decoration 3210 are arranged left and right. Although the LED that illuminates 3211 is shown to be non-adjustable in brightness, in addition to the LED that illuminates the first decoration part 3211 on the back rear upper side of the door frame 3 and the game board 5, it emits rainbow color effect. One or more non-iridescent LEDs without decoration may be provided. The non-rainbow LED is controlled to be turned off when the rainbow color effect is executed, or controlled to perform light emission decoration different from the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect. It does not perform luminous decoration for production, but unlike the LED that luminous decoration is applied to the first decorative part 3211 on the back, it is possible to adjust the luminance. In this way, the result of the brightness adjustment during execution of the rainbow effect can be reflected in the non-rainbow LEDs that do not carry out the luminescence decoration of the rainbow effect. It is possible to emit light with brightness (light quantity) desired by the player in the executed light emission decoration.

In addition, when the above-described dimming LEDs are performing a rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration, the luminescent color is switched (flickering) in a short time, so an accurate amount of light (brightness) is obtained based on the light of these dimming LEDs. is difficult to determine. Therefore, there is a problem that the amount of light (luminance) is actually set to be different from the amount of light (luminance) desired by the player, even though the player intends to adjust the amount of light (luminance) to his liking. As described above, when a non-rainbow-colored LED is provided that does not execute the rainbow-colored lighting decoration even during execution of the rainbow-colored lighting effect, and a light-emitting decoration different from the rainbow-colored lighting decoration is executed, the door frame 3 In order to be able to accurately determine the light intensity (brightness) based on the light from the non-iridescent LED when adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 Thus, the amount of light (brightness) can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In addition, as the light emitting decoration during execution of the rainbow color effect of the non-rainbow LED, at least the LED that performs the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect, specifically, the LEDs included in the first to sixth board light emitting groups. The LEDs included in the frame light emission groups A to F may be those that switch the emission color in a longer unit light emission time than the LEDs included in the frame emission groups A, or those that perform emission decoration with the same emission color without switching the emission color.

In addition, the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 provided with the rear upper first decoration substrate on which non-dimming LEDs that do not perform the rainbow color effect light emission decoration are mounted, and whose light quantity (luminance) cannot be adjusted as described above. Non-iridescent LEDs (full-color LEDs are controlled in emission colors different from the emission colors of the five 7-segment display parts of the back-upper movable decorative body 3210) It may be one that controls the light emission of a monochromatic LED that emits light in a color different from the light emission color of the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decoration 3210). Light emission may be controlled. In this case, it becomes easy to distinguish between non-iridescent LEDs and non-dimming LEDs, and it becomes easy to compare the light amount (luminance) when adjusting the light amount (luminance). , the amount of light (brightness) can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In the above-described example, the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect, that is, the luminous decoration that changes the luminous color in a short time is not performed. A white solder resist (protective material) having the highest reflection efficiency is also applied to the surface of the rear upper first decoration substrate on which monochromatic LEDs (non-dimmable LEDs) that illuminate and decorate the upper first decoration portion 3211 are mounted. In addition to being coated, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative substrates should be colored with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow and other colors with similar reflection efficiency to white) ) is applied by screen printing to increase the reflection efficiency of the surface on which the LEDs are mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate. By suppressing the interference of light on the surface of the first decorative substrate on the rear and back side, and making the light emission of each LED clearer, characters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the segment display portion can be displayed more clearly. good.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243(A), an LED is mounted to light-embellish the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged horizontally. and a rear upper first decoration substrate provided on the back side of the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 and a rear upper second decoration portion in which predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") are arranged in rows. The back rear upper second decoration substrate on which the LED for light emitting decoration 3212 is mounted, and the back rear upper movable decoration body 3210 containing the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decoration part 3211 and the back rear upper The second decorative portion 3212 is formed with a predetermined thickness (about 10 mm in this example) by an opaque (white in this example) resin or the like that does not have translucency except for the predetermined characters.

Further, as shown in FIG. 243(B), the 7-segment display portion of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is formed with tubular penetrating portions corresponding to the respective segments. The surface on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted of the first decorative substrate on the back side is partitioned so that the LEDs are arranged. In addition, cylindrical through portions corresponding to predetermined characters ("JACKPOT" in this case) are formed in the rear upper second decorative portion 3212, and one or more LEDs are arranged in the through portions. , the surface on which the plurality of LEDs of the second decorative substrate are mounted is partitioned.

In addition, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is formed so as to be divided into two front and rear decorative bodies, and the inside of one of the decorative bodies is brought into close contact with the surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. With the inside of the other decoration in close contact with the surface of the second decoration substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted, the decoration divided into front and back is assembled (fixed) to the back and back. It constitutes the upper movable decorative body 3210 .

As a result, the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the penetrating portions corresponding to the respective segments in the 7-segment display portion of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is suppressed from leaking into the penetrating portions corresponding to other segments. , the interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of segments of the 7-segment display section can be suppressed. , etc.) can be made easier to identify individually. In addition, since the light from the LED arranged in the through-hole can be emitted from each segment in the 7-segment display portion of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 without leaking to the outside of the through-hole, the amount of light in the through-hole is (brightness) can be suppressed.

Similarly, the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the penetrating portions corresponding to the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 leaks into the penetrating portions corresponding to other characters. can be suppressed to suppress the interference of the light emitted from each of the predetermined characters, so that each of the predetermined characters of the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 can be easily identified individually. In addition, since the light from the LEDs arranged in the through portion can be emitted from each of the predetermined letters (here, "JACKPOT") of the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 without leaking out of the through portion, A decrease in the amount of light (brightness) in the penetrating portion can be suppressed.

In addition to the structure of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 described above, or separately from the structure of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 described above (without adopting the structure of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210), the back A rear upper first decoration substrate on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decoration 3210 are arranged left and right, and a predetermined character (here Then, on the surface on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a white Instead of the solder resist (protective material) of , a solder resist (protective material) of a dark color (black, purple, navy blue, deep green, etc.) with low reflection efficiency may be coated. In this case, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decoration substrate on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 are mounted, and the LED that decorates the rear upper second decoration portion 3212 are mounted. Although the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative substrate is reduced, the light from each through portion can be emitted independently without interfering with each other. The characters, numbers, patterns, etc. indicated by the five seven-segment display portions of the decorative portion 3211, and the predetermined characters of the second decorative portion 3212 on the rear upper back side can be clearly displayed, and this information can be displayed to the player. can tell you exactly.

In addition, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. Even when the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decoration substrate is coated with a dark solder resist (protective material), the rear upper first decoration substrate is not mounted with the LEDs for decorating the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 with light emission. and the LED non-mounting surface of the rear upper second decoration substrate, on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper second decoration portion 3212 are mounted, are colored other than dark (for example, white, green, etc.). A solder resist (protective material) may be coated. In addition, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decoration substrate on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. White solder resist (protective material) is coated only on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative substrate and only the inner region of the through portion, or a white coating film is formed by silk printing, etc., and the outer region of the through portion A dark-colored solder resist (protective material) may be coated on the surface of the substrate, or a dark-colored coating film may be formed by silk printing or the like. While suppressing the interference, the light emitted from the LED arranged in the through portion is reflected at a high rate, so that each segment of the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 and the rear upper second decoration Predetermined characters (here, “JACKPOT”) in the portion 3212 can be decorated brightly.

In addition, back and top movable decorations corresponding to respective segments of the five 7-segment display portions of the back and top movable decorative body 3210 and predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the back and top second decoration portion 3212 respectively. The surface of the body 3210 (the portion where the through portion is formed) is coated with a translucent film (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass-like film) or a translucent film (in this example, red, etc.). A cover body made of resin or the like may be provided. As a result, direct viewing of the light from the LEDs decorating the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and from the LEDs decorating the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is suppressed, so that the player does not feel dazzled. can do. In addition, by causing the film or the cover body to emit surface light, the light source becomes inconspicuous when the LED that decorates the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 or the LED that decorates the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 emits light. can do.

In addition, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decoration substrate on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. In order to avoid confusion between the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative substrate and electronic components such as LEDs mounted on the rear second decorative substrate and other decorative substrates, letters and symbols are colored with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) It is applied by screen printing using the ink of In addition, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. For one or both of the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative substrate, ink of a color with low brightness or saturation (for example, green) may be applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing. , Letters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative substrates to be mounted are letters and symbols without foil (that is, wiring patterns that are copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) The surface of the foil-cut letters is coated with a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LED. Alternatively, the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface) may be screen-printed using ink of a predetermined color (not limited to colors with high brightness and saturation, but also including colors with low brightness and saturation). In this case as well, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LEDs that decorate the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted, and the LED that decorates the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. It is possible to suppress light interference with the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative substrate.

In addition, the back rear top first decoration substrate on which the LED that illuminates the back top first decoration portion 3211 is mounted, and the back top second decoration substrate on which the LED that illuminates the back top second decoration portion 3212 is mounted. The decorative substrate and the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are firmly attached to the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (difficult to remove, at least a part of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear upper first decorative substrate, or the rear upper second decorative substrate is removed due to welding, etc. irreversible mounting state that cannot be removed unless destroyed), whereby the LED mounting surfaces of the rear upper first decoration substrate and the rear upper second decoration substrate are mounted on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decoration substrate and the rear upper second decoration substrate from being damaged by mischief or the like.

In addition, among the plurality of decoration substrates on which the plurality of LEDs belonging to the first to sixth lighting groups are mounted, one of the plurality of decoration substrates has an LED for decorating the 7-segment display section with light emission. When mounting, that is, when mounting a plurality of LEDs whose light intensity can be adjusted (dimming LED group) and a plurality of LEDs whose light intensity cannot be adjusted (non-dimming LED group) on a single decorative substrate Alternatively, a decorative body in which the through portion is formed may be provided on the LED mounting surface of the non-dimmable LED group. In this case, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED is further enhanced.

As described above, information such as characters, numbers, and patterns are displayed in the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212, and important information is displayed in the game effect. It can play an important role such as In addition, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 may directly control the main control board 1310 . Compared to the case of controlling the decoration part 3211 and the rear upper second decoration part 3212, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles (such as display of contents different from what should be displayed), and not give disadvantages to players. can be made

In addition, while the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the peripheral control unit regular processing every 33.3 ms, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. , the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 . The display contents of the back upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back upper second decorative portion 3212 can be updated, and if a problem occurs, the back upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 can be updated. Even when contents different from the originally displayed contents are displayed, the display contents can be immediately updated (after 4 ms) to be changed to the original display contents, so that a player or the like is not disadvantaged. That is, the back top first decorative portion 3211 and the back top second decorative portion 3212 that display important information (high importance) are higher than the light emitting decorations that do not display important information (low importance). Since the control signal is output in a short cycle to update the light emission mode of the light emitting means (LED), there is a problem with the display contents of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 that display important information. Even if a problem occurs, the display contents can be immediately changed to normal display contents, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the display of contents different from the original contents. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the back rear upper first decoration part 3211 and the back rear upper second decoration part 3212 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, A communication error may occur between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and there is a possibility that the information indicated by the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 may be defective. In the example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the rear upper first decoration part 3211 and the rear upper second decoration part 3212, so that the peripheral control part 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decoration part 3211 and the rear upper second decoration part 3212 directly. Compared to the case of controlling the back top second decoration part 3212, the information indicated by the back top first decoration part 3211 and the back back top second decoration part 3212 is less likely to be defective, and the player is disadvantaged. You can restrain yourself from giving.

[Modification 1 of rainbow effect]
Next, a modified example of the above-described rainbow effect will be described. In this example, the player can determine the degree of expectation for a big hit by pressing the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 during execution of the rainbow effect. It should be noted that in Modification 1, only portions different from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant description will not be given.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 244, when the rainbow color effect is being executed, if the variable display with a high expectation of a big hit such as a decorative pattern becoming a reach after the rainbow color effect is being executed, the Even if the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during execution of the rainbow color performance, the rainbow color performance is continued until timing t100 without ending the rainbow color performance.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 245, when the rainbow color effect is being executed, the rainbow color effect is not executed with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, such as the decorative pattern does not become a reach after the rainbow color effect. When the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during the execution of , the rainbow color effect being executed is terminated at timing t6 when the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed. Then, the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined effect mode (for example, variable display of decorative patterns, etc.), and LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and various decorations provided on the door frame 3 are displayed. The light emission of the LEDs on the substrate is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode (part or all of them may be extinguished).

Thus, it is possible to determine the possibility of a big hit when the rainbow color effect is being executed, and the player presses the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow color effect is being executed. It is possible to induce the operation unit 303 to be positively pressed. In addition, when the player presses the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 during the period from the timing t2 to the timing t100 when the rainbow color performance is executed and determines that the big hit expectation is high, the game interest is improved. can be made It should be noted that the possibility of a big hit can be determined not only by pressing the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, but also by operating a predetermined operation means. may be For example, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated, the possibility of a big win can be determined, when the volume control button 227 is pressed, the possibility of a big win can be determined, and the light amount control button 228 It may be possible to determine the possibility of a big hit when pressing the .

It should be noted that after the rainbow color effect being executed is completed based on the fact that the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during execution of the rainbow color effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a display irrelevant to the rainbow color effect. You may make it perform a production display. This makes it possible for the player to notice that the rainbow color presentation has ended and to surely recognize that the degree of expectation for a big win is low. Further, when the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect can also be terminated according to the operation of the effect operation unit 300. Alternatively, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period during execution of the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect is terminated. can be Further, after the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect being executed by the effect display device 1600 is finished, when a predetermined start condition is met (for example, the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period of time). or when the non-variation effect period in which the variable effect is not executed reaches a predetermined period, etc.), the rainbow color effect may be started again. As a result, the lighting mode and the display mode of the rainbow-colored performance are imprinted in the player's mind, and when the rainbow-colored performance is executed in the subsequent variable performance, the variable performance with a high expectation for a big win is executed. The production operation unit 300 can be operated with such expectations.

Also, in FIG. 245, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during execution of the rainbow color effect, LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 After finishing the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect in the LEDs of the various decoration boards, the rainbow color effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing of finishing the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect. , etc. is ended. As a result, sudden switching of the display content in the effect display device 1600 can be suppressed, and the display content can be switched while leaving the reverberation of the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during execution of the rainbow color effect, a predetermined sound may be output. In this case, the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation unit 300 After outputting a predetermined sound based on the fact that is pressed, the timing of outputting this predetermined sound (the timing may be the same as or different from the timing at which the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect is completed) may be earlier than the predetermined timing. Period (If the specified sound is output at the same timing as when the rainbow-colored light emitting decoration ends, the same period as the predetermined period from the timing when the rainbow-colored light emitting decoration ends) When outputting a predetermined sound at a timing different from the timing of finishing the rainbow color effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 at a delayed timing) may be terminated. In this case as well, sudden switching of the display content in the effect display device 1600 can be prevented, and the display content can be switched while leaving the afterglow of the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode.

Also, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during execution of the rainbow effect, various LEDs of the decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 After finishing the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect on the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the rainbow colors of the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 You may make it start the light emission decoration of production|presentation. In this case, the effect display device 1600 is displayed after the lighting decoration of the rainbow color effect of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is finished. Before ending the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode in (while continuing the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode in the effect display device 1600) Various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 again It is also possible to start the luminescence decoration of the rainbow color effect in the LEDs and the LEDs of various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 . As a result, the interest of the player who is discouraged by judging that the degree of expectation for the big win is low due to the end of the luminous decoration of the rainbow color presentation can be improved, and the player can be made to pay attention to the rainbow color presentation again.

In addition to the above example, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be determined by changing the sound output mode during execution of the rainbow effect. For example, if the above-described rainbow color effect is being executed, if the variable display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is being executed, such as the decorative pattern becoming a reach after the rainbow color effect, the mode according to the rainbow color effect While executing the sound output, when the rainbow color production is executed, if the decorative pattern does not become a reach after the rainbow color production, etc. If the variation display with a high expectation of the big hit is not being executed, according to the rainbow color production Without executing the sound output of the one mode, another mode of sound output may be performed or no sound output may be performed. Also in this case, the degree of expectation for big win can be discriminated by the execution of the rainbow color presentation and the mode of sound output, and when it is discriminated that the degree of expectation for big win is high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2 of rainbow effect]
Although the above-mentioned rainbow color effect does not involve the movement of the movable body, the movable body that is decorated with the above-described rainbow color effect must always or at a predetermined rate in addition to the light emitting decoration in the rainbow color effect. You may make it perform the operation|movement linked with rainbow color production|presentation. Hereinafter, it is shown as Modified Example 2. It should be noted that in Modification 2, only portions different from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant description will not be given.

As shown in FIG. 246, at timing t2, the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button effective period (for example, 5) is reached without the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed. seconds) has elapsed (timing t2), a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front, bottom, middle decoration board 3168 belonging to the fourth board light emission group are switched to a predetermined emission color (in this example, After emitting light in blue), control is performed to change the emission color at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.1 seconds) (in this example, “blue” → “purple” → “red” → “white” → “yellow”). ” → “Green” → “Blue” → “Purple” → …).

Further, at timing t2, the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed. When the rainbow color effect is started in accordance with the operation, the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 of the back front bottom effect unit 3160 provided with the back front bottom middle decoration board 3168 is lifted from the normal standby position as shown in FIG. Then, the front of the effect display device 1600 (in this example, part of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rises so as to overlap the front of the effect display device 1600. In addition, by rising near the center of the effect display device 1600 The entire back front lower middle decorative body 3161 may be lifted so as to overlap with the front of the effect display device 1600.), and rotates about the axis in the front-rear direction.

As a result, during execution of the rainbow color effect, light emitting decoration by the LED and operation by the movable body (back front bottom middle decoration board 3168) are executed in front of the effect display device 1600, and the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 is executed. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back, front, bottom, and middle decorative substrates 3168 that are decorated with light emission change the light emission color every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), so it is possible to execute an effect that attracts a lot of attention. In addition, since the back front bottom middle decorative body 3161 is exposed in front of the effect display device 1600, and the back front bottom middle decorative body 3161 rotates while partially overlapping with the effect display device 1600, It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and to heighten expectations for the game.

In addition, when the rainbow effect is finished (timing t99), the rotation of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 about the longitudinal axis is stopped and the effect display device 1600 is lowered from the front to return to the normal standby position. Stop. In this example, in synchronism with the movement of the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 to the normal standby position, the effect display device 1600 is caused to generate the reach of the decorative pattern. In this way, the back front bottom middle decorative body 3161 exposed to the front of the effect display device 1600 is rotated while being decorated with light, so that part of the effect display device 1600 is covered and the back front bottom middle decorative body 3161 is covered. In order to attract the player's attention, it is possible to surprise the player when the reach of the decorative pattern occurs on the performance display device 1600 in synchronism with the movement of the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 to the normal standby position, thereby increasing expectations for a big win. .

As described above, when an abnormal state occurs during execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, a plurality of end the light emission decoration of the rainbow color production by the LED of . As a result, the rainbow effect is not performed in an imperfect form.

On the other hand, the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 does not stop operating even if an abnormal state occurs during execution of the rainbow color effect, and performs the same operation as in a state in which no abnormal state occurs. . In addition, even if an abnormal state occurs before the start of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the operation will be performed at the timing of starting the original rainbow color effect in the same way as when the abnormal condition does not occur. It has become. That is, if the light emission control of the rainbow color effect cannot be realized in a complete form as designed, the light emission decoration by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front, lower, middle decoration board 3168 is stopped or not executed, but the rainbow color Operations that do not affect the luminous decoration of the presentation are executed as planned (as designed) without being interrupted. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the variable performance is continuing, and the misunderstanding that the variable performance has ended due to the suspension of the rainbow-colored performance can be prevented from being given to the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 247, when an abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow color effect, the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 is mounted on the back front bottom middle decoration substrate 3168 for luminous decoration. The lighting decoration of the rainbow color presentation by the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided on the game board 5 including the plurality of LEDs is ended and controlled to be turned off. Even when the door frame 3 is closed during execution of the rainbow color effect and the abnormality is resolved, the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect is not restored (the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect is not restarted). there is

On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 (timing t6) when the back front bottom middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color effect, the operation of the back front bottom middle decorative body 3161 interlocks with the rainbow color effect. (timing t6 to timing t100). In this way, when an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow color effect, the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 continues the operation of the back front bottom middle decoration body 3161 while ending the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect. The continuation of the operation makes the player aware of the continuation of the variable performance, thereby preventing the player from feeling uneasy.

In addition, even if an abnormality occurs in the variable performance for executing the rainbow color performance, and the abnormality is resolved before the rainbow color performance ends and the abnormal state returns to the normal state, the back front, bottom, middle decoration body 3161 is decorated with light. The luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decoration board 3168 is not restarted. In other words, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, and the abnormality is resolved before the rainbow color effect ends and the abnormal state returns to the normal state, the reverse In a light-off state in which the front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 is not decorated with light, an operation linked to the rainbow effect is performed. As a result, when the rainbow color effect display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, an abnormal state occurs in the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect depending on whether or not the back front, bottom, middle decorative body 3161 is decorated with light emission. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts and the like.

Depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), whether or not to continue or start the operation linked to the rainbow effect of the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 may be changed, for example, as described above. For errors that have a small effect on the game, the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the back front, bottom, middle decorative body 3161 is continued, or the operation linked to the rainbow color effect is executed as planned (operated at the timing set in the scheduler). On the other hand, for an error that seriously affects the game, the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the back front, bottom, middle decorative body 3161 is stopped (after stopping the operation linked to the rainbow color effect, it returns to the normal standby position. ) or by controlling not to perform the operation linked to the previously scheduled (set in the scheduler) rainbow color effect, even during the execution of the variable effect You may make it interrupt or end a variable performance. As a result, the operating state of the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 can be varied according to the degree of the error, making it possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, whether or not the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is to be disappeared may be changed according to the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency). Regarding the error, the display of the rainbow color effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 is not lost, and a warning display (for example, "the door is open" etc.) is displayed so that a part of the rainbow color effect display mode overlaps. For errors that have a serious effect on the performance display device 1600, the display of the rainbow color effect display mode is extinguished, and only a warning display (for example, "Illegal winning has occurred!") is performed. Even if there is, the display of the rainbow color effect (rainbow color effect display mode) may be interrupted or terminated. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode on the effect display device 1600 according to the degree of the error, and it is possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, as shown in the modified example 1 of the rainbow color effect, when the variable display with a high expectation of a big hit such as the decorative pattern becomes reachable after the rainbow color effect is executed, always or at a predetermined rate The back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is operated in conjunction with the rainbow color presentation, and when the variation display with high expectation of big hit such as the decorative pattern does not become a reach after the rainbow color presentation is not executed, the back front is performed. The lower middle decorative body 3161 may not be operated in conjunction with the rainbow effect. As a result, if the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color presentation, expectations for a big win can be improved, and the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color presentation. Even if it is not, there is a possibility that the variation display with a high degree of expectation for the big win is executed, so that the expectation for the big win can be kept from being lost.

Further, although the above-described embodiments (all embodiments including modified examples 1 and 2) are related to the rainbow effect, the present technical concept can also be applied to effects other than the rainbow effect. For example, modification 2 can be applied not only to the case where the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is operated in conjunction with the rainbow effect, but also to the case in which it is operated in conjunction with other effects.

[Golden effect]
Next, the golden effect will be explained. The golden effect in this example means that part or all of the characters, characters, patterns, etc. displayed on the effect display device 1600 are displayed in gold or a color close to gold (a color similar to gold (yellow in this example)). In conjunction with the gold display of the effect display device 1600, some or all of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are displayed in gold or in a color close to gold (golden). A similar color (yellow in this example) emits gold light, and when the golden effect is executed, there is a high probability that it will be a big hit (for example, if it is a big hit (jackpot confirmed effect) or a big hit If the probability of becoming a hit is high (jackpot notice), if the decorative pattern becomes a reach (reach notice), it will be executed as a reach effect after the reach occurs, suggesting that the probability of becoming a big hit is high, etc.) be.

In addition, when the golden effect is executed, it may always be a big hit (the degree of expectation for the big win is 100%), or it may be a big win that is executed both when it is a big win and when it is lost. It may be the one with the second highest degree of expectation (for example, a rainbow color effect, a giraffe pattern, a zebra pattern, a ladybug pattern, etc. that is different from the usual background, characters, etc.). One effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, 80% to 100% of expectation for big win) may be included (eg, 60% or the like may be used as the expectation for big win in the gold color effect)). That is, the plurality of performances corresponding to the degree of expectation of a big win may include a performance with a lower degree of expectation for a big win than the golden performance, or may include a performance with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the golden performance. It may not include an effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the effect. In this way, the golden effect is an effect corresponding to a high degree of expectation for a big win, and the player can expect a big win when the golden effect is executed.

In the following, as a gold effect, gold display in the effect display device 1600, gold light emission by LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and gold light by LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 The gold display in the effect display device 1600, the gold light emission by the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, and the various lighting devices provided on the game board 5 are shown. gold light emission by the LED of the decoration substrate, or any combination thereof.

For example, as shown in FIG. 248, when a variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310 to instruct the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of decorative symbols (in this example, a variation effect for executing a gold effect) is received (FIG. 248 (A)), the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is started to display the decorative patterns translucently, and at a predetermined notice timing, a treasure box is displayed as a character on the effect display device 1600, and characters (in this example, Then, "Treasure box found!") is displayed (Fig. 248(B)). At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed in the upper layer (upper layer) of these characters and characters. It does not interfere with the visibility of characters and letters.

Then, based on the fact that a predetermined period of time has passed since the treasure box was displayed on the effect display device 1600, a mode of opening the treasure box is displayed (Fig. 248(C)). At this time, the effect display device 1600 displays a mode in which gold light (light of a color similar to gold) is emitted from the treasure box (gold display), and various types of light provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are displayed. Among the LEDs of the decoration board, the LEDs arranged in the area corresponding to the light emitted from the treasure box displayed on the effect display device 1600 are caused to emit light in a color similar to gold (golden light emission). In this example, the upper lid of the treasure chest displayed on the effect display device 1600 is gradually rotated, and the mode of changing the amount of light leaking from the treasure chest according to the degree of opening of the treasure chest is displayed. Among the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the board 5, the LEDs arranged in the area corresponding to the light leaking from the treasure chest are caused to emit light in a color similar to gold (golden light emission). In FIG. 248(C), in synchronization with the rotation of the upper lid of the treasure box, the LEDs arranged above the upper tray 201 (not limited to all the LEDs arranged above the upper tray 201, Some LEDs among the plurality of LEDs arranged above (for example, the rear upper first decoration part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged horizontally) are decorated with light. Of the LEDs (the LEDs mounted on the first decoration board on the rear upper side) may not emit gold light, the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 are gradually changed to gold from below. After that, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the door frame top unit 450 are similar to gold in order according to the degree of rotation of the upper lid of the treasure chest. to emit light in the desired color.

In FIG. 248(C), gold display and gold light emission are performed in conjunction with the operation of opening the treasure chest, and the light leaking (emitted) from the treasure chest displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed outside the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to give the impression that it gradually spreads out, the relationship between the gold display of the effect display device 1600 and the gold light emission by LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Even when the color displayed on the effect display device 1600 by the gold display and the light emission color of the LED by the gold light emission are similar but not the same color, the gold display and the gold light emission can be easily recognized. It can be recognized as representing the same color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 248(D), a gold nugget is taken out from the treasure chest displayed on the effect display device 1600, light is reflected on the surface of the gold nugget, and golden light (light of a color similar to gold) emerges from the gold nugget. ) is displayed (gold display). In addition, LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 arranged around the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the golden light emitted from the gold nuggets that display the gold bullion on the effect display device 1600 luminesce in a color similar to gold (golden luminescence). In FIG. 248(D), in addition to the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the door frame top unit 450, In addition, the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 arranged below the upper plate 201 and the outer peripheral surface, the unit upper cover 312, the left plate decoration 271, the right plate decoration 276, and the LEDs provided on the front lens 185 ( Not only all the LEDs arranged below the upper plate 201 but also some LEDs among the plurality of LEDs arranged below the upper plate 201 (for example, the handle decoration substrate 184 for making the handle front lens 185 emit light) A plurality of LEDs mounted on the LEDs) may not emit gold light, but emit light in a color similar to gold.

In addition, the light guide plate 3110 may be made to emit gold light in addition to the above gold light emission. 3128g for the light guide plate of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right first decoration substrate in the back front right decoration unit 3140. 3148, the back front right second decorative substrate 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 are caused to emit light to make the first pattern 3111 gold or a color close to gold (similar to gold). It may be made to emit light in color (yellow in this example). As a result, in addition to the spread in the horizontal direction of the gold display of the effect display device 1600 and the gold light emission of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is arranged in front of it. It is possible to display the spread in the front-rear direction by the light guide plate 3110, and it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the golden presentation.

When the golden effect is executed in this way, the gold display on the effect display device 1600 and the gold light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 ( Only one of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may emit gold light. The relationship between the gold display on the performance display device 1600 and the gold light emission by the LED can be instantly recognized, and the performance with a sense of unity can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 as a whole. In addition, as described above, the gold effect suggests that the probability of winning a big win is high, so that the execution of the gold effect in the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can improve the player's expectations for the big win. It is possible to suppress the decline of the game interest.

After the treasure box is displayed in FIG. 248(B), the treasure box is displayed based on the operation of the player (when the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation section 301 is rotated or when the pressing operation section 303 is pressed). It is also possible to display the state in which the treasure box is opened. It is also possible to display the mode in which the treasure box is opened at times. In other words, after the treasure box is displayed, the golden effect may be started according to the player's operation, the golden effect may not be executed unless the player operates, or the player does not operate. Even in this case, the golden effect may be started when the operation effective period has passed.

Further, in this example, the player can determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big win by operating the operation section such as the pressing operation section 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 during execution of the golden presentation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249(A), when a gold effect is being executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit such as a decorative pattern becoming a reach, the gold effect is being executed. Even if the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed at the timing t3, the gold performance is continuously executed until the timing t4 without ending the gold performance.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 249(B), when the gold effect is not executed as a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit, such as the decorative pattern becoming a reach, the effect operation is performed at the timing t3 during the execution of the gold effect. When the pressing operation portion 303 of the unit 300 is pressed, the golden effect is terminated at the timing t3 when the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, and the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined effect mode (for example, variable display of decorative patterns, etc.), and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (white in this example). light is emitted at the same time, but it is also possible to turn off part or all of them) to control the light emission.

As a result, the possibility of a big win can be determined by operating the performance operation unit 300 when the golden performance is being executed, and the player can determine the possibility of a big win during the period from timing t2 to timing t4 when the golden performance is being executed. can induce the operator to positively press the operating section such as the pressing operating section 303 of the effect operating unit 300 . In addition, when the player operates the operation part such as the pressing operation part 303 during the period of timing t2 to timing t4 during which the golden effect is executed and it is determined that the expectation of the big win is high, the game interest can be improved. can. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to the one that can determine the possibility of a big win depending on whether the golden effect ends or continues when an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. When a specific operation part (for example, a contact operation part 302, a volume adjustment button 227, a light amount adjustment button 228, a handle 195, etc.) is operated among a plurality of operation parts, a big hit is obtained depending on whether the golden effect ends or continues. You may enable it to determine the presence or absence of the possibility of becoming. For example, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated, it is possible to determine whether there is a possibility of a big win depending on whether the golden effect ends or continues, or when the volume control button 227 is pressed. In addition, it is possible to determine whether there is a possibility of a big win according to whether the golden effect ends or continues, and whether the golden effect ends or continues when the light amount adjustment button 228 is pressed. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on whether the handle 195 is rotated and the game ball is hit, and the possibility of a big win depending on whether the golden effect ends or continues. It may be one that enables determination of the presence or absence of gender, or the like.

Further, it is not limited to the one that can determine the possibility of a big win according to whether the golden effect ends or continues when the above-described specific operation unit is operated, and a plurality of detections provided in the pachinko machine 1. When detection is made by a specific detection means (for example, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the means, the big hit depends on whether the golden effect ends or continues. You may enable it to determine the presence or absence of the possibility of becoming. For example, when the game ball that entered the starting hole (first starting hole 2002 and second starting hole 2004) is detected by the starting hole sensor (first starting hole sensor 3002 and second starting hole sensor 2401), the golden effect It is possible to determine whether there is a possibility of a big win depending on whether the game ends or continues, and when the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the palm, fingers, etc. are touching, the golden effect ends. It may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of winning a big hit depending on whether the game continues or not. In this case also, the player can be induced to play so that detection by the specific detection means is performed during the period from timing t2 to timing t4 during which the golden effect is executed. In addition, when the detection by the specific detecting means is performed during the period of timing t2 to timing t4 during which the golden effect is executed and it is determined that the degree of expectation for the big hit is high, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, after the golden effect is terminated based on the operation of the operation part such as the pressing operation part 303 during execution of the golden effect, the effect display device 1600 displays the effect information unrelated to the golden effect. may This allows the player to recognize that the gold presentation has ended, and to grasp that the degree of expectation for a big win is low and that there is no possibility of a big win. Further, when the effect display device 1600 displays effect information irrelevant to the gold effect after ending the golden effect based on the operation of the operation part such as the pressing operation part 303, the effect information is not related to the golden effect. The display of the effect information may also be terminated in accordance with the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, or during the execution of the display of the effect information unrelated to the gold effect, If the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated for a long period of time, the display of the effect information unrelated to the gold effect may be terminated. Further, after the display of the effect information unrelated to the golden effect executed by the effect display device 1600 is completed, when a predetermined start condition is met (for example, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 or the like is performed for a predetermined period of time). When the part is not operated, or when the non-variation performance period in which the variation performance is not executed reaches a predetermined period, etc.), the golden performance may be started again. As a result, the lighting mode and the display mode of the golden performance are imprinted in the mind of the player, and the expectation that the variable performance with a high expectation of a big hit will be executed when the gold performance is executed in the variable performance to be executed thereafter. can be held to operate the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 . In addition, on the condition that the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 has not been operated for a predetermined period during the execution of the display of the effect information unrelated to the gold effect being executed by the effect display device 1600, the gold color When the display of the effect information unrelated to the effect is configured to end, the predetermined period is reset ( The predetermined period may be reset and counted from 0 again). In this case, by repeatedly resetting the predetermined period during which the display of effect information unrelated to the gold effect can be executed and operating the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 within the predetermined period, It is possible to delay the timing of resuming the golden presentation or prevent the golden presentation from being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gold effect from being performed for a player who does not desire the execution of the gold effect, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Also, in FIG. 249(B), when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during execution of the golden effect, the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 After finishing the luminous decoration of the golden effect on the LEDs of various decoration boards provided in the display device 1600, the golden effect display mode, etc. end the effect display. As a result, sudden switching of the display contents in the effect display device 1600 can be suppressed, and the display contents can be switched while leaving the reverberation of the effect display such as the golden effect display mode.

Further, when the pressing operation section 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during execution of the gold presentation, a predetermined sound may be output. After outputting a predetermined sound based on the operation, a predetermined period of time (golden effect) is generated before the timing of outputting this predetermined sound (the timing may be the same as or different from the timing at which the luminous decoration of the gold effect is completed). If the specified sound is output at the same timing as the end of the luminous decoration, the specified period will be the same as the timing from the end of the luminous decoration of the golden effect, and the predetermined timing will be different from the timing of the end of the luminous decoration of the golden effect. In the case of outputting a sound, the effect display such as the gold effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 may be ended at a timing delayed by a period different from the predetermined period from the timing when the luminous decoration of the gold effect is finished. Also in this case, when a predetermined sound is output, the display contents of the performance display device 1600 are prevented from being suddenly switched, and the display contents are switched while leaving the afterglow of the performance display such as the golden performance display mode. can be done.

Also, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during execution of the golden effect, LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and various types of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 After finishing the luminous decoration of the gold effect in the LEDs of the decoration board, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 again emit light in the gold effect. You may start decorating. In this case, after finishing the luminous decoration of the gold effect on the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600 Before ending the effect display such as the golden effect display mode (while continuing the effect display such as the gold effect display mode in the effect display device 1600), the LEDs and doors of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 again. The LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the frame 3 may start to emit gold light-emitting decorations. As a result, the disappointment of players who are discouraged by the fact that the expectation of a big win is low and that there is no possibility of winning a big win due to the end of the luminous decoration of the golden effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the golden effect again. can be made

Further, in addition to the above example, the presence or absence of the possibility of a big win may be determined by changing the sound output mode during execution of the golden effect. For example, if a golden effect is executed as a variable display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, such as the decorative pattern becoming a ready-to-win, the sound output in a manner corresponding to the golden effect is executed, while the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win. If the golden effect is not executed as a variation display with a high expectation of a big hit, the sound output of another mode is executed without executing the sound output of the mode corresponding to the golden effect, or the sound output is not executed. can be Also in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big win by the execution of the golden performance and the mode of the sound output, and when it is determined that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this example, prior to the golden effect, the LEDs that decorate the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged horizontally are controlled to emit light. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 249A and 249B, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 at timing t0 and decorates the effect display device 1600. In the period of timing t1 after the start of the variable performance such as the variable display of the pattern, the rear upper first decoration part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged horizontally is turned off. When the timing t1 before the start of the golden effect is reached, the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged left and right in advance of the golden effect. 3211 is controlled to emit red light, and when timing t2 comes, the golden effect is started. As light emission control of the five 7-segment display parts of the back and upper movable decoration 3210 performed prior to the golden effect, for example, the start timing of the golden effect is counted down, or blinking is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (big hit). It may be stopped at a numerical value indicating probability, etc.). Further, a dot matrix display portion may be provided as the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211. In this case, a predetermined character (such as hot!) is displayed as a display performed prior to the golden effect, Predetermined characters may be displayed so as to flow repeatedly from right to left on the dot matrix display section.

In addition, the red emission control of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is continued even after the end of the golden effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big hit in the ready-to-win performance or the like executed after the end of the golden performance. In this way, in order to control the light emission of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 prior to the golden effect, and to continue to control the light emission of the rear upper upper first decorative portion 3211 even after the end of the golden effect, the execution is performed in advance. Expectation for the start of the golden performance can be heightened by the light emission control of the back rear upper first decoration part 3211 which is turned on, and the expectation for the big win can be heightened by the light emission control of the back rear upper first decoration part 3211 even after the end of the golden performance. be able to.

In addition, the light emission control of the back rear upper first decoration part 3211 is started at least prior to the golden effect, and it may be continued even after the end of the golden effect, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. It may be started at any timing between the timing t0 to start the golden effect and the timing t2 to start the golden effect (including the one in which the light emission control is started at the timing t0), or the decorative pattern from the timing t4 to end the golden effect. may be terminated at any timing between the timing t5 at which the variable display of is stopped (including when the light emission control is stopped at the timing t5). As a result, whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern is to be executed can be determined by the light emitting state of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 . In addition, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped (timing t5), if the variable display of the decorative pattern is started again before the predetermined period elapses, the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is controlled to be turned off. Alternatively, the light emitting state may be continuously controlled without the light emitting state. In this case, it can be determined from the luminous state of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 that the variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously performed. In addition, when the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is displayed blinking or moved, the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is blinked or moved at the timing t1 preceding the golden effect. When the blinking display or moving display is stopped at any timing from the timing t2 after the start of the golden effect to the timing t5 (including the timing t5) at which the variable display of the decorative patterns is stopped, and the variable display of the decorative patterns is started again. Then, the display content of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 may be updated to resume blinking display or moving display (timing t0). Even in this case, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the presence or absence of blinking display or moving display in the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 .

Thus, in this example, a high-expectation golden effect with a high probability of a big win or a possibility of a big win and a low-expectation golden effect with a low probability of a big win or no possibility of a big win are executed. It's like It should be noted that, as described above, the gold display is not limited to the one in which both the gold display and the gold light emission are performed in conjunction, and only one of the gold display and the gold light emission may be performed. , when one of the gold display and gold light emission is executed as a high-expectation golden effect, even if the operation of the operation unit by the player is detected during the execution of the high-expectation golden effect, the high-expectation gold Continue to execute the production (out of the gold display and gold light emission, the one that has been executed before the player's operation etc. is continued even after the operation), while the low expectation golden production is being executed , terminates the low-expectation golden effect when it detects the operation of the operation unit by the player during the execution of the low-expectation golden effect (the gold display and the gold light emission are executed before the player operates). end). With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation unit and the like, and to actively participate in the game, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

During execution of the high-expectation golden effect and the low-expectation gold effect, the effect sound is output in a manner corresponding to the gold effect. When the operation unit or the like is operated during execution of the low-expectation golden presentation, the low-expectation gold presentation is terminated and the output of the presentation sound is terminated. On the other hand, even if you operate the operation part, etc. during the execution of the high-expectation golden effect, the high-expectation golden effect will not end, so the effect sound will continue to be output until the high-expectation golden effect ends. It's becoming At least a part of the mode of the effect sound output during the execution of the high-expectation golden effect and the mode of the effect sound output during the execution of the low-expectation gold effect is made different. (For example, in the high-expectation golden production, a specific golden sound mode is output, and in the low-expectation gold production, a non-specific golden sound mode that is different from the specific golden sound mode (only partly different from the specific golden sound mode It may be similar as a whole, or it may be completely different from the specific golden sound mode), or output a dramatic sound in the high-expectation gold production, and output the production sound in the low-expectation gold The production may be one that does not output a production sound, etc. In this case, it is possible to determine whether the high-expectation gold production is being executed or the low-expectation gold production is being executed, depending on the mode of the production sound. To reliably determine whether a high-expectation golden presentation is being executed or a low-expectation golden presentation is being executed according to whether the golden presentation is terminated or continued when an operation part or the like is operated, although there is a possibility. be able to

Depending on whether or not specific image information is to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on detection of the player's operation, it is determined whether either the high-expectation gold effect or the low-expectation gold effect is being executed. It may be made possible. For example, as shown in FIG. 250, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the execution of the low-expectation golden effect (FIG. 250(B)), the specified While the image information 1600a is displayed (FIG. 250(D)), the specific image information 1600a may not be displayed when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during execution of the highly anticipated golden effect. . By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine whether the low-expectation gold effect is being executed or the high-expectation gold effect is being executed, depending on whether or not the specific image information 1600a is displayed. , the player's operation can be urged to actively participate in the game, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again while the specific image information 1600a is being displayed, the certain period during which the specific image information 1600a can be displayed may be reset. The display period may be reset and measured from 0 again). For example, when the specific image information 1600a is displayed for 5 seconds based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, the display period of the specific image information 1600a (when the specific image information 1600a is displayed) is displayed. If the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again within 5 seconds after the operation is performed, the specific image information 1600a is displayed for 5 seconds from the timing when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again. By doing so, the display period of the specific image information 1600a may be extended. This prevents the player from overlooking the specific image information 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. Also, even if the display period of the specific image information 1600a has not reached the above-described certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds), if a predetermined condition is satisfied ), the display of the specific image information 1600a may be terminated when the above-described abnormal state occurs, etc. In this case, the display of the specific image information 1600a is displayed at the above-described constant It is possible to grasp that the predetermined condition has been satisfied by ending the period before reaching the period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 250(D), the specific image information 1600a can be displayed even after the end of the low-expectation golden effect until the above-mentioned fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. As a result, the specific image information 1600a can be displayed even when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated just before the end of the low-expectation gold presentation. In other words, the player can surely recognize that the low-expectation golden presentation has been executed.

Further, in the above example, the specific image information 1600a is displayed when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during execution of the low-expectation golden effect. The specific image information 1600a may be changed based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. FIG. For example, a character is displayed as the specific image information 1600a on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 during execution of the low-expectation golden effect (FIG. 250(B)). After that, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is further operated, the character as the specific image information 1600a is changed to an inflated mode (gets thicker) (FIG. 250(C)), and the pressing operation unit 303 and the like are changed. 250 (B) to 250 ( D)). In this way, not only whether or not the specific image information 1600a is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, but also whether the specific image information 1600a is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 can be determined. You may make it change in steps. As a result, it is possible to reliably make the user aware that the specific image information 1600a is being displayed on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the low-expectation golden effect, and to recognize that the low-expectation gold effect is being executed. Even in such a case, the disappointment can be alleviated by the character change as the specific image information 1600a.

Further, the character as the specific image information 1600a may be displayed when any one of the plurality of operating sections is operated. In this case, when the first operating section among the plurality of operating sections is operated, 250(C)), and the specific image information 1600a is changed based on the operation of the second operation unit out of the plurality of operation units. The character as the information 1600a may be changed to shrink (get thinner) (FIG. 250(C)). As a result, it is possible to reliably make the user aware that the specific image information 1600a is being displayed on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the low-expectation golden effect, and to recognize that the low-expectation gold effect is being executed. Even in such a case, the disappointment can be alleviated by the character change as the specific image information 1600a. Further, by operating one of the first and second operation units among the plurality of operation units, the body shape of the character as the specific image information 1600a changes to the maximum value (body type 6) or minimum value (body type 1). However, by operating the other one of the first operation portion and the second operation portion among the plurality of operation portions, the body shape of the character as the specific image information 1600a can be changed from the maximum value (body type 6) to the minimum value (body type 1). , or from the minimum value (body type 1) to the maximum value (body type 6).

Further, when the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display for executing the high-expectation golden effect, the specific image information can be displayed based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 even before the execution of the high-expectation gold effect. 1600a may not be displayed. As a result, the player's expectation for the big win can be heightened before the execution of the high-expectation golden performance, and the player's attention can be made to pay attention to the high-expectation golden performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the low-expectation golden effect is being executed, a specific sound (for example, a “beep” output when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated) is generated in response to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. or a sound corresponding to the operation of the specific image information 1600a (for example, in FIGS. 250(B) to 250(D), a sound such as a "beep" corresponding to the change in weight or weight of the specific image information 1600a)) may be output. As a result, when the low-expectation golden effect is being executed, the specific sound can be output in relation to the display of the specific image information 1600a to make the player notice the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a. Discouragement can be alleviated. Further, even when the high-expectation golden effect is being executed, the above-described specific sound may be output according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. In this case, the pressing operation unit 303, etc. Although the specific image information 1600a is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the operating section , the pressing operating section 303 or the like is operated by outputting a specific sound in accordance with the operation of the operating section such as the pressing operating section 303 or the like. It is possible to make the player recognize that the operation of the unit is surely accepted, and to improve the game interest of the player who recognizes that the high-expectation golden presentation is being executed.

Further, in response to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, a specific sound (for example, an electronic sound such as "beep" that is output when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, or the operation of the specific image information 1600a 250(B) to 250(D), the specific image information 1600a is to be output. A specific sound may be output prior to the change of the display of , and then the display of the specific image information 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed. With this configuration, it is possible to change the display of the specific image information 1600a after notifying the change of the display of the specific image information 1600a by the specific sound and making the player recognize it in advance. It is possible to avoid overlooking changes in the display of the information 1600a.

Further, when the low-expectation golden effect is being executed, it is possible to specify which of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 can execute the above-described gold light emission according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. The light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate may be changed (for example, change of light emission color, change of light emission pattern (blinking interval, etc.), change of brightness, etc.). In this case as well, when the low-expectation golden effect is being executed, the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on the specific decoration board is changed in relation to the display of the specific image information 1600a. It is possible to make the player aware of the change in the player's disappointment. Also in this case, prior to the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a, the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board is changed (for example, the color of light emitted, the pattern of light emission (blinking interval, etc.) is changed, and the brightness is changed. change, etc.). With this configuration, the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a is notified by changing the light emission mode of the LED mounted on the specific decoration board, and the specific image information 1600a is notified to the player in advance. can be changed, and it is possible not to overlook the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a.

Further, when the specific image information 1600a is displayed based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 during the execution of the low-expectation golden effect, it is executed based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. The specific image information 1600a may be displayed after the middle low-expectation golden effect is finished. By configuring in this way, not only the display of the specific image information 1600a, but also the end of the low-expectation golden presentation can make the player recognize that the low-expectation gold presentation has been executed, and the expectation of a big win is low. It is possible to suppress the reduction in the interest in the game due to the endless execution of the expected golden performance.

Further, in the above example, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during execution of the high-expectation golden effect, the specific image information 1600a is not displayed. If an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 even during When the light emitted by the LED becomes difficult to see), and when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects the vibration of the game board 5 continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is performed). When it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is vibrating, the light emitted by LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the effect display device 1600 blur and are difficult to visually recognize. state), when a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is filled with game balls), the ball cutting detection sensor 574 When a minor error occurs, such as when a detection signal is input (an error with a low possibility of a goto act, such as when it is detected that there is no game ball in the guide passage 570a), When radio wave irradiation is detected (when electromagnetic waves or the like cause noise in the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, or when noise is present in the display of the effect display device 1600) , When the magnet goto is detected, when the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401 is input when the second start opening 2004 is not open, when it is not in the big winning game state or the small winning game state, the big winning opening When a detection signal from the sensor 2402 is input, when a serious error such as an error with a high possibility of a fraudulent act occurs) When a specific condition is satisfied, a specific image The information 1600a may be displayed, or after the specific image information 1600a is displayed, the display mode of the specific image information 1600a may be changed based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. may With this configuration, even when it is difficult to hear the specific sound, the display of the specific image information 1600a and the change in the display mode of the specific image information 1600a can reliably accept the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. can be recognized, and the game interest of the player who recognizes that the high-expectation gold presentation is being executed can be improved.

Here, metallic luster such as gold cannot be displayed by a single display element (only one display element) in a display device such as the effect display device 1600 or the like. Therefore, in this example, the effect display device 1600 expresses gold by displaying an image obtained by effect-processing yellow, which is a color close to gold. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 251(A), in this example, in the case where the effect display device 1600 performs graphic processing to display a gold color representing metallic luster such as gold, yellow characters, characters, patterns, etc. It can be displayed with gradual differences in brightness (gradation), star-shaped, diamond-shaped, radial, etc. glows (parts that represent luster and are lighter in color than the surroundings (whitish parts)), and shading. By displaying (dark shadows) or the like, the luster of the metal is expressed, and it is possible to recognize that the gold display is performed only by the gold display of the effect display device 1600. there is

In the same way, even in light emitters such as lamps and LEDs, it is not possible to reproduce gold with a single light-emitting element (only one light-emitting element). It is designed to express For example, as shown in FIG. 251(B), a plurality of LEDs may emit a common yellow color, but a predetermined number of LEDs may emit yellow light with different brightness in stages (gradation), or all of the plurality of LEDs may emit yellow light. are emitted in a common color (yellow), some LEDs are caused to emit white light to represent the glow, or the LEDs arranged on the extension of the radial glow displayed on the effect display device 1600 are close to gold. Light is emitted in an emission color such as yellow and other colors are extinguished, or the brightness of the emission color of the LED arranged on the extension of the radial glow displayed on the effect display device 1600 is increased (bright such as pale yellow). While emitting light (yellow), by reducing the brightness of LEDs that are not arranged on the extension of the radial glow (dark yellow such as blackish yellow) and emitting light, metallic luster can be expressed or displayed on the effect display device 1600. It can be made to recognize that gold light emission is performed in association with the gold display. In addition to these, or instead of these, the surface mounting surface of the board on which the LED is mounted may be a member (such as a lens member having a multifaceted shape) having two surfaces, an outer member and an inner member. A double lens member or the like consisting of two members may be used, and in this case, the degree of lens cut (number of surfaces, size, etc.) of the outer member and the inner member may be different. By using a lens member or a double lens with different degrees of lens cut, the refraction of light becomes irregular and the feeling of glitter can be improved. To express the luster of gold, metal, etc. by diffusing the light from an LED or generating a high-luminance area where light is collected and a low-luminance area where light is avoided. It is also possible, and by arranging such a lens-cut member, it is possible to recognize that gold light is being emitted, and the lens-cut member deteriorates the visibility behind the member. It is possible to make it difficult to see the surface mounting surface of the substrate, the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting surface, the surface side writing part, etc., and the deterioration of the game interest due to the visual recognition of information unrelated to the game. can be suppressed. Alternatively, the boundary between one surface and the other surface of the multifaceted lens-cut member may be arranged so as to overlap the surface-side notation portion, whereby an image viewed through the lens-cut member. can be distorted, making it difficult to see the surface-side inscription. Furthermore, in this example, in conjunction with the gold display on the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit gold light, so that the gold display and the gold light emission By generating a synergistic effect, the player can be made to recognize that gold display and light emission are performed at a high rate.

Further, as described above, in this example, among the plurality of decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs, the specific decoration substrate capable of executing gold light emission, that is, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 is decorated with light emission. a back front left decoration substrate 3129 for light emission decoration; a back front left logo decoration portion 3121, a back front left logo decoration portion 3122, and a back front left sub decoration portion 3123; A back front bottom logo decoration substrate 3173 for luminous decoration of the front bottom logo decoration 3167, a back front bottom middle decoration substrate 3168 for luminescence decoration of the back front bottom middle decoration 3161, and a back front bottom left interior decoration. A back front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169 for luminous decoration of 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170 for luminous decoration of the back front lower left outer ornament 3164, and a back front lower right inner ornament 3165. A back front lower right inner decoration substrate 3171 for luminous decoration, a back front lower right outer decoration substrate 3172 for luminous decoration of the back front lower right outer decoration 3166, and a back front right logo decoration part 3141 are luminous decorated. 3152, a back front right upper decorative substrate 3151 for luminous decoration of the back front right upper logo decoration portion 3142, and five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right. A rear upper first decoration substrate (not shown) on which LEDs for decorating the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 are mounted, and a surface on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted (LED mounting surface) , is coated with white solder resist (protective material).

Among the plurality of decorative substrates mounted on the door frame 3 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs, a specific decorative substrate capable of executing the golden light emission, that is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450 A frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420. , the plate left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the plate right decoration provided on the rear side of the plate right decorative lens 277. The substrate 278, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the like are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted (LED mounting surface). be.

In the specific decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, electronic devices such as LEDs to be mounted are coated on a white solder resist (protective material) coated on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. Characters and symbols (electronic component part numbers) to avoid confusion with components and other decorative substrates, attributes of front electronic components such as the area indicating the position where electronic components are placed (furthermore, the shape of the front electronic components , the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components. , bright colors such as yellow and yellow-green) are applied by screen printing. In other words, the LED mounting surface of the specific decoration substrate among the plurality of decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protection mask), which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency. Materials) are coated, and letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates, areas indicating the positions where electronic parts are arranged, etc. Attributes of the front side electronic components (furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic components, the size of the front side electronic components, the mounting direction of the front side electronic components (mounting direction), and the model of the front side electronic components may be included.) The surface-side writing portion shown is screen-printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, a bright color such as yellow or yellow-green).

As described above, in the golden effect, the LEDs mounted on these specific decorative substrates are effect-processed to emit yellow similar to that of the surface-side notation portion to emit gold light. Coating the surface of a specific decoration board with a white solder resist (protective material) and causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on this specific decoration board to emit light in the same color as the surface side marking part formed on the LED mounting surface. , not only can the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface be increased, but also the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs can be suppressed from being attenuated by the surface side notation portion, so that gold light emission can be clearly performed with high brightness. In addition, by forming the surface-side notation using yellow, which has a similar reflection efficiency to white, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface can be made nearly uniform, and the light emitted from the LED can be directed to the specific decorative substrate The light is uniformly reflected on the LED mounting surface of (1) to suppress the occurrence of illuminance unevenness, thereby enhancing the presentation effect in the gold presentation and suppressing the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

Among the specific decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, the decoration substrates other than the rear upper first decoration substrate on which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged in the left-right direction. is mounted with a full-color LED, and emits gold light when the above-described gold effect is executed. On the other hand, among the specific decorative substrates, the first decorative substrate (not shown) on the rear upper side is mounted with only a single-color LED (red in this example), and even when the golden effect is performed, the upper rear side In the five 7-segment display portions of the movable decorative body 3210, only characters, numbers, patterns, etc., are displayed in the same luminescent color (red in this example) as when the golden effect is not executed without emitting gold light. , and an effect different from the golden effect is executed. In other words, in the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that displays characters, numbers, patterns, etc., the characters, numbers, patterns, etc. are displayed by not changing the luminous color even if the golden effect is executed. , etc., are displayed in a state that is easy for the player to see, thereby preventing erroneous information from being conveyed to the player. It should be noted that while the golden effect is being executed, the single-color light-emitting LEDs mounted on the back rear upper first decoration substrate among the specific decoration substrates may not be controlled to emit light. light emission control of the full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates other than the first decoration substrate on the back and the top among the specific decoration substrates provided in the pachinko machine 1 to cause the entire pachinko machine 1 to emit light in a unified emission color (golden emission). It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, both monochromatic LEDs and full-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear upper first decoration substrate. In this case, one of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decoration substrate The single-color light-emitting LED is made to emit light in the same color as when the golden presentation is not executed without emitting gold light even during the execution of the golden presentation, or is turned off during the execution of the golden presentation. On the other hand, the full-color LEDs among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-upper first decorative substrate may emit gold light.

In this example, a white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LEDs of the specific decoration board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are mounted, and the LEDs of the specific decoration board are mounted. On the surface where the LED is mounted (LED mounting surface), letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) to avoid confusion with electronic parts to be mounted and other decorative substrates, areas indicating the positions where electronic parts are arranged, etc. Attributes of the front side electronic components (furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic components, the size of the front side electronic components, the mounting direction of the front side electronic components (mounting direction), and the model of the front side electronic components may be included.) The surface-side writing portion shown is screen-printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, a bright color such as yellow or yellow-green). In addition, in this example, the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the specific decoration board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 where the LED is not mounted is also coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and furthermore, the specific decoration board On the back side where the LED is not mounted (LED non-mounted side), the above-mentioned back side marking part is screen-printed using ink with high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow and yellowish green). is applied by Therefore, the LED non-mounting surface of the specific decoration board is mounted on another decoration board (a decoration board other than the specific decoration board or another specific decoration board among a plurality of specific decoration boards). When light is emitted from the LED, the emitted light can be reflected with high efficiency and used efficiently, thereby suppressing a decrease in the amount of light. In addition, a solder resist (protective material) of a different color (for example, dark color such as green or black) from the surface where the LED is mounted (LED mounting surface) on the back surface where the LED is not mounted (LED non-mounting surface) of the specific decorative board ) may be coated, or the back side inscription portion may be screen-printed using ink of a color with low brightness or saturation (for example, black, green, etc.).

As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a transparent flat plate-like panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and the panel plate 1110 . and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the front component 1000 and is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 . The front structural member 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100 as described above. As a result, the existence of various members arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 from the front of the front component member 1000 (that is, the front of the game board 5) (hereinafter referred to as It may be described as a “transparent game panel 1100”).

In addition, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 includes, as described above, the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a. , the starter unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center role 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are almost entirely transparent. formed. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 134, in a normal state, the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are passed through them. Decoration unit 3140, back front bottom middle decoration 3161, back front bottom left inner decoration 3163, back front bottom left outer decoration 3164, back front bottom right inner decoration 3165, back front bottom right of decoration unit 3140 and back front bottom effect unit 3160 The exterior decoration 3166, the back front and bottom logo decoration 3167, the back rear top movable decoration 3210, the back rear left side decoration 3220, the back rear right side decoration 3230, etc. of the back rear up production unit 3200 are well visible. In addition, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500 .

For example, in the back front left decoration unit 3120, behind the transparent game panel 1100 are a back front bottom middle decoration 3161, a back front bottom left inner decoration 3163, a back front bottom left outer decoration 3164, and a back front bottom right. Transparent decorations such as an inner decoration 3165 and a back front lower right outer decoration 3166 are arranged, and a back front left decoration substrate 3128 is arranged behind these transparent decorations. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 . In this way, behind the transparent game panel 1100, there are a back front bottom middle ornament 3161, a back front bottom left interior decoration 3163, a back front bottom left exterior decoration 3164, a back front bottom right interior decoration 3165, and a bottom left interior decoration 3165. The back front lower right outer decoration body 3166, which is a transparent decoration body, and the back front left decoration substrate 3128 are arranged in this order. The front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 is coated with a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by applying a white resist liquid. A white resist layer is formed. On the white resist solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the surface such as the part number of the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of full color LEDs and the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic components are arranged. Indicates the attributes of the electronic component on the front side (may also include the shape of the electronic component on the front side, the size of the electronic component on the front side, the mounting orientation of the electronic component on the front side (mounting direction), and the type of the electronic component on the front side). The surface-side notation portion is printed in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used)) by silk printing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 137, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used) which are in contact with the game balls and have a gold color in a predetermined gauge arrangement. ) are planted on the transparent game panel 1100, it is possible to utilize the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. In other words, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the player is arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. Through the transparent decorations of the back front lower middle decoration 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166. , even if the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3128 can be visually recognized, the yellow (multiple obstacle nails N This contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the surface side inscription part of the color similar to the gold that the .

Similar to the back front left decorative unit 3120, the back front right decorative unit 3140 also contributes to obscuring the presence of the front surface side inscription portion. That is, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the player is arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. Through transparent decorations such as the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and the back front right logo decoration portion 3142 of the back front right decoration unit 3140, the back front top right decoration substrate 3151 and the back front bottom right decoration substrate 3152 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are passed through. Even if the front surface (surface) of the back front right decoration unit 3140 can be visually recognized, it is silk-printed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the back front right decoration substrate 3151 and the back front right decoration substrate 3152 of the back front right decoration unit 3140. This contributes to making it difficult to recognize the presence of the front-side notation portion in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstructing nails N).

Further, for example, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 is turned off, the surface of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 is turned off. The surface-side inscription portion formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the back is attached to the back front lower middle decoration 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, and the back front of the back front left decoration unit 3120. Although visible through the transparent decorations of the lower left outer decoration 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166, and the transparent game panel 1100, the back front left decoration substrate The white coating film formed on the surface of 3128 serves as a white background, so that the obstacle nail having gold color is planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3128. Due to the attractiveness of N, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 to the obstacle nail N having gold color. As a result, even when the back front left decorative board 3128 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the eyes of the obstacle nail N having a golden color are attracted to the surface of the back front left decorative board 3128. Since it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface of the game machine, the world view of the game machine does not easily collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, similarly to the back front left decorative unit 3120, the back front right decorative unit 3140 can also be prevented from being decorative. That is, in a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are turned off, the back front The front-side inscription portion formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the lower right decorative substrate 3152 is decorated with the back front right logo of the back front right decoration unit 3140. It is formed on the surface of the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152, although it is visible through the transparent decorations of the portion 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142, and the transparent game panel 1100. The white coating film becomes a white background, so that a golden obstacle is planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the front upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the lower right decorative substrate 3152 . Due to the attractiveness of the nail N, the line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 to the obstacle nail N having gold color. As a result, even when the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front lower right decorative board 3152 are used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the eye is drawn to the obstacle nail N having a gold color. Since the white coating film formed on the front upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the lower right decorative substrate 3152 can be made difficult to see, the world view of the gaming machine is less likely to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In this example, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100. Instead, a transparent cell sheet having a predetermined shape is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. However, by applying a gold design to a part of this cell sheet (the same color as the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N or a color close to this gold color), etc., the part with this gold design is attractive. Depending on the nature, for example, a back front bottom middle decoration 3161, a back front bottom left inner decoration 3163, and a back front bottom left outer decoration in the back front left decoration unit 3120 arranged behind the gold design part. The front surface (surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 in the back front left decoration unit 3120 can be visually recognized through the transparent decorations of the body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166. If possible, through transparent decorations such as the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 in the back front right decoration unit 3140 arranged behind the part with the gold design, the back front Even if the front surfaces (surfaces) of the back front upper right decoration substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decoration substrate 3152 in the right decoration unit 3140 can be visually recognized, the back front left decoration substrate 3128 and the back front left decoration substrate 3128 in the back front left decoration unit 3120 can be visually recognized. Yellow (similar to the gold color of the part designed on the cell sheet) is silk-printed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the back front upper right decoration substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decoration substrate 3152 in the back front right decoration unit 3140. color) may be made difficult to recognize.

Even when configured in this manner, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3128 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front upper right decoration substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decoration substrate 3152 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 can be used. In a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light to be mounted are turned off, the white coating film formed on the surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151, and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 The front side inscription portion formed in yellow similar to gold is the back front lower middle decoration 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration 3164, and the back front of the back front left decoration unit 3120. Transparent decorations such as the lower right inner decoration 3165 and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166, transparent decorations such as the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the transparent game panel 1100 Although it can be seen through the front left decorative substrate 3128 , the upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the lower right decorative substrate 3152 , the white coating film formed on the surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3152 serves as a white background. The part with a gold design on the cell sheet pasted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 placed in front of the decoration board 3128, the back front right top decoration board 3151, and the back front right bottom decoration board 3152. Due to the attractiveness, the line of sight can be naturally guided from the surfaces of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front right upper decorative substrate 3151, and the back front right lower decorative substrate 3152 to the portion of the cell sheet designed in gold. As a result, even when the back-front-left decorative substrate 3128, the back-front-right upper decorative substrate 3151, and the back-front-right lower decorative substrate 3152 are used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the gold color applied to the cell sheet is By drawing attention to the design portion of , the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151, and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 can be made difficult to see. The world view of the game machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, the surface of at least the 7-segment display part of the rear upper first decoration part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration 3210 are arranged horizontally (the surface of the rear upper first decoration part 3211) The game panel 1100 in front of the game panel 1100 may not be planted with obstacle nails. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the visual recognition of the 7-segment display portion of the back upper first decorative portion 3211 from being hindered by the obstacle nail N, and the 7-segment display portion of the back upper first decorative portion 3211 can be suppressed. Since information such as characters, numbers, and patterns to be displayed can be easily seen by the player, the information displayed on the 7-segment display section can be reliably conveyed to the player. Moreover, in addition to this, an LED is mounted for lighting the rear upper first decoration part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged horizontally. For one decorative substrate, at least the surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted (LED mounting surface) may be coated with a dark-colored (black, green, purple, etc.) solder resist (protective agent) (the back surface on which no LEDs are mounted). (The LED non-mounting surface may also be coated with a similar solder resist), thereby suppressing light interference on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate. As a result, the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs can be individually identified, so that information such as characters, numbers, and patterns can be clearly displayed on the 7-segment display section. In addition, on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate, each of the plurality of LEDs is partitioned to suppress light interference. It may be formed integrally with the decorative portion 3211, or may be formed separately from the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211). Since the light emitted from the display can be more clearly identified, information such as characters, numbers, and patterns can be clearly displayed on the 7-segment display section.

In addition, in the rear rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in the rear rear effect effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, a metallic decorative portion 3211a having a golden metallic luster (a mesh in FIG. 252) is provided so as to surround the 7-segment display portion. hanging part) is formed. The golden metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3211a can impart a sense of luxury, and the luminance can be increased by reflecting light emitted from the lamps and LEDs provided around the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. can be done.

In addition, even when the golden effect is executed as described above, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 do not emit gold light, and the golden effect is displayed. , a different effect (displaying letters, numbers, patterns, etc. in the same luminescent color (red in this example) as when the gold effect is not executed) is executed. In this way, the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 of the rear upper movable decoration 3210 do not emit gold light even when the gold effect is executed, but are formed so as to surround the 7-segment display portions. The metal decorative portion 3211a having a golden metallic luster reflects the light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from the lamps and LEDs provided around the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. The light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from the lamps and LEDs provided around the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 has a golden metallic luster. By reflecting the light on the metal decoration part 3211a holding the light, the player can easily recognize that gold light is being emitted.

The metal decoration portion 3211a is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is mounted at a predetermined position of the hot stamping device. At this time, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface side is elastic and heated to a predetermined temperature are placed above the intermediate product of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 . are placed. Then, the hot plate is lowered to a position a predetermined distance below the upper end of the intermediate product of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) by the heat of the hot plate. As a result, the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is formed with the metal decorative portion 3211a.

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used to form the metal decorative portion 3211a of the present embodiment has elasticity at the portion that contacts the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 to which the metal foil of the transfer sheet is to be transferred. Therefore, even if the transfer destination (the front surface of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211) is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and can be applied to a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. Also, the metal foil can be transferred (foil-stamped) in good condition. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3211a can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment compared to the case of forming by plating or vapor deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed. A metal film may be formed by plating or vapor deposition on the surface of the intermediate product before the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is completed.

In addition, in this example, a metallic decorative portion (metal decorative portion 3211a ) is formed, but it is not limited to single-color LEDs, but it is also possible to form a metal decoration part with a golden metallic luster on the decoration body equipped with full-color LEDs, or to execute gold light emission during the execution of the golden effect. A metal decoration portion having a golden metallic luster may be formed on a part of the plurality of decorations provided with full-color LEDs. By forming a metal decoration part having a golden metallic luster on a decorative body provided with a full-color LED, the metallic decoration has a golden metallic luster when another performance is executed although the golden light is not emitted in the golden performance. When the full-color LED provided on the decorative body in which the part is formed is illuminated, it is reflected by the metal decoration part formed around this LED and can be recognized as gold light emission. For the player who recognizes that is being executed, the expectations for the big win can be improved, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, when a metal decoration portion having a golden metallic luster is formed on some of the plurality of decoration bodies provided with full-color LEDs for executing a golden effect, the metallic decoration portion having a golden metallic luster is formed. By reflecting light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from lamps and LEDs provided around the decoration on which is formed, to the metal decoration having a golden metallic luster In addition to making it easier to recognize that gold light is being emitted, light of a color similar to gold emitted from a full-color LED provided on a decorative body in which a metallic decorative portion having a golden metallic luster is formed. (Yellow in this example) can be reflected by the metal decorative portion formed around the LED and recognized as gold light emission, so that the player can easily recognize that gold light emission is being performed.

Also, in the above example, during the execution of the gold effect, a light emission effect of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) is executed. Although the metal decoration part is formed on the decoration body, in a game machine capable of executing a specific effect of controlling light emission with a specific emission color, a color corresponding to the specific emission color (a color that can be recognized as the same or a color that is similar A decorative portion having a glossy color (for example, gray and silver) may be formed on the decorative body. By configuring in this way, among a plurality of types of effects executed by the game machine, a special valued effect is obtained by matching the specific luminescent color with the specific glossy color formed on the decorative part of the decorative body. can be executed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced by making the player guess that the expectation of a big win is high when the specific effect of controlling the light emission with the specific emission color is executed. In addition, when the specific effect is executed as described above, not only the plurality of light emitting means (lamps, LEDs, etc.) are controlled to emit light in a specific emission color, but also the characters, characters, and patterns displayed on the effect display device 1600 are controlled. In order to display some or all of the above in a specific color, characters, characters, patterns, etc. displayed in a specific color on the effect display device 1600 and a plurality of light emitting means (lamps, LEDs, etc.) that emit light in a specific color are used. In conjunction with this, the pachinko machine 1 as a whole (partially may be of a different color) can execute an effect representing a specific color, and the specific color represented by the effect display device 1600 and the light emission color of the light emitting means can be executed. Even if the displayed specific color is not the same, the relevance can be easily recognized, and the high expectation of a big hit can be recognized, thereby improving the game amusement.

In addition, in the rear rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in the rear rear effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, a metallic decorative portion 3211a having a golden metallic luster (the shaded portion in FIG. 252) surrounds the 7-segment display portion. ) is formed, the front surface (front surface) of the rear upper first decorative substrate can be visually recognized through the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorative portion 3211a. Even so, the existence of the front-side notation part in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) silk-printed on the white resist solidly coated on the first decorative substrate on the rear back side is made difficult to understand. contributing to that.

In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear upper first decorative substrate. Through-holes, lands, etc. are exposed from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the back to the metal decoration part 3211a provided (formed) on the rear upper first decoration substrate, it is provided (formed) on the rear upper first decoration substrate. By attracting the eye to the metal decorative portion 3211a, the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be made difficult to recognize. To increase the degree of freedom in drawing wiring patterns of a rear-back-upper first decorative substrate without being restricted by the positions, sizes and numbers of holes and lands, and to shorten the time required for artwork work. can also contribute to

252, the front surface (surface) of the back-front-lower middle decoration body 3161 provided in the back-front-lower effect unit 3160 is formed with a metal decoration part 3161a having a metallic luster, and the metal decoration part 3161a is formed. The whole except for is formed transparently. The metal decoration part 3161a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is silk-printed on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decoration substrate 3168. Since the surface-side marking portion that enables identification of possible full-color LEDs has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front-side marking portion is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3161a. there is

In addition, on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decoration board 3168 corresponding to the metal decoration part 3161a of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted, whereas the metal decoration part 3161a is not mounted. A full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 corresponding to the transparent area of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 excluding the .

In a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 is replaced by the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 with metallic luster. Although it can be seen through the transparent region excluding the metal decorative portion 3161a, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 becomes a white background. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3161a, the line of sight is natural from the front surface (front surface) of the back front lower middle decoration substrate 3168 to the metal decoration portion 3161a provided (formed) on the back front lower middle decoration body 3161. will be induced to As a result, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration portion 3161a provided (formed) on the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, and the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decoration substrate 3168 It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the surface-side inscription portion. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 . Through-holes, lands, and the like are conspicuous from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed. Through holes formed on the front surface of the back front lower middle decoration board 3168 are naturally guided to the metal decoration part 3161a provided (formed) on the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 from the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 , lands, etc. can be obscured, and when performing an artwork work that draws the wiring pattern of the back front, bottom, middle decorative board 3168, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands are not restricted. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back front, lower, and middle decorative substrate 3168, and it is also possible to contribute to shortening the time required for artwork work.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during execution of the golden effect (when the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected (when the opening of the door frame 3 causes various When it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LED of the decorative board), and when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects the vibration of the game board 5 continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (acts such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 When it is detected that is being performed, the pachinko machine 1 vibrates, so that the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the effect display device 1600 are blurred and visually recognized. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), the ball cut detection sensor 574 A minor error such as when a detection signal from is input (error with a low possibility of a goto act such as detecting that there is no game ball in the guide passage 570a) has occurred When radio wave irradiation is detected (electromagnetic waves or the like cause noise in the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, or noise is present in the display of the effect display device 1600). case), when the magnet goto is detected, when the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401 is input when the second start opening 2004 is not open, when it is not a big hit game state or a small hit game state When a detection signal from the prize winning opening sensor 2402 is input, when a serious error such as an error with a high possibility of a goto act occurs, etc.), an LED that emits gold light when the gold effect is executed. of the specific decoration substrates that are mounted on the game board 5 (the back front upper left decoration substrate 3129 for making the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 emit light, the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front upper left A back front left decoration substrate 3128 for luminous decoration of the logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, a back front bottom logo decoration substrate 3173 for luminescence decoration of the back front bottom logo decoration 3167, and a back side. A back front lower middle decoration substrate 3168 for luminous decoration of the front lower middle decoration 3161, a back front lower left inner decoration substrate 3169 for luminous decoration of the back front lower left inner decoration 3163, and a back front lower left inner decoration substrate 3169. A back front lower left outer decoration substrate 3170 for luminous decoration of the decoration body 3164, a back front lower right inner decoration substrate 3171 for luminous decoration of the back front lower right inner decoration 3165, and a back front lower right outer decoration substrate 3171. A back front lower right outer decoration substrate 3172 for luminous decoration of the decoration body 3166, a back front lower right decoration substrate 3152 for luminous decoration of the back front right logo decoration portion 3141, and a back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 to emit light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for decoration are turned off, and the specific decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 (the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, A door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame left side lower decoration board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420. , a plate left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 , a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430 , and a plate right side provided on the rear side of the plate right decorative lens 277 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board 278 and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 of the door frame right side unit 430 are controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification light emission mode (blinking red light with maximum brightness (light amount)). It is designed to

On the other hand, among the specific decoration substrates provided on the game board 5, the rear upper first decoration provided on the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged horizontally. A plurality of LEDs mounted on a board (not shown) are displayed without being turned off even if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the gold effect (a predetermined lighting pattern is continued. Alternatively, the lighting pattern may be changed based on the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, the type of abnormality may be displayed, etc.). In this way, the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the surface (LED mounting surface) of the specific decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted has an electronic component mounted on it. Characters and symbols (electronic component part numbers) to avoid confusion with components and other decorative substrates, attributes of front electronic components such as the area indicating the position where electronic components are placed (furthermore, the shape of the front electronic components , the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation of the front-side electronic components (mounting direction), and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) For example, among the specific decorative substrates screen-printed using ink of a bright color such as yellow or yellowish green, the specific decorative substrate that mounts an LED that emits gold light when the gold effect is executed ends the gold light emission. Although the light emission is controlled in the mode of extinguishing or in an abnormal state, the rear upper first decoration substrate provided in the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged horizontally. , the display is continued (the predetermined lighting pattern is continued until the fluctuation time elapses). As a result, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to know the information by displaying the information about the game. Of the serious errors described above, if a very serious error that makes it difficult to continue the game due to an abnormality in the main control board 1310 occurs, the five 7-segment display parts of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 will be displayed. The lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decoration substrate provided in the rear upper first decoration portion 3211 arranged in the left and right direction is changed to display according to the type of abnormality, or the rear rear is displayed. Even if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate provided in the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged horizontally are turned off. Well, in this case, it becomes possible to immediately judge the degree of abnormality.

In addition, in this example, while the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted even during execution of the golden effect, at the timing when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, one of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is specified. It is possible to change (adjust) the amount of light of the LED mounted on the decoration board. Specifically, when the button marked with the character "+" of the two light amount adjustment buttons 228 is pressed, a specific decoration substrate among the plurality of decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 is immediately selected. The LED becomes brighter (intensifies the light intensity), and when the button marked with the character "-" is pressed, the LED of the specific decorative substrate among the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 is immediately dimmed (light intensity weakening).

Note that when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated under specific conditions, the result of the light amount adjustment may be reflected at a timing later than the timing at which the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 253 (A), when a gold effect is executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, such as when the decorative pattern becomes a reach (when a high-expectation gold effect is executed 2), when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated to change the brightness from 3 to 4 at timing t'3 during execution of the golden effect, the door frame is opened at timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. The brightness is changed to 4 at the timing t'4 when the golden effect is completed without changing (adjusting) the light amount of the LED mounted on the specific decoration board among the plurality of decoration boards provided on the game board 3 and the game board 5. may

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 253(B), when the gold effect is not executed as a variable effect in the variable display with a high expectation of a big hit such as the decorative pattern becoming a reach (the low-expectation gold effect is executed case), when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated to change the brightness from 3 to 4 at timing t'3 during execution of the gold effect, at timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated The light quantity of the LED mounted on a specific decoration board among the plurality of decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 may be changed to the luminance of 4 .

In this way, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated under specific conditions, the result of the light amount adjustment is reflected at a timing later than the timing at which the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, thereby improving the state of the game machine and the jackpot. Since it becomes possible to determine the presence or absence of the possibility of, etc., it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

At timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated in FIG. 253(B), the light amount of the LED mounted on a specific decoration board among the plurality of decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 is changed. In this case, the low-expectation golden effect is ended at timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, and one of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (the door frame 3 or the game board 5, or a predetermined number of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5) to change the light emission mode of the LED mounted on the For example, it may be lit in white at a constant brightness, lighted in a light emission mode different from gold light emission, or the blinking interval may be changed (lengthened). This makes it possible to easily adjust the amount of light. That is, when the LED mounted on the specific decorative board among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emits gold light, the light amount of the LED mounted on the specific decorative board changes with the passage of time. It is difficult to grasp the current amount of light, so it cannot be said that the state is suitable for adjusting the amount of light. At the timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the low-expectation golden effect is finished, and the LED mounted on one of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is turned on, for example, with a constant brightness. By emitting light at the time, the current amount of light can be easily grasped and the amount of light can be easily adjusted to the player's preference. In addition, at the timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the low-expectation golden effect is terminated, and one of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5) It may be all of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the predetermined number of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the game board 5). Any one of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (all of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 may be used) with the brightness after adjustment according to the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 However, the LEDs mounted on a predetermined number of decoration boards among the plurality of decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 may be made to emit light. The brightness after adjustment can be confirmed by light emission from an LED mounted on one of the plurality of decoration boards provided in 5, and the brightness can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In addition, as a specific condition for reflecting the result of the light amount adjustment at a timing later than the timing at which the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated as described above, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during execution of the high-expectation golden effect. Alternatively, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the low expectation performance, the result of the light amount adjustment is reflected after the end of the high expectation gold performance or the low expectation gold performance, or the light amount adjustment during the execution of the specific reach performance. When the button 228 is operated, the result of the light amount adjustment is reflected after the end of the specific reach effect, the above-described abnormal state (not limited to all abnormal states, but a specific abnormal state (for example, the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4) When the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the occurrence of the abnormal state, the result of the light amount adjustment is reflected after the abnormal state ends. Any one or an arbitrary combination of reflecting the result of the light amount adjustment after the setting change process is completed when operated may be used. In this case as well, the state of the gaming machine, the possibility of a big win, etc. can be determined by the timing of reflecting the result of the light amount adjustment, so that the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in this example, the operation of the volume control button 227 is accepted even during the execution of the golden effect, and at the timing when the volume control button 227 is operated, the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to change (adjust) the volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, sound effect, etc., output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass. Specifically, when the button with the character "+" of the two volume control buttons 227 is pressed, the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass speaker of the main body frame 4 are immediately activated. The volume of the production sound such as music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the main body frame speaker 622 is increased, and when the button with the character "-" is pressed, the top center speaker of the door frame 3 and The volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 is made small.

Note that when the volume control button 227 is operated under specific conditions, the result of the volume control may be reflected at a timing later than the timing at which the volume control button 227 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), when a gold effect is executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, such as when the decorative pattern becomes a reach (when a high-expectation gold effect is executed ), when the volume control button 227 is operated to change the volume from 3 to 4 at timing t''3 during execution of the golden effect, the door is opened at timing t''3 when the volume control button 227 is operated. Without changing (adjusting) the volume of sound for production such as music, voice, and sound effect output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, The volume may be changed to 4 at the timing t''4 when the golden effect is finished, or the volume may be changed to 4 at the timing t''5 when the variable effect is finished.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(B), when the gold effect is not executed as a variable effect in the variable display with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, such as the decorative pattern becoming a reach (the low-expectation gold effect is executed case), when the volume control button 227 is operated to change the volume from 3 to 4 at timing t''3 during execution of the golden effect, at timing t''3 when the volume control button 227 is operated The volume of sound for production such as music, voice, and sound effect output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4 is changed to volume 4. may

In this way, when the volume control button 227 is operated under a specific condition, the result of the volume control is reflected at a timing later than the timing at which the volume control button 227 is operated, so that the state of the game machine and the big win can be achieved. Since it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a game, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

At timing t''3 when the volume control button 227 is operated in FIG. 254(B), music is output from the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. In the case of changing the volume of sound for presentation such as voice, sound effect, etc., the low-expectation gold presentation may be ended at timing t''3 when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. This makes it possible to easily adjust the volume. That is, when the LED mounted on a specific decoration board among the plurality of decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emits golden light, the player cannot concentrate on adjusting the volume, and the player can adjust the volume to his liking. It is difficult to adjust, and it is difficult to grasp the current volume because the sound for production changes with the passage of time, so it is not suitable for volume adjustment. At the timing t''3 when the volume control button 227 is operated, the low-expectation golden effect is terminated, and the LED mounted on one of the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is turned on, for example, with a constant brightness in white. By making it emit light or not outputting a sound for effect, the player can easily concentrate on adjusting the volume and adjust the volume to his liking. If the low-expectation golden effect is terminated in 3 and the effect sound is not output, the confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume according to the operation of the volume control button 227. In this case, the volume after adjustment can be confirmed by the confirmation sound, and the volume can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In addition, as a specific condition for reflecting the result of the volume adjustment at a timing later than the timing at which the volume adjustment button 227 is operated as described above, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during execution of the high-expectation golden effect Alternatively, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution of the low expectation performance, the result of volume adjustment is reflected after the end of the high expectation gold performance or the low expectation gold performance, or the volume adjustment during the execution of the specific reach performance. When the button 227 is operated, the result of the volume control is reflected after the specific reach effect is completed. If the volume control button 227 is operated during the occurrence of the abnormal state, the result of the volume control is reflected after the abnormal state ends. Any one or an arbitrary combination of reflecting the result of the volume adjustment after the end of the setting change processing when operated may be used. In this case as well, the state of the gaming machine and the possibility of a big win can be determined by the timing of reflecting the result of the volume adjustment, so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, in the above example, among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1, a specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, the light amount control button 228, the handle 195, etc.) is operated. In some cases, when detection is made by a specific detection means (for example, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1, the golden effect is performed. Although the presence or absence of the possibility of a big hit can be determined depending on whether it ends or continues, the effect operation unit 350 is operated in the variable effect such as the variable display of the decorative pattern executed by the effect display device 1600 is displayed (operation prompting display, for example, "press the button!") is performed, and the effect display device 1600 (display mode (appearance of character, change of background color, change of display color, etc.)) is not executed, the first of the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 When a specific operation unit (for example, pressing operation unit 303, contact operation unit 302, etc.) is operated, or the first specific detection means among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start mouth sensor 2401, handle touch sensor 192, etc.), the first specific light emitting means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the LED 364a of the decorative board 364 in the button) emits light (emission color, brightness, light emission pattern , blinking interval, switching between lighting state and light-out state, etc.) changes, and whether the second specific operation unit among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example Volume control button 227, light amount control button 228, handle 195, etc.) or by the second specific detection means (for example, general winning hole sensor 3001, gate sensor 2801, etc.) among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1 When the detection is made, the first specific light emitting means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 provided on the game board 5 and the LED of the door frame top center decorative board 455 provided on the door frame 3 etc.) (e.g., one or more of luminescent color, brightness, luminescent pattern, blinking interval, switching between lit state and off state, etc.). It may be made possible to distinguish between the presence or absence of gender .

For example, when an operation unit such as the push operation unit 303 is pressed during execution of the high-expectation golden effect, the light emission mode of the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 is not changed (the change in light emission mode is not allowed). When the operating unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times) during execution of the low-expectation golden effect, the LED 364a of the button decoration board 364 is turned off from the lighting state. The central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, that is, the pressing operation portion 303 may be changed from the lit state to the extinguished state (allowing a change in the light emitting state), or , luminance, light emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between lighting state and light-out state, etc.), and when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the above-mentioned high-expectation golden effect does not change the light emission mode of the LED that emits gold light mounted on a specific decoration board among the plurality of decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (does not allow change in the light emission mode), while the low-expectation gold effect When the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during execution, the brightness of the gold-emitting LED mounted on a specific decoration board among a plurality of decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 is changed more than before the operation ( (It may be any one or more of luminescent color, brightness, luminescent pattern, blinking interval, switching between lit state and off state, etc.). In this case, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times) during execution of the low-expectation golden effect to turn the LED 364a of the button middle decoration board 364 from the ON state to the OFF state. , the LED 364a of the decorative board 364 inside the button is changed from the off state to the on state when the depressing operation portion 303 is again pressed a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times). Alternatively, each time the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times), the LED 364a of the button decoration substrate 364 is alternately turned on and off. Alternatively, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed for a predetermined period after the LED 364a of the button decoration board 364 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the LED 364a of the button decoration board 364 is turned on. Alternatively, the brightness may be changed stepwise according to the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (when the "+" side is pressed, the brightness is changed toward brightness 6, and when the "-" side is pressed, the brightness is changed toward brightness 1). may be changed).

It should be noted that any operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as long as the light emission effect such as the high-expectation gold effect and the low-expectation gold effect is executed at the timing of pressing the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. is pressed, after the end of the low-expectation golden effect, the luminance of the LED that emits gold light that is mounted on a specific decoration substrate among a plurality of decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is changed. good too. That is, in the low-expectation golden effect, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the lighting mode of the LED mounted on the specific decoration substrate among the plurality of decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 is changed. Although the change is allowed, the change in the light emission mode of the LED mounted on the specific decoration substrate among the plurality of decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is not limited to the change during execution of the low-expectation golden effect. , It may be performed after the end of the low-expectation golden effect.

In addition, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the ring-shaped button external decorative board 355, and the button inner decorative board 364 provided in the effect operation unit 350 have a surface mounting surface (a surface on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, an LED Mounting surface) is coated with white solder resist (protective material), and on the white solder resist coated on the surface mounting surface, electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative substrates may be confused with each other. Characters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) to avoid The mounting orientation (mounting direction) of front-side electronic components and the type of front-side electronic components may be included. etc.) by screen printing.

On the other hand, the board on which the volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are provided has a dark color (green, black, etc.) solder resist (protective material) on the surface mounting surface (surface on which the volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are provided). ) is coated on the surface mounting surface, and letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts), electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is applied by screen printing using white ink. In this way, in this example, the board on which the first specific light-emitting means provided in the first specific operation part and which changes the light emission mode when the first specific operation part is operated is mounted, and the second specific operation part Is a board on which a first specific light emitting means whose light emission mode changes during operation is mounted in order to make the colors of the solder resist and the surface side notation part different from the board on which is provided, or a second specific operation part during operation It becomes easy to determine whether the board is mounted with the second specific operation unit that changes the light emission mode of the LED mounted on the specific board on which is not provided. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be mounted on the surface mounting surface of the board on which the volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are provided. In this case, even if the light amount control button 228 is operated, the volume A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface mounting surface of the substrate on which the adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 are provided may always emit light with constant luminance without changing the luminance.

Also, during the execution of the movable effect that moves the movable decoration, a specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, the contact operation unit 302, the volume adjustment button 227, the light amount adjustment button 228) among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 , handle 195, etc.) or detection by a specific detection means (for example, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1 It may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big win depending on whether the movable effect is terminated or continued when the game is performed. For example, during execution of a high-expectation movable effect with a high probability of winning or a possibility of winning (for example, the back and upper movable decoration 3210 moves from the raised position to the lowered position covering a part of the front of the effect display device 1600 When a specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, the light amount control button 228, the handle 195, etc.) is operated among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 in the moved state). And when detection is made by a specific detection means (for example, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1, the high expectation movable While the production is not finished, the probability of winning a big hit is low or during the execution of a low-expectation movable production with no possibility of winning (for example, when the back-upper movable decoration body 3210 moves from the raised position to the front part of the production display device 1600 specific operation portion (for example, pressing operation portion 303, contact operation portion 302, volume control button 227, light amount control button 228, handle 195, etc.) or when detection is made by a specific detection means (for example, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1 The low-expectation movable effect may be ended. In this case, if the low-expectation movable effect is executed, the front of the effect display device 1600 is operated when the specific operation unit is operated in a state where the front part of the effect display device 1600 is covered, or the detection is made by the specific detection means. is opened, it is possible to reliably recognize that the low-expectation movable effect is being executed.

Further, in the above example, among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1, a specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, the light amount control button 228, the handle 195, etc.). Although the LED 364a of the button decoration board 364 provided inside the pressing operation portion 303 is changed when the portion 303 is pressed, the specific operation portion (for example, the pressing operation portion 303, A luminous body (for example, the outer periphery decoration of the production operation unit) provided in the operation unit (for example, the production operation unit 300 having the press operation unit 303) provided with the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, the light amount adjustment button 228, the handle 195, etc. LEDs mounted on any one of the substrate 320, the external button decorative substrate 355, the internal button decorative substrate 364, etc.), and the light emitters (the left plate decorative substrate 273, the right plate LEDs mounted on any one of the decoration board 278, the handle decoration board 184, the back front bottom middle decoration board 3168, etc.) light emission mode (light emission color, brightness, light emission pattern, blink interval, lighting state and light-off state may be one or more of the switching, etc.) may be changed. Specifically, when the press operation unit 303 is pressed during execution of the high-expectation golden effect, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320 provided in the effect operation unit 300 including the press operation unit 303 and the outside of the button While the light emitting modes of the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrate 355 and the inside-button decoration substrate 364 are not changed, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times) during execution of the low-expectation gold effect. Good) Any one of the effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320, the button external decoration board 355, and the button inner decoration board 364 provided in the effect operation unit 300 having the pressing operation part 303 when the pressing operation is performed. Light emission mode such as changing the LED mounted on from the lighting state to the light-out state (emission color, luminance, light emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between lighting state and light-out state, etc.) ) may be changed. That is, it may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big win by changing the lighting mode of an LED arranged near the specific operation part when the specific operation part is operated.

Also, in the above example, the gold presentation was explained, but the present technical idea is not limited to this, and the surface mounting surface of the board on which the light emitter is mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). Then, a light-colored (yellow, yellow-green, light blue, etc.) surface-side marking portion is formed on the white solder resist, and a light-emitting body mounted on the surface-mounting surface emits light having the same or similar color as the front-side marking portion. Color (e.g., yellow emission color for yellow surface-side label, gold emission color for yellow front-side label, yellow-green emission color for yellow front-side label, yellow-green surface During the execution of the effect that emits light in a yellow-green emission color for the side label, a yellow emission color for the yellow-green front side label, and a gold emission color for the yellow-green front side label) When a specific operation unit (for example, pressing operation unit 303, contact operation unit 302, volume control button 227, light amount control button 228, handle 195, etc.) is operated among a plurality of operation units provided in pachinko machine 1, the light emitting body This is a concept that includes determining whether or not there is a possibility of a big win depending on whether or not the lighting mode changes. That is, by coating the surface mounting surface on which the light emitter is mounted with a white solder resist, it is possible not only to maintain a high reflection efficiency of the surface mounting surface, but also to use ink of the same or similar color as the light emitting color of the light emitter. By forming the surface-side marking part, the reflection efficiency of the light-emitting body can be increased by the front-side marking part, and a decrease in the reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface can be suppressed. It becomes familiar and inconspicuous, and has the effect of making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the surface side inscription part. Since the presence or absence of the possibility can be determined, the presence or absence of the possibility of a big win can be determined without making the player visually recognize unnecessary information.

In addition, the high-expectation gold effect and the low-expectation gold effect have been exemplified as the gold effect. Displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the gold light emission (high-expectation gold light emission) that emits the LED mounted on the specific decoration board among the plurality of decoration boards provided on the game board 5 and the low-expectation gold effect are executed. The gold display (low-expectation gold display) and the gold light emission (low-expectation gold light emission) that emits LEDs mounted on a specific decoration board among the plurality of decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, It is not limited to one or both of the display mode and the light emission mode being the same, and one or both of the display mode and the light emission mode may be partially the same (common), One or both of the display mode and the light emission mode (display color, emission color) may be the same or similar (common). For example, although the display contents are different between the high-expectation gold display and the low-expectation gold display, at least a part of the display contents may display gold common to both the high-expectation gold display and the low-expectation gold display. However, the yellow light emission common to both the high expectation gold light emission and the low expectation gold light emission may be included in at least a part of the different light emission patterns between the high expectation gold light emission and the low expectation gold light emission. That is, the present technical concept can be applied as long as the high-expectation golden presentation and the low-expectation gold presentation have at least a partly common aspect.

[Information display]
Next, a modification using an information display will be described. In recent years, the number of players has decreased significantly, and it is urgent to attract new players. There is A modification in which an information display for displaying information about games is provided will be described below.

In this example, an information display device using a dot matrix display section is provided by operating an operation section such as the production operation section 301 in place of the five 7-segment display sections of the above-mentioned back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 . It is possible to switch between a state in which information about a game is displayed (game information display mode) as the display content of the information display device of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 and a state in which a game effect is executed (game effect mode). It is Further, in this example, when the operation means is operated during a specific period, the display contents of the information display device of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 can be switched. For example, control to switch the display content when the operation unit such as the production operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the customer waiting demonstration production, and operation of the operation means that can be operated only by the game clerk (for example, the back of the pachinko machine 1 When the RAM clear switch provided on the side is pressed, when the setting key switch 1311a is operated (for example, when the setting key cylinder is turned ON from the initial position, or when the setting key cylinder is turned ON from the initial position) The setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise to return to the position (OFF operation, etc.), the display of the information display of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is switched to display information about the game. Control to display (start) and display of the information display device of the back rear upper movable decoration 3210 when the operation unit such as the production operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the variable production on the production display device 1600 is hidden. Control to switch the display content after the end of the variable production by operating the operation unit such as the production operation unit 301, and the change when the operation unit such as the production operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the variable production in the production display device 1600 Without switching the display content during the performance, the mode being executed (game information display mode, game performance mode) is continued, and the display corresponding to each mode is performed, and the operation unit such as the performance operation unit 301 is operated. One or an arbitrary combination of control to switch the display content after the end of the variable effect may be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 255(A) to (C), in a state (game information display mode) in which game-related information is displayed, the information display device of the back rear upper movable decoration 3210 displays "big win", "left-handed ←". , and ``Right shot→'' are displayed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the time is reduced (low probability time reduction state (also referred to as time reduction state), high probability time reduction state (also referred to as variable state)) to the second start port 2004 to enter the game ball A target game (so-called "right-handed hitting") is performed. In addition, when the time is reduced, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened, and the start winning (to the first starting port 2002 winning of the game ball, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004) becomes easier, so the state is advantageous to the player. However, this advantageous state cannot be enjoyed when the player does not play a game aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 (so-called "right-handed hitting") during time saving. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 255(C), the player performs a game (so-called "right-handed hitting") aiming at entering the game ball into the second start port 2004 during time saving. As a display for instructing, the information display of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is designed to display "right hitting →". As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to enjoy an advantageous state in spite of the fact that the time is short, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

On the other hand, in normal time (low probability non-time saving state (also referred to as normal state), high probability non-time saving state), a game aiming at winning the game ball to the first start port 2001 (so-called "left-handed hitting") is performed It's like In addition, in addition to the fact that the second start port 2004 is rarely opened in normal times, the period in which it is open is extremely short compared to the time saving, so that the player can open the second start port 2004 in normal times. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage by playing a game aiming at the entry of a game ball. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. The information display of the movable decorative body 3210 displays "Left-handed ←". As a result, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged in normal times.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this modified example, the information displayed in the dot matrix of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is used to determine whether to hit left (the operation of hitting a game ball to the left side of the center accessory 2500) or hit right. (strike with the strength to abut on the impact part 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a), or when a big hit occurs, notification to that effect By instructing the player to play a game aiming at entering the ball into the big winning hole 2005, not only skilled players but also inexperienced players are not disadvantaged.

The information display may be a dedicated display for displaying information about games, and in this case, the information to be displayed may be switched when the operation means is operated during a specific period. The information related to the game includes information for guiding the game (right-handed, left-handed, etc.) as shown in FIGS. Lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) information (jackpot, loss, probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot, etc.) and setting information (pachinko machine 1 set in setting change processing) related to lottery probability of winning or losing The probability of occurrence of a big hit with respect to the set value of and the number of actually executed variable effects, etc.) and the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 (out of the game balls fired to the game area 5a By the out port 1008 The number of collected game balls) and a specific winning device (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, big winning port 2005, general winning port 2001, etc.) or any combination of multiple Good), for example, the number of game balls that have won the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, etc.) The number of game balls that have won It may be an arbitrary combination of the number of game balls) and the number of game balls.

Although the information display is provided inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in this example, it may be provided outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 . This increases the degree of freedom in designing the inner regions of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and provides structures and movable objects to enhance decorativeness and presentation effects. In addition, in the modified example described above, an example using a dot matrix display section has been described, but the information regarding the game may be displayed using not only the dot matrix display section but also a 7-segment display section. In addition to the information display for new players, an information display for game clerks may be provided. In this case, the information display is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. You may do so.

In addition, a monochromatic LED is mounted on the first decorative substrate on the rear upper side of the information display device, and the information display device on the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 does not emit gold light even during the execution of the above-described golden effect. In addition, it emits light in a color different from the gold light emission (in this example, it is red, but it may be emitted in another color (blue, etc.) as long as it is a light emission color that can be clearly seen even during gold light emission). You can let it run. As a result, the information displayed on the information display can be clearly viewed even during execution of the gold light emission.

In addition, since the information display of this example displays important information related to the game as described above, the surface of the first decorative substrate on the back and upper side provided on the information display in order to clarify the display content (An insulating film of the same color may be formed on the back surface where no LED is mounted, or an insulating film of a different color from the front surface may be formed on the back surface.) , black, purple, dark blue, etc.) is formed (resist treatment). As a result, light interference is suppressed on the surface on which the LEDs of the rear upper first decorative substrate are mounted, and the light from each of the plurality of LEDs can be visually recognized independently. Various information can be displayed clearly. In addition, while a light-colored (white in this example) insulating film is formed on the surface of the board on which the LED that emits gold light is formed when the gold effect is executed, important information for the player and the game staff is displayed. The same insulating film may be formed on the front surface of the rear upper first decoration substrate provided in the information display device of the rear upper movable decoration 3210 (on the rear surface where the LED is not mounted, or the same insulating film may be formed on the front surface. may be formed with an insulating film of a different color on the back), a dark-colored (for example, green, black, purple, dark blue, etc.) insulating film is formed, so if a problem occurs in the light emission of the LED The color of the insulating film formed on the surface of the substrate makes it easy to determine whether the LED plays an important role.

In addition, on the front surface (surface) where the LEDs are mounted on the rear upper first decorative board, the part number corresponding to each LED and the attributes of the electronic parts such as the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged (further, the electronic parts shape, size of electronic parts, mounting direction of electronic parts (mounting direction), and model number of electronic parts. It is silk-printed with the paint of Of the area occupied by the front surface (front surface) where the LEDs of the rear upper first decorative substrate are mounted, the surface side marking part (area silk-printed with white (not limited to white, yellow, black, etc.) paint) The area occupied by is smaller than the area occupied by the resist (insulating film of dark color (for example, green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.)). Therefore, the reflection efficiency on the front surface (surface) of the rear upper first decoration substrate on which the LEDs are mounted is different from that in the case where only the resist is formed on the front surface (surface) of the rear upper first decoration substrate on which the LEDs are mounted. Similarly, since it is possible to make it substantially uniform, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light emission unevenness, and to suppress the deterioration of the effect of suppressing the interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of mounted LEDs.

In addition, regarding the surface side notation portion silk-printed on the front surface (surface) where the LEDs of the rear upper first decoration board are mounted, electronic components of the same type may be collectively displayed for each predetermined group. . For example, one surface-side marking portion such as "LEDs 1 to 5" may be provided for five LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the rear upper first decorative substrate. In this case, it is possible to reduce the ratio of the surface side marking portion to the front surface (front surface) where the LEDs of the rear upper first decorative substrate are mounted, compared to the case where the front side marking portion is provided for each electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to make the reflection efficiency more uniform on the front surface (front surface) of the rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LEDs are mounted. In addition, the front surface side marking part may not be silk-printed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear upper first decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted. It may be formed by silk printing, foil-cutting letters, resist-cutting letters, etc., and the front surface side inscription part may be formed by foil-cutting letters or the like on the front surface (surface) where the LEDs of the rear upper first decorative substrate are mounted. , resist removed characters, or the like.

Also, as described above, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during the execution of the golden effect (when the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected (when the opening of the door frame 3 causes the door frame 3 to open) When it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards), and when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects the vibration of the game board 5 continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (such as hitting the pachinko machine 1) When it is detected that the action of (1) is being performed, the pachinko machine 1 vibrates, causing light emission by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the effect display device 1600 to blur. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the lower plate 202 is full of game balls), ball cut detection Minor errors such as when a detection signal from the sensor 574 is input (an error with a low possibility of a goto action such as when it is detected that there is no game ball in the guide passage 570a) If it occurs, if radio wave irradiation is detected (electromagnetic waves, etc. may cause noise in the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, or noise may occur in the display of the effect display device 1600). When the magnet goto is detected, when the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401 is input when the second start opening 2004 is not open, when it is not a big hit game state or a small hit game state When a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402 is input in the event of a serious error such as an error that is highly likely to be a goto act, etc.), the above-mentioned golden effect A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 among the LEDs that emit gold light at the time of execution are turned off, and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 emit light in an abnormality notification light emission mode (blinking red light with maximum brightness (light amount)). It is designed to control.

On the other hand, the display of the information display device of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is continued without being turned off even if an abnormality occurs during execution of the golden effect. In this way, the surface of the specific decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 and emitting gold light during execution of the gold effect (the surface coated with the white solder resist (protective material) and the LED of the specific decorative board mounted) On the (LED mounting surface), letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) to avoid confusion with electronic parts to be mounted and other decorative substrates, surface side electronic parts such as areas indicating the position where electronic parts are arranged Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) The part is printed by screen printing using ink with high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow and yellowish green)). gold light emission), the information display of the rear upper movable decoration 3210 (mounted on the rear upper first decoration substrate on which an insulating film of a dark color (e.g., green, black, purple, dark blue, etc.) is formed. LED) continues to display even if an abnormality occurs (continues a predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time elapses). As a result, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to know the information by displaying the information about the game. Of the serious errors described above, if an extremely serious error that makes it difficult to continue the game due to an abnormality in the main control board 1310 occurs, etc. Display according to the type of abnormality is performed by changing the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decoration board, or the rear upper first decoration board provided on the information display of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 A plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board may be turned off, in which case the degree of abnormality can be determined immediately.

In addition, depending on the type of abnormality, it may be possible to change whether to continue displaying the information display of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 or to turn off the information display to hide it. When a minor error occurs, the display of the information display on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is continued, and when the above-described serious error occurs, the information display is extinguished and hidden. may This makes it possible to determine the degree of abnormality.

In addition, as described above, the LED that emits gold light during the execution of the gold effect is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit regular processing that is performed approximately every 33.3 ms. The LEDs of the first decoration board on the back and top provided in the information display device of the movable decoration 3210 are controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 by the main control side timer interrupt processing performed about every 4 ms. ing. In this way, the information of the rear-back-upper movable ornament 3210 is transmitted in a shorter cycle than when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LED that emits gold light based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 . The display content of the display can be updated, and even if a problem occurs and the content different from the content originally displayed on the information display of the back rear upper movable decoration body 3210 is displayed, it will be updated immediately (4 ms Afterwards, the display contents can be updated and changed to the original display contents, so that the player or the like is not disadvantaged. That is, the information display device of the back and top movable decorative body 3210 that displays important (highly important) information about the game is shorter than the LED that is light emission controlled and decorated according to the variable effect such as the golden effect. Since the control signal is output periodically to update the light emitting mode of the LED, even if the display content of the information display device of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is defective, the display content can be immediately changed to the normal display content. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the display of content different from the original. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the information display of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral A communication error may occur between the control board 1510 and the information displayed by the information display device of the back rear top movable decoration 3210 may be defective. By directly controlling the information display device of the body 3210, the information of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 is displayed compared to the case where the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the information display device of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210. Problems are less likely to occur in the information displayed by the display device, and it is possible to suppress disadvantageous effects on the player.

In addition, various decorative substrates that are provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and that emit gold light when the gold effect is executed are provided on a decorative body or the like (a case or a cover may be used) made of a translucent material. On the other hand, the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case or cover) provided with the rear upper first decoration substrate provided in the information display that does not emit gold light when the gold light emission is performed is not translucent. It may be made of a material, and in this case, the LED, which plays an important role, is mounted depending on whether or not the decorative body (case, cover, etc.) on which the substrate is provided has translucency. It is possible to determine whether or not

In addition, as shown in FIG. 256, the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 (a case or cover may be used) provided with the rear upper upper first decoration substrate provided in the information display device which does not emit gold light when the gold light emission is performed is used to control the rear upper display. The rear upper first decoration substrate may be firmly accommodated. For example, the rear upper movable decoration 3210a and the rear upper first decoration substrate covering the surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear upper first decoration substrate of the rear upper movable decoration 3210 (case or cover may be used). The rear upper movable decorative body 3210b that covers the rear surface (LED non-mounting surface) is firmly adhered by welding or the like, and if a part of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is not destroyed, the rear upper first decoration substrate is formed. It may be configured so as not to be detachable. On the other hand, the decorations (cases, covers, etc. may be used) provided with various decorative substrates that are provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and emit gold light when the golden effect is executed are partially destroyed. Alternatively, the decorative substrate may be detachable. In the information display device that displays important information in this way, the rear upper first decorative substrate cannot be removed unless a part of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (a case or cover may be used) is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the physical destruction of the light emitting means such as the LED which plays an important role. On the other hand, regarding light emitting means (light emitting means less important than the information display) such as LEDs that are provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and emit gold light during execution of the gold effect without displaying important information. Since the light-emitting means can be replaced without destroying the decorative body or the like (a case or cover may be used), maintenance is facilitated.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate inside the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (case or cover may be used) on which the rear upper first decorative substrate provided in the information display is provided. Interference suppressing means for suppressing interference of light emitted by each may be formed. For example, as shown in FIG. 256(B), a plurality of cylindrical portions are formed inside the rear upper movable decorative body 3210a that abuts on the surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear upper first decoration substrate. The surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative substrate may be partitioned so that one LED is arranged inside each of the plurality of cylindrical portions. As a result, the advancing direction of the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate is regulated, and the LEDs are mounted adjacent to the surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative substrate. Interference with the light emitted from the LED is suppressed, and the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting means can be easily identified individually. In addition, since it is possible to clearly distinguish between lit LEDs and unlit LEDs in the information display, information can be clearly displayed on the information display.

In addition, the rear upper movable decoration 3210b covering the rear surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the rear upper first decoration substrate of the rear upper movable decoration 3210 is formed so as to have only a minimum opening. may For example, as shown in FIG. 256(B), a rear upper movable decoration 3210b covering the rear surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the rear upper first decoration substrate is connected to the rear upper first decoration substrate with an electric wiring. Alternatively, only openings for connectors may be formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from entering the cylindrical portion formed in the rear upper movable decoration 3210a from the rear surface side of the rear upper movable decoration 3210, thereby displaying incorrect information on the information display. Therefore, the reliability of the information displayed on the information display is improved.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs as described above, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 among the LEDs that are mounted on the specific decoration board and emit gold light during execution of the gold effect are turned off, while the information display is turned off. Since the light is emitted while maintaining the normal luminance, the brightness in the game window part can be reduced in an abnormal state to make the light emission of the information display stand out, so that the information displayed on the information display can be easily visually recognized. In addition, when an abnormality occurs, the LED provided on the door frame 3 among the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board and emitting gold light when executing the gold effect The light emission is controlled by flashing light emission), but interference of light emitted by each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decoration substrate on the back top inside the back top movable decoration 3210 (a case or cover may be used) is prevented. Since it has an interference suppressing means for suppressing interference, even in a situation where the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification light emitting mode (blinking light in red with maximum brightness (light amount)) It is easy to determine the light emitting state of each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the device.

In addition, in this example, since the surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with a dark solder resist, the light emitted from the LED provided in the through portion leaked out of the through portion. Even in this case, the diffusion of light can be suppressed.

In the above embodiments (all embodiments including modifications), a white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the specific decorative substrate, and the white solder resist is coated. (Protective material) On the surface, such as characters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative substrates, areas indicating the positions where electronic parts are arranged Indicates the attributes of the electronic component on the front side (may also include the shape of the electronic component on the front side, the size of the electronic component on the front side, the mounting orientation of the electronic component on the front side (mounting direction), and the type of the electronic component on the front side). The surface-side labeling part is screen-printed using yellow ink, and a gold effect (golden light emission) is performed by causing multiple LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board to emit light in a color similar to the yellow of the front-side labeling part. Although shown, this technical idea can be applied to other presentations. For example, an effect is performed in which the surface-side inscription portion is screen-printed using yellow-green ink, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the specific decorative substrate emit light in a color similar to the yellow-green color of the surface-side inscription portion. good too. That is, the present technical idea can be applied as long as it is an effect of emitting light in a color similar to the color of the LEDs mounted on the specific decoration board and the color of the surface-side notation.

In addition, for electronic components other than the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board, the surface side labeling portion may not be screen-printed, or the back surface side labeling portion may be screen-printed on the back surface where the LED is not mounted. . In addition, the surface of the specific decorative board on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is white (including colors recognized as (similar to) white such as beige, ivory, cream, off-white, etc.) or bright colors. Mount only electronic components (for example, LED elements with white packages, connectors with white housings, or more (any combination)) that have exteriors (cases, packages, housings, etc.) On the other hand (including those that mount only LED elements with white packages and do not mount other electronic components), electronic components that do not have at least a white or bright color exterior on the back surface where multiple LEDs are not mounted (for example Resistors with black exteriors, circuits that control the light emission of multiple LEDs (e.g., constant current drive circuits), capacitors with brown exteriors, connectors with housings that are different from white (light blue, yellow, etc.), etc.) may be mounted (not limited to placing only electronic components that do not have a white or light-colored exterior on the back side, but electronic components that do not have a white or light-colored exterior and/or one or both of the electronic components may be arranged). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LED is mounted and increase the amount of light of the specific decorative substrate, so that the above-described light emission effects such as the golden effect can be executed without uneven light emission. At the same time, an impactful performance can be executed, and the game interest is improved.

In addition, the color of a plurality of LED packages mounted on a specific decorative substrate may be white (including colors recognized as (similar to) white such as beige, ivory, cream, off-white, etc.). In this case, it is possible to prevent the reflection efficiency from lowering due to the exterior color of the LED itself mounted on the specific decoration board, so that the light quantity of the specific decoration board can be increased. Also, a first specific decoration board mounting both a plurality of LEDs having a white package on one surface and a connector having a white housing as a specific decoration board, and a plurality of LEDs having a white package on one surface and a connector having a housing of a color different from white (for example, light blue, yellow, etc.) on the other surface. In this case, a connector having a white housing, which is highly effective in suppressing a decrease in reflection efficiency, is mounted on the same surface as the surface on which the LED is mounted (LED mounting surface (also referred to as a surface mounting surface)). For connectors that have a housing other than white, which is less effective in suppressing the decrease in reflection efficiency (may reduce the reflection efficiency), a surface different from the surface on which the LED is mounted (LED non-mounting surface (also called back mounting surface) )) to maintain a high reflection efficiency at the surface on which the LED is mounted. This technical concept does not exclude the mounting of electronic components having a white exterior such as a connector with a white housing on the LED non-mounting surface. By mounting it on the LED mounting surface, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the reflection efficiency due to electronic components other than the LED, so the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface is maintained high and the light emission of the LED is efficiently used to prevent the decrease in the amount of light. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above example, all of the specific decorative substrates on which LEDs whose light emission is controlled in gold color are mounted are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface, but the present invention is not limited to this. Some of the specific decorative boards on which LEDs whose light emission is controlled in gold color are mounted are coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a color other than white (for example, green or black) on the surface. Alternatively, for all or some of the specific decorative boards on which LEDs whose light emission is controlled in gold color are mounted, only the surface where the LEDs are mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). Alternatively, the back surface on which the LED is not mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) in a color other than white (for example, green or black). In addition, the substrates (relay substrates, driver substrates, LED-mounted decoration substrates, and other substrates) connected to the specific decoration substrate by harnesses have the same configuration as the specific decoration substrate. The surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) and electronic parts are arranged to avoid confusion with mounted electronic parts and other decorative boards. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as areas indicating positions (including shape of surface-side electronic components, size of surface-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of surface-side electronic components, model of surface-side electronic components) ) is screen-printed using ink with high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow and yellow-green), the specified decorative board and harness The substrates to be connected (relay substrates, driver substrates, other substrates such as decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted) are also coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface, and the surface side notation part has brightness and saturation. It may be screen-printed using high-color (for example, bright color such as yellow or yellow-green) ink. That is, on the game board 5, a board coated with a white solder resist (protective material) and a board coated with a green solder resist (protective material) are mounted together. When checking the harness or connection of the specific decoration board due to a problem, make sure that the board connected to the specific decoration board is coated with the same color solder resist (protective material) as the specific decoration board. Or you can quickly find the board that is connected to the specific decorative board by screen-printing the surface side marking part using the same color ink and other boards (coated with green solder resist (protective material) It can be confirmed without making a mistake with the board that is attached).

Also, a connector having the same color exterior may be used for each of the specific decoration board and the board connected by the harness. Since the board can be identified, the board connected to the specific decorative board can be found quickly. Also, a connector mounted on the surface mounting surface (the surface facing the front of the game machine) of a board (a relay board, a driver board, another board such as a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, etc.) connected to a specific decorative board with a harness Also, the connector with a white exterior is used, and the connector with a different color from white is mounted on the back mounting surface (the surface facing the back of the game machine) of the board that is connected to the specific decoration board with a harness. (This does not exclude the case where a connector having a white exterior is mounted on the non-LED mounting surface). As a result, the board connected to the specific decorative board can be found more accurately and quickly, and the reflection efficiency of the surface mounting surface of the board connected to the specific decorative board by a harness can be suppressed. It is possible to efficiently use light emitted from a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game machine to suppress a decrease in the amount of light.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the above embodiments, separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, separation hole 1823c, separation hole 1827c, separation hole 1828c, etc.) that can separate decorations such as seals ) is shown as a penetrating hole-shaped one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slit-shaped or notch-shaped one may be used.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine, but it is also applicable to other gaming machines such as a mackerel ball machine and an arrange ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel. The slot machine will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004, as shown in FIG. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise to open the front door (front frame) 6002 to the main body. It can be opened from the portion (box) 6004 .

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body (box) 6004. It is used for opening and closing and locking the front door (front frame) 6002 . The metal locking device is attached to a cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) made of metal extending back and forth, a key hole 6005 made of metal formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the regular metal key. The cylinder main body of the metal locking device penetrates from the rear through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal lock unit (not shown) is inserted from behind. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the locking device made of metal and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit has the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and also functions as a door frame metal ground, and is connected to the main body ( It is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside the box 6004 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This ground board (not shown) collects electromagnetic noise generated in various places and can be grounded (grounded) to the island equipment of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. there is This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening and closing operation by the metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not placed near or around the metal locking device, and is positioned below the metal locking device and placed on the main body so as not to be affected by electromagnetic wave noise that enters the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 . In this manner, even if electromagnetic noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

A front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative portions are not plated with decorative plating at all, while others are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit.) are electrically connected). As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metallic door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the board ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, when electromagnetic noise that enters the decorative parts with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), the door frame metal ground wire is transferred. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via the ground board, and then transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined location on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, An electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit on the open side portion opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The electrostatic removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

Also, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of them are decorated with decorative plating on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). , and the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. may be electrically connected. The power board is supplied with AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and does not allow current to flow. , has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 .

In addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 also accommodates a setting change board 1311 on which setting key switches 1311a capable of changing setting values are mounted. In other words, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch can be set. 1311a is arranged inside the body portion (box) 6004 . The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004 . In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 has a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot). and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002 .

On these variable rotators, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

(Solution A1)
As described above, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the game board (game board 5) and the lottery means (main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) that performs a lottery for whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery conditions A portion that executes the hit determination process in step S305), and if the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process A game machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a random number or a second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process). The game board includes a specific light-emitting board (rear front, lower, middle decorative board 3168) having a plurality of light-emitting means mounted on the front mounting surface, and a transparent area covering the front-mounting surface of the specific light-emitting board. and a light emission control means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310 , the CPU of the peripheral control IC drives the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 and the game board 5. a portion for transmission from the substrate serial I/O port to each decoration substrate of the game board 5), and the specific decoration portion includes a specific color region (metal decoration portion 3161a) is formed, a white coating (white solder resist) is formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate, and a notation portion ( letters and symbols for avoiding confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates) are formed in yellow, and the light emission control means selects the plurality of is capable of controlling light emission in a golden light emission mode (for example, gold light emission). As a result, the white coating film formed on the surface-mounting surface of the specific light-emitting substrate can maintain high reflection efficiency on the surface-mounting surface. It can be used efficiently to suppress the decrease in the amount of light. In addition, in a state in which the plurality of light emitting means are turned off, the white coating film formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate is passed through a transparent region of the specific decorative portion excluding a specific color region having a metallic luster. , Although it can be visually recognized, the white coating film formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate becomes a white background, so that the surface mounting of the specific light emitting substrate is conspicuous due to the color (gold) of the specific color area. The line of sight is naturally guided from the surface to the specific color area provided in the specific decorative portion. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate.

(Solution A2)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to solution A1, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board is recognized as white (beige, ivory, cream, off-white, off-white, etc. (similar and a white color (beige, ivory, cream, off-white, off-white, etc.) including the plurality of light-emitting means is mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light-emitting substrate. Only electronic components (LED elements with white packages, connectors with white housings, etc.) are mounted, and the back mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate is white Electronic components other than electronic components with a black exterior (e.g., a resistor with a black exterior, a circuit that controls the light emission of multiple LEDs (e.g., a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, a color different from white ( A connector having a housing of light blue, yellow, etc.) is also mounted. As a result, a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted is suppressed, and the amount of light from the specific light emitting substrate can be increased. A performance with an impact can be executed, and the amusement of the game is improved.

(Solution A3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solution means A1 or solution means A2, the golden light emission mode is such that although all of the plurality of light emission means are controlled to emit yellow light, the light emission is yellow with a stepwise difference in brightness for each predetermined number of light emission means. It is characterized in that it is a light emission mode in which light is emitted. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that gold light is being emitted.

(Solution A4)
Further, in the game machine according to any one of the solutions A1 to A3, the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate is covered with a lens-cut single or double diffusion portion. As a result, light from a plurality of light-emitting means is diffused, or light is collected to create areas with high brightness and areas with low brightness where light is avoided to create a glittering feeling, such as gold or metal. It is also possible to express a glossy feeling, and by arranging such a lens-cut diffusion part, it is possible to recognize that gold light is being emitted, and the visibility behind the diffusion part can be improved. It is possible to make the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate and the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting surface difficult to be visually recognized by exacerbating the deterioration, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the visual recognition of information irrelevant to the game. .

(Solution A5)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to any one of Solution Means A1 to Solution A4, a special light-emitting substrate ( back and upper first decorative substrate), and the light emission control means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, sets the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board to a different gold light emitting mode. It is characterized in that light emission is controlled in a special light emission mode (for example, red light emission). The plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board are not controlled in the golden light emitting mode, but are controlled in the special light emitting mode. It becomes easy to distinguish the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board, and the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board can be easily recognized.

(Solution A6)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solution A5, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board can change the brightness when a predetermined operating section is operated, and the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board can change the luminance. is characterized in that the luminance of the light emitting means cannot be changed even when the operating section is operated. Since it is impossible to change the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board, it can be used as an index when changing the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board. The brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the board can be easily changed to the brightness desired by the player.

(Solution A7)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solution A5 or solution A6, when a special period occurs in the light emission control in the gold light emission mode, the gold light emitted by the plurality of light emission means mounted on the specific light emission substrate is While the light emission control in the light emission mode is terminated, the light emission control in the special light emission mode by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emission board can be continued without termination. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result is a winning even if the light emission control in the gold light emission mode is ended, and the player feels uneasiness and disbelief due to the end of the light emission control in the gold light emission mode. You can choose not to give.

(Solution B1)
In addition, a game board (game panel 1100) having a plurality of obstacle nails (obstacle nails) planted on the front surface thereof, and lottery means (main control board 1310) for performing lottery for winning or not based on establishment of lottery conditions. If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process Control to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with the first special random number or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process). A game machine that is arranged behind the game board and has a plurality of light emitting means mounted on a specific light emitting board (back front upper right decorative board 3151, back front lower right decorative board 3152, etc.), and by the lottery means Light emission control means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310) for controlling light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 and the game board 5 A part that transmits the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc., from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5) and a white coating film (white solder resist) is formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate, and a yellow marking portion specifying each of the plurality of light emitting means on the white coating film (characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates) are formed, and the light emission control means controls the plurality of A specific light emission control (gold light emission) for controlling light emission of the light emitting means in a gold light emission mode can be executed, and the obstacle nail has a color (gold) similar to both the marking portion and the gold light emission mode. characterized by As a result, even when a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate are controlled to emit light in the gold light emission mode by having the obstruction nail have a color similar to the gold light emission mode, the gold light emission mode does not interfere with the gold light emission mode. In addition, when a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board are turned off by the similar color of the obstacle nail and the notation part, the notation part is It becomes difficult to stand out, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game caused by the visual recognition of information unrelated to the game.

(Solution B2)
Further, in the game machine according to solution B2, special light emission is arranged behind the game board, a dark coating is formed on the surface mounting surface, and a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the dark coating. It further comprises a substrate (first decoration substrate on the rear and back side), and the light emission control means controls the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board in the gold light emitting mode when the lottery result of the lottery means is a win. controls light emission in a different special light emission mode (e.g., red light emission), and the obstacle nail is planted in a specific mounting area overlapping with the specific light emitting substrate on the game board, while the special light emitting board on the game board The obstacle nail is not planted in the special mounting area that overlaps with the light emitting substrate. As a result, it is possible to make the notation portion inconspicuous for the specific light emitting substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means whose light emission is controlled in the golden light emitting mode is mounted, and the special light emitting which mounts a plurality of light emitting means whose light emission is not controlled in the gold light emitting mode. As for the substrate, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means.

(Solution B3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solution means B1 or solution means 2, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board can change the luminance when a predetermined operation unit is operated, and the special light emitting board It is characterized in that the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted in the device cannot be changed even when the operation unit is operated. Since it is impossible to change the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board, it can be used as an index when changing the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board. The brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the board can be easily changed to the brightness desired by the player.

(Solution B4)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of Solution Means B1 to Solution Means B3, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board are white (beige, ivory, cream, off-white, off-white). (including colors recognized as (similar to) white such as white), and the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate has a white color (beige, ivory, cream, generated Only electronic components (LED elements with white packages, connectors with white housings, etc.) having exteriors that are recognized as (similar to) white such as off-white are mounted, and the specific light-emitting substrate On the back mounting surface of , electronic components other than electronic components with a white exterior (e.g., a resistor with a black exterior, a circuit that controls the light emission of multiple LEDs (e.g., a constant current drive circuit), and a brown exterior A capacitor, a connector having a housing of a color different from white (light blue, yellow, etc.) is also mounted. As a result, a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted is suppressed, and the amount of light of the specific light emitting substrate can be increased, so that the light emitting effect can be executed in a state without uneven light emission. A performance with an impact can be executed, and the amusement of the game is improved.

(Solution B5)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of solution means B1 to solution means B4, in the gold light emission mode, although all of the plurality of light emission means are controlled to emit yellow light, brightness is changed stepwise for each predetermined number of light emission means. It is characterized in that it is a light emission mode in which light is emitted in different yellow colors. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that gold light is being emitted.

(Solution B6)
In addition, in the game machine according to any one of Solution Means B1 to Solution Means B5, the surface mounting surface of the specific light-emitting substrate is covered with a lens-cut single or double diffusion portion. As a result, light from a plurality of light-emitting means is diffused, and light is collected to create areas with high brightness and areas with low brightness where light is avoided to create a glittering feeling, such as gold or metal. It is also possible to express a glossy feeling, and by arranging such a lens-cut diffusion part, it is possible to recognize that gold light is being emitted, and the visibility behind the diffusion part can be improved. It is possible to make the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate and the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting surface difficult to be visually recognized by making it worse, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the information irrelevant to the game being visually recognized. .

(Solution C1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A game machine for controlling to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a second special random number), wherein the game board is a surface mounting surface. A plurality of light-emitting substrates on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted, and a special decoration part in which a gold specific color area (metal decoration part 3211a) is formed in part decoration unit 3211), and light emission control means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310) for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery results of the lottery means. and game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board 5), and a white coating (white solder resist) is formed on the surface mounting surface of the plurality of light emitting substrates, and the plurality of (characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates) that specify each of the light emitting means are formed, and the light emission control means is determined by the lottery means If the result of the lottery is a win, specific light emission control (for example, gold light emission) is performed to control the light emission of the plurality of light emission means mounted on the specific light emission substrate (rear front lower middle decoration substrate 3168) among the plurality of light emission substrates in a golden light emission mode. ), and the surface mounting surface of a special light-emitting substrate (back rear upper first decorative substrate) different from the specific light-emitting substrate among the plurality of light-emitting substrates is covered with the special decorative portion. , the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting substrate provided in the special decorative portion are mounted on the specific light emitting substrate by the special decorative portion, although light emission is not controlled in the golden light emission mode during the specific light emission control. It is characterized in that the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means can be reflected. As a result, the golden light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the light emitting substrate provided around the special decorative portion can be reflected in the gold specific color area, thereby causing the light emitting colors of the plurality of light emitting means to be reflected. In addition, the light reflected from the specific color region and the color of the specific color region itself also make it easier for the user to recognize that the light is emitted in the gold light emission mode.

(Solution C2)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to solution C1, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate is recognized as white (beige, ivory, cream, off-white, etc. (similar and a white color (beige, ivory, cream, off-white, off-white, etc.) including the plurality of light-emitting means is mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light-emitting substrate. Only electronic components (LED elements with white packages, connectors with white housings, etc.) are mounted, and the back mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate is white Electronic components other than electronic components with a black exterior (e.g., a resistor with a black exterior, a circuit that controls the light emission of multiple LEDs (e.g., a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, a color different from white ( A connector having a housing of light blue, yellow, etc.) is also mounted. As a result, a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted is suppressed, and the amount of light from the specific light emitting substrate can be increased. A performance with an impact can be executed, and the amusement of the game is improved.

(Solution C3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solution means C1 or solution means C2, the gold light emission mode is such that although all of the plurality of light emission means are controlled to emit light in yellow, the light emission is yellow in which brightness is different stepwise for each predetermined number of light emission means. It is characterized in that it is a light emission mode in which light is emitted. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that gold light is being emitted.

(Solution C4)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to any one of solution means C1 to solution means C3, a special light-emitting substrate ( back and upper first decorative substrate), and the light emission control means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, sets the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board to a different gold light emitting mode. It is characterized in that light emission is controlled in a special light emission mode (for example, red light emission). The plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board are not controlled in the golden light emitting mode, but are controlled in the special light emitting mode. It becomes easy to distinguish the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board, and the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board can be easily recognized.

(Solution C5)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solution means C4, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board can change the brightness when a predetermined operation unit is operated, and the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board can change the luminance. is characterized in that the luminance of the light emitting means cannot be changed even when the operating section is operated. Since it is impossible to change the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board, it can be used as an index when changing the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board. The brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the board can be easily changed to the brightness desired by the player.

(Solution C6)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solution means C4 or solution means C5, when a special period occurs in the light emission control in the gold light emission mode, the gold light emitted by the plurality of light emission means mounted on the specific light emission substrate is While the light emission control in the light emission mode is terminated, the light emission control in the special light emission mode by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emission board can be continued without termination. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result is a winning even if the light emission control in the gold light emission mode is finished, and the player is relieved of the anxiety and disbelief caused by the end of the light emission control in the gold light emission mode. You can choose not to give.

(Solution D1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A game machine for controlling to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a second special random number), wherein a plurality of first light emitting means are mounted. A white coating film and a light-colored coating film having a light color different from white are formed on the surface mounting surface to be coated so that the occupancy ratio of the white coating film is higher than the occupancy ratio of the light-colored coating film. A specific light emitting substrate (rear front, lower, middle decorative substrate 3168) and a white coating film and a dark coating film of a dark color different from white are formed on the surface mounting surface on which a plurality of second light emitting means are mounted. and a special light-emitting substrate (first decorative substrate on the rear and upper side) formed so that the occupation ratio is lower than the occupation ratio of the dark-colored coating film, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win. , a specific lighting effect for controlling light emission of the first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board to the bright color (e.g. gold light emission), and the special light emitting even during execution of the specific light emitting effect. It is characterized in that the second light emitting means mounted on the substrate can be controlled to emit a special color (for example, red) different from the bright color without controlling the light emission to the bright color. As a result, the reflection efficiency of the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate can be maintained at a high level, and the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate can be efficiently used to suppress the decrease in the amount of light. It is possible to execute a specific light emission effect. On the other hand, although the reflection efficiency of the surface mounting surface of the special light emitting substrate is low, interference of light on the surface mounting surface can be suppressed.

(Solution D2)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to solution D1, the plurality of first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate is white (white such as beige, ivory, cream, off-white, etc. white (beige, ivory, cream, navy, off-white) including the plurality of first light emitting means on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate. Only electronic components (LED elements with white packages, connectors with white housings, etc.) are mounted, and the back mounting surface of the specific light-emitting substrate includes electronic components other than electronic components with a white exterior (e.g., a resistor with a black exterior, a circuit that controls the light emission of multiple LEDs (e.g., a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, a white and are also mounted, such as connectors having housings of different colors (light blue, yellow, etc.). As a result, the reduction in reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface on which the plurality of first light emitting means are mounted is suppressed, and the light amount of the specific light emitting substrate can be increased, so that the light emitting effect can be executed in a state without uneven light emission. It is possible to execute a performance with an impact as well as to improve the amusement of the game.

(Solution D3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solving means D1 or the solving means D2, the plurality of first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board can change the brightness when a predetermined operation unit is operated, and the special light emitting The brightness of the plurality of second light emitting means mounted on the substrate cannot be changed even when the operation section is operated. Since it is impossible to change the brightness of the plurality of second light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board, it can be used as an index when changing the brightness of the plurality of first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board. This makes it easier for the player to change the brightness of the plurality of first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate to the brightness desired by the player.

(Solution D4)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of solving means D1 to solving means D3, when a special period occurs during execution of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board is turned off. It is characterized in that while the specific light emission effect of controlling light emission in the bright color is finished, the second light emission means mounted on the special light emission board can continue to emit light in the special color without finishing the light emission. and As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the result of the lottery is a win even if the specific light emission performance ends, and to prevent the player from feeling anxiety or disbelief due to the end of the specific light emission performance. .

(Solution E1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A gaming machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a second special random number), wherein a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light-emitting substrates are formed and a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on the white coating film (Among a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs, a specific substrate capable of emitting gold light is decoration board, etc.), and light emission control means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310) for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery results of the lottery means. and game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board 5), display means (effect display device 1600) capable of displaying images, and display control means for controlling display of the display means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310 , a part where the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512); and an operation means (pressing operation unit 303, etc.), and the display control means can cause the display means to display a specific mode (specific image information 1600a) when the operation means is operated. and the light emission control means performs a specific light emission effect (golden effect) for controlling light emission of a specific light emitting means mounted on a surface mounting surface of a specific light emitting board among the plurality of light emitting boards in a specific light emission mode (golden light emission). and performing, as the specific light emission effects, a first specific light emission effect (low-expectation golden effect) allowing the display means to display the specific mode, and displaying the specific mode on the display means. Including a second specific light emitting effect (high expectation golden effect) that is not allowed, and when the second specific light emitting effect is executed, the first specific light emitting effect It is characterized in that the probability of winning is higher than when it is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine the degree of expectation for winning depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is being executed or the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, and when the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, special Expectations for the game state can be improved.

(Solution E2)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solving means E1, the display control means displays the specific mode on the display means according to the operation of the operation means, and then displays the specific mode according to further operation of the operation means. can be changed. As a result, even when the first specific light-emitting effect with a low hit expectation is executed, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by making the player pay attention to the change in the specific mode.

(Solution E3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to solution means E1 or solution means E2, sound output means capable of outputting a specific sound according to the operation of the operation means (top center speaker and top side speaker of door frame 3, main body frame 4 main body frame speaker 622 for bass, etc.), and the display control means can display a specific mode on the display means after the sound output means outputs the specific sound when the operation means is operated. , characterized in that As a result, the possibility of displaying the specific mode can be notified by the specific sound, and the specific mode can be displayed after making the player recognize it in advance, and whether the specific mode will be displayed or not can be displayed. It is possible to draw attention to

(Solution F1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A gaming machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a second special random number), wherein a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light-emitting substrates are formed and a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on the white coating film (Among a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs, a specific substrate capable of emitting gold light is decoration board, etc.), and light emission control means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310) for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery results of the lottery means. and game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board 5), an operation means (light amount adjustment button 228) that can be operated by the player, and a luminance change means ( and a portion where the peripheral control board 1510 changes the default luminance of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in response to a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a. It is possible to execute a specific light emission effect (golden effect) in which the specific light emission means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emission substrate is controlled to emit light in a specific light emission mode (golden light emission), and as the specific light emission effect, the specific light emission means A first specific lighting effect (low-expectation golden effect) that allows a change in luminance, and a second specific lighting effect (high-expectation gold effect) that does not allow a change in the luminance of the specific lighting means. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second specific light emitting effect is executed, the expectation of winning is higher than when the first specific light emitting effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine the degree of expectation for winning depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is being executed or the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, and when the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, special Expectations for the game state can be improved.

(Solution G1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A gaming machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a second special random number), wherein a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light-emitting substrates are formed and a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on the white coating film (Among a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs, a specific substrate capable of emitting gold light is decoration board, etc.), and light emission control means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310) for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery results of the lottery means. and game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board 5), and sound output means for executing predetermined sound output (top center speaker and top side speaker of door frame 3, body frame speaker 622 for low sound of body frame 4, etc.) , a sound control means for controlling the sound output means (the part that executes the sound data output processing of the CPU of the peripheral control IC), and an operation means (such as the pressing operation section 303) that can be operated by the player, The sound control means is capable of causing the sound output means to output a specific sound when the operation means is operated, and the light emission control means controls the specific light emitting substrate (back side) of the plurality of light emitting substrates. Execute a specific light emission effect (golden effect) that controls light emission of the specific light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the lower middle decorative board 3168 etc.) in a specific light emission mode (golden light emission), and as the specific light emission effect, the sound output A first specific light emitting effect (low expectation golden effect) that allows the specific sound to be output from the means, and a second specific light emitting effect (high expectation) that does not allow the specific sound to be output from the sound output means Gold effect), and when the second specific light emission effect is executed, the expectation of winning is higher than when the first specific light emission effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine the degree of expectation for winning depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is being executed or the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, and when the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, special Expectations for the game state can be improved.

(Solution H1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A gaming machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a second special random number), wherein a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light-emitting substrates are formed and a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on the white coating film (Among a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs, a specific substrate capable of emitting gold light is decoration board, etc.), and light emission control means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310) for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery results of the lottery means. and game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board 5), and the light emission control means is mounted on the surface mounting surface of a specific light emitting substrate (rear front, bottom, middle, decoration substrate 3168, etc.) among the plurality of light emitting substrates. It is possible to execute a specific light emission effect (golden effect) that controls light emission of the specific light emitting means in a specific light emission mode (golden light emission), and as the specific light emission effect, a preset specific operation (for example, lowering to the lower movement end) A first specific light emission effect (low gold expectation effect) and a second specific light emission effect (high expectation gold effect) that continues without ending the light emission control in the specific light emission mode even if the detection means is detected, It is characterized in that, when the second specific light emitting effect is executed, the expectation of winning is higher than when the first specific light emitting effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine the degree of expectation for winning depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is being executed or the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, and when the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, special Expectations for the game state can be improved.

(Solution H2)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solving means H1, the light emission control means terminates the first specific light emission effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the detection means, after which a predetermined period of time ( For example, 30 seconds or the like) can be executed again based on the elapse of the first specific light emission effect. As a result, even after the specific operation is performed and the first specific light emission performance ends, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of determining whether the first specific light emission performance is being executed again or the second specific light emission performance is being executed, It is possible to prevent a decline in amusement interest.

(Solution I1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A gaming machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a second special random number), wherein a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light-emitting substrates are formed and a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on the white coating film (Among a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs, a specific substrate capable of emitting gold light is decoration board, etc.), and light emission control means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310) for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery results of the lottery means. and game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board 5), a specific light-emitting board among the plurality of light-emitting boards, and a preset specific operation (for example, the pressing operation section 303 is pushed downward so as to descend to the lower movement end). and a specific operation means (for example, the pressing operation part 303) having a specific detection part (for example, a pressing operation sensor 373) capable of detecting a pressing operation), and the light emission control means is mounted on the special light emission board. a specific light emission effect (golden effect) that controls the light emission of a plurality of light emitting means in a specific light emission mode (golden light emission), and as the specific light emission effect, when the specific operation is detected by the specific detection unit, the A first specific light emission effect (low-expectation gold color effect) that allows the light emission modes of a plurality of light emitting means mounted on a specific light emission board to be changed, and a case where the specific operation is detected by the specific detection unit. and a second specific light emission effect (high expectation gold color effect) that does not allow the light emission modes of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emission substrate to be changed, and the second specific light emission effect is executed. In this case, the probability of winning is higher than when the first specific light emission effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine the degree of expectation for winning depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is being executed or the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, and when the second specific light emitting effect is being executed, special Expectations for the game state can be improved.

(Solution J1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A game machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with the second special random number), and a white coating film on the surface mounting surface ( A white solder resist) is formed, and a plurality of light-emitting substrates (a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on the white coating film are gold-colored). and a light emission control means (peripheral control IC based on various commands received from the main control board 1310) for controlling light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery results of the lottery means. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I for the lamp driving board. /O port to each decoration board of the game board 5), and state detection means for detecting the state of the game machine (for example, the main control MPU 1310a executes the fraud detection process, detects the door frame opening switch, the main frame and a part for detecting a detection signal from the open switch 4b), and on the white coating film on the surface mounting surface of a specific light emitting substrate (rear front, lower, middle decorative substrate 3168, etc.) among the plurality of light emitting substrates. is formed with a notation part (characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates) for specifying each of the plurality of light emitting means in yellow, and the light emission control means is and specific light emission control (golden effect) for controlling light emission of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate in a golden light emission mode (golden light emission) when the lottery result of the lottery means is a win. and said plurality of luminescences mounted on the surface mounting surface of a special luminescence substrate (back rear top first decoration substrate) different from said specific luminescence substrate among said plurality of luminescence substrates during said specific luminescence control The means is controlled to emit light in a special light emission mode (red) different from the gold light emission mode, and the state detection means detects a specific state (a state in which an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1) during the specific light emission control. state, etc.), the specific light emission control is terminated and the light emission modes of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board are changed, while the special light emitting board It is characterized in that light emission control in the special light emission mode of the plurality of light emission means mounted on the surface mounting surface can be continued. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emission control in the special light emission mode by the plurality of light emission means mounted on the special light emission board even in the specific state, and even if the light emission control in the gold light emission mode ends, the lottery result will not be obtained. It is possible to suggest to the player that he/she has won, and to prevent the player from feeling anxiety or disbelief due to the end of light emission control in the golden light emission mode.

(Solution K1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A game machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with the second special random number), and a white coating film on the surface mounting surface ( A white solder resist) is formed, and a plurality of light-emitting substrates (a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on the white coating film are gold-colored). specific decorative board capable of emitting light), and state detection means for detecting the state of the game machine (for example, the main control MPU 1310a executes fraud detection processing, or detection from the door frame open switch or main body frame open switch 4b). and a portion for detecting a signal), and the plurality of light emitting substrates are specific light emitting substrates (rear, front, bottom, middle, decoration substrates 3168, etc.) on which a white coating film (white solder resist) is formed on the surface mounting surface. and a special light-emitting substrate (such as the first decorative substrate behind the back of the information display) on which a dark coating film (for example, green or black solder resist) is formed on the surface mounting surface, and further the specific light-emitting substrate On the white coating film of the surface mounting surface of the above, a notation part specifying each of the plurality of light emitting means in yellow (characters to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates symbol) is formed, specific light emission control (gold effect) for controlling light emission of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate in a gold light emitting mode (gold light emission), and the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting substrate non-specific light emission control for controlling light emission of the light emitting means in a special light emission mode (for example, red) different from the gold light emission mode, and the state detection means is in a specific state ( When it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in an abnormal state, etc., the specific light emission control is terminated, and the state detection means detects that the specific state is in effect during the non-specific light emission control. The feature is that the non-specific light emission control is continued even in such a case. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emission control in the special light emission mode by the plurality of light emission means mounted on the special light emission board even in the specific state, and even if the light emission control in the gold light emission mode ends, the lottery result will not be obtained. It is possible to suggest to the player that he/she has won, and to prevent the player from feeling anxiety or disbelief due to the end of light emission control in the golden light emission mode.

(Solution L1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the winning determination process of step S305) for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition. , If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of first special symbol normal process, or read in second special symbol normal process A game machine for controlling to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a second special random number), wherein a plurality of light emitting means are provided on a surface mounting surface. Depending on the lottery result by the lottery means, a plurality of light-emitting substrates (such as a specific decoration substrate capable of executing gold light emission among a plurality of decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs) on which Based on various commands received from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means (color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 and the game board 5) A part that transmits game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to each decoration board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board), and Manipulable operation means (pressing operation unit 303, etc.), and luminance change means (peripheral control board 1310a) for changing the luminance of the plurality of light emitting means according to the operation of the operation means (peripheral control board according to the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a). 1510 changes the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs), and the surface mounting surface of a specific light emitting substrate (back front, bottom, middle decoration substrate 3168, etc.) among the plurality of light emitting substrates, A white coating film (white solder resist) is formed, and a notation portion that specifies each of the plurality of light emitting means by yellow on the white coating film (electronic components such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates letters and symbols for avoiding confusion) are formed, and the light emission control means changes the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate to a gold light emitting mode (golden Execute specific light emission control (golden effect) that controls light emission in light emission), and if a special period (such as a state in which an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1) occurs during the specific light emission control, over the special period The plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate are in a special light emitting mode different from the gold light emitting mode (abnormality notification light emitting mode (blinking red light with maximum luminance (light amount))) etc.), and when the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, the specific light emission board at the luminance changed by the luminance changing means While emitting light from a plurality of mounted light emitting means at the operation timing, when the operating means is operated during the special light emission control, the specific light emitting board is illuminated with the luminance changed by the luminance changing means. It is characterized in that light emission of a plurality of mounted light emitting means is performed at a timing delayed from the operation timing. As a result, the state of the game machine can be determined by the timing of light emission of the plurality of light emitting means with the luminance changed by operating the operating means, and the operation of the operating means can be accepted even in the specific state. It is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result is a win even if the light emission control in the gold light emission mode is finished, and the player does not feel anxiety or distrust due to the end of the light emission control in the gold light emission mode. can be made

(Solution M1)
In addition, the game board (game board 5) and the lottery means (the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that performs the lottery determination process of step S305) for determining whether the lottery is a hit or not based on the establishment of the lottery condition. ) And, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (hit determination table and special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol normal process A game machine that controls to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with the read second special random number), wherein the game machine is provided on the game board. A plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted are provided, and the plurality of light-emitting boards are specific circuit boards (game board 5 and mounting a plurality of LEDs, a specific decorative board capable of emitting gold light, etc.) and a dark coating film made of green or black on the surface mounting surface (for example, green or black solder resist ) is formed on a special circuit board (such as a first decoration board on the back and rear of an information display device), and on the white coating film on the surface mounting surface of the specific circuit board, the light emitting means is specified (characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards) are formed in a specific color (e.g., yellow), and the specific circuit board among the plurality of light emitting means The first light emitting means mounted in the plurality of light emitting means is capable of controlling light emission in a specific light emitting mode (golden light emitting mode) that is the same as or similar to the specific color when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win. Among them, the second light-emitting means mounted on the special circuit board can change the light-emitting mode based on the operation of a predetermined operation means to display the game information by light-emitting, and the specific color is It is characterized in that light emission is controlled to a different special color (for example, red). As a result, the game information is displayed by light emission based on the operation of the operating means, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 1000 front constituent member 1100 game panel 1804 decoration (decoration)
1804a Chamfered portion 1804b Adhesive surface (adhesive surface)
1805 decoration (decoration)
1805a Chamfered portion 1806 Decoration (decoration)
1806a Notch 1807L Decoration left (decoration)
1807R decoration right (decoration)
1808 decoration (decoration)
1809 decoration (decoration)
1809a Notch 1823 First member (pedestal member)
1823a flat plate portion (flat plate portion)
1823b mounting recess (mounting recess)
1823c separation hole (separation hole)
1823e Incorrect sticking prevention part (wrong sticking prevention part)
1824 first member (pedestal member)
1824a flat plate portion (flat plate portion)
1824b mounting recess (mounting recess)
1824c Incorrect sticking prevention part (wrong sticking prevention part)
1825 first member (pedestal member)
1825a flat plate portion (flat plate portion)
1825b mounting recess (mounting recess)
1825c Incorrect sticking prevention part (wrong sticking prevention part)
1826L First member left (pedestal member)
1826R first member right (pedestal member)
1826a flat plate portion (flat plate portion)
1826b mounting recess (mounting recess)
1826c Incorrect sticking prevention part (wrong sticking prevention part)
1827 first member (pedestal member)
1827a flat plate portion (flat plate portion)
1827b mounting recess (mounting recess)
1827c separation hole (separation hole)
1827d Incorrect sticking prevention part (wrong sticking prevention part)
1828 first member (pedestal member)
1828a flat plate portion (flat plate portion)
1828b mounting recess (mounting recess)
1828c separation hole (separation hole)
1828d Incorrect sticking prevention part (wrong sticking prevention part)
2000 front unit 2810 gate body (pedestal member)
2810a front plate (flat plate)
2810b Pasting recess (mounting recess)
2810c Incorrect sticking prevention part (wrong sticking prevention part)
2810d separation hole (separation hole)
2811 Gate seal (decoration)
2811a Notch 3000 Back unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition and provides a profit based on the result of the lottery,
a plurality of specific mounting regions in which the light emitters are mounted and a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface;
effect display means capable of executing a predetermined effect display;
Production control means for controlling production,
a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine,
The production control means is
a first specific luminous body mounted in a first specific mounting area among the plurality of specific mounting areas, and a plurality of the specific mounting areas when generating a specific period during which a specific effect is performed by the effect display means; A second specific light-emitting body mounted in a second specific mounting region of the region and a third specific light-emitting body mounted in a third specific mounting region of the plurality of specific mounting regions are made to emit light of different colors. It is possible to emit multicolor light by emitting light at the same time and changing the emitted light color in a predetermined order,
When the state detection means detects that the state detection means is in a specific state during the multicolor light emission, the multicolor light emission is terminated,
Aside from the plurality of specific mounting regions, the device further has a special mounting region in which special light emission other than the multicolor light emission is performed during the multicolor light emission,
For the special light emitter mounted in the special mounting area, the special light emission is terminated when the state detecting means detects that the special light emission is in the specific state during execution of the special light emission. continue without
Furthermore, apart from the plurality of specific mounting regions and the special mounting region, a special mounting region is mounted in which a special light emitting body capable of emitting light in a manner different from the multicolor light emission is mounted during the multicolor light emission,
Although it is impossible to adjust the luminance of the special light-emitting body by a predetermined luminance adjusting means during the multicolor light emission, the luminance of the special light-emitting body is adjusted by the luminance adjusting means during the multicolor light emission. is made possible and
Further, the luminescent color of the special light emitter mounted in the special mounting area is only a specific color, and the specific color is never switched to another color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images